9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.

Data Access Studio User

Guide 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Table of Contents
Introduction
Getting Started
Main Window
User Guide Structure
What's New
Technology
ReportsNow Information
DAS Reporting
Run Reports Published to You
Run Reports Published to You
Change Parameters and Data Selection
Run the Report
Export and Print
Drill Down
Design a Quick Report
Create a Financial Balances Report
Create a Fixed Assets Report
Create a Job Cost Report
Design Reports
Create a New Report
Get the Data You Need
See Sample Data
Manage Your Report
Format Your Report
Add Charts and Excel formatting to your report
Calculate Values Over Your Data
Find Trends in Your Data
Export and Print Results
Document Your Report
Make Your Report Run Faster
Design Advanced Reports
Create a Table Join from Scratch
Show Additional Table Information
Dashboards
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 2 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Designer
Creating a Dashboard
Working with mobie Data
Working with Data
Adding Dashboard Items
Binding Dashboard Items to Data
Designing Dashboard Items
Data Shaping
Interactivity
Appearance Customization
Data Analysis
Converting Dashboard Items
Dashboard Layout
Undo and Redo Operations
Automatic and Manual Updates
Printing and Exporting
UI Elements
Dashboard Viewer
Data Presentation
Dashboard Parameters
Printing and Exporting
Dashboard Items
Web Dashboard - Viewer Mode
Data Presentation
Mobile Layout
Dashboard Parameters
Exporting
Dashboard Items
View Detail Data
ProReports
ProReport Designer
First Look at the Report Designer
Add New Reports
Open Reports
Introduction to Banded Reports
Bind to Data
Publishing
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 3 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create Popular Reports

Configure Design Settings
Use Report Elements
Shape Report Data
Lay out Dynamic Report Content
Customize Appearance
Add Navigation
Provide Interactivity
Add Extra Information
Use Expressions
Print, Preview and Export Reports
Report Designer Tools
Print Preview
ProReport Web Viewer
Viewing and Navigating
Content Editing
Passing Parameter Values
Printing
Exporting
Bursting
Overview
Distribution Burst
Burst Driver Report Setup
Adding Distribution Burst Calculations to Burst Driver Report
Master (Bring Back) Burst
Burst Driver Setup
Adding Master/ Bring Back Burst Calculations to a Master Report
Drilldown Burst
Burst Driver Setup
Adding Drilldown Burst Calculations to the Main Report
Sub-Report Attributes
Scheduler
Schedule Your Reports
Creating and Editing Scheduled Tasks
Work with Scheduled Tasks
Task Activity

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 4 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

G etting Started
Sign into D ata Access Studio:
JD E EnterpriseOne
Your JDE Administrator will provide you with a shortcut or web page address to run Data Access Studio. Typically, this is a link to
DASWeb.exe.
Once you run the link, you will sign into Data Access Studio with your EnterpriseOne credentials: User, Password, Environment,
and Role (Role is applicable to E1 versions 8.9 and higher). You can usually put *ALL in the Role field, unless you have been
instructed otherwise.

If you have any issues logging in, please consult your JDE administrator.
JD E World
Your JDE Administrator will provide you with a shortcut or web page address to run Data Access Studio.Typically, this is a link to
DASWeb.exe.
Once you run the link, you will sign into Data Access Studio with your World credentials: User and Password. Data Access Studio
will automatically provide the default library list for you.
:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 5 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Main Window

To Do this

Create a new report from a table or existing view Click the New Report link. Create a New Report.

Create a new report by defining a custom join Click the By Table Join link. Create a Table Join from Scratch.

Work with your custom reports Click the My Workspace link. See Design Ad Hoc Reports.

Open a recently accessed custom report Click hyper link of the report name under My Workspace.

Work with reports published to you Click the Published Reports link. See Run reports published to you.

Open a recently access published report Click the hyper link of the report name under Published Reports.

Work with JD Edwards tables directly Click the JDE Data link.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 6 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Work with tables external to JD Edwards Click the Non-JDE Data link.

Type text in the Search window. As you type, the search window will show JDE
applications, views, tables, and reports that contain the text you type. This is a very
effective way to see what the data is behind any JDE application or report.
Search for an application, report, view, or table
The Search window includes Templates. Templates are pre-written documented
reports written by ReportsNow. You can use Templates directly or as a starting
point for your own reports.

Access online help Click the Help button.

Access online video training Click the Video Training button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 7 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

User G uide Structure

This User Guide organizes its chapters by the following user spectrum:

User level JDE Knowledge Can Design Reports Technical Knowledge

mobie® user Not needed No Minimal

Subscriber Not needed No Minimal

Quick Report Designer Minimal Yes Minimal

Ad Hoc Designer Yes Yes Some

Advanced Designer Yes Yes High

The user spectrum ranges from less technical (Subscriber and mobie® user) to the most technical (Administrator). Refer to the
chapters of the manual that best fit your level of JDE knowledge and technical expertise. Refer to the user chapter that best fits
your level of JDE knowledge.
Each user section teaches you how to use the software by showing:
Problems you can solve
How to solve those problems with Data Access Studio
Screen shots
Links to video examples
This guide was published on March 26,2016

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 8 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

What's New in DAS8

In general, the DAS8 features and menus are highly consistent with the previous version. Here is an overview of the major
enhancements.

ProReports
DAS8 introduces a new feature called ProReports. ProReports is an advanced presentation tool that transforms one to many DAS
reports into a highly sophisticated report output. Designed to simplify the complex presentation tasks that have been a challenge
for our Excel presentation in the past, this tool can easily meet the needs of such things as invoices, product catalogs, and
corporate filings.

Dashboards
Improvements to dashboard visualizations including the following:
Asynchronous loading of widgets for improved loading performance on the Web
Ability to embed hyperlinks in grid widgets
"Empty on load" feature to load widgets empty until a selection is made
Tab control to group widgets

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 9 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customized control over formatting of numbers and dates

Allow specification of complex data source filtering conditions that previously could not be represented by the user interface
Improved mobile adaptability mode for viewing dashboards on phones
Improved layout of pivot grid widgets on the Web
Simple authentication portals support recovery of passwords before email has been verified
Avoid duplicate entries in Web portal when a dashboard is published to both a user and a group of which the user is a
member
Parenthesized accounting format for negative numbers is used where applicable
Improve text formatting in grid widgets
Improved error page when attempting to visit an URL to a viewer that does not exist or the user does not have access to
Detail data popout grid now does better auto-sizing of columns
Allow seeing the URL of mobie portals in the Web publishing dialog
Now supports design notes that shows an outline of all the widgets of the dashboard
The 'Dependent Reports' context menu for a dashboard in our My Private Reports area now show dependencies from
published reports as well as your private reports.
In addition, the mobie Web portal now includes the ability to view ProReports.

New Calculations
Formula Calculation
DAS8 introduces the formula calculation that allows creation of complex formulas into a single calculation column. Most existing
DAS calculations can be used in a formula calculation. There are also report popup menu items for creating formulas as you
would many quick calculations and mechanisms for converting existing calculations individually into formula calculations or
converting all possible calculation columns into a minimal set of formulas. Using the formula calculation often results in better
calculation performance because fewer individual calculation columns are created and less memory is required to hold
intermediate results.
Key Features
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 10 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Sophisticated editor that helps to show possible values and functions as you type.
Support nested If statements to support complex logic in a single calculation
Easily combine the output of multiple calculations
Support sophisticated string comparison using easy to use wild cards

New Calculations and other I mprovements

New math operations: square root, log, ln, ceiling, floor, and truncate
Allow copy/paste of formula contents in the list calculation editor

Automator Improvements
Version 5.4 had some ability to introduce more complex schedules based on the standard iCalendar format, but this support was
removed as it could not be properly modified once created. Support for this standard format is now back and improved in DAS 8
on an Advanced Scheduling tab:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 11 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Automator scheduling now also offers an option for choosing what to do when calculation errors occur - whether to continue to
emit output or to fail the job.

Administration Improvements
Usability improvements of the security application
Renamed permissions and other security element to be more clear based on customer feedback
Permissions that are required by other permissions are automatically set
Table lookups that occur in variable calculations are now audited

External Data
External data connection editor shows available properties for third party .NET data providers, such as the CData providers

Miscellaneous
Support for MySQL DataBox's is deprecated
Improve performance of running reports that have lots of drilldown bursts defined
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 12 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Updated template icons in main search view

Allow period to date range calculation to resolve negative period offsets
It is now possible to export all dependencies of a report or dashboard (such as burst targets and underlying report of a
dashboard) from My Reports workspace

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 13 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Technology
DAS™ is built on the best-of-breed technology, which we make as transparent to you as possible:
Native Access to JDE
Connects to any 32-bit or 64-bit External Data source - (OLE/DB, ODBC, + native drivers for Excel, Microsoft SQL
Server, Oracle, and IBM DB2).
64 bit application - Allows users to run reports over enormous data sets. DAS automatically runs as a 32 bit application on
legacy 32 bit operating systems.
Web application - DAS deploys seamlessly across your enterprise as a one-click Web application.
Best in class Excel integration - DAS controls the tedious elements of Excel so you can be more productive with Excel.
Lightning fast search - Find JDE objects with ease.
Performance tuned queries - DAS automatically tunes queries so they run the fastest they can while impacting the
database as little as possible.
Highly visual report and dashboard designers
mobie® is a cross device dashboard distribution system:
Any device. Dashboards can run on any device and any browser
Snapshot data. Databox™ storage currently supports: Microsoft SQL Server and Oracle
Cloud enabled. mobie® Portals are IIS applications that can be hosted in house or in the cloud (Azure, etc.)
Central management. Centrally manage multiple Portals, users, and DataBoxes™
Flexible Authentication. Authenticate against Windows (multiple domain support) or Simple Membership (or both)
Row Security. Ability to define and assign custom row security

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 14 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

ReportsNow Company I nformation

ReportsNow is an Oracle Partner that provides the highest quality JDE reporting software. As you use Data Access Studio, please
utilize the following resources from the ReportsNow web site: ReportsNow.com

Link Information

ReportsNow.com See upcoming events and WebCasts. See what's new and access all resources on the ReportsNow web site.

Video Training 24/7 access to skills-based video training.

Email support Email to send support questions or suggestions for future enhancements.

Information Ask about online or on-site training. Find out more information about ReportsNow or Data Access Studio.

Partner Information Find a quality ReportsNow business partner in your area.

Also look for ReportsNow® at your local user groups and Quest Events.
Office Locations

Nor th America
ReportsNow, Inc. EMEA
Denver Office (Headquarters) Zuidzijde 124
5299 DTC Blvd 2411 RX Bodegraven
Suite 760 The Netherlands
Greenwood Village, CO 80111, USA Phone: +31 (0) 653 899 736
Toll Free: 1-877-777-0655 Email: [email protected]
Fax: 1-303-693-6995

Trademarks
Data Access Studio and ReportsNow are trademarks of ReportsNow, Inc.
JDE, JD Edwards, EnterpriseOne, World Software are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation.
.NET, Excel, Office, Word are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Third Party Licenses
Siberix Report Writer
Copyright 2012 by Siberix Technologies, Canada
http://siberix.com/

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 15 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

U S ER LEV EL JD E K NO W LED G E CAN D ES IG N R EPO R TS TECHNICAL K NO W LED G E

Subscriber Not needed No None required

Quick Report Designer Minimal Yes Minimal

Ad Hoc Designer Yes Yes Some

Advanced Designer Yes Yes High

Data Access Studio lets Report Designers publish reports to Subscribers. Once a report is published to you, you are a Subscriber
to that report. As a Subscriber:
You see the list of reports published to you
You can run the reports as you need
You can change the report data selection if the Publisher of the report allowed it
You cannot modify and save the report
You cannot show columns that were hidden
Subscriber- only users
If you are a subscriber-only user, then you:
Need no JDE knowledge
Choose from reports that were published to you
Change report parameters (if applicable)
Run reports
Export or print the results
This section shows you how to run reports that are published to you in the following topics:
Run reports published to you
Change parameters and data selection
Run the report
Export and print

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 16 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Run Reports P ublished to You

Once you have signed in to Data Access Studio:
If you are a subscriber only user, you will see the report selection screen below:
If you are a designer, click File | Open | Reports Published to me... to see the report selection screen:

You will see one line for each report that is published to you. This form presents the report folder, report name, and date the
report was published to you.

TO D O THIS

Open a report without

Left-click the report and click Open. Alternatively, you may double-click the row.
running it

Close the Select

Click Close or click the X in the upper right-hand corner of the window.
Reports window

Refresh the list of

reports published to Click Find.
you

If you have this permission, left-click the report and click Delete. Note: if you are not authorized to do this
Un-publish a report
operation, this button will not appear on this screen.

Change the
If you have this permission, click the Manage Subscribers button.
subscribers for reports

Left-click the report and click Run. The report will run with the default data selection and parameters and present
Run a report
you with the final result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 17 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Save the published

Left-click the report and click Save To Layout. Once saved, Data Access Studio will notify you that the save was
report to a private
completed. You will now have a private report named the same thing as the report you copied.Note: if you are
report which you can
not authorized to do this operation, this button will not appear on this screen.
modify

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 18 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Change Parameters and D ata Selection

If you chose to Open a report, you will have the opportunity to change the data selection (if allowed) and report parameters for
that report before you run it. You can then run the report and see the result.
Here is a sample report:

TO D O THIS

Enter a Click on the box next to the parameter. Use the visual assist button to assist you in selecting valid values. User the filter
parameter helper button for advanced selections such as lists, not in list, ranges, etc.

Change
You may want to restrict the values you see in a certain column. If the column is visible and the change filter criteria permission
the filter
is allowed, you can click the gray box below the column label to enter filter criteria. See Filter Your Data for more information.
value of a
Note: if the publisher has disallowed filter changing, you will not be able to modify the column filter.
column

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 19 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Run the Report

Once you have entered report parameters and filters, you can get sample data or run the full report. As the report runs you will
see the progress bar fill.

TO D O THIS

See a small preview of the data without actually running

the entire report Click the Get Sample Data button.

Once you have entered the necessary parameters and are ready to run the
Run the report over all the data
report, click Run Report.

Stop an in progress report Click the Cancel button. Note: you may only the click the Cancel
button if it is enabled.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 20 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Export and P rint

Once your run completes, you will see the progress bar completely filled. You will also see the results of your report. From here
you can print or export your data.

TO D O THIS

Print your report Click File

Export your report data to Excel Click on the main toolbar.

Once you export, Data Access Studio will export, format, and save the report data to your default export directory. Data Access
Studio will then, by default, open the result of the export for you to review, save, etc.
If you have the Export menu on the main menu bar for the report you are running, then you may export the data in the report as
follows:

To Do this

Export your report data to Excel Click Export | All Grid Data | To Excel...

Export your report data to a web page format Click Export | All Grid Data | HTML...

Export your report data to a PDF (Adobe acrobat)

Click Export | All Grid Data | PDF...
format

Export your report data to Access or other similar

Click Export | All Grid Data | To Tab Separated Values...
third party software

Export you report data to Oracle BI Publisher or

Click Export | All Grid Data | XML...
similar third party software

Export your report data to Access or other similar

Click Export | All Grid Data | To CSV...
third party software requiring CSV format

Use the Pad calculation to make all export columns a fixed width. Then Click Export
Export your report data to fixed format
| All Grid Data | To Fixed Format...

Select the columns or rows you want to export. Click Export | Selected Grid Data |
Export only selected rows or columns
and select your output format.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 21 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill downs are links between cells in one table to another table. For instance, the account balance can drill down into a set of
General Ledger entries. Data Access Studio supports drill downs as follows:
Master file drill downs
General Ledger drill downs
User-defined drill downs

Drills downs support multiple rows and drill down on summary values as well. E.g. if you want to drill into a rollup summary
value on a Balance Sheet, right-click the summary value and select Drill Down -> Account Ledger. DAS will show all the
transactions that rolled up into that summary value automatically.
Master file drill downs
For any cell that has a master file behind it (for instance, address book number, item number, etc.), you can right-click the cell. On
the popup menu, you will see Drill Down. When you click the drill down selection, DAS will open the master file and show you
the details for the item you selected. If you select multiple rows in the source table, when you click the drill down option, DAS will
show you master file records for all the items you selected.
G eneral Ledger drill downs
See Account Ledger Drill Down.
User- defined drill downs
See User-Defined Drill Down.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 22 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Account Ledger drill downs

These drill downs are automatically available on any new or pre-existing report over the above tables.
DAS provides the following pre-defined General Ledger Drill Downs:
Account Balances (F0902) -> GL over any Net Posting column, Relative Period, or Period Amount column
Asset Balances (F1201) -> GL over any Net Posting column, Relative Period, or Period Amount column
Purchase Orders (F4311) -> GL over Order Number and Amount Received columns
Account B alances D rill D own ( F0902 )
For any report that runs over the Account Balances table (F0902)--which includes Financial Quick Reports, you can drill into
amounts. To Drill down into an amount, right-click the amount and select Drill down -> Account Ledger:

DAS will open the account ledger and show you the transactions and transaction totals for the item you drilled into. Note that you
can drill into a summary as shown above or into a detail cell.
Asset B alances D rill D own ( F1202 )
For any report that runs over the Asset Balances table (F1202)--which includes Fixed Asset Quick Reports, you can drill into
amounts. To Drill down into an amount, right-click the amount and select Drill down -> Account Ledger.
P urchase Order D rill D own ( F4311 )
For any report that runs over the Purchase Order Detail (F4311)--which includes Fixed Asset Quick Reports, you can drill into
amounts. To Drill down into a purchase order, right-click the Order Number and select Drill down -> Account Ledger. DAS
will show you the two balancing entries for the order in the Account Ledger (F0911). The amounts shown in the Account Ledger
should match up to the Amount Received column in the Purchase Order header.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 23 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

User- defined D rill D own

You can connect any report to any other report with the Burst calculation. This allows you to create any row-level drill down you
need.
When designing a drill down you need two DAS Reports:
A driver report
A target report
DAS drills down from the driver reportto the target report.
Create a target report that will show the details for a driver. For example, re-order items for a business unit. The target
report takes a business unit as its input and shows if any items need to be re-ordered for that business unit.
Open a driver report. In our running example, this would be a list of business units. This will be the business units for which
we want to drill into the target.
Click Design | Edit Calculations.

Select Burst:
For Report enter the name of the report that will show the drill down information for your source report.
Connect your source report to the target report by passing values from source to target. In our example, connect the
business unit from the driver to the business unit of the target.
Save your calculations.
You can now right-click any row in your source report and you will see:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 24 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When you click Run target report for row, DAS will launch the target report and pass the values for the selected row
automatically. The result is a Drill Down for the driver row.
Note: You will only see the other menu item Burst selected rows if you enabled multiple row security for your user profile. If you
need multi-row bursting, consult your DAS administrator to set up this permission.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 25 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

U S ER LEV EL JD E K NO W LED G E CAN D ES IG N R EPO R TS TECHNICAL K NO W LED G E

Subscriber Not needed No Minimal

Quick Report Designer Minimal Yes Minimal

Ad Hoc Designer Yes Yes Some

Advanced Designer Yes Yes High

Data Access Studio version 5.0+ empowers users with limited JDE knowledge to create a wide variety of practical business
reports. The Quick Report user typically possesses finance, payroll, sales, etc. knowledge, but does not necessarily know where
JDE stores this information.
The Quick Report system guides you through business language and options so that you can create the reports you need.
You can access the Quick Report menu as follows:
1. Select File | Quick Report
2. Select from the available Quick Reports, e.g. Financials

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 26 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Financials Quick Report allows a finance user to create reports such as:
Balance Sheet
Income Statement
Trial Balance
Budget vs. Actual
Business Unit comparison
Period, quarter, yearly comparison
and more
To get started, sign in then:
Click File | Quick Report | Financials

The Quick Report lets you specify what kind of report you want and how you want to create it.

TO D O THIS

Enter information on a particular tab Click the desired tab. See topics that follow.

Create the Financial Balances report with the parameters you specified Click Create report.

To exit the designer Click the back button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 27 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Type of Financial Report

The first step in defining your report is to select what type financial reportyou want. Enter this information on the Main tab:

In this version, all reports are based on the Posted balances file in JDE.

TO D O THIS

Select the type of financial report that you want to create. After selecting the basic types, you can
Type of your report (Required) use the rest of the wizard to customize it further (for example, you can split an Income Statement
into multiple periods or compare actuals vs. budget).

Click on the edit box next to Report name and type a descriptive name for your report. This is a
Name your report (Required)
mandatory step.

If your business organizes accounts

with the category code information in Click the check box labeled: I need category codes from the chart of accounts.
the JDE Chart of Accounts

If you need to access category codes

Click the check box labeled: I need category codes from the business unit master information.
in the JDE Business Unit table

Depending on your JD Edwards setup, for an Income Statement or Trial Balance, you usually will
Reverse sign on revenue accounts
check the Reverse sign on revenue accounts

Depending on your JD Edwards setup, for a Balance Sheet or Trial Balance, you may need to
Reverse sign on liability accounts
reverse the sign on liability accounts by check Reverse sign on liability accounts.

Once you are finished, click the Periods tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 28 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Financial Periods

You can show amounts by period, quarter, year, or Year-To-Date period. You can also compare period amounts to amounts in
previous periods or years.

TO D O THIS

Select how to organize the Click the Organize by option box. Select Fiscal Period, Fiscal Quarter, Fiscal Year, and/or YTD
periods in your report Period.

Compare a period to previous Change the Compare to previous number to the number of periods you want to compare against. Set
periods the option box next to the number to Fiscal Period.

Compare a period to the same Change the Compare to previous number to the number of years you want to compare against. Set
period in previous years the option box next to the number to Fiscal Year.

Click the Organize by option box. Select Fiscal Quarter. Change the Compare to previous number to
Compare a quarter to previous
the number of quarters you want to compare against. Set the option box next to the number to Fiscal
quarters
Quarter.

Click the Organize by option box. Select Fiscal Quarter. Change the Compare to previous number to
Compare a quarter to the same
the number of years you want to compare against. Set the option box next to the number to Fiscal
quarter in previous years
Year.

Compare a year to previous Click the Organize by option box. Select Fiscal Year. Change the Compare to previous number to the
years number of years you want to compare against. Set the option box next to the number to Fiscal Year.

Compare a Year-To-Date Click the Organize by option box. Select YTD Period. Change the Compare to previous number to
amount to previous Year-To- the number of years you want to compare against. Set the option box next to the number to YTD Fiscal
Date amounts Period.

Split period values (such as Check the Split column values by criteria. Once checked, see Financial Column Rollup to specify how to
Budget vs. Actuals) split the period values.

Change the Caption for the

Select the desired caption setting from the Caption drop down.
period columns
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 29 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Financial Row Rollup

The next step is to define how you want to organize your row information. You have three choices depending on your needs:
User Defined List - Manually define each account rollup
Chart of Accounts - Use the JDE Chart of Accounts to define the account hierarchy
Account Group - Rollup accounts by the object accounts
User D efined List
The User Defined List option gives you a flexible way to define manually how you want your financial information displayed. Each
row in the grid below represents how to rollup detail information into one line. Initially, you must add each row you need. Once
you are finished, you can save your list so that you and others may re-use the work you did.
The editor in this grid lets you:
Define as many rows as you want
Define the criteria you need for each row
Sample screen shot showing a user-defined list

See the topic Make a List for directions on how to define the rows you want to rollup.
Account G roup
Use this option if you want to roll up simply by the object account. Select how you want to see the roll-ups labeled (Display rows
as).
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 30 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 31 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Financial Column Rollup - Optional

The Columns tab lets you show side-by-side comparisons of financial information. For instance, suppose you wanted to show a
side-by-side comparison of Actual amounts and Budget amounts. In this example, you would enter two lines in the grid: one for
Actual and one for Budget.
The editor lets you:
Define as many side-by-side categories as you want
Define the criteria you need for each category

TO S HO W S ID E- B Y- S ID E CO MPAR IS O NS O F D O THIS

Business units Add a line for each business unit you want to compare.

Companies Add a line for each company.

Ledger types Add a line for each ledger type.

Category code Add a line for each category code criteria.

etc...

See the topic Make a List for directions on how to define the rows that specify your side-by-side comparison.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 32 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Special Settings
The Special Settings tab lets you set preferences for your financial report.

TO D O THIS

Change how you

want to prompt Select By date or By period from the pull down box.
for date

Change the text

Either select one of the pre-defined prompts: As of or For the period ending from the pull down box. Or you may
for prompting
type in your own date prompt text.
date information

Define the For financial statements to balance in JDE, you must negate the values of the Revenue accounts. Define the revenue
accounts to accounts in your system here by any criteria you choose (object range, category code, etc.). Once set, DAS will
reverse sign remember the setting as you create new financial reports.

For balance sheet accounts, you must add the beginning balance to get the cumulative actual amount of the account.
Define the balance
Define the balance sheet accounts in your system here by any criteria you choose (object range, category code, etc.).
sheet accounts
Once set, DAS will remember the setting as you create new financial reports.

Limit which object

accounts your Enter a begin object account (OBJ) value and an end object account value that define the inclusive range that you
financial report want to display in your report.
shows

Exclude zero
balances from the Check to exclude 0 balances. Uncheck to include zero balances.
report

Present your
financial report
Check Excel presentation.
with Excel
capabilities

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 33 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Capital Asset Management Quick Report allows a user to create reports over fixed assets.
To get started, sign in then:

Click | Quick Report | Fixed Assets

The Quick Report lets you specify what kind of report you want and how you want to create it.

TO D O THIS

Enter information on a particular tab Click the tab. See topics that follow.

Create the Fixed Assets report with the parameters you specified Click Create Report.

To exit the designer Click the back button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 34 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify What D ata You Require

The first step of defining your report is to name your report and choose to include/exclude asset master information or business
unit information. Enter this information on the Main tab:

In this version, all reports are based on the Posted balances file in JDE.

TO D O THIS

Click on the edit box next to Report name and type a descriptive name for your
Name your report (Required)
report. This is a mandatory step.

If you need asset master information in your

Click the check box labeled: I need information from the asset master.
report

If you need to access category codes in the JDE Click the check box labeled: I need category codes from the business unit master
Business Unit table information.

Once you are finished, click the Columns tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 35 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Financial Periods

You show amounts by Year-To-Date period. You can also compare period amounts to amounts in previous periods or years.

TO D O THIS

Compare to previous Fiscal Change the Compare to previous number to the number of periods you want to compare against. Set
periods the option box next to the number to Fiscal period.

Compare to previous Fiscal Change the Compare to previous number to the number of quarters you want to compare against. Set
quarters the option box next to the number to Fiscal quarter.

Compare to previous Fiscal Change the Compare to previous number to the number of years you want to compare against. Set the
years option box next to the number to Fiscal year.

Compare to previous YTD Change the Compare to previous number to the number of periods you want to compare against. Set
Fiscal periods the option box next to the number to YTD Fiscal period.

Compare to previous Fiscal Change the Compare to previous number to the number of quarters you want to compare against. Set
QTDs the option box next to the number to Fiscal QTD.

Change the Caption for the Select the desired caption setting from the Caption drop down: Description and Year, Period Number
period columns and Year, or Period Month Description and Year.

Split period values (such as Check the Split column values by criteria. Once checked, see Financial Column Rollup to specify how to
Actuals and Budgets) split the period values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 36 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Fixed Asset Row Rollup

The next step is to define how you want to organize your row information. You have two choices depending on your needs:
User Defined List - Manually define each asset rollup
Asset Group - Rollup accounts by the object accounts
User D efined List
The User Defined List option gives you a flexible way to define manually how you want your information displayed. Each row in
the grid below represents how to rollup detail information into one line. Initially, you must add each row you need. Once you are
finished, you can save your list so that you and others may re-use the work you did.
The editor in this grid lets you:
Define as many rows as you want
Define the criteria and formulas you need for each row
Sample screen shot showing a user-defined list

See the topic Make a List for directions on how to define the rows you want to rollup.
Asset G roup
Use this option if you want to roll up simply by the asset class. Select how you want to see the roll-ups labeled (Group by).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 37 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 38 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Special Settings
The Special Settings tab lets you set preferences for your financial report.

TO D O THIS

Change how you want to

Select By date or By fiscal period and year from the pull down box.
prompt for date

Change the text for prompting Either select one of the pre-defined prompts: As of or For the period ending from the pull down box.
date information Or you may type in your own date prompt text.

Exclude zero balances from the

Check to exclude 0 balances. Uncheck to include zero balances.
report

Present your financial report with

Check Excel presentation.
Excel capabilities

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 39 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

6.0 also introduces a Job Cost quick report. The setup is similar to what is found in other Financial quick reports, but line item
setup is done for jobs and by selecting specific ledger types.
To get started, sign in then:

Click | Quick Report | Job Cost

The Quick Report lets you specify what kind of report you want and how you want to create it.

TO D O THIS

Enter information on a particular tab Click the tab. See topics that follow.

Create the Job Cost report with the parameters you specified Click Create Report.

To exit the designer Click the back button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 40 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify What D ata You Require

The first step of defining your report is to name your report and choose to include/exclude asset master information or business
unit information. Enter this information on the Main tab:

In this version, all reports are based on the Posted balances file in JDE.

To Do this

Click on the edit box next to Report name and type a descriptive name for your
Name your report (Required)
report. This is a mandatory step.

If you need chart of account information in your

Click the check box labeled: I need category codes from the chart of accounts.
report

If you need to access category codes in the JDE

Click the check box labeled: I need category codes from the business unit
Business Unit table
master information.
If you need to reverse signs on your revenue
Click the check box labeled: Reverse sign on revenue accounts.
accounts

Once you are finished, click the Columns tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 41 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Job Cost Columns

You can show amounts by fiscal year and Year-To-Date. You can also compare period amounts to amounts in previous periods or
years.

TO D O THIS

Select period
Click the Select period type(s) option box. Select YTD Fiscal Period and/orFiscal Year.
type(s)

Compare to
previous Change the Compare to previous number to the number of periods you want to compare against. Set the option box
Fiscal next to the number to Fiscal Period.
periods

Compare to
previous Change the Compare to previous number to the number of quarters you want to compare against. Set the option box
Fiscal next to the number to Fiscal quarter.
quarters

Compare to
Change the Compare to previous number to the number of years you want to compare against. Set the option box next
previous
to the number to Fiscal Year.
Fiscal years

Compare to
Change the Compare to previous number to the number of years you want to compare against. Set the option box next
previous YTD
to the number to YTD Fiscal year.
Fiscal years

Compare to
Change the Compare to previous number to the number of quarters you want to compare against. Set the option box
previous
next to the number to Fiscal QTD.
Fiscal QTDs

Change the
Caption for Select the desired caption setting from the Caption drop down: Description and Year, Period Number and Year,
the period Period Month Description and Year.
columns

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 42 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Split periods
Check the option box labeled: Split periods into sub columns (e.g. Actuals and Budgets). This option is selected by
into sub
default. It gives you the opportunity to create a list of Actuals and Budgets, allowing you to change the criteria of your
columns (e.g.
ledger types. Once checked, see Financial Column Rollup to specify how to split the period values. Uncheck the option box
Actuals and
if you do not wish to split periods into sub columns.
Budgets)

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 43 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Job Cost Row Rollup

The next step is to define how you want to organize your row information. You have three choices depending on your needs:
User Defined List - Manually define each account rollup
Chart of Accounts - Use the JDE Chart of Accounts to define the account hierarchy
Job Cost Code - Rollup values by the job cost code
User D efined List
The User Defined List option gives you a flexible way to define manually how you want your financial information displayed. Each
row in the grid below represents how to rollup detail information into one line. Initially, you must add each row you need. Once
you are finished, you can save your list so that you and others may re-use the work you did.
The editor in this grid lets you:
Define as many rows as you want
Define the criteria you need for each row
Sample screen shot showing a user-defined list

See the topic Make a List for directions on how to define the rows you want to rollup.
Use this option if you want to roll up simply by the object account. Select how you want to see the roll-ups labeled (Group By).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 44 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 45 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Special Settings
The Special Settings tab lets you set preferences for your financial report.

TO D O THIS

Change how you want to

Select By date or By fiscal period and yearfrom the pull down box.
prompt for date

Change the text for prompting Either select one of the pre-defined prompts: As of or For the period ending from the pull down box.
date information Or you may type in your own date prompt text.

Exclude zero balances from the

Check to exclude 0 balances. Uncheck to include zero balances.
report

Present your financial report with

Check Excel presentation.
Excel capabilities

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 46 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

U S ER LEV EL JD E K NO W LED G E CAN D ES IG N R EPO R TS TECHNICAL K NO W LED G E

Subscriber Not needed No Minimal

Quick Report Designer Minimal Yes Minimal

Report Designer Yes Yes Some

Advanced Designer Yes Yes High

Ad Hoc Report Design is one of the strengths of Data Access Studio. Data Access Studio empowers you to deliver a large variety
of reports in a timely manner by:
Allowing you to visually create your report with sample data
Presenting real-time data exactly as you see it in JDE
Applying automatic performance improvements
Enforcing read-only queries so you can design with confidence
To create Ad Hoc Reports in Data Access Studio you need to know how to:
Get the Data You Need
See Sample Data
Edit Your Report
Format Your Layout
Calculate Values Over Your Data
Find Trends in Your Data
Export and Print Results
Publish Your Report to Others

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 47 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To create a new report, click the New Reportbutton on the home page:

This will take you to the New Reports page. Create a new report using any of the methods below.

TO D O THIS

Select the button next to Dashboard. See the Dashboard Design Manual for more information on
Create a new Dashboard
how to create a dashboard

Select a report from the drop down menu. See Financials, Create a Fixed Assets Report, or Create a
Create a new Quick Report
Job Cost Report.

Create a new report from a JDE

Select the Next button to choose a table and build a report.
table or view

Create a new report from a custom

See Create a Table Join from Scratch.
join

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 48 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Create a new report from external

See External Data.
data

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 49 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create a new report from JD E table or view

TO D O THIS

Open a table Type a table name (e.g. F0411) into the box. Click the Open icon.

Change the data source where you Click the Data Source option box. Select from list of available data sources. Note: if the
open the table (EnterpriseOne only) administrator revokes this permission, you will not see the Data Source option box.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 50 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Access Studio can open any JDE table, business view, or logical for which you have access. From the home page, use the
universal search to find what you need:

To Do this

Click on the Search box and type in a JDE table or business view name. This
Search by Name automatically brings up all Search results related to the query. Browse the list of
results in the grid. Click a result to open.

Click on the Each box and type in a keyword or phrase. This automatically brings up
Search by Description all search results related to the query. Browse the list of results in the grid. Click a
result to open.

Check the option boxes next to the Search options to show results for My
Narrow/Expand search options Workspace, Public Workspace, Templates, JDE Tables, Dashboards. Uncheck
to hide.

When the Search box is not populated, the home page automatically displays
Open a recently opened table Recently Opened reports, templates, and/or tables. Click any item in the list to
open.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 51 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Open a Table for First Time

When you open a table or business view, Data Access Studio will close the form above and open a new window for the item you
want to query.
For example, let's say you opened the JDE Work Order Master File (F4801). You would see a form that resembles the following:

When Data Access Studio opens a table for the first time, notice the following:
The description, object, and data source appear in the title of the window.
The quick menu with Run Report, Get Sample Data, etc. shows at the top of the grid.
All columns are shown with the default Description style. The column descriptions come from the JDE data dictionary. E.g.
you see the column header Order Number instead of the cryptic DOCO. See the Customize the Look and Colors of Your
Report topic for more information on how to change the column caption and other styles.

The grid in the form initially has no data in it. Add filter criteria and click Get Sample Data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 52 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

External Data Access is a complete solution that allows you to combine data from different sources into one report:
Ability to create reusable connections to external data sources
Security layer over external data access
32-bit and 64-bit connections
Client-side and server-side (reusable) connections
Additional data access drivers for performance and convenience
Seamless integration into existing Folders, Publishing, and Scheduling functionality
Ability to join within an External Data source
Ability to do a Table Lookup to External Data sources

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 53 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Manage External Connections

Data Access Studio lets you connect to any 32-bit or 64-bit data source. Furthermore, you can use your connection in any report
to combine information from that connection with the rest of the data in your report.

To work with your external connections, click the button (New External Data) on the main toolbar. Alternatively, click File |
New | External Data.

The External Data Connection page shows all available connections. Connections are grouped by the location of the connection
(Client or Server). Each connection has a user-defined name, the data source type, the connection information, the bit-ness (32-bit
or 64-bit) and the audit information (date, user, and version).

To Do this

Click New | 32-bit Client Connection or New | 64-bit Client

Add new Client side connection Connection. A client side connection is available only on the workstation on which
it's created. The bit-ness (32-bit or 64-bit) of the connection must match the bit-
ness of your data source.

Click New | 32-bit Server Connection or New | 64-bit Server

Connection. Server side connections are the ideal way to make a connection
available to multiple users. You can only create a server-side connection on the DAS
Add new Server side (Reusable) connection Web server itself. Once you create a server-side connection you must grant users
access to it via Work With Security (see the Data Access Studio Administrator's
guide for more information). The bit-ness (32-bit or 64-bit) of the connection must
match the bit-ness of your data source.

Create a report over an existing connection Highlight the connection and click Select. See Create Report Over External Data
Connection.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 54 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Highlight the desired connection. If the connection is a client-side connection, click

Edit to edit it. If the connection is a server-side connection, you must run DAS
Edit an existing connection
on the server. Then you can click Edit to edit the connection. See Editing a
Connection.

Highlight the desired connection or connections (multi-select with CTRL or SHIFT

Delete a connection keys). Click Delete. Note: you have to run DAS on the DASWeb server to
delete a server-side connection.

Refresh data in the grid Click the Refresh button.

You can customize the External Data Grid (re-order columns, group by different
Save customized grid columns, sort, etc.). To save your customized grid, click the Save button. To
restore the grid to the default layout click the Restore button.

Exit this page Click the Back button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 55 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can create two types of connections:

Client side
Server side
Client Side. A client side connection is available only on the workstation on which it's created. The bit-ness (32-bit or 64-bit) of
the connection must match the bit-ness of your data source. If you create a report based on a client-side connection, the report
cannot be published or scheduled as no one else but you has access to the connection.
Server Side. A server side connection is the ideal way to make a connection available to multiple users. You can only create a
server-side connection on the DAS Web server itself. You must grant users access to each server side connection using Work
With Security (see the Data Access Studio Administrator's guide for more information). Once a user is granted rights to the
server side connection, the user can add data from that connection to any DAS report.
32 - bit and 64 - bit connections
Any data source that you connect to (whether it be client side or server side) will be either a 32-bit or 64-bit data source. We will
refer to this trait as the "bit-ness" of the data source. The bit-ness (32-bit or 64-bit) of the DAS connection must match the bit-
ness of your external data source.
D efining a connection
When you click New Connection from the External Data Connections page, you will see a dialog that resembles the following:

This dialog gives you many ways to connect to a data source.

First, select the Data Provider.

DAS supports generic ODBC and OLE DB. DAS also provides native connections for Oracle, SQL Server, DB2, as well as Microsoft-
specific drivers (e.g. Excel). The list you see here will depend on which database drivers you have installed. The data provider you
pick can have performance advantages. In general, the native drivers will outperform the generic ODBC or OLE DB drivers.
Once you have selected the driver, select an available data source for that driver.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 56 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Example - Connect to an Excel file

A common requirement is to report over an Excel file. DAS makes this easy.
1. From the External Data Connection page, select New Connection (see Create a New Connection). Note: if you are
running 64-bit Excel, you need to create a 64-bit connection.
2. Select Microsoft Excel.

1. Enter the path to your Excel file in the Excel file name field. Click OK.

You may keep the system-assigned name (i.e. the path) or provide your own name in the Save Connection dialog. Click Save.

1. Select the sheet you want (if there is only one sheet in your Excel workbook, all you need to do is name your report). Name
your report by typing it in the Report Name field (or keep the system assigned name).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 57 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2. Click Create Report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 58 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create Report Over External D ata Connection

Once you have defined a connection, double click the connection to create a report over its data:

When you select a connection, DAS shows tables in that data source. If available, DAS will group by schema.
You can search for tables using the grid's filter. Once you find the table you are looking for, highlight it.
DAS creates a default Report Name and Table Name. You can provide your own report name if you like. In general, you should
not have to change the Table Name. However, if you need to change the Table Name click the button.

To create your report once you are finished, click the Create Report button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 59 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Editing a Connection

You can change the parameters of a connection by highlighting the connection a clicking the Edit button.
DAS will pop up the connection properties for that connection. For instance:

You can change any field that the dialog allows for your connection. In the example above, for instance, we could change the Excel
workbook or the location of the workbook by modifying the Excel file name field.
Most Connection Properties have an Advanced button. Press this button to configure low-level parameters of the connection
that may not otherwise appear on the main dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 60 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

B ringing B ack D ata from an External Connection

You can use that Table Lookup calculation (see Get Related Data from Another Table) to bring back non-JDE external data into
your report.
1. Add a Table Lookup calculation to your report.

1. Click Datasource and select your external data source (Note: Class will be External and Type will be either Client or Server
for all your non-JDE data sources).
2. Click Target table/view. You should see the tables available in your external data source. Pick a table.
3. Hook up the Filter Criteria and return values as you would normally with a Table Lookup.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 61 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Upgrading Legacy non - JD E connections

If you created non-JDE connections in DAS version 5.4 or earlier, the reports for those connections will appear on your My
Workspace page (See Access Your Saved Reports).
When you try to open one of these reports, DAS will warn you that the report was based on a legacy connection format:

If you click Close no conversion will take place.

Click Convert to convert your report and its legacy connection. By default, DAS will only convert the external data source
definition if DAS can currently open that connection. If you want DAS to create the connection regardless, uncheck Only create
external datasources that can be accessed.
Once your report is converted, DAS will name the new report the same as the previous report except with the tag (LEGACY) added
to it. The new report will be based on a newly created DASVIEW. Your old report will still be around just in case. You can delete
your old report when you are satisfied the conversion worked correctly. You may also rename the converted report.
If you have legacy DAS non-JDE connections, DAS will convert these connections to the new format. Any connection created this
way will have the word (LEGACY) in it. DAS will automatically upgrade the connection when you try to open a report from My
Workspace that was based on the legacy format.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 62 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Creating a Join in a non - JD E D ata Source

DAS allows you to create join definitions for tables that are within an External Data source.
1. Click File | New | Custom join.

1. Click Connection. Select the External data connection.

2. Define the rest of the join as normal (See Create a Table Join from Scratch).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 63 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

P roxy Method to Access Non - JD E D ata

If you run EnterpriseOne and your Non-JDE Data is one of the databases supported by EnterpriseOne: Oracle, DB2, MSSQL,
MSDE, or Access, then you can use the Proxy Method which has the following features:
1) You can publish your resulting reports
2) JDE manages passwords centrally. JDE maps the JDE user to the non-JDE user
3) You can schedule your resulting reports
4) You can setup your non-JDE datasource once on the DAS Web server
ReportsNow can assist you with the details of the Proxy Method. The overview of the steps required for the Proxy Method are as
follows:
1) In your non-JDE database, make your non-JDE adhere to JDE standards. You typically do this by creating a "View" in your non-
JDE database. For instance, let's say you have a table named Customer List with three fields. You would transform the "view" in
your native data source like this:

CU S TO MER LIS T JD E TAB LE NAME F5 5 CU S T

Name JDE DD Name DL01

Phone Number JDE DD Name DL02

Email Address JDE DD Name DL02

2) Create an E1 table that matches the view you created (in the example above, create F55CUST with three columns DL01, DL02,
DL03)
3) Create an E1 data source that points to your non-JDE data source
4) Create a data source user in E1
5) Associate the data source user to the E1 user
Once this is setup up, you can access your non-JDE table in DAS as if it were any other JDE table!

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 64 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Frequently, the data you will need for your report will reside in different (yet related) tables. To simplify navigating and combining
data into your report, DAS provides two related features: Drill downs and Bring Backs.
D rill D owns
Drill Downs are the ability to open a related data in a different table as a new query. To execute a Drill Down, hover over a grid
cell. If the grid cell turns to an underlined hyperlink, then a drilldowwn is available. Left-click or right-click the cell. Select the
desired drill down from the available list by clicking it. The Drill Down, by its nature, is an interactive activity (as opposed to an
automated activity).
For instance, if you were looking in the Account Ledger (F0911) and wanted to see all transactions for a batch in a new window,
you would right-click the batch number and select the Drill down -> Transactions by Batch - Account Ledger. DAS will then
open and tile a new window that shows the transactions for the batch you selected. For each batch you want to check, you must
interactively right-click and follow the Drill Down.
B ring B acks
Bring backs are the cousin of the Drill Down. If a cell has a Drill Down, then the cell also has a Bring Back. Instead of opening a
new window, the Bring Back literally brings back the data into your existing report. This has the advantage of effectively doing all
the drill downs in one shot rather than individually for each row -- which is ultimately better for reporting purposes. The Bring
Back will arrange your existing report automatically to handle the new data. You can always click Undo to undo the effects of a
Bring Back.
For instance, if you were looking in the Account Ledger (F0911) and wanted to see all transactions for a batch in your report, you
would right-click the batch number and select the Bring back -> Transactions by Batch - Account Ledger. DAS will then
group your report by unique batches and return the transactions for the batches back to your report. Your report now has all the
batch transactions in it for you to query.
Types of D rill D owns and B ring B acks
DAS has two types of Drill Downs and Bring Backs:
Standard
Specialized
Each of these is described below.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 65 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Standard B ring B acks

Standard bring backs include all master tables, UDCs, and anything that has an associated description. There are thousands of
data items that fall into this class such as Address Book Number, Business Unit, Company, etc.
For this class of Bring Backs, the bring back brings back additional information about the item.
Example 1 - Address Book Master Information
If you right-click any address book number cell in your grid you will see: Drill Down / Bring Back -> Address Book Master.
When you select this option, the description for the address book number will be returned to your grid. Simply double-click the
new calculation (which is a Table Lookup calculation - see Get Related Data from Another Table) and edit the columns to bring
back - add Search Type for instance. In this manner, you can effectively bring back any master table data you need very quickly.
Example 2 - second UDC description
Sometimes you want the second UDC description for a UDC item. Use Bring Backs to get this. Right-click a UDC value your grid:
Drill Down / Bring Back -> User Defined Code Values. When you select this option, the description and second description
for the UDC will be returned to your grid. You can also double-click the new calculation (which is a Table Lookup calculation -
see Get Related Data from Another Table) and edit the columns to bring back.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 66 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specialized D rill D owns and B ring B acks

Data Access Studio provides the following JDE-specific Drill Downs and Bring backs:

D R ILL D O W N / B R ING
B ACK D ES CR IPTIO N

Account balance -> Account Gets Account ledger (F0911) transactions for a period balance. Right-click amount cell on Quick Report
ledger (Relative Period) reports or Account Balances table (F0902).

Asset account balances -> Gets Account ledger (F0911) transactions for a period balance. Right-click amount cell on Quick Report
Account ledger (Relative Period) reports or Account Balances table (F1202).

Purchase order -> Account Gets Account ledger (F0911) transactions for a purchase order. Right-clickPurchase Order Detail file (F4311)
ledger document number cell.

GL Document ->
Gets all transactions for a given GL Document. Right-click Account ledger (F0911) document number cell.
Transactions for document

Batch Number ->

Gets all transactions for a given GL Batch number. Right-click Account ledger (F0911) batch number cell.
Transactions for batch

Account ledger -> Accounts Gets the de-duplicated AP records for the corresponding GL records. Right-click Account ledger (F0911)
Payable document number or amount cell.

Account ledger -> Accounts Gets the de-duplicated AR records for the corresponding GL records.Right-click Account ledger (F0911)
Receivable document number or amount cell.

Account ledger -> Account Gets the period posting values for a set of Account ledger transactions. Right-click Account ledger (F0911)
balances amount cell.

Account ledger -> Work Gets the work order data for the Account ledger sub-ledger. Right-click Account ledger (F0911) sub-ledger
Order cell (where row is sub ledger type W).

Account ledger -> Address Gets address book master data for the Account ledger sub-ledger. Right-click Account ledger (F0911) sub-
Book ledger cell (where row is sub ledger type A).

Work Order -> Parent Work Gets the parent work order for given Work Order. Right-click Work Order Master filer (F4801) parent work
Order order number cell.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 67 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Once you open the JDE table, the second step is to get some sample data. Data Access Studio is a visual report writing system.
Getting sample data helps users visualize the report as they design it. Refer to the following Data Access Studio main tool bars:

Find and Find Progress toolbar:

Quick menu toolbar:

TO D O THIS

See sample
data with Click the Get Sample Data button.
no filter

See sample
data with a Enter filter information in the Filter Boxes underneath each Column Header. Click the Get Sample Data button.
filter

See sample
data with Enter filter information in the Filter Boxes underneath each Column Header. Click the Find with Count button. Note that
count of if the administrator restricts this capability, you will not see the Find with Count button. Note that if you do not specify
total
records filter information prior to pressing the Find with Count button, Data Access Studio will issue a performance warning.

Load
another
page of Click the Get More Data button.
records

Go to
previous
page of Scroll to the top using the vertical scroll bar.
records in
grid

Load all
records for Click the Run Report button. As the report runs, you will see Counting Records, Selecting Records, and then the
query progress bar loading the records. When the load is done the Progress Indicator will show a full progress bar.

Go to the
Scroll to the top using the vertical scroll bar or click CTRL-Home on your keyboard.
first row

Cancel a
large row When you load records, the Cancel button on the toolbar will be enabled. When enabled, you may click the Cancel
load button to stop the record load. The status bar will indicate that the grid is partially loaded.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 68 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter Your D ata

Data Access Studio provides a robust and simple way to get the data you need. When you open a table, each column has a Filter
Box directly beneath the column caption:

When you click on the filter box, you will see the Filter Helper button. If the column has a Visual Assist, you will also see the
Visual Assist button.

TO FILTER FO R D O THIS

Direct text Click the Filter Box and type in the number, string, or date you need to find.

Values in the Visual Assist Click the Visual Assist button. Select from the valid values. Click Ok.

A list of values Click and select List. In the list form, type the values you need on each line and click
Ok.

Click and select Not in list. In the list form, type the values you want to exclude on each
Values you want to exclude from your query
line and click Ok.

Click and select Begins with. In the list form, type the "begins with" text on each line and
Items that begin with specific text
click Ok.

Click and select Contains. In the list form, type the "contains" text on each line and click
Items that contain specific text
Ok.

Click and select Ends with. In the list form, type the "end with" text on each line and click
Items that end with specific text
Ok.

Items that fall into a range Click and select Range. See Filter a Range topic.

Items that fall into a range relative to today Click and select Today. See Filter a Range Relative to Today's Date topic.

Items that are blank Click and select Blank.

Items that are not blank Click and select Not Blank.

Items that match a Report Parameter

If your report has Report Parameters, you can filter using these values. Click
value

Items that match information about the For World and Enterprise One users, Click and select one of the following under the
signed-on user 'Variables' sub-menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 69 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter a Range
When you select the Range filter option, Data Access Studio will prompt you with the following form:

TO FILTER D O THIS

Check the box next to From. Uncheck the box next to Through. Select the From option. Type in the value in
From a specific value
the edit box. Click Ok.

From and excluding a Check the box next to From. Uncheck the box next to Through. Select the From and excluding option. Type
specific value in the value in the edit box. Click Ok.

Check the box next to Through. Uncheck the box next to From. Select Through option. Type in the value in
Through a specific value
the edit box. Click Ok.

Through and excluding a Check the box next to Through. Uncheck the box next to From. Select Through and excluding option. Type
specific value in the value in the edit box. Click Ok.

Check the box next to From. Check the box next to Through. Select From option. Select Through option.
Between two values
Type values in both edit boxes. Click Ok.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 70 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter a Range Relative to Today's D ate

The Today Range Filter lets you specify date ranges relative to today's date. This is very useful if you want your report to always
run on a set time window relative to today's date. For example, you can setup a range that runs between today and three months
ago. Every time you run the report, the report will always show only the dates that fall into the window relative to the time the
report was run.
When you select the Today filter option on a date column, Data Access Studio will prompt you with the following form:

TO FILTER D O THIS

Check the box next to From. Uncheck the box next to Through. Select From option. Enter a positive or negative
From a specific offset
offset. Select Days, Months, or Years option. Click Ok.

From and excluding a Check the box next to From. Uncheck the box next to Through. Select From and excluding option. Enter a
specific offset positive or negative offset. Select Days, Months, or Years option. Click Ok.

Through a specific Check the box next to Through. Uncheck the box next to From. Select Through option. Enter a positive or
offset negative offset. Select Days, Months, or Years option. Click Ok.

Through and Check the box next to Through. Uncheck the box next to From. Select Through and excluding option. Enter a
excluding a specific
offset positive or negative offset. Select Days, Months, or Years option. Click Ok.

Check the box next to From. Check the box next to Through. Select From option. Select Through option. Enter a
Between two offsets
positive or negative offset. Select Days, Months, or Years option. Click Ok.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 71 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter with Form ( advanced )

On occasion, you will need more advanced filtering than can be specified by the column filters. In these rare cases, you can define
filter criteria using the Additional Criteria form. On the Main Menu, click Design | Additional Criteria...

To Do this

Enter Field and Criteria information for one row. On the next row, under Field,
select Chain or. Then Enter Field and Criteria information for the following row.
E.g.:
Enter OR logic

Move a criteria row Click the grip bar and drag row to new position.

Copy a criteria row Highlight the row to copy. Click Copy Row.

Delete a criteria row Highlight the row to delete. Click Delete Row.

Accept changes Click OK.

Reject changes Click Cancel.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 72 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Now that you have opened a table or business view, you can edit it to create the report you need.
Data Access Studio provides a wide array of ways to format, rearrange, calculate, and group information into the format you need.
As you edit your report, you will be the only one who sees your changes--hence the term Private Report. Once you are done
with your report, you may elect to publish it to others so they may benefit from your work.

TO D O THIS

Save your private report Click File

Click the List of reports option box on the tool bar. Select the report you want for the table
Pick a report you saved from an open table
that is open.

Pick the default report Click the Report List option box on the tool bar. Select the blank report at the top.

Copy your report Click File

Delete a report Click File

Restore your Report from the last time you

Click File
saved it

Undo the last change you made Click Undo.

Redo the last thing you undid Click Redo.

Once you are finished editing your Report, you can:

Run it privately
Publish it to other users

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 73 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Access Your Reports

Once you build your collection of Reports, you can access them at any time from the home page by clicking My Workspace (or
alternatively File | Open | My Workspace...).

Once clicked, Data Access Studio will show you all of your Reports as follows:

Designer users can now create their own personal folders by simply clicking on the New Folder button. You can also create
folders within folders. The new user interface also allows users to undo or redo changes they have made. DAS will migrate your
existing folder configuration under My Workspace.

TO D O THIS

Type search terms in the search box. As you type, the tree will filter results matching your search. To clear search
Search for a report
results either delete the contents of the search box or click the Clear Search Filter button.

Open a report by
name Click on the search box . Type in a report name or wildcard (*). Double-click the row you want to open.

Sort by most recently

Right-click Date. Select Sort Descending.
created reports

Change the data

source where you
Click the Data Source option box. Select from the list of available data sources. Note: if the administrator revokes
want to open the
this permission, you will not see the Data Source option box.
report
(EnterpriseOne only)

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 74 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Open by selecting a
Click the Recently Opened option box. Click any item in the list to open the report on whichyou previously
report that you
worked.
recently opened

Highlight the report(s) you want to delete in the grid. Click Delete. Data Access Studio will move your deleted
Delete a report reports to the Recycle Bin. Any report in the Recycle Bin can be recovered simply by moving it to another folder.
When you delete your report from the Recycle Bin, you will be prompted to confirm the delete. Upon
confirmation, the report will be permanently deleted.

Create a new report Click the New button. See Create a New Report.

Close this form Click Close.

Create a new folder Click New Folder .

Rename a folder Right-click a folder. Click Rename. Enter the new folder name.

Undo/Redo last
Click the Undo or Redo button.
change

Save changes to the

tree structure Click the Save button.
immediately

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 75 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

P ublish Your Report to Others

To publish your report, open your private report and click: File | Publish... Once clicked, you will see the following form:

If the report was not previously published, the Published by value will be blank. If the report was previously published,
Published by will show who published the report. By default security, only the person who published the report last can re-
publish it. This prevents users from inadvertently overwriting each other's published reports.

To Do this

Change the name of the published Report Click the edit box next to report: and type in a new name.

If you are granted the permission, you may select the public folder where you want
Select target folder your report to reside. Click the ellipses to see the control of available folders. Select
the desired folder and click OK.

Click on the selection box under the User ID column. Pick Subscribers by their JDE
User ID, Role, or Group. Add as many users, roles or groups as you need. If you
Select Subscribers for your published Report
select DASUSERS then your report will be published to everyone who uses Data
Access Studio.

Disallow Subscriber to change data selection in your For each subscriber row, uncheck the Allow user to change data selection check
report box.

By default, the Subscriber cannot hide and show columns in a published report.
Allow Subscriber to hide and show columns Check the Allow user to hide and show columns button to let the Subscriber hide
and show columns in the published report.

Publish the report with the settings you added Click Publish. Once published, your subscribers will be able to see and run your
Report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 76 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Delete a published Report Click Delete. Data Access Studio will prompt you to confirm the delete. Click
Ok.

Close this form Click Close.

Control your data if you present it in Excel Press Excel Presentation. See the section below.

Excel P resentation Options

TO D O THIS

Show the Excel presentation Only (and hide the

Check the Show Excel Presentation Only.
Data behind it)

To make the Excel presentation unmodifiable by

Check the Make Excel Read Only box.
the subscriber

Hide Excel Menus Check the Hide Excel Menus box.

Add the names of the worksheets that you do not want to show to the subscriber
Hide designated worksheets
under the Sheet grid.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 77 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Public Folders are available to everyone using Data Access Studio. Public folders organize all published reports into a hierarchy of
folders. Each user will only see the portions of the Public Tree based on the reports that are published to him/her. Any report that
is not assigned to a specific folder, by default, will be placed in aspecial folder called the Unassigned Folder.
To access public folders, from the home page, click the Public Workspace button(alternatively click File | Open | Public
Workspace).

There are two types of Public Folder users: Normal and Folder Admin.

Normal User
Most users will fall into Normal User category and will see a screen which resembles the following (your folders, of course, will be
different than the ones shown below):

The Normal user is the user who uses the tree to find and run reports. The Normal user will not have an Edit button on the
toolbar (and hence no Folder Admin section of the toolbar as shown above).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 78 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Search for a Type search terms in the search box . As you type the tree will filter results matching your search. To clear search
report results either delete the contents of the search box or click the Clear Search Filterbutton.

Run a report Browse the list of results in the grid. Highlight the row you want to open and click Run. DAS will open and run the
report.

Open a report Browse the list of results in the grid. Highlight the row you want to open and click Open.

Sort by most
recently created Click Last Modified. Each click will toggle between descending, ascending, and no sort.
reports

Exit this form Click the Back button .

Create a new
Click New Folder.
folder

Un-subscribe
If you would like to remove a report from your view, click the Un-subscribe button.
from a report

Re-subscribe to
If you would like to re-subscribe to a report that you previously un-subscribed, click the Re-subscribe button. DAS will
an un-
show you a list of reports to which you un-subscribed. Simply click any number of reports that you want back and click
subscribed
Ok.
report

To "edit" a public report, click Save to private report. DAS will copy the public report into your private reports and
Edit a public
open it so that you can change your private copy. Note: editing your private copy will not alter the public report unless
report
you republish the report.

Refresh tree To reload the tree from the database click the Refresh button .

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 79 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Folder Admins
Folder Admins are the only users that can modify the public tree. A DAS Administrator can designate one or more users to be
Folder Admins (see the DAS Administrator's guide for instructions). Only one folder admin may modify the public tree at one
time. Take care editing the tree as all users of DAS will be affected by these changes.

TO D O THIS

Put public Click the Edit button. You will only see the Edit button if you are a Folder Admin. DAS will make sure no other Folder Admin
folders into is currently editing the public folders. If someone else is, then DAS will show you who is currently editing the public folders.
Edit mode Once DAS grants you the right to edit the public folders, you will see the Folder Admin toolbar.

Put public
folders into When you are editing the public folders and see the Folder Admin toolbar, either click the Edit button again or click the
non-edit Back button . If necessary, DAS will ask you to save any unsaved changes.
mode

Save your
Click the Save button. DAS will save any changes you made to the public tree.
changes

Create a
Click the New folder button. Once created you can drag and drop the folder to any location you desire.
new folder

Rename a Right-click a folder and select Rename. Enter the new name for the folder. Note: within a parent folder, folder names must
folder be unique.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 80 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Delete a Highlight the reports and folders you want to delete in the grid. Right-click and select Delete. Data Access Studio will
report or move your deleted reports to the Recycle Bin. Any report in the Recycle Bin can be recovered simply by moving it to
folder another folder. When you delete your report from the Recycle Bin, you will be prompted to confirm the delete. Upon
confirmation, the report will be permanently deleted.

Exit this
Click the Back button.
form

Create a
Click New Folder.
new folder

Undo/Redo
Click the Undo or Redo button.
last change

Restore
Given that changes to the public tree affect all users, DAS automatically backs up versions of the public tree. To restore to a
from
previously saved backup, click Restore from backup.
backup

Manage
who is
See Manage Report Subscribers.
subscribed
to reports

Place
reports on Select one to many reports or folders. Click Hyperlinks and select the type of hyperlink you would like to export. For E1
E1 menus tasks, pick Create Hyperlink or Create Single Sign on Hyperlinks. DAS will create a text file of the hyperlinks for you to
or web cut and paste into E1 or website. See the DAS Administrator's Guide for more information.
pages

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 81 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Manage Report Subscribers

Once you have published a report, you can conveniently add or remove subscribers to the report en masse. For example, i f
you had 20 reports and want to add a new subscriber to each (or remove a subscriber from each). To manage report subscribers:
1. Click File | Open | Reports Published to me
2. If you have the permission to un-publish (Delete) published reports, you will see the Manage Subscribers button
3. Select one or more reports (use CTRL and SHIFT keys to multi-select)
4. Click the Manage Subscribers button

IMPORTANT: If you selected more than one report, the Subscribers list is the union or combination of the subscribers of all
reports you selected. This feature makes it easy to make the subscribers for a set of reports the same.

TO D O THIS

Remove a subscriber Highlight one or more subscribers and press Delete.

Add a subscriber Click on the blank cell in the Subscribers grid. Click the visual assist button . Select a new user
from the valid users.

Once you edit your Subscriber list, click Assign Subscribers to Report to apply the changes to
Apply your changes
the report list.

Cancel the operation without making

changes Click the Close button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 82 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Now that you understand how to save, restore, publish your report, we can address modifying your report. When you modify a
report you will be transforming your data closer and closer to the final form that you need it. These transformations are the
Building Blocks for creating any report.

The majority of formatting operations are found on the Column Menu. To access the Column Menu on any grid:

See the following sections to see how to use each of the options on this Column Menu and more.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 83 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Only the Columns You Need

JDE tables have many columns. In most cases, too many columns for a readable report. That's why Data Access Studio lets you
easily hide and show columns as you need. Furthermore, as a performance benefit, the more columns you hide, the faster your
query will run over large data sets.
You can hide and showcolumns the following ways:
Click Design | Columns in the Quick Menu above the grid

Right-click the column header(s) (Column Menu). To multi-select columns hold CTRL and click the column headers. Select:
Hide Column(s)
Show Only Column(s)
Hide and Show Columns
When you click Design | Columns in the Quick Menu or right-click and select Hide and Show Columns, DAS will display the
following form:

TO D O THIS

Search for a column

Type in the name of the column in the Filter Box under Column Caption or the Alias under Alias.
by name

Hide or show a
Check to Show. Uncheck to hide.
column

Hide or show Hold the CTRL key down and click the columns you need. Then right-click your selection and select Uncheck
multiple columns highlighted items to hide. Select Check highlighted Items to show.

Show columns with

Click the Show Columns with Filters button in the Quick Menu at the top of the form.
filters

Show system If your report has hidden system columns, the Show System Columns button will show them. If you click this
columns button, the column list will include system columns that you can show.

Edit available
If your report is based on a DASVIEW (joined tables), then you will see an additional button Show Table Join.
columns in a
When you click this button, you can add and remove columns from you join definitions directly.
business view

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 84 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

To accept your
changes Click OK.

To cancel your
changes Click Cancel.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 85 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

P lace Columns in the Positions You Need

Data Access Studio makes moving columns easy. Simply click the column header and drag it to where you want it. You may also
multi-select columns with the CTRL or SHIFT keys and drag-and-drop columns as a whole.
To move the Item column below:
1. Click the Column Header:

1. Hold the mouse key down and move the column to the desired position.
2. Let go of mouse button to drop:

TIP: If you click on the column caption and begin typing, the grid will search for the column name that you typed.
Use this feature to find any column in the grid.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 86 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

G et D escription for Cryptic JD E D ata

JDE Data contains many codes and numbers that are not readable in plain English. Data Access Studio solves this problem with
instant Associated Descriptions. For instance, consider the data in Account ID:

Clearly the data in Account ID is not understandable in plain English. JDE, however, has an Associated Description for Account
ID that provides its English description.
For any column that has a JDE Associated Description, simply double-click the Column Header. Alternatively, you can click the
Column Header and select Quick Calculation | Enterprise One (or World) | Associated Description:

Example result

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 87 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Associated Description calculation creates a new column next to the coded column. The new column shows the English-readable
description, which makes your report more understandable.
You may hide the original column once you get its associated description.
If a column does not have an associated description, such as the Amount column, then you will not see the Associated Description on
the Column Menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 88 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

G et Totals by Column
With most reports you write, you will need to rollup information into a summary value. Data Access Studio provides this
capability with Grouping and Summarizing.

Example:
Let's say we have the account balance details, as shown to the left. We want to create a summary total for each account. Having this
summary will let us know if an account is in balance or not.

The first step is to group the things we want to summarize by. To group by any column, right-click the column header to get the
Column Menu. Select Group By This Column.

When we group by Account ID, notice that Data Access Studio collects all accounts with the same name and puts them together! Also,
because Amount is a numeric field, DAS automatically sums the values and shows you the result. Also notice that the summary operation
puts a Grand Total at the bottom.
To change a summary, right-click the column header to get the Column Menu and select Summarize | Sum.

Once you group a column, you can click the Group Expand button to see the detail lines. This can be a great way to double-
check your information.
Also, you may group more than one column. For each column you group, Data Access Studio will create a subtotal automatically.
You can control how you want to rollup your groups. For more information see Fine tune Grouping and Summarization.
You can do other summaries as well: Count, Minimum, Maximum, Average and None. You can right-click any summary on
the grid and either Suppress or Un-Suppress it.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 89 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Set G rouping and Summarization

Once you Group and Summarize your Layout, you can fine tune how you want the grouping to look. For this topic, you will right-
click the group row as follows:

TO D O THIS

Show all details Click Full expand.

Collapse all details to the top

Click Full collapse.
group level

Collapse all details to a given

Click Group all to this level.
group level

Always collapse details to a given Right-click the desired group node. Click Always Group to this level. All groups will be collapsed and
group level set to the same level as the group node that you right-clicked.

Set the collapsing of details to a Click Set grouping level. On the resulting dialog, enter the group level to collapse to. If you use the
specific level up/down arrows, the grid will show you a preview of the rollup.

Click Set grouping level. On the resulting dialog, check Page Break and select the level. When you
Set page break at a specific level export your report (to pdf or Excel) or do an Automatic Presentation, your report will page break at
the group level you selected.

Clear all grouping Click Clear grouping.

Hide/Show summaries on the

Click Hide to hide. Click Show to show the summaries.
collapsed group row

Show the value only for the group

Default. Click Group Display Style
row label

Show the category and value for

Click Group Display Style
the group row label

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 90 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Show only the text portion of a

Click Group Display Style
label in the form number.text

Show the group row at the top or

Click Group Display Style
bottom of the details

Add a quick count to the group

Click Add Count. To remove the count, click Remove Count.
row

Automatically suppress rows that

From the Design menu, select Suppress Zeroes. If checked, then the grid will hide any row where all
summarize to zero at the lowest
visible summary values of regular and calculated columns for the lowest grouping level are zero.
grouping level

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 91 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show D ata in Any Order

Data Access Studio lets you sort any column or set of columns.

To Do this

Sort a column from smallest to largest Right-click the Column Header. Click Sort Ascending.

Sort a column fromlargest to smallest Right-click the Column Header. Click Sort Descending.

Hold the CTRL key down and multi-select the columns you want. The order in which
Sort many columns from smallest to largest you click the columns will determine which column is sorted first. Right-click the
Column Header. Click Sort Ascending.

Hold the CTRL key down and multi-select the columns you want. The order in which
Sort many columns from largest to smallest you click the columns will determine which column is sorted first. Right-click the
Column Header. Click Sort Descending.

Sort by both smallest to largest andlargest to Hold the CTRL key down. Right-click the Column Header. Pick a different sort than
smallest for multiple columns the one it shows.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 92 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customize the Look and Colors of Your Layout

You can change the look of your layout by clicking Design | Grid Styles...

TO D O THIS

Make your
layout look like a
Click Report Look.
clean white
report

Make your
layout look like a Click Spreadsheet Look.
spreadsheet

Change the
Font, Font Color
or Background Click on the Font, Font Color, or Background of any cell to modify the property.
of the available
styles

Hide/show
vertical lines in Uncheck/Check Show Vertical Lines.
your grid

Hide/show
horizontal lines Uncheck/Check Show Horizontal Lines.
in your grid

Hide/Show
summaries in Uncheck/Check Summaries.
your grid

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 93 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Uncheck/Check Smart Column Filters. Option is checked by default. When checked, report optimizes the final query.
Enable/disable
Uncheck to override this behavior when troubleshooting queries. Calculations such as Relative Periods and Relative
Smart Column
Dates have smart column filters. Also, if your join is a LEFT OUTER join, then the Smart column filter in this case always
Filters
adds a "or blank" to any filter on any non LEFT table.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 94 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customize the Look and Colors of Your Layout ( continued )

TO D O THIS

Place summaries on the same

line as your group label Check Summary on group line.
(default)

Force report to sort data at Check Sort at Database. This option is for advanced users only. If the Administrator denies this privilege
the database to you, this check box will have no effect.

Fit column widths

Check Auto-Width On Find.
automatically after each Find

Keep your manual column

Uncheck Auto-Width On Find.
widths intact

Let Data Access Studio

automatically control the Check Auto-Uppercase Filters.
character casing for filters

Hide/Show the row indicator

Uncheck/Check Show row indicator.
column at the left

Hide/Show the calculation

indicator in the column Uncheck/Check Show calculation indicator
header

Certain calculations such as Relative Dates and Relative Periods can control the filters in the grid. Also, if
Turn off Smart Filters you have a one-to-many join, checking this box will automatically correct your query. If you want to
disable this behavior, uncheck this box.

Select a different Column

Click the Column Header options box and select the option you want to see.
Header type

Change the indicator font for

Uncommon. Click the Multi-Sort Font Size options box and select new size.
Multi-Sort

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 95 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Report Parameters
Report parameters provide the way for your user to input valid values to the report prior to retrieving the results. The DAS Report
Parameter system supports the following input scenarios:
1. Enter a filter value (single value, lists of values, range, etc.)
2. Single value only entry
3. Selection by automatic valid values
4. Selection by customized list of valid values
5. Select by a calendar for dates
6. Allow blank entry or not
7. Selection by data type: string, date, number etc.
You can create report parameters as follows:
Method 1: D rag a column to the report parameter space:

In the example above, we drag the Or Ty column above the grid columns and drop for this result:

Now we have an Order Type parameter above the grid columns that is linked to the Or Ty column. In this case, any value the
user enters in the "Order Type" parameter will be reflected in the Or Ty column filter. You can see that this link is present by click
the Or Ty filter box. You will see the text <Order Type>. Angle brackets wrap the name of the parameter and is how the
parameter is referenced in things like grid column filters or as inputs to calculations. If you try to clear the Or Ty column filter,
DAS will issue a warning that says you're about to break the link between the filter and the parameter -- the default
recommended course is to maintain the link.
The other feature of the "Order Type" parameters is that is has the same visual assist as the Grid Column "Or Ty". This means that
when the user clicks the "Order Type" entry box, DAS will present a visual assist button that will show the valid Order Type values
when clicked.
Method 2: Manually add a parameter using the parameter editor:
To manually add/edit/delete the report parameter fields in your report, click Design | Report Parameters... Once Clicked, Data
Access Studio will open the Report Parameter Designer as follows:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 96 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Access Studio shows the Designer in the region above your Layout grid. You can resize the height of the Report Parameter
Designer by clicking the splitter line between the Designer and the Layout grid.

TO D O THIS

Add a Click an empty cell beneath the Name column. Enter the name for your parameter. Tab out of the Name column. Select
parameter an editor that is appropriate for your parameter. If you have a Date parameter, select a Date editor, etc. For each type of
manually editor you select, modify the properties of the editor to best match your parameter.

Organize the
top-down
Click the Grip Bar for any parameter row. Drag the row to the desired location. Drop the row on the desired location.
order of your
parameters

Delete a
parameter Highlight one or more parameters. Click Delete Parameter.

Make a
parameter Check Visible (default) to make the parameter visible. Uncheck Visible to hide the parameter from the user.
visible/invisible

Rename a Click on the parameter name in the Name column. Type in the new name. DAS will automatically update all parameter
parameter name references in your report to the new name

Close the
Designer and
Click Back.
show the
Prompt screen

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 97 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Parameter D efinitions
Once you have parameters defined, you can change the properties of those parameters in the parameter editor. Click on the
editor you want to customize and view the Define Editor tab:

Data Access Studio shows the Designer in the region above your Layout grid. You can resize the height of the Report Parameter
Designer by clicking the splitter line between the Designer and the Layout grid.

To Do this

Click the Editor Type selection box and pick the desired editor type:

Specify editor
type

When you select an editor type, the remaining settings for that editor will be update to reflect options for that editor. The
Grid column valid values is a special editor that is aware of the grid column value values for the specified grid column

Allow/disallow
To allow blank entry (default), check the Allow blank entry check box. To force entry of a value, uncheck this checkbox
blank entry

DAS supports the follow varieties of input modes:

User allowed to entry any valid filter text: single value, wildcards, lists, or ranges, etc. See Filter Your Data
Expression for more information on the syntax of these strings. This option provides a filter button on the entry field
that assists the user with the various filter options (list, not in list, range, etc.)

User allowed to enter a single value only. No filter syntax allowed for this mode. If editor type is Date,
Single Value
then the calendar control will only allow the selection of a single day.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 98 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Parameter designer specifies a list of valid values manually. If the valid values also have associated
descriptions, then these will be shown to the users as well (although the report designer may override
even this description in his/her list). Use this option to limit the valid choices to a user. If single mode,
then use may only pick one of the values. If Multi mode, the user may pick one or more of the values (i.e.
a list of values). In either case, the user MUST select at least one of the values (i.e. blank entry is not
allowed) Example:Suppose we wanted to allow the user to pick from three Company numbers. In this
case, the user may prefer to select by company number vs description is it is shorter and recognizable to
the user. By using Multiple values from list we setup up the Custom valid values as follows:

Value from
list (single
and
multiple)
Here we
simply enter each valid company number on each line. If the column has an associated description, this
will be the default description per line. You may override any description by typing in the edit box for the
line. Once designed this way, the user selects by company number:

Here the user selects by number and the selection is shown as the number he/she selected. The
Description only shows up in the Valid Values selection.

Specify input
mode

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 99 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Very similar to Value from list except instead of selecting by value, the user is presented with the
descriptions of those values only. This mode is handy to show the user a more friendly (and
customizable) list of options which get resolved to each's baker values automatically). Example:Suppose
we wanted to allow the user to pick from two Ship To address numbers. The address number in this case
is the "backer value" - it is that which we want to use to query. However, the user doesn't recognize
address numbers as easily as the Ship to Name. By using Multiple descriptions from list we setup up the
Custom valid values as follows:

Description
from a list
(single and
multiple) Here
we enter the valid address numbers. Notice that the Description value automatically defaults to
Associated Description which means DAS will automatically get the description for the number. You may
override the description with any text. Once designed this way, the user simply picks by description:

Once the user

makes the selection, the <Ship To> token is set to corresponding the address numbers for that selection

Specify
If applicable. Choose Normal for mixed case. Choose Upper case to force entry in uppercase. Choose Lower case to
character
force entry in lower case.
casing

Make a
parameter Check Visible (default) to make the parameter visible. Uncheck Visible to hide the parameter from the user.
visible/invisible

Close the
Designer and
Click Back.
show the
Prompt screen

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 100 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

P rompt for Values

Once you have designed your Report Parameters and clicked Back (which closes the designer), Data Access Studio will show the
user prompt that you designed. For example:

To Do this

Click on the edit box next to the parameter you want to modify. Enter a value and
Enter a parameter
click TAB.

Run the Report with the parameters you entered Click Run.

See some sample rows for the parameters you

entered Click Get Sample Data.

Edit and design your parameters (Designer user

only) Click Design.

Hover mouse between the label and entry side and above both to see the resize
cursor. Click and drag left or right so the width of the label is the desired size. Save
your report to retain the width.
Resize label portion of the parameters

Hover mouse to the right of the parameter entry area to see the overall resize
cursor. Click and drag to resize to the desired overall width. Save your report to
retain this width.
Resize the width of both label and parameter entry
area

If the parameters that the user entered violate a entry rule, DAS will popup up the error message below the offending parameter
value. The popup will instruct the user how to correct the data entry issue.
Once you design your parameters, you can also connect the parameters to certain calculations. See Connect a Report Parameter
to a Calculation for more information.
You can rename parameters. Simply enter a new name and DAS updates all references to that parameter.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 101 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Copy Column ( s )
You can copy multiple columns. To copy one or more columns:
1. Multi-select the column headers you want
2. Right click on the Column Headerfor any column in your selection
3. On the popup menu, select Copy
DAS will create new copies for the selected columns and highlight the new columns when the copy is complete. You can proceed
to edit the new copies by double-clicking the column header.
.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 102 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

System Variables
Use System Variables to get information about the signed-on user. You can use this information to filter data, name reports, or set
column captions.
List of Available System Variables:

V AR IAB LE D ES CR IPTIO N

SYS_USER_ID Login ID of the user.

SYS_USER_Description User name from the address book.

SYS_USER_BusinessUnit Business unit for the user.

SYS_USER_Company Company for the user.

SYS_USER_Type Address book type of the user (e.g. 'E' for Employee).

SYS_USER_Environment Login environment of the user.

SYS_USER_SignedOnRole Login role of the user.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 103 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Rename a Column
By default, Data Access Studio names columns based on their JDE Data Dictionary description. You can, however, override this
caption and change it to whatever you wish.

TO D O THIS

Right-click the Column Header. Select Rename. Type a new name and click OK. You can press the button to see parameters
Rename and variables that you can also use in your column header. For instance, let's say you had a column that shows period amounts
a and the user can enter different period amounts via a parameter. Then, if you select the period amount parameter tag in the
column Column name, as the period numbers changes, the column header will change too! Parameter tags are in the form of: <tag>.
You can place the tag anywhere in your column header. For instance: Current Period <Period>.

Change
the
column
caption See Column Caption in the Customize the Look and Colors of Your Layout topic.
to pre-
set
value

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 104 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can present your report with all the features of Excel. With Excel Presentation, your query comes alive with Graphs,
Dashboards, and pixel-perfect formatting:

Data Access Studio provides two ways to format your report in this manner:
Automatic presentation (newer)
Manual presentation (legacy)
In general, use the Automatic presentation for new reports. The Manual presentation method (which uses row padding for nested
groups), is there for legacy reports.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 105 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

New to DAS 6.0, is the Automatic presentation mode that supersedes the old way of presenting your data in Excel. Automatic
presentations automatically track changes you make on the data tab. For instance, if you add new columns or change the
grouping, the change automatically appears on the presentation tab.
Also, Automatic presentations do away with row padding. This means you may have as many grouping levels as you want (the
legacy way had a limit of 3 group levels). Also, the new mechanism is more efficient with memory – so the size of your resulting
report will be smaller as well.
Automatic presentations work seamlessly with downstream Excel formulas and charts. Automatic presentations keep formulas
and charts intact as your incoming query data changes. Also, the formulas track changes to the List calculation. For example, if you
add a row to a List, all formulas based on other amounts will remain unaffected.
Finally, Automatic presentations let you quickly create beautifully formatted report elements. To get you started, we’ve provided
over 30 different customized styles that you can quickly apply and customize.
Creating an Automatic P resentation

To automatically present your data in Excel, right-click a column to get the Column Menu. Select Present data | Automatic.

DAS will embed Excel under the Presentation tab and map all visible columns automatically with the default style (more on that
later). Note also the appearance of the Presentation menu item in the toolbar (See Control the Excel Presentation)

Once you create your automatic presentation, you can control it in many ways:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 106 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Controlling the Automatic P resentation

Once you've added an automatic presentation to your report, you can control it as follows:

TO D O THIS

Exclude a
column from Either: 1) hide the column or 2) Right-click the Column Header. Uncheck Presentation
being presented

Include a column By default, all visible columns are automatically presented. So if you add a calculation column it will automatically show
in presentation in the automatic presentation. If you previously unchecked Presentation

Change the Each column is automatically mapped to a default style. For instance, the grouped column is mapped to the style
column style GROUP. You can change the default style as follows: Right-click the Column Header. Select Map to style -> and select
mapping the desired styles from the available styles. See Automatic Presentation Styles for more information.

Change how the

presentation SeeAutomatic Presentation Styles.
looks

Change the
Just change the grouping level in the data tab, the Automatic presentation automatically updates itself. Also, if you
report grouping
move the grouped column, the automatic presentation will track the movement.
level

Add a chart or Click Refresh . Then add any chart or formula you want using Excel notation. DAS will automatically track the
formula formula and chart as the data in the data tab changes (e.g. with different queries).

Add row above

the presentation Click Refresh . In Excel, insert a row. Also, you can click Presentation
area

Remove/Edit text By default, the automatic presentation prefixes the total lines with the word "Total -" and the label of the group. E.g.
for Totals row Total - Bank account. To change this behavior, click Presentation

Toggle Excel By default, when you add an Automatic presentation, DAS does not add Excel outlining to the presentation. To add
outlining Excel outlining (i.e. +/- group collapsing in Excel), click Presentation

Remove the
Automatic
Right-click the Column Header. Select Presentation
Presentation
from your report

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 107 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Automatic P resentation Styles

The automatic presentation provides a rapid way to style your presentation. Consider the following four screen shots:

Each is a different style for the same report. In one click, the user can transition between each of the above styles.
A style is any Excel format (color, font, size, numeric precision, conditional format, border, etc.) that you specify for a specific
element. You can see that it is possible, for instance, to do odd-even row shading and conditional formatting.
P re - built DA S Styles
To get you started with styles, DAS ships with about 30 pre-defined styles. To try out a predefined style on a report with an
Automatic presentation, click Presentation | Styles.

Click any row and your automatic presentation will apply the style you selected. See Managing Styles for more information.
H ow D o DA S Styles Work?
Now that you've had a chance to play with the pre-built DAS styles, let's consider how styles work. Once you understand this, you
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 108 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

can create and save your own custom styles.

First, why do we need DAS styles? Without DAS styles, you would be forced to format your Excel presentation cell by cell. The
problem with this approach, other than tedium, is that as soon as your data changes, all of your formatting is incorrect. So this
approach clearly cannot work for reports in general.
As opposed to styling cell by cell, DAS Styles format by a cell's type. A cell has two components to its type: the Row Type and the
Column Type.
Row Types
R O W T YPE D ES CR IPTIO N

CAPTION The text in the header part of the grid column

GROUP The text for the group by each group level

DETAIL The text and amounts at the detail lines

TOTAL The text and amounts for a group's total at each level

GRANDTOTAL The data for the column grand total

DEFAULT The default formatting

SPACER The spacing between a total and the next group

So given this simple set of types, you can, for instance, define that you want the Group caption to be Arial font size 14 and blue.
No matter what the input data (whether it's 100 rows or 100,000 rows), the group styling will always be correct. Note that row
types are referenced by the literal labels in the table above. Also, GROUP, TOTAL, and SPACER support appending a number to
specify "at which level". E.g. GROUP1 means the styling for group level 1.
Column Types
CO LU MN T YPE D ES CR IPTIO N

GROUP The group column

FIRST The first column

LAST The last column

DEFAULT Any column by default

Any user defined style to be applied by column (note that the Type in this case can be any name - it does not have to be
USER_DEFINED
USER_DEFINED). You may also specify as many user-defined column types as you need

The column types let you specify column specific styling in conjunction with the row type.
The DA S_S TY LE S sheet
When you combine the Row Typesand Column Type you get the DAS_STYLES sheet. All automatic presentations have a
DAS_STYLES sheet. This sheet is the matrix of the row types and columns types that define the style for your presentation. When
you select a style, this is the sheet that gets updated with the style's data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 109 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The above is the DAS_STYLES for the template "Color Tiles 3". You can see it is simply a spread sheet of formats for each row and
column type. The COMMENT tag means ignore any text below the COMMENT tag.
Now, if you modify any of the formats in the DAS_STYLES sheet, then you customized the style. For instance, in the screen shot
above, you could change the GROUP1 text to be blue (Cell B3). Once changed, all your Group level 1 text will be blue. See
Managing Styles for more information about saving and publishing custom styles.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 110 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Managing Styles
To control the DAS presentation styles on a report with an automatic presentation, click Presentation | Styles.

This dialog lets you control the styles in your reports.

TO D O THIS

Apply a
style to Click any style row. DAS will apply the selected style to your report.
your report

To set a
Check the Default check box for the style. Once checked, the next time you create an automatic presentation, this is the style
style as the
that will be applied. If no style is checked, then DAS uses the internal bootstrap style for new automatic presentations.
default

Click any style row and select Customize Style from the toolbar. DAS will display the styles DAS_STYLES sheet for you to
Customize edit. Once you are done editing, click Save style to save your style to either a new name or overwrite an existing name.
a style Note: you cannot rename pre-existing styles; but you can copy these styles to your private styles with the same name. You
may also customize a style from the Report tool bar by clicking Presentation

Rename a Click on a style row and click Rename in the tool bar. Enter the new name for the style. If you select an existing name, DAS
style will warn you of overwriting if necessary.

Delete a Click on a style row and click Delete in the tool bar. Note: a DAS Administrator must grant you delete rights to delete public
style styles.

Publish a
Click on a private style and click Publish. The style will be copied to the public space. Note: a DAS Administrator must grant
style to
publishing rights for your to publish styles.
others

Copy a pre-
built or
public style
Click a public or pre-built style. Click Copy to private in the toolbar.
to your
private
styles
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 111 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Add page
Click Page Break on Group. DAS will add Excel page breaks for all Group level 1 level breaks. Note: Excel 2010 and earlier
breaks for
can only insert up to 1024 page breaks. If your report exceeds this limit, consider using Bursting instead.
top group

Create a
Click New Folder.
new folder

Rename a
Right-click a folder. Click Rename. Enter the new folder name.
folder

Undo/Redo
Click the Undo or Redo button.
last change

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 112 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Manual P resentation
You can present also present your report with the Manual presentation option. The Manual presentation provides the most
flexibility for simple reports. If your report is more complicated (either because you need more than three group levels or have
hundreds of thousands of rows of data) you should opt for the Automatic presentation approach (see Automatic Presentation).
With Manual Presentations, your query comes alive with Graphs, Dashboards, and pixel-perfect formatting:

To present your data in Excel, right-click a column to get the Column Menu. Select Presentation. Data Access Studio will
display the following screen:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 113 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Add additional
columns to Click on the visual assist in the From grid list. Select the columns you want.
present

Re-order the
sequence of Click on the grip bar and drag the column name to the position you want.
columns

Map data to
Embed Excel but
do not graphically Set Sheet to blank or DASLink.
present it (old
style Embed Excel)

Change the target

sheet where you
Change the Sheet text box to the name of the Excel sheet you want.
want to present
the grid data

Change the target

cell where you
Change the Cell column and row values.
want to present
the grid data

Change upper Change the Row Padding value. The Row Padding value sets the upper limit on the number of rows Excel will
limit on the present. Pick the smallest number that you know will be bigger than the number of rows you expect from your query
number of rows and grouping. For instance, if your grid groups business unit and you know that the maximum number of business
for the presented units for any given query will not exceed 500, then set the Row Padding to 500. If you make this number smaller, it
data will be easier to format your Excel presentation later.

Only map data

(and hence do not Select None for Chart Type.
graph the values)

Create a chart for

each column. X
axis = rows and Check One chart per column. Select the visual assist for Chart Type and select the type of chart you want. DAS will
values of the chart create an array of that chart type in the Excel presentation.
are the values in
the grid.

Create a chart for

each row. X axis =
columns and Check One chart per row. Select the visual assist for Chart Type and select the type of chart you want. DAS will
values of the chart create an array of that chart type in the Excel presentation.
are the values in
the grid.

| Specify how you want the graphs to be laid out in the presentation | Click the Pattern option and select how many columns to
use when laying out the resulting graphs. | | Specify borders for your graphs | Check the Border box for borders. Un-check the
Border box to create graphs with no borders. | | Specify round corners for your graphs | Check the Round Cornersfor round
corners. Un-check for square corners. |

Once you have configured the options you want, click the Map Columns to Excel to complete the presentation. Whenever
you Map Columns to Excel, DAS overwrites the previous mapping. Sometimes it is a good idea to clear the target sheet before
re-mapping graphs to it.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 114 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Control the Excel P resentation

Once you present your data in Excel, DAS displays the Control Presentation menu option on the Quick menu above the grid.
You can use this menu to control how DAS presents your data in Excel. To access these options, click on the Control
Presentation menu:

TO D O THIS

Adjust the Excel width

automatically after Check the Best fit after query button. Uncheck this button to keep Excel column widths intact.
each query

Best fit the current

Click Best fit sheet.
visible sheet now

Auto fit the sheet

Check the Auto-fit to printer. Note: If you want to add page breaks to your presentation, make sure to uncheck
width to the width of
Auto-fit to printer!
the printer

Hide/show spacer Check the Filter sheet to hide the spacer rows (as defined by the Row Padding). Uncheck to show the spacer
rows rows. Note: Show the spacer rows if you want to apply Excel Format Cells.

Uncheck the Filter sheet button. Select the cells and spacer cells and set the Excel Cell Formatting for the cells (E.g.
Format cells
numeric format, bolding, etc.). Check the Filter sheet button when you are done.

Show a "clean" look

Click Report look.
for your report

Show a "spreadsheet"
look so you can edit Click Spreadsheet look.
your report

Hide/show excel
Click Toggle menus.
menus

Hide/show grid
column and row Click Toggle headings.
headings

Hide/show grid lines Click Toggle gridlines.

Hide/show worksheet
Click Toggle worksheet tabs.
tabs

Hide/show status bar Click Toggle status bar.

Wipe out the visible

sheet (i.e. start with a Click Clear active sheet.
"clean slate")

Present visible grid Click Map visible columns to Excel. Once you click, DAS will present the dialog to present columns in Excel Add
columns in Excel Charts and Advanced Formatting.

Manually edit and Click Advance Edit. With this option, you can append new maps at the end. Use this option if it is important to
refine previous maintain the order and columns of a previous mapping. You may also add additional mapping such as Report
mappings Parameter mapping with this editor.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 115 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Remove the Excel

Click Un-embed Excel. DAS will remove the Excel presentation and show the grid showing your query data.
Presentation

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 116 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Access Studio provides two calculation methods to transform data:

1. Global Variables
2. Calculation Columns

Global Variables
Global variables are calculated values that can use parameters (See: Prompt for Values), System values (See: SystemVariables), or
constants to create derived information prior to running a report.
Primary uses:
Create filters which derive from input parameters to filter grid column data. For example, suppose you have an input date
parameter, you could create a global variable that creates a filter selects the first day and last day of the month relative to
that input date. Then you can use this global variable as the filter to a grid column so your report shows only the range for
first day of month to last day of month for your grid data.
Create static information to use in Calculation Columns (see below)
Create static information

Calculation Columns
Calculation Columns give you the power to create information derived from your grid. Calculation Columns differ from Excel cell
calculations in that Calculation Columns work for any number of rows. This row-independence means you can design reports that
are more useful and re-usable on JDE data than is possible with Excel.
Quick Facts
Each Calculation Column lets you transform your data visually.
Many calculations support Quick Calculation. With Quick Calculation, you multi-select columns, right-click any Column
Header in your selection, and pick Quick Calculation | ... to do the calculation you need. See Associated Descriptions for an
example.
Once you add a calculation, you will see the results of the calculation in your grid immediately.
You can edit a calculation by double-clicking its Column Header. (Edit Calculations with the Editor)
You can edit all calculations. (Edit Calculations with the Editor)
You can delete a Calculation Column by right-clicking the Column Header and selecting: Delete Column.
You can filter Calculation Columns just like any other column. Note: if you have that slow-running query, Calculation
Column filtering won't improve database query performance.
Data Access Studio re-calculates when you find new data or when it detects a change that forces a recalculation.
Data Access Studio automatically determines dependencies, calculation order, and circular dependencies.
Formula
The formula calculation is a special calculation column that allows you write an expression combining many different calculations.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 117 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Access Studio provides the following ways to edit calculations.

TO D O THIS

Edit a single calculation Double-click the Column Header. Or right-click the Column Header, and select Calculations

Edit all calculations Click Design

DAS has two ways to view calculations.

1) The calculation list view, where all the calculations are shown.
2) The calculation flow view, where the flows into a selected calculation are shown (see Calculation flow view below)
Calculation list view
The calculation list view allows you to add, delete, edit, and copy calculations. You can rearrange the display order of the
calculations by drag and drop.

To Do this

Click on an empty box under Calculation type. Click on the Visual Assist to select
from a list of available calculations. Or type in the name of the calculation directly.
Add a calculation
Click TAB to apply. Once applied, the calculation-specific parameters will show under
the Parameters tab.

Delete a calculation Highlight one or more calculations on the left-hand side. Click Delete.

Highlight the calculation row on the left. Edit the values under the Parameters tab.
Edit a calculation You may also change the Column Caption and Output Type (if the particular
calculation allows it).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 118 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Copy a calculation Highlight the calculation and click Copy. The copied calculation will appear at
the bottom.

If you want to keep a calculation from running, but you don't want to delete it, you
can uncheck the Enabled checkbox for the calculation. When a calculation is
Disable a calculation
disabled, it will emit the default value for the calculation and skip running the
calculation itself.

When viewing the list of calculations, it can be handy to re-arrange the row display
order of the calculations. To re-arrange calculations, click on the Row Control area.
Re-arrange the calculation display order Drag and drop the calculation row to the desired location and drop. You may
rearrange multiple calculation rows at a time (user standard Ctrl-click and Shift-click)
to select multiple rows

If your grid has rows loaded, the Value column will show the calculated values for
that row. To select another row to evaluate:
Right-Click the Value column.
Select Evaluate Previous Row to see all calculation values for the previous row
Select Evaluate Row (nnnn) to re-evaluate the values for the current row
See the value of a calculation for a row Select Evaluate Next Row to see all calculation values for the next row
Check/Uncheck Auto-evaluate to turn calculation evaluation on or off respectively
(default is on)
You may also evaluate the calculations directly from the report. If you are on the
Data tab of your DAS report, you can right click a detail row and select the Debug
option. Once selected, DAS will show the calculation editor and evaluate the
calculations for the row you selected.

If your calculation row shows a magnifying glass in the row (Show flowchart), then
See calculation dependencies this means the calculation depends on the results of other calculations. You may
click the magnifying glass to see the flow chart.

Typing shortcuts:

K EY EFFECT

Tab to the next/previous editable field. Tab from the last editable field of the header row will activate the first editable
TAB/SHIFT+TAB
field in the Parameters grid.

Open any active visual assist. If the visual assist is not active, you can press ENTER and then F4 to open the visual assist.
F4 When selecting from the list of valid values, you may type in the value you need in the filter box, and then press Alt+S to
select the value.

Calculation flow view

The purpose of the flow chart view is to show you how your calculations inter-relate. This view is useful for visualizing
complicated calculation logic. The flow lines show which calculations flow into which (flow direction indicated by the arrow). Also,
the Value column shows the evaluated values (if available) for each stage of the flow. In the example below we see that the
Account category calculation feeds in the YTD calculation (for this row, the value it passed the value GLG9)
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 119 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can see calculations in flow chart view as follows:

1) If you double click a calculation column header in your DAS report.
2) If you are in the calculation editor in list view and you click the magnifying glass next to the calculation editor

TO D O THIS

Go back to the
Click the Back to list view button at the top of the flow chart
calculation list view

Expand and collapse Click the top Level of detail arrow to collapse to higher levels of the flow chart. Click the bottom Level of detail
levels of detail arrow to expand to more detailed levels of the chart

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 120 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Connect a Report Parameter or System Variable to a Calculation

When you create Report Parameters for your Layout or want to access information about the signed-on user, you may want to
connect these variables to a calculation input:
1. Click on Parameters tab for the calculation you want to connect to a Report Parameter
2. Click on the Filter Helper button
3. Select Variables | <name of the parameter> you want to connect
Once a Report Parameter is connected, when the user changes the value of the parameter, the calculation parameter will change
as well. This is useful, for example, in the Period Amounts, you could hook up a Parameter called "Period" to the "End Period" of
that calculation.
Once a System Variable is connected, when a different user signs in, the calculation parameter will also change as well. This is
useful when creating self-service reports that a user might access from a web portal.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 121 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Troubleshoot Calculation Errors

If your calculation has an error, DAS will red-out the cell values that have an error in the grid.
To identify and resolve errors:
1. Run your calculation.
2. Right-click on calculation cells that are red.
3. Read the message box instructions and optional resolution.
4. Press "Edit Calculation" to correct the error.
Common errors include:
Invalid type conversion
Missing inputs
Blank inputs
Missing options
Circularly dependent calculations
Performance considerations
The calculation architecture is designed to provide maximum performance. This includes:
1. Only re-calculating necessary columns.
2. Caching results when appropriate (associated descriptions and table lookups).
3. Taking minimum steps in repetitive calculations.
Overall, the result should be that adding new columns has little performance impact on your layout. Calculations can, however,
impact performance if they are used improperly. The section that follows outlines best practices for using calculations:
Delete any calculation that you are not using.
Limit the number of Table Lookup calculations. A table lookup will query data from other tables. If this is done excessively,
the overall performance of your report may suffer.
If you are querying against a large table (>1,000,000 rows), make sure that your report filters on at least one database
column. You may filter calculation column results; however, the database itself cannot recognize these filters. Because
calculations are derived data, filtering calculations will not result in a smaller set of rows retrieved from the database.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 122 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Global variables are values you define that can be used in your report for:
Filters
Inputs to grid calculations
Display values in headers and presentations.
To create one or more global variables for your report:

1. Click Design.

2. Click Variables
3. DAS will present the Calculation Editor (See Edit Calculations with the Editor) for variables
Editing variables is similar to editing calculation with these important differences:
Variables can only use input Parameters, System Variables, Constant values, and other variables as inputs
Most, but not all, calculations are supported in variables mode. The editor will show which calculations are available
Variables can feed the report filters before the report is run (i.e. the variable values can shape the data set of your report
query if desired)
As you edit variable values, the evaluated value will show in the calculation editor immediately

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 123 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

One of the primary applications of Global Variables is to create dynamic filters.

Example
Suppose you have a report with an input parameter named Date

Now suppose you want to filter the Order Date column with the range of the first day of the month through the last day of the
month based on the Date entered.
To accomplish this:
1. Open the variables editor
2. Add a new calculation: First Day of Month
3. For the input, change to Literal, use the filter visual assist button and select the Date parameter (in general, Parameters and
variables are reference by their name enclosed in angle brackets: e.g. <Date>)

1. Do the same steps, this time add a new calculation Last Day of Month
2. Now add a Concatenation calculation to create the filter string for the range filter (See Filter a Range)

Rename the Caption to Filter. The Concatentation example above shows how you can combine the other variables into a new
variable that will server as the filter string. Note the Value column shows that the filter evaluation is what we want.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 124 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

1. Click Save and Close to save your changes

2. Click the visual assist on the Order Date filter column. Select Variables -> <Filter>

Now the Order Date filter tracks the first and last day of the month of whatever date you enter in the Date parameter of the
report

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 125 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

A List is like a mini spreadsheet where all formulas are referenced by name (as opposed to Excel where formulas are usually
referenced by cell position e.g. A47). Named formulas are an advantage when you need to modify your spreadsheet formulas. For
instance, if you have a label named [Sales], the label means the same thing regardless of where it appears in the List.
A list can be anything: a list of accounts, business units, ledger types, customers, etc. Data Access Studio lets you define the lists
you need and assign the list a label for quick reference. For instance, you can define your list of P&L account and label the list as
"P&L Standard". You can then define cell and row calculations over any label in your list. For instance, you can sum up several
items or take a percent of one label to another.
To create a List
You can setup a List with the Calculation Editor or Quick Report Wizards. In the Calculation editor, select the List calculation and
click Edit List. Once created, you will almost always Group by the list column. You can group by more than one list. A list may be
grouped at any level as well.
A List consists of the following:
1. Label - unique text that identifies the item. IMPORTANT:Labels need to be unique for the thing they represent. If you
need duplicate labels, you can append as many spaces after your label to make a unique name for it. In your formulas, the
spaces will be represented as an underscore so: SALES and SALES_ will be different labels in your formulas (the first has no
spaces after it the second has one space).
2. Criteria
(optional). If present, the criteria says what values to roll up for the label. For instance, if the criteria is Obj Acct 1* that
means any row where Obj Acct starts with 1 will be rolled up into the total amount for the label.
3. Default Expression (optional). The expression evaluates slightly differently based on two cases.
1. Case 1. Label has criteria. In this case the expression operates on the elements that make up the label. The
expression can begin with an operator (-, +, *, /), So shorthand syntax such as - or /1000 is valid (the first means
negate the element values, the second means divide all element values by 1000).
Case 2. Label has no criteria. This is the row totals case. In this case the expression defines what the label is. e.g.
[Bank 1] + [Bank 2] + [Bank 3] is the formula for the label Bank Total.
1. Additional Expression (optional). This is an extra set of formulas that can use any of the symbols in the list or default
expression. Use this to create secondary calculations such as percent of row values.
2. Override Style (optional with Automatic Presentation only)

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 126 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To Do this

Click Insert Row Before or Insert Row After. The editor will create a new row
Add a new row above/below the row you have highlighted. Alternatively, you may enter text in the
new empty row at the bottom in the Description column.

Click the box under the Pattern column and click the ... visual assist. See Define
Define how the label is rolled up
Criteria for the List Item for instructions on defining the "pattern".

Click the box under the Row Calculation column. See Define row calculations for
Define a row calculation
the List item for further instructions.

Hold CTRL key down as you left-click multiple rows. Then click the Delete Row
Delete list items
button.

Hold CTRL key down as you left-click multiple rows. Then click the Copy button.
Copy and Paste
Highlight the row where you would like to paste the rows. Click Paste.

Hold CTRL key down as you left-click multiple rows. Highlight the row you want to
move. Then click the "Drag and drop grip bar" and drag row above or below current
Move multiple list items
position. Release mouse button to drop to new position. Grid will automatically
scroll as you drag near the top or bottom.

Save your list Click File | Save List. See Save a List and Share a list

Load a previously saved list Click File | Load List.

Delete a previously save list Click File | Load List. See Work with Your Lists.

To export your list to XML, click File | Export. Exporting to XML can be useful if you
Export your list to XML
want to do mass search and replace or other options in an XML editor.

Import your list from XML Once you have modified an XML export, you can import it back using File | Import.

Click Add Column. This creates a new expression column. Create formulas in this
Create a secondary expression column that combine symbols from the list and default expressions. See Define
secondary expressions.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 127 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Delete secondary expression Highlight a secondary expression column. Click Delete Column.

Back on your report grid, right-click the Column Header. Select Apply this list
Apply an expression to a grid column expression -> and select a valid list expression.

Load a pre-defined list Click the Import from JDE tab. Select the list that you would like to import.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 128 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D efine Criteria for the List I tem

Once you click the ... visual assist, you will see the Define criteria form below:

This form allows you to specify what criteria the data has to meet to apply to the label you entered. For instance, let's say our label
was US customers, then the Criteria may be "Country = US". In this example, "Country" is the value we would select under the
Field column of this form. "US" is the text we would enter in the empty box under the Criteria column. You may add as many
Field-Criteria lines as you need. See Filter Your Data for more details.

To Do this

Select from the list of fields in the Field edit box. Enter the criteria for the field in the
Criteria edit box. In the Criteria edit box, you may use the Filter Helper visual assist
Add a new criteria row
to define things such as lists and ranges. Also, each line you enter implicitly means
apply this line AND any previous lines before it.

Sometimes you may have complicated criteria that requires AND-OR logic. To add
Add an OR condition an OR condition, click the empty box under the Field column and select or. You
should have at least one line defined before the or and one line defined after the or.

Delete a criteria row Highlight the row you want to delete. Then click the Delete Row button.

Hold CTRL key down as you left-click multiple rows. Then click the Delete Row
Delete multiple rows
button.

Copy a criteria row Highlight the row you want to copy. Then click the Copy Row button.

Hold CTRL key down as you left-click multiple rows. Then click the Copy Row
Copy multiple rows
button.

Highlight the row you want to move. Then click the "Drag and drop grip bar" and
Move a criteria row drag row above or below current position. Release mouse button to drop to new
position.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 129 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Hold CTRL key down as you left-click multiple rows. Highlight the row you want to
Move multiple rows move. Then click the "Drag and drop grip bar" and drag row above or below current
position. Release mouse button to drop to new position.

Save your criteria definition Click OK.

Cancel your criteria edits Click Cancel.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 130 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D efine List Calculations

You can perform two types of calculations on any list row:
1. Modify the results of the rollup on the row (applies if the rollup Criteria is defined for the row)
2. Calculate values from other rows (applies if the rollup Criteria is not defined for the row)

Case 1: Label has Criteria defined

If you place a calculation in the Row Calculation column, the value of the rollup will be modified directly. Use this feature for the
following scenarios:
1. Reversing the sign of the rollup. In this case, simply type a minus sign: - in the Row Calculation.
2. Scaling the value of the rollup. For instance, suppose you want to divide the Bank 1 by 1000, simply enter: /1000 in the Row
Calculation for Bank1 - this is referred to as Inline shorthand. You can also explicitly enter the formula as: [BANK
1]/1000.
Case 2: Label has no Criteria defined
In this case, the Row Calculation is any supported calculation of the labels. The most common scenarios are:
1. Summing other labels. In this case, simply multi-select the labels in the visual assist (holding down the CTRL key) and click
Select. The result will be the syntax for summing the labels. For example: [LABEL A]
[LABEL B].
2. Subtracting. In this case, change the sign of the operation in the calculation: [LABEL A] - [LABEL B].
3. Percent: [LABEL A]/([LABEL A] + [LABEL B]).
In general, you can enter any expression using +, -, *, /, (, ). The row calculation also supports built-in functions (as listed in the
visual assist for the Row Calculation column in the Math Calculations category). These row expressions are referred to as the
Default Expression. You may apply these expressions to numeric columns in your report or derive Secondary expressions to
do more sophisticated calculations as well (See Define secondary expressions)

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 131 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D efine Secondary Expressions

In addition to the Default Expression for the list, you may also define additional Secondary Expressions. Secondary
expressions always follow the Default Expression to do additional calculations. For instance the default expression could be
calculating a total and a secondary expression could calculation the percent of that total.
To create a Secondary Expression

1. Edit your list

2. Click Add column. This will create a new expression column in the list editor (e.g. Expression 2)
3. To rename the expression column, right-click the new column, click Rename. Enter the new name for the expression.
In the screenshot above, the Default Expresion defines Total as [A] + [B] + [C]. The secondary expression Expression 2,
defines the first row as /[TOTAL] which is shorthand for [A]/[TOTAL] which means the percent of label [A] to the total.
Remember that symbols in brackets are case insensitive -- so [Total] means the same thing as [TOTAL]
You may add more than one secondary expression to your list definition. Remember, in all cases, the Default Expression is
always evaluated prior to the secondary expression.
To apply an expression to your report
Once you have defined a Default Expression and optionally Secondary expressions, you may selectively apply these
transforms to your report as follows:

1. On your report with a list, right-click a numeric column

2. Click Apply this list expression ->
3. Select None for no expression, Default Expression for the default expression, or any other secondary expression you have
defined
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 132 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

4. Once selected, DAS will calculated each list row and column intersection with the expression selection you pick

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 133 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Save a List
When you click Save List, you will see the dialog below:

TO D O THIS

Provide a name for your list Click on the edit box next to Enter name for list. Enter the name of your list.

Click the down arrow on the List category edit box. Select the category that best matches how
Organize your list into a category
you want to categorize your list.

Make your list available to other

Click Publish list. See Share a list
reports and people

Click OK. Note: if there is a list with the same name, Data Access Studio will prompt if you want
Save the list
to overwrite the existing list.

Don't save the list Click Cancel.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 134 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

P ublish/Share a List
When you publish a list you make the master version of the list available to more than one report. When any report uses a
published list, then any change to the master list automatically gets applied. This technique is a great way to synchronize many
reports the reflect the change made to one list..
To share a list:
1. Make a list. See (Lists)
2. Click Pre-defined lists tab. Click Save/Share
3. Name you list and click Publish list
4. Click OK

In the above example we created a new list called: Shared List. We can now re-use this list in other reports such that any changes
to the master list is automatically reflected in all reports that reference it.
To reference a published/shared list in another report
1. Open/Create another DAS report
2. Add and edit a List calculation
3. Click Pre-defined lists tab. Click Load
4. Select a list under the Published/shared list category (See Work with Your Lists)

Notice differences in using a shared list:

1. List Editor title shows: Shared list mode
2. The list by default is read-only.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 135 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

3. The list menu is sparse: Unbind/Change, Close, and information about the Shared list
The shared list is read-only because any change to the list could have wide-reaching impact - i.e. any saved change to the
published list will automatically apply to all reports bound to the list.
To edit a shared list
1. Double-click/Edit the list
2. Click Unbind/Change. This places the list into an editable mode
3. Edit the list
4. To apply changes for everyone, click Pre-defined lists tab. Click Save/Share (leave the name of the list the same and leave
Publish list checked)
5. Click OK

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 136 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Work with Your Lists

When you select a list to load, you may also do other operations with your lists. The select list form organizes all lists in the
system as:
My Lists
Public Lists
Furthermore, the form organizes lists by the categories people selected when saving the list.

TO D O THIS

Select a list to load Highlight the list in the grid. Click OK.

Delete a list Highlight the list in the grid. Click Delete.

Copy a public list to your private list Highlight the public list in the grid. Click Copy To Private Mapping.

Use a shared list in your report Select any list under Public/shared lists (See Share a list)

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 137 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Additional List P roperties

You can edit additional list properties by opening the Calculation Editor and highlighting your list item:

O PTIO N EFFECT

Filter Default false. If true, the calculation will apply the list criteria to your data selection. This can improve performance in some
database cases.

Allow Default true. If checked, your list can have rows that map to multiple list labels. For instance, if your label A has range 1000 -
duplicate 2000 and label B has range 1500-3000, then the overlap of 1500-2000 will be handled automatically. If this option is not
maps checked, then overlapping ranges are not allowed and the first occurrence of the range wins.

Default true. If checked and a group has only one row, then the list will not allow a drill down as it is not necessary. In this case
Smart
the +/- group button will be hidden and only the result of the row is shown. This usually makes for a cleaner look. If
collapse
unchecked, then the +/- group button always allows a drill down.

Guarantee Default true. If checked, the list will guarantee that the row label appears in the order of the list whether or not there are data
Row rows for that label. If unchecked, then the label will only show if there are rows for that label.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 138 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

List override styles

If your report has an Automatic Presentation (See Automatic Presentation), then you can optionally define cell style overrides in
your list. This feature is handy when you want to apply cell-specific formatting to one part of your list (but not necessarily the
whole column)
1. Open a report with a list and an automatic presentation
2. Edit your list
3. You will see a column on the far right named Override Style

The Override Style allows you to select an available presentation style (See Automatic Presentation Styles) for any cell. If the
Override Style is left blank, then the default presentation styling will be used when formatting the row and column. However, if
you specify an override style, then this style will always be used. For example let's say you always wanted to format a certain cell
in your list as a percent with an orange background. Define a style label See Automatic Presentation Styles) and select this style
for the cell in your list.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 139 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

I mport a list definition from Excel

If you need to create a very large list, it may be easier to create the structure of the list in Excel and import it into DAS. DAS
provides a rudimentary way to define a list in Excel that can be import into DAS:
1. Create an Excel workbook formatted as follows:

A B

1 Label FieldName FieldName2

2 Label1 Value1 Value2

3 Label2 Value3 Value3

A,B,C are Excel columns A, B, C. Each FieldName is the name of the field for your criteria: e.g. LT or MCU
Here’s an example with literal values:

A B

1 Label MCU OBJ

2 Misc 1 1000

3 Assets 1 2000

4 Liabilities 1 3000

What this means is Column A is the list label. Columns B and C are the Criteria for that label. In this example, the criteria is
interpreted to mean: MCU=1 AND OBJ=1000. So you can see, you can leverage the copy/paste features of Excel to quickly define
hundreds of rows this way.
1. Getting the Excel definition into DAS: First, create an external client-side data link in DAS to the workbook above (See
Example - Connect to an Excel file). Once you save the connection and Create Report you will see the workbook in DAS. Click
Run Report to load the workbook data into DAS. For example, with the attached workbook:

IMPORTANT: Notice that is you named the column in your Excel file as F0902.OBJ, then when you open that Excel file in DAS, it
gets renamed to F0902#OBJ (this is because Excel has an issue with periods in the column name. if you avoid periods in the
column name you will not have this issue). You need to right click and rename F0902#OBJ and F0902#SUB to F0902.OBJ and
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 140 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

F0902.SUB

in the report designer, click CTRL-A to select everything. Right-click and grid Column Header and select: Quick Calculation ->
Text -> List:

DAS open and load the list editor with the definition from the Excel file. The editor will highlight any detected errors.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 141 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

So you can see the significance of the Field name: F0902.OBJ and F0902.SUB are the field names in your report. If for instance you
report was over the just the F0902 table only (i.e. not a DASVIEW), then these fieldnames would have been OBJ and SUB. Make
sense?
Click Pre-defined list tab and Click Save/Share to save this list.
See the follow support page article for more information on importing list definitions from Excel:
https://support.reportsnow.com/hc/en-us/articles/202666223-How-to-Import-a-list-from-an-Excel-file-into-a-DAS-List-
calculation

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 142 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Formula
A key concept in Data Access Studio is to provide a relevant set of point-and-click calculation columns that are easy to use and
understand. This allows us to present a powerful enterprise-grade reporting tool to a larger audience. While it is possible to chain
together these simple calculations to solve ever more complex problems, it becomes burdensome to manage such complex
chains of calculation columns. Therefore, especially for complex and large reports, it is suggested to use the formula calculation.

Key Features
Allow combining many calculations into one column. This reduces the number of total columns thereby reducing both the
complexity to understand the report but also reduces the memory footprint of such a report at runtime.
Multi-line text with line-specific comments. The comments can be embedded within the expression as needed.
Nested IF Statements. The non-formula conditional calculation could only express one expression. Nesting Ifs allows for an
easy expression of a decision tree of expressions - making complex reports easier to manage.
Horizontal Summaries. By default, formulas will calculate using the summaries of its inputs in group and report
summarization.

How to Create a Formula

A formula calculation can be created in many different ways:
1. By selecting the 'Formula' calculation in the Calculations editor like other calculations.
2. By using the 'Formula' menu item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 143 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

3. By converting an existing non-formula calculation to a formula using the 'Convert to Formula' command.
4. By converting all non-formula calculations in a report to formulas using the 'Convert all to Formula' command.

Note

Converting all non-formula calculations to formulas in a report will combine simple calculations into more complex formulas
automatically. Please see Formula Conversion for more information.
Note

Not all non-formula calculations can be converted to formulas. Please see Formula Conversion for a list of calculations that
cannot be converted.

Working with the Formula Editor

Available I tems
The Available Items section contains the items that can be used in the formula editor:
Parameters - visible if the report has parameters.
Variables - visible if the report has variables.
System Constants - always visible and contains such things as the current date, current user, etc.
Grid Columns - all columns from the report
Functions - all functions that can be used in a formula. Note that there are calculations (such as table lookup) that cannot be
used in a formula.
Operators
Below the editor are the list of operators to use to create expressions for assignments and conditions.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 144 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

- Comment and uncomment lines in the formula. Useful to temporarily disable a section of the formula.

- Basic math operator including modulus and power.

- Wrap the selected text in parenthesis to control the order of a boolean expression

- Wrap the selected text in quotes to make a string literal.

- Basic operators to compare values when used int he If function.

- Basic boolean operator (AND or &, OR or |, NOT or !) to help construct boolean expressions.

- Like operator that follows the syntax of the Visual Basic Like Operator. This operator supports matching a single
character (?), zero to many characters (*), a digit (#), and ranges ([-list of chars-] or [!-not in list of chars-]).
Special Notes on the I f function
The If function is a three part function: If (expression, true value, false value). If the expression is true, the true value is returned
otherwise the false value. Another If statement can be embedded in either true or false positions to construct a decision tree. The
function can be formatted across multiple lines with embedded comments to make the statement easier to manage.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 145 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Non-Formula Calculation to Formula Calculation Conversion

Often it is desired to convert a non-formula calculation to a DAS Formula Calculation or it might be desired to convert all non-
formula calculation in a report.

Single Calculation Conversion

Converting a single non-formulation calculation will convert just the selected calculation to its formula equivalent. Any column
references will become column references in the formula. Consider a 'Division' calculation that depends on a 'Difference'
calculation. The 'Difference' calculation is hidden and is only used by the 'Division' calculation.

Converting just this 'Division' calculation...

will result in a new column with this formula:

The old column would need to be deleted and any columns dependent on the old column should be re-hooked to the newly
converted column.

Whole Report Conversion

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 146 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Converting a single calculation makes sense while developing. However, there are two main reasons to convert all the non-
formula calculations to formulas:
In-place conversion. Unlike a single calculation conversion, a new calculation object is not created but instead the existing
one is converted to a formula preserving existing dependencies.
Column Optimization. Whole report conversion will eliminate unnecessary calculations that are only used to hold
temporary results.
Consider a simple report with two 'Division' calculations dependent on a single 'Difference' calculation:

Converting all calculations...

results in two formula calculations with the old 'Difference' calculation ([Extended Price]-[Extended Cost]) embedded in each one.
The old Difference calculation has been removed as it is no longer necessary.
Note

An embedded transformed calculation will be embedded in all formulas that depended on it before.

Note

The conversion process will not convert variables. Variable calculations must be converted manually.
Criteria for a Converted Calculation to be Embedded in Other Formulas
A calculation will be embedded into other converted calculations if the following conditions are met:
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 147 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

1. Calculation can be converted to a formula

2. Calculation is only referenced by other calculations that can be converted to a formula
3. Column is hidden, unsorted, un-grouped, and unfiltered
4. Column is not referenced by a parameter or additional criteria

Limitations on Conversion
Not all calculations can be converted. A calculation must be to be expressed in a text format easily.
As such, these calculations cannot be converted to a formula:
Database
Table Lookup
Enterprise One
Account Category
Associated Description
Chart of Accounts
Current mailing address
JDE email address
JDE phone number
JDE user name
Media Objects
Model Account
Period Amounts
Relative Period
Unit Conversion
Work Days
Math
Running Total
System
Burst
De-duplicate
Group Rank
Group Row Index
Group Summary
Parent Child Hierarchy
Random Row Index
Row Index
Spacer
Type Converter
XPath Query
Text
List
Replace
Split

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 148 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Column Values into a Sum Column

Data Access Studio lets you easily sum up multiple columns into a new totals column.
To sum columns, multi-select the columns you need by left-clicking the column headers while holding down the CTRL or SHIFT
keys.

Right-click any column header in you selection, and select Quick Calculation | Math | Sum.

Note: If your layout is grouped, the sum column will show totals for each summary line and grand totals as well.
If you want to add a grand total at the bottom of the sum:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 149 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculate Percentage between Two Columns

You can easily calculate the percentage between two columns. Multi-select the columns you need by left-clicking the column
headers while holding down the CTRL or SHIFT keys.

Right-click the column header on the selection and select Quick Calculation | Math | Division.

Notice that the division calculation shows divisions across summaries and grand total automatically.
Now right-click the new column header and select Custom Numeric Format.

Choose Percent and Click OK.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 150 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Perform Math Operations on Your D ata

You've seen how to sum columns and get the percentage difference between two columns. You can also do the following
calculations on columns. In all cases, select one or more numeric columns, right-click on any Column Header in your selection and
select one of the following math operations:

TO G E T THE D O THIS

Positive part of one or more columns Select Quick Calculations

Average value of two or more columns Select Quick Calculations

Multi-select two numeric columns. Right-click the Column Header. Select Quick
Difference between two columns
Calculations

Maximum value between two or more columns Select Quick Calculations

Minimum value between two or more columns Select Quick Calculations

Product of two or more columns Select Quick Calculations

Get the division remainder for two columns Multi-select two numeric columns. Select Quick Calculations

Standard deviation between two or more

Select Quick Calculations
columns

Sum of two or more columns Select Quick Calculations

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 151 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculate the D ate D ifference between Two D ates

To get the data difference between two dates:
1. Multi-select two date columns
2. Right-click either Column Header
3. Select Quick Calculation | Data | Date Difference

By default, the date difference is displayed in Days. To change the units of the difference to Months, or Years:
1. Double-click the Date Difference Column Header. This will bring up the calculation editor. Click on the Days visual assist.
Pick Months or Years.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 152 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculate a D ate Relative to a G iven D ate

To get the data difference between two dates:
1. Select a date column
2. Right-click either Column Header
3. Select Quick Calculation | Data | Date Offset

By default, the date offset is the same as the original date. To change the offset:
1. Double-click the Date Offset Column Header. This will bring up the calculation editor.
2. Change Offset unit to the Days, Weeks, Months, Quarters, or Years.
3. Change Relative offset to the number of units you want to offset. This number may be positive or negative. E.g. if Offset
Unit is Years and Relative offset is -1, then the result will be the original date minus 1 year. The Relative offset can be a
literal or a grid column. Use grid columns when your offset is a calculated value rather than a static (non-changing) value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 153 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Extract D ate I nformation from a D ate Column

You've seen how to show the date difference between two columns. You can also do the following date calculations on columns.
In all cases, select one or more date columns, right-click on any Column Header in your selection and select one of the following
date operations:

TO G E T THE D O THIS

Day of the month Select Quick Calculations

Day of the week Select Quick Calculations

Day of the year Select Quick Calculations

First day of the month Select Quick Calculations

First day of the year Select Quick Calculations

Last day of the month Select Quick Calculations

Last day of the year Select Quick Calculations

Month description prefixed with a number for sorting Select Quick Calculations

JDE Julian date representation of the data Select Quick Calculations

Month Select Quick Calculations

Month Description Select Quick Calculations

Today's Date Select Quick Calculations

Year Select Quick Calculations

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 154 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Rollup an Amount based on a Sliding Calendar D ate

This calculation transforms transactional data into organized date groups such as Quarter, Year, Month, Inception-To-Date, etc.
The rolled-up amount slides with the reference date (typically a Report Parameter) that you provide. You can create this type of
calculation automatically with the Organize Dates Trend.
1. From the Main Menu, select Design | Edit Calculations (see Edit Calculations with the Editor)
2. Add an new calculation for Relative Dates
3. For Date, assign a date column in your grid
4. For Compare Date, assign a literal date (typically a Report Parameter date value)
5. Offset Measure is the type of rollup you want to do: Month, Quarter, Year, etc.
6. Relative Offset is how many units of the Offset Measure you want to move. Positive values go forward. Negative values
go backward. E.g. if you specify Offset Measure as Quarter and Relative Offset as -1, then the time period will be the
prior Quarter as defined by the Compare Date
7. Value to roll up is the amount filed that you want to rollup to the date organization
Example
To rollup the last quarter of Quantity Ordered, where the reference date is a Report Parameter named Date (<Date>), do the
following:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 155 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Make Multiple Period Amounts Appear as One Period Amount Column

When working with balances tables such as the Account Balances (F0902) or Asset Account Balances (F1202), it can be a
challenge to work with the amount fields (AN01 through AN14). Rather than deal with 14 amount columns, it would be much
simpler if you could combine all the columns into one column. This is what the Period Amounts calculations does.

So what are the advantages of using Period Amounts over say summing the amount columns manually? Plenty:
1. Easier to change the period value: Any time you want to change which period or which through period, just change the
value of the Period Amount calculation. If you manually summed the columns, then every time you needed a different
period, you would have to delete the old sum, re-select the columns you wanted to add, and add the new sum calculation.
2. Easier to build a report foundation: With Period Amounts you only have to create one calculation. This means that any
calculation you need to do off the period value can reference the one calculation. This makes maintaining and building your
amount-based report much more simple.
3. Hook up to Report Parameters: You can hook up the Period Amount parameters to your Report Parameters. This lets
you prompt the user for the period number when they run the report.
To add a Period Amounts column:
1. Open a table or view with AN01-AN14 (such as the Account Balances or Asset Account Balances tables).

2. Click the Calculation Editor button on the main toolbar.

3. Type in Period Amounts under the Type of Calculation.
4. On the Parameters, enter 1 for Begin Period. Enter any number from 1 through 14 for End Period.
5. (Optional) Specify Ledger Type to only rollup values for a specific ledger type (e.g. AA).
6. (Optional) Specify a Dataitem prefix. By default, the calculation will rollup AN01-AN14 (or though AN12 if AN13 and
AN14 do not exist). Some tables, however, have other arrays of balance amounts that can be rolled up similarly. For
example, the Tax History (F016136) table defines BW01-BW12. To use Relative Period on this table, enter BW for this
parameter. If this parameter is blank, the calculation will default to the AN prefix.
Note: If Begin Period and End Period are the same number, then the calculation represents the amount for that period. If
Begin Period is 1 and End Period is another number, then the Period Amount is the "through" period amount (e.g. such as
Year-To-Date depending on the year start period).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 156 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Account B alances by Any Period, Quarter, or Year

In JDE, balance files have columns Net Posting 1 ... Net Posting 14 (AN01...AN14) for each account per fiscal year. The
challenge with this organization is that it is difficult to:
1. Get balances that cross a year boundary in one report
2. Relate the fiscal period to the calendar period
3. Form your query based on accounting time intervals such as fiscal quarter
The Relative Period calculation resolves these challenges.
To add a Relative Period column:
1. Open a table or view with AN01-AN14 (such as the Account Balances or Asset Account Balances tables). Your table can have
any array of XX01-XX14 of columns as well for the Relative Period calculation.

2. Click the Calculation Editor button on the main toolbar.

3. Type in Relative Period under the Type of Calculation. Once you tab out, the calculation caption will read <Description>
<Year>. This means show the calendar month description and year for the column caption. You can use the <Period> tag to
show period and the <Quarter> tag to show quarter. You may place these tags as you wish in the Caption to show the
information you need.
4. The Parameters tab is where you define the starting period and "relative to" period information as follows:

PAR AME TER EFFECT

Relative
Amount to offset the period. See the "Offset-Group Periods" table below.
Offset

Group
Select Period, Quarter, or Year. See the "Offset-Group Periods" table below.
Periods by

If blank, calculation will use the default company. If set to a grid column, calculation will use the company for the grid
Company
column value for each row. The companies you query need to have the same fiscal date pattern.

Begin If blank, calculation will use the current period of the company. Otherwise, calculation will apply the period entered. Value is
Period ignored if there is a value for Date.

If blank, calculation will use the current fiscal year of the company. Otherwise, calculation will apply the period entered. Value
Fiscal Year
is ignored if there is a value for Date.

Date If a date is specified, calculation will calculate the fiscal period and fiscal year for the company for this date.

Ledger If no value is specified, then all ledger types are rolled up. If a value is specified, then only values for that ledger type are
Type rolled up. For example, AA rolls up all the actual amounts because the actual amount ledger type is AA.

By default, the calculation will rollup AN01-AN14 (or though AN12 if AN13 and AN14 do not exist). Some tables, however,
Data Item
have other arrays of balance amounts that can be rolled up similarly. For example, the Tax History (F016136) table defines
Prefix
BW01-BW12. To use Relative Period on this table, enter BW for this parameter. If this parameter is blank, the calculation
(advanced)
will default to the AN prefix.

Reverse In JDE, you will need to reverse the sign of the revenue accounts to get a correct income statement. To specify the accounts
sign criteria that are revenue, click the visual assist and use the Criteria Editor.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 157 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

PAR AME TER EFFECT

Add begin For balance sheet accounts, you will need to add the beginning balance to get a correct balance. To specify the accounts
balance that are balance sheet accounts, click the visual assist and use the Criteria Editor.

Offset and G roup Periods

TO G E T THE D O THIS

Current Period Set Relative Offset to 0 and Group Periods by to Period.

Last Period Set Relative Offset to -1 and Group Periods by to Period.

Last Quarter Set Relative Offset to -1 and Group Periods by to Quarter.

Last Year Set Relative Offset to -1 and Group Periods by to Year.

Next Period Set Relative Offset to 1 and Group Periods by to Period.

etc..

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 158 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

G et Related D ata from Another Table

In creating reports, you may need to include information from multiple tables into one report. The Table Lookup calculation
performs this task.
To add a Table Lookup column:

1. Click the Calculation Editor button on the main toolbar.

2. Type in Table Lookup under the Type of Calculation.
3. On the Parameters tab enter values as follows:

Parameter Effect

(Optional) Name of the data source to use when retrieving data. Note: If you
defined External data sources (see External Data), you can select that data source
Datasource
here. Once selected, DAS will load the valid Data Names (see below) for that data
source. Otherwise, DAS will use the JDE default data source and tables.

Name of the table or business view to query. If you selected an External Data
Data Name
source, then this list will be the list of tables valid for that data source.

(Optional) Name of the index to use for query. When you select an index, the
Index Name
calculation editor populates the fields you need to provide for Define fetch.

(Optional)Select how you want to sort the target data set. Use this option when the
Sort Order target data set has many values for what you want to query and you need a specific
value based on the sort.

(Optional)If you query a target table with multiple rows, you can elect to summarize
the values into one value.
Average - returns the average value of the query
Count - returns the count of the query
First - returns the first result fetched from the query
Maximum - returns the largest element of the query
Summary Type
Minimum - returns the smallest element of the query
Multi-row - returns all detail rows of the query
None - returns the Row to Fetch number of the query (default is the first row)
Sum - returns the sum of the query
Summary - unused
Select the summary you would like to do such as Sum or Count.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 159 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

(Optional)Default value 1. Defines the relative row that you want. 1=First,
Row to Fetch 2=Second, etc. Useful when you need to select rows other than the first row from
the target table.

Default is no de-duplication. The Table Lookup automatically de-duplicates lookup

De-duplication
values if you select the Fetch unique target row only once.

To fetch information, you specify fields in the target table and values you want to
query against those fields. The left hand side of the Define fetch, defines the target
Define fetch
fields. The right hand side defines the values to query for. You may add or delete
field names as you wish.

Columns from the target table that you want to return to your report. If you
selected a Summary Type, above, then you may only select one column here
Define result
(which is the column you want to summarize). Otherwise, you may select multiple
target table columns.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 160 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Conditionally Rollup a Value

There are two ways to conditionalize values in your report:
1. "Only Rollup If" parameter of a calculation
2. "Conditional" calculation
3. "Replace" calculation
Option 1: Only Rollup I f Parameter
Most calculations will have a parameter named Only Rollup If. You can edit this parameter to have any condition you need that
specifies whether you want the calculation value to apply. For instance, let's say you had a calculation that calculates the total
price. You could edit the Only Rollup If parameter to specify that you only want the total price to apply if the customer has paid
on time. Once you set the condition, then the total price will only have a value if the condition is met.
Option 2: Conditional Calculation
You can add the Conditional calculation in most cases using the Quick Starts. See Turn Row Values into Column Values.
You can also add the Conditional calculation manually:

1. Click the Calculation Editor button on the main toolbar

2. Type in Conditional under the Type of Calculation
3. On the Parameters tab enter values as follows:

PAR AME TER EFFECT

Value if
A grid column value or literal value to pass through if the filter criteria is met. This is normally the column you want to
within
selectively roll up.
criteria

Value if
outside Usually 0 or blank. This is the value that is used in the rollup when the criteria is not met.
criteria

Enter one or more filter criteria to define what conditions you want to rollup. For instance, if you want to rollup amount
Filter Criteria
where LT = AA, enter LT in the field box and AA in the value box. You may use any valid filter to define your criteria.

Option 3: Replace Calculation

The replace calculation is a good option when you have many cases that you want to substitute for another value. See Substitute
Patterns of Text with a Label for more information.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 161 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter on a Summary Value

When you Group and Summarize your report and you need to query on the summary values themselves, add the Group
Summary calculation to your report.

In the example above, if we want to filter for Amount balancing to 0, we cannot filter on the Amount field directly. We have to
first add a Group Summary calculation:
1. Right-click the Column Header for the summary you need to filter (in this example right-click the Amount column)
2. Select Quick Calculation | System | Group Summary

You can now type 0 in the Group Summary Amount filter box to get only those groups whose summary is 0.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 162 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Compare String Values

To compare two string values, add the String Compare calculation:
1. Using the CTRL key, select two Column Headers
2. Right-click either Column Header and select Quick Calculation | Text | Compare strings

The result is a new calculation column where the result is:

R ES U LT ME ANING

-1 Field 1 is less than Field 2.

0 Field 1 equals Field 2.

1 Field 1 is greater than Field 2.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 163 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Substitute Patterns of Text with a Label

To substitute text with a label, use the Replace calculation:

1. Click the Calculation Editor button on the main toolbar

2. Type in Replace under the Type of Calculation
3. On the Parameters tab enter values as follows:

Parameter Effect

Source string Column to use as the input for the text replace.

Default value Column value or literal value to use if none of the text replace criteria matches.

On the left-hand side, enter text or text patterns (you may use any valid filter to
Replace first string with second value define what you want to replace).
On the right-hand side, specify the value to replace with if the match occurs.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 164 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Convert Fiscal D ate to Calendar D ate

If you want to see information by Fiscal Period and Fiscal year but the data is stored by calendar year, then use this calculation:
1. Start with Fiscal Period and Fiscal Year parameters

2. Click the Calculation Editor button

3. Type in Period to Date Range under the Type of Calculation
4. On the Parameters tab enter values as follows:

PAR AME TER EFFECT

In JDE, each company can have a different date fiscal pattern. Enter the literal company or grid column company here. If left
Company
blank, DAS will use the JDE default company for the date fiscal pattern.

Period The fiscal period.

Century The century for the fiscal year.

Fiscal Year The fiscal year.

The output of the calculation will be the equivalent calendar date range for the Company, Period, Century, Fiscal Year you
provided. You can use the date range on any date field.
Example
Suppose Company 00001 has 4/1/2011 = Fiscal period 1, FY=11, CTRY=20. Then the output is the range specifier: >=4/1/2011:
<=4/30/2011.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 165 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Combine Several Columns into One Column

Sometimes you will need a column that joins other columns into a single column. For instance, let's say you have the business
unit code and the business unit description in separate columns. You may want to combine two into a single column that has both
business code and description.
To create a combined column, use the Concatenation calculation:
1. Using the CTRL key, multi-select the columns you want to bring together. The order that you select each Column Header will
determine where in the final string the text goes.
2. Right-click on any Column Header in your selection. Pick Quick Calculation | Text | Concatenation.
Example result combining business unit and its description:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 166 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Text Calculations
The following calculations are available on the Quick Calculation | Text menu and Design| Edit Calculations

TO D O THIS

Pad a
Add a new calculation for Pad. Select Left or Right side to pad. Check Strip blanks if you want to strip blanks before padding.
string to
Enter a Padding character (e.g. the space character). Enter the Total Width of the new string. Select an Input Grid Column
a given
to pad.
length

Trim
characters Add a new calculation for Trim. Select Left, Right, or Both for side to trim. Enter a character that you want to trim off in Trim
from a Delimiters (e.g. the space character). Select an Input Grid Column to trim.
string

Split one
Add a new calculation for Split. Enter a character or a string in Delimiters. Check Delimiter is String if the Delimiter value
column
represents a string. Select an Input Grid Column to split. Here's the slightly tricky part. For Assign column with 1-based
into
index of split you need to enter a number for each piece of the split that you want. For instance, if you want the first two
several
parts of the split, enter 1 and 2.
columns

Extract Add a new calculation for Substring. Enter a Start Index that represents where in the string to start the extract. Enter a
pieces of Length for how many characters to extract from that position. Select an Input Grid Column to extract. The Length and Start
a column Index values can also be report parameters or GridColumn values.

Convert
text to
Add a new calculation for To Lowercase. Select an Input Grid Column (or literal) to convert to lower case.
lower
case

Convert
text to
Add a new calculation for To Uppercase. Select an Input Grid Column (or literal) to convert to upper case.
upper
case

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 167 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The following calculations are available on the Quick Calculation | System menu.

TO D O THIS

Get the relative sequence of a grouped row. For example, the first row in a group has a group row Right-click on grouped Column
index of 1, the second row has a group row index of 2, etc. Header. Click Quick Calculation

Get the relative sequence of a row. For example, the first row in the grid has a row index of 1, the Right-click on any Column Header.
second row has a row index of 2, etc. Click Quick Calculation

Right-click on grouped Column

Get group ranking from largest to smallest.
Header. Click Quick Calculation

Right-click on Column Header. Click

Convert a column from one data type to another
Quick Calculation

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 168 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D e - duplicate
De-duplicate is a powerful System calculation that helps you manage data duplication. Data duplication is common with LEFT
OUTER joins and RIGHT OUTER joins. Recall that you do a LEFT OUTER join when you have a 1-to-many or many-to-many
relationship between one table (the left table) and another table (the right table).
Note: if you are using a Table Lookup calculation, the Table Lookup will de-duplicate the source data by default. Additionally, if
required, the Table lookup has a target de-duplication option as well. See Get Related Data from Another Table.
Example: Suppose you create a table join: F0411 left outer F0911 join. This is an example of a many-to-many relationship in JD
Edwards:

Notice that when duplication is present in your query, you can usually see it immediately. Notice the AP Amount Dup duplicates
within the Pay Items (001, 002, 003). Notice the G/L Amount Dup duplicates the pattern: 100.00, 100.00, 300.00 with each Pay
Item.
Because of the many-to-many relationship, the highlighted amounts duplicate (and in two different ways). Although the 1,500
totals match, the value of 1,500 is in fact the wrong number. Now look at the AP Amount and G/L Amount columns. The AP
amount de-duplicates its column (AP) to take just the first values in the group (which is correct for the LEFT table in the join). The
G/L Amount de-duplicates its column by taking the values only up to the first level break (which is correct for the RIGHT table in
the join).
De-duplicate bases how it de-duplicates on the following:
1. Column to de-duplicate (in the Example above AP Amount Dup, G/L Amount Dup).
2. What value to use as a "filler" (e.g. blank or 0).
3. De-duplication method:
1. First value in group - Applies the first value in group once and uses the "filler" value for the rest.
2. Up to first level break - Applies all the values until the first group level break occurs. In the example above, the first
level break occurs when the Pay Item goes from 001 to 002.
3. Distinct values - Applies a value if it is distinct within the group. Otherwise it applies the "filler".
4. Group Column. If blank, the calculation uses the lowest level group when performing the de-duplication. If a grouped
column is specified, the de-duplication will use that grouping as its reference for groups and level breaks.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 169 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The calculations below apply specifically to the JD Edwards system. As you know, the JDE system has internal logic that can be
difficult to calculate. These calculations hide the complexity of the internal logic and allow you to focus on the business
requirements.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 170 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Address B ook Calculations

For any table that has an address book number in it, you can get information about the address number in one-click:
Right-click the column header of the address book field. Select Quick Calculation | JDE and select one of the displayed options:
Email address
Mailing Address
Phone, FAX, etc.
JDE User name
In each case, right-click the column header of the address book field. Select Quick Calculation | JDE | ...

PAR AME TER EFFECT

Returns the first e-mail address for the address number. You can edit the e-mail address calculation to choose other
Email address
e-mail.

Current mailing Returns the current effective address of the address number. You can edit the e-mail address to show date effective
address from earlier date.

Returns the first phone number associated with the address number. You can edit the phone calculation to choose
Phone
other phone numbers or phone types.

Returns the JDE user name for the address number. For E1 this is the E1 sign on name. For World this is the World
JDE User
sign on name.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 171 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show JD E Tree Structures

JD Edwards has many tree-formatted data tables: Organization Charts, Bill of Materials, Menu Structure, Company structure. The
common pattern between each of these tables is that the table information has these two columns: a parent column and a child
column. In this pattern, the parent column can have multiple children. Each child in turn can be a parent of even more children.
Furthermore, in some cases such as the Bill Of Materials table, a child can belong to more than one parent! In general this pattern
looks like:
A1
|
|---B1
||
| |---C1
| |---C2
|
|---B2
etc.
The Parent Child calculation in Data Access Studio transforms the linear data in the table to a dynamic tree structure like above.
Once in the tree form, you will immediately see the structure of the information in your tables. Furthermore, you can create
reports that roll up information per this structure. For example, you can do head count by supervisor.
To use the Parent Child calculation:
1. Open a table with a parent column and a child column (e.g. the employee master F060116 (address number and
supervisor)).
2. Optional, but recommended: get the Associated description for the child column and parent column.
3. Click Design | Calculations.
4. Select Parent Child Hierarchy.
5. In the Parameters tab, select the parent grid column in the Parent column.
6. Select the child grid column in the Child column.
7. Select the Associated Descriptions you created in step two for the Parent label and Child label.
8. Click Save and Close.
When you click Run Report, you will see the structure of the information in the table.

AD D ITIO NAL
PAR AME TER
INFO R MATIO N EFFECT

To control how deep the tree will go. This parameter defaults to 10 levels. Having this safeguard protects your
Max Tree Depth
report if there are data integrity issues in the table.

Default checked. When checked, the calculation will show the parent detail for each level. Sometimes you will want
Show Parent Detail
to show this detail line and other times not. To suppress the parent row, uncheck this option.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 172 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

AD D ITIO NAL
PAR AME TER
INFO R MATIO N EFFECT

Default checked. The calculation automatically creates supporting columns. When checked, the calculation hides
Auto format
the supporting columns and automatically groups the columns.

Enter any value, list of values, range or valid filter to define which items to show at the top of the tree. If blank, the
Start point
tree top will be all the items that have no parent.

Running Factor When parent items scale quantities of child items, then set the Running Factor to the quantity column.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 173 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Convert values with Unit of Measure Conversion

Imagine that you have transactions for various items in various units. What if you wanted to see those transactions in one unit?
Let's say you wanted to see everything by kilograms or cases. This topic explains how to use the Unit Conversion calculation to
solve this problem.
JD Edwards allows users to enter transactions for items in various units. Although JD Edwards provides unit conversions for
items, it is fairly difficult to actually query this conversion information and provide the correct conversion. The Unit Conversion
calculation lets you convert any unit to any other unit seamlessly. To convert the units of an item:
1. Right-click the item number in your grid.
2. Select Quick Calculation | EnterpriseOne/World | Unit Conversion.
3. Data Access Studio will create a new column called "Unit Conversion". Double-click this new column to edit.
4. You will see that the Short item is already populated with the Short Item Grid Column setting.
5. If business units affect your conversions, select a business unit column for the Business unit setting.
6. Select Input units if your table has transactional units (usually the UM field). If you leave Input Units blank, then the
calculation will use the base unit of the item as the input unit.
7. Select the desired Output unit. This can be a parameter or hard-coded value.
Once you get data, you will see that the Unit Conversion column has the correct unit conversion for each item. Simply multiply
your transaction quantity by this conversion to get the converted quantity.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 174 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

G et the short item number for a 2nd I tem Number

For the case where you have a JDE 2nd item number that you want to convert to a short item number, use the Get short item
number calculation:
1. Right-click 2nd item number in your grid
2. Select Quick Calculation | EnterpriseOne/World | Get short item number
3. Data Access Studio will create a new column called "Get short item number" that is the short item number for the second
item number
Another useful case for this is report parameters. Usually, you will want your user to enter a 2nd Item number rather than a short
item number. In this case, prompt the user for a 2nd item number and create a Variable that converts the 2nd Item number to a
short item number.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 175 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculate Work days

If you need to report how many days a resource has worked, then the Work Days calculation is for you. JD Edwards allows one to
define various work day patterns. The problem is that this information can be difficult to utilize in a report. The Work Days
calculation simplifies the information so that you can get relevant information into your report such as:
Work days, holidays, or weekends per month
Whether a given day is a weekend, holiday, or weekend
Work days, holidays, or weekends per year
Calculate by branch plant and default branch plan
Calculate by shift
To add the Work Days calculation to your report:
1. Click Design | Calculations
2. Select Work Days

PAR AME TER EFFECT

Any valid date range using the range notation. e.g. >=1/1/2017:<=12/13/2017 or <6/1/2016, etc. When this field has a
Work
valid range then it overrides any other date specification setting and the WorkDay calculation uses this date range to
date(s)
compute the workday count.

Typically the grid column value for a business unit. This will be the branch that the calculation uses when looking up the
Branch
work day information.

Default
If no Branch is specified or if it has a blank grid column value, then use this value.
Branch

Year Four-digit year that represents the year you are interested in getting the workday information for.

Month 0=all months, 1 = jan, 2 = feb ... 12= dec.

Day of the
0=all days in month, 1 = day one ... 31 = day 31.
Month

Shift Default blank. Or enter a valid shift code(open F0007).

WorkDay
W=workday, E=weekend, H=Holiday.
code

Calendar
Default blank. Or enter a valid calendar type (open F0007).
Type

Calendar
Default blank. Or enter a valid calendar key (open F0007).
Key

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 176 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Model B usiness Unit over the Chart of Accounts

The Chart of Accounts in JD Edwards is typically tied to the specific account information (MCU, OBJ, SUB) rather than a "Model"
account (just OBJ and SUB). Sometimes it can be handy to view balance information, for instance, with a different chart of
accounts. So, for instance, you may want to compare different business units or consolidations of business units to one "master"
chart of accounts. The Model Account calculation solves this issue.
To use the Model Account calculation:
1. Open an amount table that has the following fields Business Unit (MCU), Object (OBJ) and Subsidiary (SUB). E.g. Account
Balances (F0902) or Account Ledger (F0911), Accounts Payable Ledger (F0411), etc.
2. Click Design | Calculations
3. Enter Model Business Unit (which serves as the Chart of Account definition)
4. In the Parameters, enter a Business Unit to use as the model account
To Create a Chart of Accounts from the model account:
1. Once the Model Account is created, right-click the Column Header and select Quick Calculation | EnterpriseOne|World
| Chart of Accounts
That should do it! You should see a chart of accounts based on the model business unit. You cannot rollup quantities to this
account structure:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 177 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Offset between two fiscal periods

Imagine the case in a balance table where you may want to show an actual amount if the period meets a certain threshold or a
budget amount otherwise. Or let's say that if the period is in a period threshold range you want to show an amount, otherwise
you want to show 0.
To solve this problem, you will need a reliable way to count the number of periods between two points:
(century + fiscal year + period)B - (century + fiscal year + period)A
For instance, point A could be the reference period and point B could be the current period.
To perform the Offset Between Two Periods calculation:
1. Open a table with period information (e.g. Account Balances (f0902))
2. Click Design | Calculations
3. Enter Offset Between Two Periods
4. In the Parameters, enter a static Company, grid column company or blank (for default JDE company)
5. Enter values for the reference period: Period 1, Century 1, Fiscal Year 1
6. Enter values for the other period: Period 2, Century 2, Fiscal Year 2
When you run your report, the Offset Between Two Periods column will contain the number of periods between 2 and 1.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 178 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

JD E - Specific Calculations
The following calculations are available on the Quick Calculation | EntepriseOne/World menu:

TO D O THIS

Convert JDE date and

Multi-select Column Headers for corresponding date and time columns (e.g. Date Updated and Time
time columns to a single
Updated). Click Quick Calculation
DateTime column

Get Automatic Account

Open a table with Object account, Subsidiary, and Company. Click on any Column Header. Select Quick
Instruction (AAI)
Calculation
information

For any business view with the Chart of Accounts table (F0901) in it, multi-select Column Headers that
Show chart of accounts
represent how you want to see the account display (e.g. Description, or Object.Subsidiary, etc.). Click on any
structure
Column Header in your selection and click Quick Calculation

Get JDE Period from a

date column or date Click Layout
value

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 179 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Miscellaneous Calculations
The following calculations are available at Design| Edit Calculations

To Do This

Add a new calculation for Random Number. Default type is integer. If you want to
Create a random number have a decimal random number, change the Type from Integer to Decimal. Enter
a minimum value and maximum value.

Add a new calculation for Random Row Index. Select one of the show modes:
1) All means do not filter out rows but show the random row assignment. 2)
Threshold or less means filter all rows where the random row index is less than or
Select a random set of rows row from any report equal to the Threshold number. 3) Threshold percent or less means filter the
random row indexes that are less than the Threshold number as a percentage of
the total number of rows.
m.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 180 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Trigonometric Calculations
The following calculations are available at Design| Edit Calculations. DAS supports that calculation of standard trigonometric
functions. All trigonometric functions have a parameter that specifies the units: either Degrees or Radians.

TO CO MPU TE D O THIS

Sine Add a new calculation for Sine. Select Units. Select input column or literal value.

Cosine Add a new calculation for Cosine. Select Units. Select input column or literal value.

Tangent Add a new calculation for Tangent. Select Units. Select input column or literal value.

Secant Add a new calculation for Secant. Select Units. Select input column or literal value.

Cosecant Add a new calculation for Cosecant. Select Units. Select input column or literal value.

Cotangent Add a new calculation for Cotangent. Select Units. Select input column or literal value.

Arcsine Add a new calculation for Arcsine. Select Units. Select input column or literal value.

Arccosine Add a new calculation for Arccosine. Select Units. Select input column or literal value.

Arctangent Add a new calculation for Arctangent. Select Units. Select input column or literal value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 181 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Hyperlink calculation allows you to create a click-through field on your DAS report. The Hyperlink consists of a display value
and a backing link.
Example:
The report below defines a hyperlink such that for each user, click the link will bring up the Address Book Revision form for that
user (see CafE1 in the ReportsNow support portal)

To add a Hyperlink calculation to your report:

1. Open the calculation editor
2. Select Hyperlink calculation
3. Specify the URL. This input is typically a Concatenation calculation that combines the static part of the URL with the dynamic
part (for example, the address number column as in the figure above). You will typically use the URL Encode calculation as
well to ensure your URL string is always URL friendly.
4. Specify the Displayed Text. The displayed text can be the URL itself or a more user-friendly text representation of the
hyperlink (which can also be the result of a calculation)
Once a hyperlink calculation is created for a report, the user will be able to export the functioning hyperlink to these formats: PDF,
Excel, and HTML (See Export and Print Results). Also the DAS Auto presentation feature preserves the hyperlink behavior (See
Automatic Presentation).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 182 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The URL Encode calculation (which typically works in conjunction with the Hyperlink calculation) formats an input string into an
URL parameter friendly format. URL Encoding is necessary to guarantee your source string will work as a hyperlink.
For example:
Original Text
URL-Friendly
Mountain Bike Red
Mountain+Bike%2C+Red
Men's Suit Jacket
Men%27s+Suit+Jacket
To create a URL encoding of a column:
1) Right-click the source column
2) Select Quick Calculation | System | URL Encode

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 183 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Trending gives you the power to find hidden, yet important, patterns in your data.
Quick Facts
You perform a trend by selecting a column, right-clicking it and selecting: Trending | ...
You specify your Trend using business language
Once you apply your Trend, you will see the results immediately
You can undo your trend by pressing the Undo button
You can modify the columns in the Trend by using Quick Calculations or Edit Calculations with the Editor
Each trend has common options explained below
This section discusses many of the Calculation Columns that let you transform your data into the format you need
Common Trend Options
The dialog box for each trend operation has the following options in common:

O PTIO N EFFECT

Show
Default checked. When checked, the resulting trend will collapse all groupings to the summary level (thereby hiding the
summaries
detail lines). When unchecked, the Trend will show summaries and details.
only

Hide unused Default checked. When checked, the Trend will hide any column that does not have a filter and is not a part of the Trend.
columns When unchecked, the Trend will not hide any columns.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 184 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Your Top Ten and B ottom Ten Performers

Imagine you want to see your top ten customers or products. You can create this type of report with the Rank Top Ten Trend:
1. Right-click a column in your grid that you would like to rank.
2. Select Trending | Rank Top Ten.
Sample screen shot

1. Enter the number of rankings you want to see: e.g. top 10, 25, 100, etc.
2. Select the column you want to rank. Data Access Studio will automatically populate this field with the column you select in
step 1.
3. Choose how you want to rank: Sum, Count, etc.
4. Choose the column you want to use as the ranking quantity. E.g. Quantity Shipped. If you selected Count in the previous
step, then this field will be hidden.

5. Click Ok.
To show the Bottom Ten, repeat the same steps above, except select Trending | Rank Bottom Ten.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 185 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Organize D ate I nformation

Imagine you want to see your items sold by last three months, current quarter, year-to-date, or year and compare to the previous
year. Organize Dates lets you do this over any reference date as follows:
1. Right-click a column in your grid that you would like to organize.
2. Select Trending | Organize Dates.
Sample screen shot

1. 1. Select the column you want to rollup for the year trend. Data Access Studio will automatically populate this field with
the column you select in step 1.
2. Select how you want to calculate the date difference:
1. For the first date, select between a control panel date (recommended), a date grid column or today's date.
2. For the second date, select a grid column. Note: the second date will be subtracted from the first date.
3. Choose how you want to trend: Sum, Count, etc.
4. Choose the column you want to use as the ranking quantity. If you selected Count in the previous step, then this field
will be hidden.
5. Select the date organization you want. All choices that begin with Current do not have a Number value. All other
choices let you specify a Number. For instance, if you want the last three months, enter Last Months and 3.
6. Enter a number in Compare to previous years to compare the defined organization for this year to past years.

7. Click Ok.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 186 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Month Trends

If your data contains date information, you may want to see how your data changes by month. To see month trends in your data:
1. Right-click a column in your grid that you would like to trend.
2. Select Trending | Month Trend.
Sample screen shot

1. Select the column you want to rollup for the month trend. Data Access Studio will automatically populate this field with the
column you select in step 1.
2. Select the date column you want to use.
3. Choose how you want to trend: Sum, Count, etc.
4. Choose the column you want to use as the ranking quantity. E.g. Sales Quantity. If you selected Count in the previous step,
then this field will be hidden.

5. Click Ok.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 187 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show D ay Trends
If your data contains date information, you may want to see how your data changes by day. To see day trends in your data:
1. Right-click a column in your grid that you would like to trend.
2. Select Trending | Day Trend.
1. Select the column you want to rollup for the day trend. Data Access Studio will automatically populate this field with the
column you select in step 1.
2. Select the date column you want to use.
3. Choose how you want to trend: Sum, Count, etc.
4. Choose the column you want to use as the ranking quantity. E.g. Sales Quantity. If you selected Count in the previous step,
then this field will be hidden.

5. Click Ok.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 188 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Year Trends

If your data contains date information, you may want to see how your data changes by year. To see year trends in your data:
1. Right-click a column in your grid that you would like to trend.
2. Select Trending | Year Trend.
Sample screen shot

1. Select the column you want to rollup for the year trend. Data Access Studio will automatically populate this field with the
column you select in step 1.
2. Select the date column you want to use.
3. Select the year range you would like to run.
4. Choose how you want to trend: Sum, Count, etc.
5. Choose the column you want to use as the ranking quantity. If you selected Count in the previous step, then this field will
be hidden.

6. Click Ok.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 189 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Organize Your D ata into Aging Ranges

If your data contains date information, you may want to see how your data changes by a user-defined time interval. To see aging
trends in your data:
1. Right-click a column in your grid that you would like to trend.
2. Select Trending | Aging.
Sample screen shot

1. Select the column you want to rollup for the year trend. Data Access Studio will automatically populate this field with the
column you select in step 1.
2. Select how you want to calculate the date difference:
1. For the first date, select between today's date, a date grid column or a report parameter.
2. For the second date, select a grid column. Note: the second date will be subtracted from the first date.
3. Select the units for the date difference: Days, Months, or Years.
3. Choose how you want to trend: Sum, Count, etc.
4. Choose the column you want to use as the ranking quantity. If you selected Count in the previous step, then this field will
be hidden.
5. Select the bucket ranges you want. You may edit the existing ones and add and delete ranges as you need.

6. Click Ok.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 190 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Turn Row Values into Column Values

When you need to do side-by-side comparisons, you can use the Cross Tabular Trend to convert row values into column values:
1. Right-click a column in your grid whose distinct rows you would like to convert into columns.
2. Select Trending | Cross Tabular.
Sample screen shot

1. Select the column you want to rollup for the year trend. Data Access Studio will automatically populate this field with the
column you select in step 1.
2. Select the column whose distinct rows you want to convert to columns. E.g. if your rows had Union Code information, then
the Trend will create a new column for each distinct Union Code.
3. Choose how you want to trend: Sum, Count, etc.
4. Choose the column you want to use as the ranking quantity. If you selected Count in the previous step, then this field will
be hidden.
5. You can append multiple Cross Tabular Trends to create Dashboards. If you want to replace the previous Cross Tabular
Trend, click Remove previous CrossTab columns.

6. Click Ok.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 191 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Access Studio provides quick and easy exporting and printing.
See Export and Print for instructions on how to export your grid data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 192 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Set D efault P rinting P references

Data Access Studio provides the ability to specify printing preferences for each layout:
1. Open a Layout
2. Click Design | Printing Preferences...

To Do this

Change margins Enter values for Left, Right, Top, or Bottom.

Change the orientation of the printout Click Portrait or Landscape.

Hide or show the filter row on the printout Check Show Filter Values to show filters. Uncheck to hide filters.

Change the paper size Click on the Paper Size options box. Select paper size from list.

Use the visual assist to select a print driver on your workstation. If you are the
administrator on your workstation (or if your administrator installed the
ReportsNow PDF print driver) you can select this print driver to print to PDF.
Change the Embed Excel Print Driver
If you have another PDF print driver, you can select it here so that when you print
from Embed Excel, the print automatically converts it to a PDF. You can also click the
Preferences... button to change the settings of the print driver.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 193 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D efine B asic H eader and Footer

Data Access Studio provides the ability to specify a report header and footer to any Layout. Once defined, the header information
such as page numbers and title will export to formatted types such as PDF, HTML and printer outputs. When you press save on
the layout, the header/footer information will be saved with your layout.
To define a header and footer for your layout, click on Design | Header and Footer...

This form has six areas for you to add text: 3 areas in the header representing left, center, and right; and 3 areas in the footer for
left, center, and right.
In addition to typing text into these areas, you may click the Quick Tag buttons to add dynamic information such as:
Page number
Page number and number of Pages
Date
Time
User
Layout name
Report Parameters - shows the Report Parameters as a block of field/value pairs
By default, a layout will have the Layout Name in the center of the header and the page number in the right hand corner of the
header.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 194 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify an Area to P rint

Data Access Studio allows you define a set of grid columns as the "Print Area" of the layout. This feature is useful if you need to
see certain columns in the interactive grid but not in the printout.

TO D O THIS

Define a
Highlight the grid columns that you want to print. Click each desired Column Header. SHIFT+click will select all columns between
Print
clicks. CTRL+click will add each column to the selection. Right click on the selected column headers and choose: Print Area
Area

Clear
the
Select Design
Print
Area

Show
the Once the print area is defined for a layout, you may want to see which columns comprise the Print Area. To highlight these
Print columns, select: Design
Area

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 195 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Set export options

To set preferences for each export operation, select Export | Export Settings...

TO D O THIS

Change the default directory where

Enter a path under Export Directory. You may use the Visual Assist to find the directory visually.
Data Access Studio will store exports

Check Open file after export. If unchecked, the export will write file to the export directory and only
Open file after export
notify you that the export has finished.

Automatically name the export and Default checked. When checked, the export will name your exported file automatically and copy it
export to default directory do the default directory. When unchecked, the export will prompt you for the file name.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 196 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can place user notes and design notes in any report.
Additionally, DAS generates "at-a-glance" design information about any report including:
Filters (hidden or shown)
Grouping
Parameters and variables
Calculations
Hidden columns
Sorting
Template information
and more
#

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 197 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

User Notes
User notes are for the end-user of the report. The notes should instruct a user on the:
Purpose of the report
Meaning of the report's parameters/filters
How to interpret results
To add or edit user notes for a report:
1. Open a report
2. Click View | User Notes
In the Notes form, you may paste WordPad (RTF) or Notepad (plain text) into the edit area. You may also type and edit in the edit
area.
You can place hyperlinks to external documentation in the edit area as well. This is useful if the documentation is too large to
store within you report (which could be a concern if people run your report over the web).

TO D O THIS

Paste text from a WordPad document Select all text in the WordPad document. Click Edit

Edit note text directly Type into the Notes edit window.

Copy note text Highlight the desired text in the Notes edit window. Click Copy to Clipboard.

Clear all notes Click Clear.

Save your changes Click Save.

Close the notes editor Click Close.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 198 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D eveloper Notes
Developer notes are for anyone who will modify the report. The notes should instruct a user on the:
Purpose of the report
Meaning of the report's parameters/filters
How to interpret results
What the calculations do
Why columns are grouped, sorted, hidden
Meaning of the report's variables
How to extend/modify the report
etc.
To add or edit developer notes for a report:
1. Open a report
2. Click View | Developer Notes
In the Notes form, you may paste WordPad (RTF) or Notepad (plain text) into the edit area. You may also type in the edit area.
You can place hyperlinks to external documentation in the edit area as well. This is useful if the documentation is too large to
store within you report (which could be a concern if people run your report over the web).
In addition to the edit area on the top, DAS automatically generates "at-a-glance" information about the report including:
grouping, filters, parameters and variables, calculations, hidden columns, sorting, template information, and more!

TO D O THIS

Paste text from a WordPad

Select all text in the WordPad document. Click Edit
document

Edit note text directly Type into the Notes edit window.

Copy note text Highlight the desired text in the Notes edit window. Click Copy to Clipboard.

Clear all notes Click Clear.

Save your changes Click Save.

Close the notes editor Click Close.

Expand bottom window of the developer notes to see read-only information about the report
View "at-a-glance" information
properties.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 199 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Make Your Report Run Faster

Data Access Studio uses many automatic performance techniques to make your report run fast. You can do the following
additional techniques to make your report go faster as well:

Symptom Do this

Report takes a long time to Select or Count Use the Quick Form Assistant.

1. Add more filtering. Try to reduce the number of rows by adding more filters.
Report takes a long time to load large number
(>100,000) of rows 2. Hide any unnecessary columns. The fewer columns you have, the faster a
larger data set load will go.

Calculating takes a long time with Table Lookup

Consider using a Table Join instead of a Table Lookup.
calculations

If you are loading a large number of records over a slower network connection,
Report loads >100,000 records over a WAN consider scheduling the report to run on the DAS Web Server. Once the report runs
connection there, the scheduler can email you the result. You must have the scheduler license
for this option.

Quick Form Assistant

The Quick Form Assistant lets you create better running queries on large tables. The Quick Form Assistant option box shows a
list of all valid indices for the currently active object. You should show all columns before using the Quick Form Assistant. Upon
selecting an index from this list, Data Access Studio creates report parameters based on the index you choose (existing
parameters will be left untouched at the top).
Once you apply the index:
To take advantage of an index, select an index that most closely matches the query you require.
Notice the index columns appear as report parameters.
Fill in index values from top most to bottom most. Remember, the database will not use an index if you do not fill in values
from the beginning of the index. For instance, if your index is "Doc Type", "Document Number", and "Doc Co", the index will
not be used if you only specify a value for only "Document Number" and "Doc Co". All left-most index columns must be
specified first for the index to take effect.
Depending on the database, even if you specify all fields of an index, the database will not always use that index. In this
event, the database decides that another execution path will provide better performance. If you notice that a fully specified
index does not result in a fast query, please notify your JD Edwards (EnterpriseOne/World) database administrator. Provide
your Database Administrator (DBA) with the index columns you used and the time the query took to run.
To undo the Quick Form Assistant, simply select the blank Index at the top of the combo box. DAS will remove any Quick
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 200 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Form indexes from your report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 201 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

U S ER LEV EL JD E K NO W LED G E CAN D ES IG N R EPO R TS TECHNICAL K NO W LED G E

Subscriber Not needed No Minimal

Quick Report Designer Minimal Yes Minimal

Ad Hoc Designer Yes Yes Some

Advanced Designer Yes Yes High

This section is for more technical users who have mastered the basic Ad Hoc report techniques. This section describes more
technical calculations and operations that you will need to create more challenging reports.
Topics in this section include how to:
Fine tune Grouping and Summarization
Connect a Report Parameter to a Calculation
Create a Table Join from Scratch
Edit Calculations with the Editor
Perform Advanced Calculations
Show Additional Information about a Table

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 202 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Access Studio lets you combine information from multiple tables -- which is referred to as a Table Join:
1. On the Hompage click By Table Join. (Or click File | New | Private Report form the main menu.)

Enter the name of your new layout in the Report Name box.
Select a Join Type:
Join - Join tables that combines columns from multiple table together. You will use join operators to connect rows together
in your join. Their might be duplicate rows.
Distinct Join - Same as a regular join except all duplicate rows are removed. This type will not perform as well as a regular
join.
Union All - Combines rows from multiple tables together. Because only rows are being combines, the selected columns
from both tables need to be exact. There might be duplicate rows. When working with unions, the 'Suggested Joins' and
'Actual Joins' tabs are not needed and are hidden. For JDE, not only do the selected columns need to be the same but the
column order must be the same. JDE Xe does not support Union All (but it does support Distinct Unions).
Distinct Union - Same as a regular union except that duplicate rows are removed. This type will not perform as well as a
regular union.
Proceed to define your join as follows:
1. Select Tables to Join
2. Select Join
3. Select Columns
4. Working with Your Custom Table Join

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 203 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Select Tables to Join

The first step to combining multiple tables is to list the tables you want. Click the Tables tab:

TO D O THIS

Add a table by its Click on the Visual Assist in the Table column. From the resulting form, type the table description in the
description Description field.

Add a table by its object

Directly type in the table name in the Table column.
name

Note: in EnterpriseOne, you can only join up to 3 tables if you use a one-to-many (OUTER) join. If you only use one-to-one
(SIMPLE) joins, then you may only add up to 5 tables.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 204 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Select Join
Once you have defined the tables you want to combine in the Tables tab, you can click the Suggested Joins tab:
Sample screen shot

If Data Access Studio finds a relationship between your tables, it will list it on the Suggested Joins tab. To select a join, highlight
the join you would like to use and click Apply Suggested Joins. Depending on the tables, sometimes information in the
Suggested Joins may be blank. In this case, click the Actual Joins tab to Define the join manually.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 205 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D efine a Join Manually

If you have more than one table, you must define at least one join condition for each table.
If there are no Suggested Joins or you need to edit your join:
1. Click the Actual Joins tab:

1. Select the type of join under the Join Type column

2. Enter the first table in Table 1
3. Enter the first field in Field 1
4. Enter the Relation (this is normally =)
5. Enter the second table in Table 2
6. Enter the second field in Field 2
Join concepts:
There are three join types available: SIMPLE, LEFT OUTER, and RIGHT OUTER.
A SIMPLE join is a one-to-one relation: the value for Table 1 and Field 1 MUST match the value of Table 2 and Field 2 (these
examples presume the Relation field is "="). When this match occurs the result is one row for that match. If the target table does
not have a match for the source table row, then no row is returned to the grid.
A LEFT OUTER join is a one-to-many relation: the value for Table 1 and Field 1 matches the value of Table 2 and Field 2. Unlike
the SIMPLE join, if the Table 2 and Field 2 value does not match, then the query still returns a row for Table 1 and Field 1. The
Table 2 fields in this instance will all be null (you can search for null fields using the <BLANK> filter). Use a LEFT OUTER join for:
1. Drill down reports - If you do a LEFT OUTER join between a header table and a detail table, then your report will be able to
drill down between the header (summary) records and the detail records.
2. Integrity reports - If you have a header table and want to know which headers have no child records, then use a LEFT OUTER
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 206 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

join.
A RIGHT OUTER join is the same thing as a LEFT OUTER join except Table 1 and Table 2 are swapped. Use a RIGHT OUTER join, for
instance, to identify detail rows that do not have a header row.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 207 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Select Columns
Perhaps the easiest part is the last part: selecting the columns you want.
1. Click the Columns tab
Sample screen shot

This is where you select the columns that you want for your report.

TO D O THIS

Search for a column by

Type in the name of the column in the Filter Box under Description.
name

Check the columns you want in your join. The fewer columns that you select for your report, the better your
Select a column
report will perform.

Hide all columns Click Hide All Columns.

To create the join based on Click Save and Close. Data Access Studio will attempt to create the join with the information provided. If
all information entered there are errors, Data Access Studio will popup the errors and how to resolve each.

To cancel your changes Click Cancel.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 208 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This is an example of selecting columns for a union. Only the columns of the primary table will be shown. All the selected columns
of the primary table must exist in the other tables. For JDE E1 and Xe, the columns must also be in the same order as the primary
table.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 209 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Working with Your Custom Table Join

After you create your join, you may edit it at any time:
1. Click Layout | Customize View

1. Edit the join as you need

2. Click Save and Close to save changes and submit queries with your view

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 210 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Additional Table I nformation

Data Access Studio provides developer-related information about Tables and Views. To access this information, click the
Additional Table Information option box on the main toolbar:

TO D O THIS

See detailed table information Select Summary.

See detailed column information Select Columns.

See detailed index information Select Indices.

See detailed join information (for business views) Select Joins.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 211 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Designer
The Dashboard Designer provides an intuitive UI that facilitates data binding and shaping, and layout design. Many of these
normally complex tasks can be accomplished with a simple drag-and-drop operation, allowing you to start creating dashboards
immediately.

Creating Dashboards
The following topics will guide you through the process of creating a dashboard.
Creating a Dashboard
Providing Data
Working with Data
Adding Dashboard Items
Binding Dashboard Items to Data
Designing Dashboard Items
Data Shaping
Interactivity
Appearance Customization
Data Analysis
Converting Dashboard Items
Dashboard Layout
Undo and Redo Operations
Automatic and Manual Updates

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 212 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

The Dashboard Designer provides the capability to print or export the individual items of a dashboard, as well as the entire
dashboard.
Printing and Exporting

UI Elements
The topics in this section describe the main elements of a Dashboard Designer application.
UI Elements

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 213 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This topic explains how to create a new dashboard.

Create a Dashboard
Click the Dashboard button on the main toolbar or the 'New' object button.

The Dashboard designer will come up and immediately prompt you for a DAS report for your Dashboard. All Dashboards are
built over one to many DAS reports. Our DAS reports are used to access and transform most any type of data source.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 214 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The topics in this section describe how to provide data to be visualized in the dashboard.
This section contains the following topics.
Supported Data Sources
Data Processing Modes

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 215 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Supported Data Sources for Databoxes

SQL Data Source
The table below lists the supported data sources and the required data providers for the mobie Databoxes.
 Tip

The dashboard designer can connect to and publish to these data sources without installed database drivers by leveraging the
DAS server. However, it is recommended to install database drivers for mobie on the developer workstation to maximize
publishing and dashboard designer performance.

SQL
D ATA D ATAB AS E PR O V ID ER D O W NLO AD
S O U R CE S U PPO R TED V ER S IO NS PR O V ID ER AS S EMB LY LINK

2005, 2008, 2008R2, 2012, 2014, 2016, 2005

Microsoft .NET Framework Data Included in
Express Edition, 2008 R2 Express, 2012
SQL Provider for SQL System.Data.dll .NET
Express, 2014 Express, 2016 Express, Azure
Server Server Framework
SQL Database

Download
Oracle Data Provider
Oracle.DataAccess.dll, link
Oracle for .NET / .NET
9i or higher Oracle.ManagedDataAccess.dll, (Included in
Database Framework Data
System.Data.OracleClient.dll .NET
Provider for Oracle
Framework)

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 216 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Processing Modes

DAS Dashboard supports two data processing modes when running against mobie that are used to perform data-related
operations (such as grouping, filtering, etc.). These modes only apply when running against mobie in the dashboard
designer/viewer in DAS and does not apply when running directly against DAS reports.
Note

Dashboards on the web will always run in server mode.

In server mode, data-related operations are performed on the database server side. For instance, when you apply filtering
to a dashboard item, the Dashboard Designer requests the required data automatically by sending a query containing a
corresponding SELECT statement with the specified WHERE clause.
In client mode, data-related operations are performed on the workstation side. In this mode, a compressed snapshot of
aggregated data is loaded into a workstation memory. This reduces memory consumption and improves the speed of
client-side data shaping operations using several techniques: data compression, various data grouping and multi-threading
algorithms, etc.
 Tip

Note that performance in server/client modes depends on multiple factors such as database structure, server workload, etc. To
decide which mode to use, test both.

Databox Mode Limitations

In server mode, the Dashboard does not have simultaneous access to bound data in its entirety. This imposes some limitations.
Some calculated fields cannot be evaluated in server mode.
The Median summary function is supported for the Oracle data provider only.
The Bound Image and Grid dashboard items cannot display images from the following types of databases:
Microsoft SQL Server
MySQL

Data Processing Errors

The Dashboard Designer provides the capability to display errors that occurred during data processing operations (such as
changing measure summary types, calculation errors, etc.). For instance, the Grid below shows an error when the summary type
of the Extended Price measure is set to Median in server mode.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 217 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To see the error message, hover the mouse pointer over the icon.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 218 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Publishing a Dashboard
Once a dashboard is complete, designers may publish the dashboard and/or the data to mobie®.
Mobie (mobie®) is the ReportsNow data warehousing tool for mobile dashboards. When Publish is selected in the DAS
Dashboard Designer, a URL is created containing the dashboard, which can be viewed on a computer or handheld device. The
URL is added to the Portal list and associated with a DataBox Table.
When a URL is open, end users may see the output of published Dashboards.

The Portal provides internet access to view the Dashboard in a URL. Each recipient of published Dashboards must have a mobie®
license, be set up in the mobie® Admin settings by a DAS Administrator, and be assigned to a Portal, as discussed in the mobie®
Admin Manual for your DAS Administrator to set up.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 219 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Working with Data

The topics in this section describe how to work with data in a DAS report.
This section contains information about Creating Calculated Fields

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 220 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Creating Calculated Fields

The Dashboard Designer provides the capability to create calculated fields that allow you to apply complex expressions to data
fields that are obtained from the dashboard's data source. You can use these fields in data visualizations as regular data source
fields.
Creating a Calculated Field
Editing a Calculated Field

Creating a Calculated Field

After you have created a data source, you can add a new calculated field based on the existing data source fields.
To create a calculated field, select the required data source (and the required DAS report/data member, if applicable) in the Data
Source Browser and click the Add Calculated Field button in the Ribbon's Data Source tab...

...or right-click the Field List and select Add Calculated Field in the context menu.

This invokes the Expression Editor dialog, which allows you to specify an expression that will be used to obtain calculated field
values. Here, you can construct the required expression.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 221 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can use the following elements in expressions.

Functions
Note

To learn how to use Aggregate functions, see Aggregations. The Expression Operators, Functions and Constants topic lists
common functions (DateTime, Math, String, etc.) supported by expressions.
Operators
Columns
Constants
Parameters
After the expression has been specified, click OK. This displays a new calculated field in the data source structure.

Now you can specify the required calculated field type, change its default name, etc.

Editing a Calculated Field

To edit a calculated field, use its context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 222 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This menu contains the following items.

ITEM D ES CR IPTIO N

Edit Expression... Invokes the Expression Editor dialog, which allows you to change an expression for an existing calculated field.

Field Type Specifies the type of the calculated field.

Rename Changes the calculated field name.

Delete Removes the existing calculated field from the data source.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 223 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Adding Dashboard Items

To create a dashboard item in the Dashboard Designer, click the corresponding button in the Home ribbon tab.

This creates an empty dashboard item, and displays the required data sections for binding this item to data (for instance, the
image below displays the Pivot dashboard item and corresponding data sections).

Perform the following steps to design a dashboard item.

Bind the dashboard item to data.
Perform the required data shaping operations (such as grouping, sorting and filtering).
Use the interactivity features to enable interaction between various dashboard items.
Adjust the dashboard item's position and size and specify the dashboard item caption settings.
Specify specific dashboard item settings based on its type. To learn more, see Designing Dashboard Items.
After you have created and designed the dashboard item, you can create an exact copy. To do this, click the Duplicate button in
the Home ribbon tab...

... or use the dashboard item's context menu. To remove the dashboard item from the dashboard, use the Delete button or the
corresponding item in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 224 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Binding Dashboard Items to Data

This section consists of the following topics.
Binding Dashboard Items to Data
Hidden Data Items

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 225 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Binding Dashboard Items to Data

This topic explains how to bind the newly created dashboard item to data source fields, to display data.
Binding Concepts
Create Binding
Modify Binding
Clear Binding

Binding Concepts
To bind dashboard items to data in the Dashboard Designer, the DATA ITEMS pane is used.

Each dashboard item type has a specific set of data sections, such as Values, Arguments and Series in the chart, Columns and
Sparklines in the grid, and Values, Columns and Rows in the pivot grid. Each data section corresponds to a particular dashboard
item area or element, and should be mapped to data to be displayed within this area/element.
Mapping is performed using data items - objects that are used to bind a dashboard item to data source fields. Data items are
used to link the dashboard item to the required data source fields and, thus, visualize data within the dashboard item.
Another key concept in data binding is the data item container, which represents a set of data items. It can contain either a
single data item or multiple data items, and allows you to specify various options related to how a specific dashboard item
visualizes data.

The data item can process data in two ways - as dimensions or measures. This depends on the data section to which the data
item is assigned, and the type of the data item container.
dimension - a data item whose values are not intended to be summarized.
These values can be of any type - string, date-time or numeric. In any case, the dashboard does not summarize the
dimension values, but groups identical values. You can perform grouping, sorting, or display the top values for the
dimension values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 226 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can also customize data format settings for numeric and date-time values. To access the data shaping settings, use the
data item's menu button.

For instance, dimensions are used to provide data for the chart argument axis, pivot grid column and row headers.
measure - a data item whose values are summarized before they are used in the dashboard.
These values can be of any type - numeric, date-time or string. In any case, the dashboard will calculate an appropriate
summary function against measure values. You can also customize the data format settings that affect how summary values
are displayed. To access these settings, use the data item's menu button.

For example, measures are used to provide data for the chart's Y-axis, and to calculate pivot cell values.
Specific data sections display Options buttons for each data item container. Use these buttons to invoke a dialog that allows you
to specify the settings of this data item container. These settings affect how a particular dashboard item's area/element displays
the provided data.

Create Binding
The DATA ITEMS pane displays data sections of the selected dashboard item. It can be used to add, rearrange or remove data
items.
To bind a dashboard item to data, select the dashboard item. Then choose the required data field from the Data Source Browser
and drop it onto the appropriate section in the DATA ITEMS pane.

You can remove the data item by dragging it outside the DATA ITEMS pane.
To learn how to bind a specific dashboard item to data, see the Providing Data topic for the required dashboard item.
To rename the data item, click its menu button and select Rename, to invoke the Rename Data Item dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 227 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Modify Binding
You can modify data binding by dragging data item containers within a data section. To do this, drag the data item container to
the required position.

You can also modify data binding by dragging data items within the DATA ITEMS pane. This action has the following specifics.
If you drag the data item to a new position, the settings specified for the corresponding data item container will be restored
to the default values.
If you drag the data item to an existing data item placeholder, the settings of the corresponding data item container will be
applied.

Clear Binding
To remove all data items for a selected dashboard item, use the Remove Data Items button in the Home ribbon tab.

You can also do this via the dashboard item's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 228 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 229 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Hidden Data Items

The HIDDEN DATA ITEMS area can be used to perform various data shaping and analysis operations by measures or
dimensions that do not directly take part in the visual representation of data.
To create hidden data items, choose the required data field from the Data Source Browser and drop it onto the appropriate
section in the HIDDEN DATA ITEMS area.
You can perform the following operations using hidden data items.
Filtering
Sorting
Top N
Conditional Formatting

Filtering
You can use hidden dimensions to apply filtering to the dashboard item. To do this, select the required hidden dimension in the
Filter Editor dialog and specify the required condition.

For instance, the Grid on the image above is filtered by the first quarter of the OrderDate (Quarter) dimension.

Sorting
You can sort values of the specified dimension by the hidden measure. To do this, select the required measure from the
dimension's Sort By sub-menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 230 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

For instance, categories displayed in the Grid on the image above are sorted by values of the hidden Quantity (Sum) measure.

Top N
You can use hidden measures in Top N conditions. To do this, select the required measure from the Measure combo box in the
Top N Values dialog.

For instance, the Grid on the image above displays top 5 categories for the Quantity (Sum) hidden measure.

Conditional Formatting
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 231 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can create format rules based on hidden measures to apply conditional formatting to elements corresponding to visible
values. To do this, use the Add Format Rule menu of the hidden measure.

For the Expression format condition, you can use the required hidden measure in the same manner as in the Filter Editor dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 232 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Designing Dashboard Items

ReportsNow Dashboard provides a number of visualization elements designed to present visual or textual information in a
dashboard - dashboard items.
This section describes the available dashboard items.
Chart
Scatter Chart
Grid
Pies
Cards
Gauges
Pivot
Choropleth Map
Geo Point Maps
Range Filter
Images
Text Box
Treemap
Filter Elements
Dashboard Item Group
Tab Container

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 233 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Chart
The topics in this section describe the features available in the Chart dashboard item, and provide extensive information on how
to create and customize charts in the Dashboard Designer.

This section is divided into the following subsections.

Providing Data
Provides information on how to supply the Chart dashboard item with data.
Series
Enumerates and describes different types of series that can be displayed within the Chart dashboard item.
Panes
Introduces the concept of chart panes (visual areas within a diagram that display chart series), and provides information on
how to create them.
Interactivity
Describes features that enable interaction between the Chart and other dashboard items.
Coloring
Describes coloring capabilities of the Chart dashboard item.
Axes
Describes how to customize settings related to chart axes.
Legend
Provides information about the chart legend and its options.
Orientation
Describes how to toggle the chart's orientation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 234 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner. To learn more, see the
Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic.
The only difference is in the data sections that the required dashboard item has. This topic describes how to bind a Chart
dashboard item to data in the Designer.
Binding to Data in the Designer
Transposing Arguments and Series

Binding to Data in the Designer

The image below shows a sample Chart dashboard item that is bound to data.

To bind the Chart dashboard item to data, drag and drop a data source field to a placeholder contained in one of the available
data sections. The table below lists and describes the Chart's data sections.

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Contains data items against which the Y-coordinates of data points are calculated. The Options button next to the Value
Values data item allows you to select the series type and specify different options. Note that some types of series accept several
measures. To learn more, see the documentation for the required series type.

Arguments Contains data items that provide values displayed along the X-axis of the chart.

Series Contains data items whose values are used to create chart series.

Transposing Arguments and Series

The Chart dashboard item provides the capability to transpose chart arguments and series. In this case, data items contained in
the Arguments section are moved to the Series section, and vice versa.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 235 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To transpose the selected Chart dashboard item, use the Transpose button in the Home ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 236 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Series
This section describes how to select a desired series type in the overview topic, and lists the variety of available series types.
The section consists of the following topics.
Series Overview
Provides information on how to specify a series type in the Dashboard Designer.
Bar Series
Lists the available types of bar series.
Point and Line Series
Lists the available types of point and line series.
Area Series
Lists the available types of area series.
Range Series
Lists the available types of range series.
Weighted Series
Lists the available types of weighted series.
Financial Series
Lists the available types of financial series.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 237 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Series Overview
The Chart dashboard item supports a variety of series types - from simple bar and line charts to complex candle stick and bubble
graphs.
Bar Series
Point and Line Series
Area Series
Range Series
Weighted Series
Financial Series
This topic describes how to change the series type and specify various series options (for instance, how to use secondary axis or
enable point labels).
Series Types
Series Options
Series Point Labels

Series Types
To switch between series types in the Dashboard Designer, click the Options button next to the required data item (or
placeholder) in the Values section.

In the invoked Series Options dialog, select the required series type and click OK.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 238 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can also do this using the Series Type gallery in the Design Ribbon tab.

Series Options
To manage common series options, use the Common Options tab of the Series Options dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 239 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Plot on secondary axis - Specifies whether or not the secondary axis is used to plot the current series.
Ignore empty points - Specifies whether or not empty points are ignored when plotting the current series.
Note that this option is in effect for the Line, Area and Range Area series.
Show point markers - Specifies whether or not to show point markers for the current series.
Note

Note that point markers are always shown when Master Filtering is enabled for the Chart dashboard item.
Note that this option is in effect for the Line and Area series.

Series Point Labels

The Point Label Options tab of the Series Options dialog allows you to enable series point labels and manage their settings.

Show point labels - Specifies whether or not to show point labels for the current series.
Content - Specifies the type of content displayed within point labels.
Overlapping mode - Specifies the label overlap mode.
Note

This option is not in effect when the dashboard is displayed in the Web Viewer.
Orientation - Specifies the orientation of point labels.
Bar options
Note

These settings are in effect for Bar series only.

Show for zero values - Specifies whether or not to show labels for points with zero values.
Position - Specifies the position of point labels relative to bars.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 240 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Bar Series
Bar series visualize data using rectangular bars with lengths proportional to the values that they represent.
The following types of Bar series are available.
Bar
Stacked Bar
Full-Stacked Bar

Bar
Bar series can be used to compare values across categories.

Stacked Bar
Stacked Bar series show the contribution of individual categories to the whole.

Full-Stacked Bar
Full-Stacked Bar series allow you to compare the percentage that each value contributes to a total across categories.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 241 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 242 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Point and Line Series

Point series visualize data as a set of individual numeric data points. Line series are used to connect numeric data points by
different types of line segments.
The following types of Point and Line series are available.
Point
Line
Stacked Line
Full-Stacked Line
Step Line
Spline

Point
Point series visualize data as a set of individual numeric data points.

Line
Line series connect numeric data points by straight line segments.

Stacked Line
Stacked Line series can be used to show the trend of the contribution for each value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 243 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Full-Stacked Line
Stacked Line series are useful for showing the trend of the percentage for each value.

Step Line
Step Line series use vertical and horizontal lines to connect the numeric data points forming a step-like progression.

Spline
Spline series plot a fitted curve through each numeric data point.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 244 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 245 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Area Series
Area series connect numeric data points by different types of line segments and fill the area between the line and X-axis/other
series.
The following types of Point and Line series are available.
Area
Stacked Area
Full-Stacked Area
Step Area
Spline Area
Stacked Spline Area
Full-Stacked Spline Area

Area
Area series connect numeric data points by straight line segments and fill the area between the line and X-axis.

Stacked Area
Stacked Area series can be used to show the trend of the contribution for each value. Stacked Area series connect numeric data
points by straight line segments and fill the area between the line and previous series.

Full-Stacked Area
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 246 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Full-Stacked Area series are useful to show the trend of the percentage for each value.

Step Area
Step Area series use vertical and horizontal lines to connect the numeric data points forming a step-like progression and fill the
area between the line and X-axis.

Spline Area
Spline Area series plot a fitted curve through each numeric data point and fill the area between the line and X-axis.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 247 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Stacked Spline Area

Stacked Area series can be used to show the trend of the contribution for each value. Stacked Area series plot a fitted curve
through each numeric data point, and fill the area between the line and previous series.

Full-Stacked Spline Area

Full-Stacked Spline Area series are useful to show the trend of the percentage for each value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 248 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Range Series
Range series are generally used to show variations in a specified time range like temperature, price, etc.
The following types of Range series are available.
Range Bar
Range Area

Data Binding Specifics

A range series is a space between two simple series displayed as a filled area (Range Area) or bars that stretch from a point in
one series to the corresponding point in the other (Range Bar). Thus, you need to provide two measures instead of one to display
a range series.
Value 1 - a measure against which the first set of values is calculated.
Value 2 - a measure against which the second set of values is calculated.
When you select the Range Bar or Range Area series type in the Designer, the DATA ITEMS area displays two data item
placeholders. Drag and drop the required measures to corresponding placeholders.

Range Bar
Range Bar series are similar to Bar series except that they are drawn between a range of values.

Range Area
Range Area series are similar to Area series except that their areas are filled between a range of values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 249 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 250 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Weighted Series
Weighted series allow you to visualize data in three dimensions.
The following types of Weighted series are available.
Bubble

Data Binding Specifics

Data points in a weighted series present the following two measures.
Value - the Y-coordinate of series points.
Weight - the size of series points.
When you select the Bubble series type in the Designer, the DATA ITEMS area displays two data item placeholders. Drag and
drop the required measures to corresponding placeholders.

Bubble
Bubble series are similar to Point series except that they allow you to provide an additional measure whose values are expressed
in a bubble size.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 251 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Financial Series
Financial series are used to illustrate stock prices.
The following types of Financial series are available.
High-Low-Close
Stock
Candle Stick

Coloring Specifics
Note that financial series do not support a standard coloring mechanism used to color chart series points. The Chart dashboard
item colors series points of financial series in the following way.
Black if the price at the end of the previous period is lower than the price at the end of the current period.
Red if the price at the end of the previous period is larger than the price at the end of the current period.

High-Low-Close
When you select the High-Low-Close series type in the Designer, the DATA ITEMS area displays three data item placeholders.
High-Low-Close series require three measures to be provided.

High - the maximum price within the specified period (the top of the series point).
Low - the minimum price within the specified period (the bottom of the series point).
Close - the price at the end of the specified period (the tick mark).

Stock
When you select the Stock series type in the Designer, the DATA ITEMS area displays four data item placeholders. Stock series
require four measures to be provided.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 252 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Open - the price at the beginning of the specified period (the left tick mark).
High - the maximum price within the specified period (the top of the series point).
Low - the minimum price within the specified period (the bottom of the series point).
Close - the price at the end of the specified period (the right tick mark).

Candle Stick
When you select the Candle Stick series type in the Designer, the DATA ITEMS area displays four data item placeholders. Candle
Stick series require four measures to be provided.

Open - the price at the beginning of the specified period.

High - the maximum price within the specified period (the upper shadow top).
Low - the minimum price within the specified period (the lower shadow bottom).
Close - the price at the end of the specified period.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 253 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 254 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Panes
The Chart dashboard item can contain any number of panes. Panes are visual areas within a diagram that display chart series.
Each pane has its own Y-axis and displays a specific set of series. All panes in a chart share the same X-axis.

To add a pane, click the Add Pane button (the icon) at the top right of the DATA ITEMS pane.

Once a new pane is added, the Dashboard Designer creates another Values section in the DATA ITEMS pane.

Use this section to provide data items that supply values to be displayed in the new pane (see Providing Data for details on data
binding).
To remove a pane, click the Remove Pane button (the icon) displayed in the corresponding Values section.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 255 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This section describes features that enable interaction between the Chart and other dashboard items. These features include
Master Filtering and Drill-Down.
The section contains the following topics.
Master Filtering
Drill-Down

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 256 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
The Chart dashboard item supports filtering by argument, series or points.

Filtering by Arguments
When filtering by arguments is enabled, you can click series points to make other dashboard items only display data related to
selected argument values.

To enable filtering by arguments in the Designer, set the required Master Filter mode and click the Arguments button in the Data
Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

Filtering by Series
When filtering by series is enabled, you can click a series point to make other dashboard items only display data related to the
selected series.

To enable filtering by series in the Designer, set the required Master Filter mode and click the Series button in the Data Ribbon
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 257 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

tab (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

Filtering by Points
When filtering by points is enabled, you can click a individual point to make other dashboard items display only data related to
the selected point.

To enable filtering by points in the Designer, set the required Master Filter mode and click the Points button in the Data Ribbon
tab.

Reset Filtering
To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button in the Chart's caption area…

…or the corresponding command in the Chart's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 258 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more about drill-down concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Drill-Down topic.
The Chart dashboard item supports drill down on argument or series values.

Drill Down on an Argument

When drill down on arguments is enabled, you can click a series point to view a detail chart for the corresponding argument
value.

Note

When Filtering by Arguments is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a series point.
Drill down on arguments requires that the Arguments section contains several data items, from the least detailed to the most
detailed item.

Note

In OLAP mode, you can perform drill-down for either a hierarchy data item or several dimension attributes.

To enable drill down on arguments, click the Drill Down button in the Data Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the
toolbar menu)...

...and the Arguments button (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 259 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill Down on a Series

When drill down on a series is enabled, you can click a series point (or corresponding legend item) to view a detail chart for the
corresponding series.

Note

When Filtering by Series is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a series point.
Drill down on a series requires that the Series section contains several data items, from the least detailed to the most detailed
item.

Note

In OLAP mode, you can perform drill-down for either a hierarchy data item or several dimension attributes.

To enable drill down on a series, click the Drill Down button in the Data Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the
toolbar menu)...

...and the Series button (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 260 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill Up
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button within the Chart caption or in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 261 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Coloring
Certain dashboard items provide the capability to color dashboard item elements by associating dimension values/measures and
specified colors. You can choose whether to use a global color scheme to provide consistent colors for identical values or specify a
local color scheme for each dashboard item. To learn more about coloring concepts common for all dashboard items, see the
Coloring section.
By default, the Chart dashboard item colors different measures and series dimensions by hue. In the example below, series points
corresponding to different countries (UK and USA) are painted in different colors.

Note

Note that the Chart dashboard item does not support coloring for the financial series.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 262 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Legend
A legend is an element of a chart that identifies chart series and series points (for instance, colored points corresponding to
argument values).

This topic describes how to customize various legend settings.

Visibility
You can specify whether or not a chart should display a legend.
In the Designer, use the Show Legend button in the Legend section of the Design Ribbon tab.

Position and Orientation

To specify the legend's position and orientation, select one of the predefined options from the gallery in the Design Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 263 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 264 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Axes
The Chart dashboard item displays two axes by default: the X-axis and the Y-axis. The topics in this section describe how to
customize axis settings.
The section contains the following topics.
X-Axis
Y-Axis

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 265 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

X-Axis
The X-axis is the axis of arguments.

This topic consists of the following sections.

Common X-Axis Settings
Numeric Formats
DateTime Formats
Continuous and Discrete X-Axes

Common X-Axis Settings

To access X-axis settings, use the X-Axis Settings button in the Diagram section of the Design Ribbon tab.

This will invoke the X-Axis Settings dialog.

This dialog contains the following settings.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 266 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

S E T TING D ES CR IPTIO N

Reverse Allows you to reverse the X-axis. If the X-axis is reversed, its values are ordered from right to left.

Show X-
Allows you to hide and show the X-axis.
axis

Show
Allows you to hide and show the X-axis title. You can choose whether to use the default text or specify a custom string.
title

Enable Allows you to enable zooming for the X-axis. The X-axis' scroll bar provides the capability to perform navigation in the zoomed
zooming diagram.

Limit
Allows you to limit the number of points displayed on the chart's diagram along the X-axis. The X-axis' scroll bar provides the
visible
capability to perform navigation if the number of all points exceeds the number of visible points.
points

Numeric Format X-Axis Settings

If arguments are numeric, the X-Axis Settings dialog contains a Numeric Format tab. It allows you to specify the numeric
display formats for X-Axis data, as described in the Formatting Data document.

The tab contains the following settings.

Format type - Specifies format types for numeric values.
Unit - Specifies the unit to convert the numeric values.
Precision - Specifies the number of fractional digits to display.
Currency - Specifies the currency symbol and format provided by the current culture settings.
Culture - Specifies the name of a culture that defines the currency symbol and format.
Include group separator - Specifies whether separators should be inserted between digit groups.

DateTime Format X-Axis Settings

For date and time arguments, the X-Axis Settings dialog displays a Numeric Format tab. It allows you to specify the date and
time display formats for X-Axis data.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 267 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Using the dialog, you can override default formats applied according to the data grouping type, as described in the Grouping
document. The following image shows the Date Time Format tab in the dialog when the grouping type is set to Exact Date. Click
the Reset to Default button to return all format settings back to their default values.

The tab contains settings described in detail in the Formatting Data document.

Continuous and Discrete X-Axes

If the dimension in the Arguments section contains numeric data, the Chart can create either a continuous X-axis or a discrete X-
axis.

CO NTINU O U S X- AX IS D IS CR E TE X- AX IS

If a continuous axis is used, the distance between argument values is On a discrete axis, all argument values are an equal distance
proportional to their values. from each other.

To specify the X-axis type in the Designer, invoke the data item menu for the argument dimension and select the axis type.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 268 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

Note that the continuous X-axis is not supported in OLAP mode.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 269 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Y-Axis
The Y-axis is the numerical axis of values.

To access the Y-axis settings, use the Y-Axis Settings button in the Diagram section of the Design Ribbon tab.

This will invoke the Y-Axis Settings dialog.

Use the combo box at the top to select the pane for the Y-axis settings you need to edit.

Common Settings
The dialog contains the following settings.
Always show zero level - Specifies whether or not the axis' zero level is visible. If this option is unchecked, the visible axis
range is defined based on the values plotted in the chart.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 270 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Reverse - Allows you to reverse the X-axis. If the X-axis is reversed, its values are ordered from top to down.
Show grid lines - Allows you to hide and show grid lines for the Y-axis.
Show Y-axis - Allows you to hide and show the Y-axis.
Show title - Allows you to hide and show the Y-axis title. You can choose whether to use the default text or specify a
custom string.
Logarithmic scale - Specifies whether the axis should display its numerical values using a logarithmic scale. The combo
box next to this option allows you to select the logarithmic base from one of the predefined values.

Numeric Format
The Numeric Format tab allows you to specify the numeric display formats for Y-Axis data, as described in the Formatting Data
document.

The tab contains the following settings.

Format type - Specifies format types for numeric values.
Unit - Specifies the unit to convert the numeric values.
Precision - Specifies the number of fractional digits to display.
Currency - Specifies the currency symbol and format provided by the current culture settings.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 271 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Culture - Specifies the name of a culture that defines the currency symbol and format.
Include group separator - Specifies whether separators should be inserted between digit groups.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 272 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Orientation
You can rotate the Chart so that the X-axis becomes vertical, and the Y-axis becomes horizontal.

To rotate a Chart in the Designer, use the Rotate button in the Diagram group of the Design Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 273 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Scatter Chart
The topics in this section describe the features available in the Scatter Chart dashboard item, and provide information on how to
create and customize scatter charts in the ReportsNow Dashboard Suite.

This section is divided into the following subsections.

Providing Data
Provides information on how to supply the Scatter Chart dashboard item with data.
Interactivity
Describes features that enable interaction between the Scatter Chart and other dashboard items.
Coloring
Describes coloring capabilities of the Scatter Chart dashboard item.
Legend
Provides information about the chart legend and its options.
Axes
Describes how to customize settings related to chart axes.
Orientation
Describes how to toggle the chart's orientation.
Labels
Provides information about point labels and tooltips that contain descriptions of data points.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 274 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner. To learn more, see the
Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic.
The only difference is in the data sections that the required dashboard item has. This topic describes how to bind a Scatter Chart
dashboard item to data in the Designer.
Binding to Data in the Designer
Transposing X- and Y-axis

Binding to Data in the Designer

The image below shows a sample Scatter Chart dashboard item that is bound to data.

To bind the Scatter Chart dashboard item to data, drag and drop a data source field to a placeholder contained in one of the
available data sections. A table below lists and describes Scatter Chart data sections.

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

X-Axis Contains the data item against which the X-coordinates of data points are calculated.

Y-Axis Contains the data item against which the Y-coordinates of data points are calculated.

Weight Contains the data item whose values are used to calculate the weight of data points.

Arguments Contains data items providing scatter chart arguments that are used to create data points.

Transposing X- and Y-axis

The Scatter Chart dashboard item provides the capability to transpose its axes. In this case, the data item contained in the X-Axis
section is moved to the Y-Axis section, and vice versa.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 275 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To transpose the selected Scatter Chart dashboard item, use the Transpose button in the Home ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 276 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This section describes features that enable interaction between the Scatter Chart and other dashboard items. These features
include Master Filtering and Drill-Down.
The section contains the following topics.
Master Filtering
Drill-Down

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 277 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
The Scatter Chart dashboard item supports filtering by points that correspond to specific argument values or their combinations.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a point (or multiple points by holding down the CTRL key) to make other
dashboard items only display data related to the selected point(s).

To learn how to enable Master Filtering in the Designer, see the Master Filtering topic.
To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter ( ) button in the Chart's caption area, or the Clear Master Filter command in the
context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 278 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more about drill-down concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Drill-Down topic.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a point to view the details.

Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a point.
Drill-down requires that the Arguments section contain several dimensions, from the least to the most detailed dimension.

Note

In OLAP mode, you can perform drill-down for either a hierarchy data item or several dimension attributes. To learn more about
OLAP mode, see Binding Dashboard Items to Data in OLAP mode.
To enable drill-down, click the Drill Down button in the Data Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up ( ) button in the caption of the Scatter Chart dashboard item, or
the Drill Up command in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 279 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Coloring
Certain dashboard items provide the capability to color dashboard item elements by associating dimension values/measures and
specified colors. You can choose whether to use a global color scheme to provide consistent colors for identical values or specify a
local color scheme for each dashboard item. To learn more about coloring concepts common for all dashboard items, see the
Coloring section.
By default, the Scatter Chart dashboard item does not color its arguments. If necessary, you can change this behavior. For
instance, the image below displays the Scatter Chart dashboard item whose Product Category points are colored by hue.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 280 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Legend
A legend is an element of a scatter chart that identifies chart points (for instance, colored points corresponding to argument
values).

This topic describes how to customize various legend settings.

Visibility
You can specify whether or not a chart should display a legend.
In the Designer, use the Show Legend button in the Legend section of the Design Ribbon tab.

Position and Orientation

To specify the legend's position and orientation, select one of the predefined options from the gallery in the Design Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 281 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 282 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Axes
Scatter Chart X and Y-axes are numerical axis of values. You can specify various axes settings to change visual data presentation.

To access X and Y-axis settings, use the X-Axis Settings/Y-Axis Settings buttons in the Diagram section of the Design Ribbon
tab.

This will invoke the X-Axis Settings/Y-Axis Settings dialog.

In this dialog, you can specify the following settings.

Always show zero level - Specifies whether or not the axis' zero level is visible. If this option is unchecked, the visible axis
range is defined based on the values plotted in the chart.
Note

Note that the X-Axis Settings dialog does not contain this option.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 283 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Reverse - Allows you to reverse the axis. If the axis is reversed, its values are ordered from top to down.
Show grid lines - Allows you to hide and show grid lines for the axis.
Show axis - Allows you to hide and show the axis.
Show title - Allows you to hide and show the axis title. You can choose whether to use the default text or specify a custom
string.
Logarithmic scale - Specifies whether or not the axis should display its numerical values using a logarithmic scale. The
combo box next to this option allows you to select the logarithmic base from one of the predefined values.
The Numeric Format tab allows you to specify the numeric display formats for axis data, as described in the Formatting Data
document.

The tab contains the following settings.

Format type - Specifies format types for numeric values.
Unit - Specifies the unit to convert the numeric values.
Precision - Specifies the number of fractional digits to display.
Currency - Specifies the currency symbol and format provided by the current culture settings.
Culture - Specifies the name of a culture that defines the currency symbol and format.
Include group separator - Specifies whether separators should be inserted between digit groups.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 284 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Orientation
You can rotate the Scatter Chart so that the X-axis becomes vertical, and the Y-axis becomes horizontal.
To rotate a Chart in the Designer, use the Rotate button in the Diagram section of the Design Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 285 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Labels
The Scatter Chart display can display point labels that contain descriptions for data points, and provide tooltips with additional
information.

Point Labels
To manage the visibility of point labels, click the Point Labels button in the Design ribbon tab.

In the invoked Point Label Settings dialog, enable the Show point labels check box to show point labels.

You can specify the following settings for point labels:

Content - Specifies the type of content displayed within point labels. You can select one of the following options.
Values - Point labels show summary values from X and Y-axes.
Argument - Point labels show argument values.
Argument and values - Point labels show argument values and corresponding summary values.
Weight - Point labels show the weight summary value.
Argument and weight - Point labels show the argument value and the corresponding weight summary value.
Overlapping mode - Specifies the label overlap mode. The following options are available.
Hide overlapping labels - If two or more labels overlap, some of them are automatically hidden to avoid overlapping.
None - The overlapping resolving algorithm is disabled.
Reposition overlapping labels - The default algorithm to re-position point labels in a random way, and avoid
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 286 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

overlapping labels.
Orientation - Specifies the orientation of point labels. The following options are available.
Default - A point label is displayed in its default orientation.
Rotate to the Right - A point label is rotated 90 degrees clockwise.
Rotate to the Left - A point label is rotated 90 degrees counter clockwise.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 287 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Grid
The topics in this section describe the features available in the Grid dashboard item, and provide extensive information on how to
create and customize grids in the Dashboard Designer.

This section consists of the following subsections.

Providing Data
Provides information about how to supply the Grid dashboard item with data.
Columns
Describes different types of grid columns.
Interactivity
Describes features that imply interaction between the Grid and other dashboard items.
Conditional Formatting
Describes the conditional formatting feature that provides the capability to apply formatting to grid cells whose values meet
the specified condition.
Totals
Describes totals that allow you to calculate summaries against values displayed within Grid columns.
Layout
Describes the Grid's layout options.
Style
Describes the Grid's style settings.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 288 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner. To learn more, see the
Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic.
The only difference is in the data sections that the required dashboard item has. This topic describes how to bind a Grid
dashboard item to data in the Designer.
The image below shows a sample Grid dashboard item that is bound to data.

To bind the Grid dashboard item to data, drag and drop a data source field to a placeholder contained in one of the available data
sections. A table below lists and describes a Grid's data sections.

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Contains data items that provide values for grid columns. The Options button next to the Column data item allows you to
Columns
select the column type and specify their options.

Sparkline Contains a data item that provides arguments for sparkline columns. To learn more, see Sparkline Column.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 289 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Columns
The topics in this section describe the different types of grid columns, and contain information on when to use each column type
and how to customize them based on the type.
This section consists of the following topics.
Column Type Overview
Provides general information about column types and describes how to change the type of a particular column.
Dimension Column
Describes dimension column specifics.
Hyperlink Column
Describes hyperlink column specifics.
Measure Column
Describes measure column specifics.
Delta Column
Describes delta column specifics.
Sparkline Column
Describes sparkline column specifics.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 290 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Column Type Overview

The Grid dashboard item supports four types of columns.
Dimension Column
Displays values in the bound data item "as is".
Hyperlink Column
Allows you to display hyperlinks in the Grid dashboard item.
Measure Column
Displays summaries calculated against data in the bound data item.
Delta Column
Bound to two measures, it calculates summaries for both measures, and displays the difference between these summaries.
Sparkline Column
Displays values in the bound data item using sparklines.

When you drop a data item into the Columns section, the type for the new column is determined automatically, based on the
data type.

Column Type Indication

The type of the column is indicated within the corresponding data item container in the DATA ITEMS area.

Column type indicators are defined as follows:

ICO N CO LU MN T YPE

Dimension Column

Hyperlink Column

Measure Column

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 291 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

ICO N CO LU MN T YPE

Delta Column

Sparkline Column

Changing Column Type

To change the column type, click the column type indicator. In the invoked Column Options window, select the required column
type in the Column type section.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 292 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dimension Column
The dimension column displays values from the bound data item "as is".

If the dimension column is bound to a data source containing images, it can display images.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 293 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Hyperlink Column
A hyperlink column allows you to display hyperlinks in the Grid dashboard item.

You can provide hyperlinks as a separate data column. or they can be automatically created at run-time from any column using
the specified URI pattern.
In this document, the sample data source contains four fields: country name, official country name, Wikipedia country page's URI
and the GDP value.

The following sections describe how to create hyperlink columns in more detail:
Data Field Containing Uri Values
Uri Pattern

Data Field Containing Uri Values

Drag the Name data field from the Data Source tree view to the column's data item container. The data field is automatically
processed as dimension. Drag and drop the GDP data field to another column's data item container. The data field is recognized
as measure and summarized.

Drop the Link field between the Name and the GDP (Sum) data items. The Grid recognizes this field as dimension and displays
links as plain text.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 294 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Click the Column Type Indicator button next to the Name data item and change its type to Hyperlink.

The Grid displays column values as clickable hyperlinks allowing you to navigate to the Wiki's pages.

You can bind the Display value and URI value to different data fields. Click the New Column data item placeholder and change its
type to Hyperlink.

Drag and drop the OfficialName field to the Display Value data item placeholder to display official country names. Drag and drop
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 295 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

the Link field to the Uri data item placeholder to specify URIs.
The grid displays official country names with links obtained from the Link data source field.

Uri Pattern
In this case, a specified URI pattern is used to generate links.
Drag the Name data field from the Data Source tree view to the column's data item container. The data field is automatically
processed as dimension. Drag and drop the GDP data field to another column's data item container. The data field is recognized
as measure and summarized.

Click the Column Type Indicator button next to the Name data item and change its type to Hyperlink. Specify the URI Pattern
option as follows:
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/{0}

The {0} placeholder is replaced with the Name data item value. The links are generated for country names and displayed in the
grid as illustrated in the following picture.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 296 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 297 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Measure Column
A measure column displays summaries calculated against data in a bound data item.

Values in the measure column can be displayed as text or represented by bars.

To select between these modes, invoke the Column Options window (see Column Type Overview to learn how to do this) and
select Value or Bar.

If bars are displayed, use the Always show zero level check box to specify whether the bar's zero level is always visible.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 298 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Delta Column
A delta column calculates summaries against two measures, and displays the difference between these summaries. This
difference can be indicated with a numeric value displayed within the delta element and an additional delta indication.

Data Binding Specifics

Delta columns are bound to two measures that provide two values: the Actual value and the Target value. The difference
between these values is displayed in the column.
When you switch the column type to Delta, the data item container is changed, to accept the Actual and Target measures.

Display Mode
Values in the delta column can be displayed as text, or represented by bars.

To select between these modes, invoke the Column Options window (see the Column Type Overview topic to learn how to do
this) and select Value or Bar.

If bars are displayed, use the Always show zero level check box to specify whether the bar's minimum value is zero (checked) or
an automatically selected value that ensures that the difference between bars is clearly displayed (unchecked).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 299 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Delta Values and Indication

If the display type is set to Value, the Column Options window displays options that allow you to configure delta values and
indication.

You can specify which values should be displayed in the delta column. To do this, use the Value type combo box in the Column
Options window.

ACTU AL V ALU E AB S O LU TE V AR IATIO N PER CENT V AR IATIO N PER CENT O F TAR G E T

To specify the condition for displaying delta indication, use the Result indication combo box in the Column Options window.

G R E ATER IS G O O D LES S IS G O O D W AR NING IF G R E ATER W AR NING IF LES S NO IND ICATIO N

The Format tab allows you to specify the numeric display format for different value types, as described in the Formatting Data
document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 300 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The tab contains the following settings.

Format type - Specifies format types for numeric values.
Unit - Specifies the unit to convert the numeric values.
Precision - Specifies the number of fractional digits to display.
Currency - Specifies the currency symbol and format provided by the current culture settings.
Culture - Specifies the name of a culture that defines the currency symbol and format.
Include group separator - Specifies whether separators should be inserted between digit groups.

Comparison Tolerance
The comparison tolerance allows you to specify more advanced conditions for displaying delta indication. For instance, you can
set a specific indication to be displayed when the actual value exceeds the target value by 10% or by $2K.
Use the Threshold type combo box to select whether you wish to specify the comparison tolerance in percentage values or in
absolute values. Then use the Threshold value box to specify the comparison tolerance.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 301 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 302 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Sparkline Column
A sparkline column visualizes the variation in summary values over time.

Data Binding Specifics

The sparkline column is bound to a measure providing sparkline values and to a dimension providing a date-time interval.

Sparkline Options
You can control sparkline appearance settings using the Column Options dialog. To invoke this dialog, click the column type
indicator ( ).

In this dialog, you can control various settings that affect how the sparkline is displayed within a grid cell.

S PAR K LINE O PTIO NS D ES CR IPTIO N

Show start/end values Species whether or not to display sparkline start/end values within a grid cell.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 303 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

S PAR K LINE O PTIO NS D ES CR IPTIO N

Sparkline view type Defines the view type of a sparkline. Sparkline view types include Line, Area, Bar, and Win/Loss.

Highlight min/max points Specifies whether or not to highlight the minimum/maximum points of a sparkline.

Highlight start/end points Specifies whether or not to highlight the start/end points of a sparkline.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 304 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This section describes features that enable interaction between the Grid and other dashboard items. These features include
Master Filtering and Drill-Down.
The section consists of the following topics.
Master Filtering
Drill-Down

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 305 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.

Configure Master Filters in the Designer

The Grid dashboard item supports filtering by rows.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a grid row (or multiple rows by holding down the CTRL key) to make other
dashboard items only display data related to the selected record(s).

To learn how to enable Master Filtering in the Designer, see the Master Filtering topic.
To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the grid's caption area, or the Clear Master Filter command
in the grid's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 306 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more about drill-down concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Drill-Down topic.
The Grid dashboard item supports drill-down for rows.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a grid row to view the details.

Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a grid row.
Drill-down requires that the Columns section contains several dimensions at the top, from the least detailed to the most detailed
dimension.

Note

In OLAP mode, you can perform drill-down for either a hierarchy data item or several dimension attributes.
To enable drill-down, click the Drill Down button in the Data Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) within the grid's caption area, or the Drill Up
command in the grid's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 307 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Conditional Formatting
The Grid dashboard item supports the conditional formatting feature that provides the capability to apply formatting to grid cells
whose values meet the specified condition. This feature allows you to highlight specific cells or entire rows using a predefined set
of rules. To learn more about conditional formatting concepts common for all dashboard items, see the Conditional Formatting
topic.
Conditional Formatting Overview
Create a Format Rule
Edit a Format Rule

Conditional Formatting Overview

The Grid dashboard item allows you to apply conditional formatting to data items providing data to the following column types.
dimension column;
measure column;
sparkline column.
Note

Note that you can use hidden measures to specify a condition used to apply formatting to visible values.
New appearance settings are applied to grid cells corresponding to the target dimension/measure values.

Create a Format Rule

To create a new format rule for the Grid's dimension/measure, do one of the following.
Click the Options button next to the required measure/dimension, select Add Format Rule and choose the condition.

Right-click the column header corresponding to the required measure/dimension and select Add Format Rule.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 308 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use the Edit Rules dialog.

Depending on the selected format condition, the dialog used to create a format rule for Grid contains different settings. For
instance, the image below displays the Greater Than dialog corresponding to the Value format condition.

The Apply to row check box allows you to specify whether to apply the formatting to the entire grid row.

Edit a Format Rule

To edit format rules for the current Grid dashboard item, use the following options.
Click the Edit Rules button in the Home ribbon tab or use corresponding item in the Grid context menu.
Click the menu button for the required data item and select Edit Rules. As an alternative, right-click the column header
corresponding to the required data item and select Edit Rules.
All of these actions invoke the Edit Rules dialog containing existing format rules. To learn more, see Conditional Formatting.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 309 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Totals
The Grid dashboard item enables you to add a summary value (a total) calculated against displayed values of an individual
column, and show the result under this column. Note that you can add any number of totals for each column. For example, you
can obtain the number of column records, average or maximum value, etc.

This topic describes how to create, edit or clear totals.

The topic consists of the following sections.
Totals Overview
Create and Edit Totals
Clear Totals

Totals Overview
You can use the following summary functions when creating totals.
Count - The number of records.
Sum - The sum of the values.

Min - The smallest value.

Max - The largest value.
Average - The average of the values.

Auto - The total is calculated using the type of summary function specified for the measure corresponding to the current
Grid column. Note that in this case, the total is calculated based on values of the corresponding data field from the
underlying data source.
You can create totals using different sets of summary functions. This depends on the type of the data source field providing data
for the target column.

ICO N D ATA S O U R CE FIELD T YPE S U PPO R TED TO TALS

Boolean Count

Byte Count

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 310 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

ICO N D ATA S O U R CE FIELD T YPE S U PPO R TED TO TALS

Date-time Min, Max, Count

Numeric All available types

String Min, Max, Count

Im por tant

Note that the Auto type is available only for the Measure column.

Create and Edit Totals

To create a total, use the context menu of the column header. Right-click the required column header, select Add Total and
specify the type of summary function used to calculate a total.

To change the total type, right-click the required total and select a new total type.

Clear Totals
You can delete one total or all the totals in a particular column.
To delete a single total, right-click a total and select Remove.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 311 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To delete all column totals, right-click the column header and select Clear Totals in the invoked context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 312 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Layout
The Grid dashboard item allows you to customize its layout in various ways. You can manage the width of grid columns, specify
the visibility of column headers, enable cell merging, etc.
To do this, use the Layout and Column Width Mode groups in the Design Ribbon tab.

Column Width Modes

Column Header
Cell Merging
Word Wrapping

Column Width Modes

The Grid dashboard item allows you to manage column widths using different modes. Use buttons in the Column Width Mode
group to manage the column width modes.

The following modes are available.

AutoFit to Contents
The grid adjusts columns to the minimum width required to completely display their content automatically. If the entire content
cannot be displayed within the dashboard item, horizontal scrolling is enabled..
AutoFit to G rid
The grid adjusts the width of all columns to fit their content in an optimal way. If you are changing the size of the dashboard item,
the width of columns is changed proportionally..
Manual
The grid allows you to adjust column widths manually.
In this mode, you can adjust the width of individual columns in the following ways.
Specify the width of the required column by dragging the right edge of the column header.

In this case, all columns preserve their relative size when the grid width is changed.
Specify the column width and fix it by right-clicking the required column header and selecting Fix Width.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 313 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can also specify the fixed column width by selecting Column Width... This invokes the Column Width window that
allows you to specify the width of the column in characters.

Fit the column width to its content and fix it by right-clicking the required column header and selecting Fit to Content.

Column Header
Use the Column Headers button to toggle column header visibility.

Cell Merging
The Grid allows you to merge neighboring cells with identical values . To do this, use the Merge Cells button.

Note

Note that banded rows are not available when cell merging is enabled.

Word Wrapping
The word wrapping feature enables the capability to display cell content on multiple lines if the size of a dashboard item is
insufficient to completely display the cell content on a single line.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 314 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

The word wrapping feature is not in effect when the AutoFit to Contents column width mode is enabled.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 315 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Style
The Grid dashboard item allows you to specify various style settings.
To do this, use the Style group in the Design Ribbon tab.

Grid Lines
Banded Rows

Grid Lines
The Horizontal Lines and Vertical Lines buttons control grid line visibility.

Banded Rows
To paint the background of odd and even rows differently, use the Banded Rows button.

Note

Note that banded rows are not available when cell merging is enabled.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 316 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Pies
The Pie dashboard item displays a series of pies or donuts that represent the contribution of each value to a total.

This section consists of the following subsections:

Providing Data
Describes how to supply the Pie dashboard item with data.
Interactivity
Describes features that enable interaction between the Pie dashboard item and other items.
Coloring
Describes coloring capabilities of the Pie dashboard item.
Layout
Describes layout options of the Pie dashboard item.
Labels
Explains how to customize data labels and tooltips.
Style
Describes how to select the style of pie charts.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 317 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner. To learn more, see the
Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic.
The only difference is in the data sections that the required dashboard item has. This topic describes how to bind a Pie dashboard
item to data in the Designer.
Binding to Data in the Designer
Transposing Arguments and Series

Binding to Data in the Designer

The image below shows a sample Pie dashboard item that is bound to data.

To bind the Pie dashboard item to data, drag and drop a data source field to a placeholder contained in one of the available data
sections. A table below lists and describes Pie's data sections.

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Values Contains data items that define the share of pie segments. In case of negative measure values, Pie uses their absolute values.

Arguments Contains data items that provide values used to label pie segments.

Series Contains data items whose values are used to label pie charts.

Transposing Arguments and Series

The Pie dashboard item provides the capability to transpose pie arguments and series. In this case, data items contained in the
Arguments section are moved to the Series section, and vice versa.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 318 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To transpose the selected Pie dashboard item, use the Transpose button in the Home ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 319 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This section describes features that enable interaction between the Pie dashboard item and other items. These features include
Master Filtering and Drill-Down.
The section contains the following topics.
Master Filtering
Drill-Down

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 320 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
The Pie dashboard item supports filtering by argument or series values.

Filtering by Arguments
When filtering by arguments is enabled, you can click a pie segment to make other dashboard items only display data related to
the selected argument value.

To enable filtering by arguments in the Designer, set the required Master Filter mode and click the Arguments button in the Data
Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

Filtering by Series
When filtering by series is enabled, you can click a pie to make other dashboard items display only data related to the selected pie.

To enable filtering by series in the Designer, set the required Master Filter mode and click the Series button in the Data Ribbon
tab (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 321 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filtering by Points
When filtering by points is enabled, you can click a single pie segment to make other dashboard items display only data related to
the selected segment.

To enable filtering by points in the Designer, set the required Master Filter mode and click the Points button in the Data Ribbon
tab.

Reset Filtering
To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the caption area of the Pie dashboard item, or the Clear
Master Filter command in the Pie's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 322 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more about drill-down concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Drill-Down topic.
The Pie dashboard item supports drill-down on argument or series values.

Drill Down on an Argument

When drill down on an argument is enabled, you can click a pie segment to view a detail diagram for the corresponding
argument value.

Note

When Filtering by Arguments is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a pie segment.
Drill down on an argument requires that the Arguments section contains several data items, from the least detailed to the most
detailed item.

Note

In OLAP mode, you can perform drill-down for either a hierarchy data item or several dimension attributes.

To enable drill down on an argument, click the Drill Down button in the Data Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the
toolbar menu)...

...and the Arguments button (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 323 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill Down on a Series

When drill down on a series is enabled, you can click a pie chart to view a detail diagram for the corresponding series value.

Note

When Filtering by Series is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a pie chart.
Drill down on a series requires that the Series section contains several data items, from the least detailed to the most detailed
item.

Note

In OLAP mode, you can perform drill-down for either a hierarchy data item or several dimension attributes.

To enable drill down on a series, click the Drill Down button in the Data Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the
toolbar menu)...

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 324 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

...and the Series button (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

Drill Up
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the caption area of the Pie dashboard item,
or the Drill Up command in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 325 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Coloring
Certain dashboard items provide the capability to color dashboard item elements by associating dimension values/measures and
specified colors. You can choose whether to use a global color scheme to provide consistent colors for identical values or specify a
local color scheme for each dashboard item. To learn more about coloring concepts common for all dashboard items, see the
Coloring section.
By default, the Pie dashboard item colors its segments in the following way.
If the Pie dashboard item contains measures (the Values section) and series dimensions (the Series section), only values
corresponding to different measures are colored by hue.
If the Pie dashboard item contains arguments (the Arguments section), different argument values are colored by hue.
If necessary, you can change the default behavior. For instance, the image below shows the Pie dashboard item whose measures
and argument values are colored by hue.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 326 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Layout
The Pie dashboard item allows you to specify the number of columns or rows in which individual diagrams are arranged.
To control how pies are arranged, use the buttons in the Content Arrangement group of the Design Ribbon tab.
By default, the Auto Arrange option is enabled, which automatically resizes pies to fit within the dashboard item.

You can also specify the number of columns in which pies are arranged. Click the Arrange in Columns button and specify the
appropriate number in the Count field.

Similarly, you can arrange pies in a specific number of rows.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 327 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 328 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Labels

You can specify which information should be displayed within data labels and tooltips. To do this, use the Data Labels and
Tooltips buttons in the Labels group of the Design Ribbon tab.

These buttons invoke a drop-down menu that is similar for both buttons. This menu allows you to specify which values are
displayed within data labels or tooltips.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 329 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Style
The Pie dashboard item allows you to select whether diagrams should be painted as pies or donuts.

To select the diagram style, use the Pie and Donut buttons in the Style section of the Design Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 330 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Cards
The Card dashboard item displays a series of cards. Each card illustrates the difference between two values. This difference can be
expressed as an absolute value, an absolute variation or a percentage variation.

This section consists of the following subsections:

Providing Data
Provides information about how to supply the Card dashboard item with data.
Layout
Describes how to manage the position and visibility of elements within a card.
Delta
Provides an overview of the Card dashboard item's capability to display the difference between two parameters.
Sparkline
Provides an overview of the Card dashboard item's capability to visualize data using sparklines.
Formatting
Shows how to format values displayed within a card.
Interactivity
Describes features that enable interaction between the Card dashboard item and other items.
Cards Arrangement
Describes how to arrange cards within the Card dashboard item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 331 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner. To learn more, see the
Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic.
The only difference is in the data sections that the required dashboard item has. This topic describes how to bind a Card
dashboard item to data in the Designer.

Binding to Data in the Designer

The image below shows a sample Card dashboard item that is bound to data.

To bind the Card dashboard item to data, drag and drop a data source field to a placeholder contained in one of the available data
sections. A table below lists and describes Card data sections.

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Contains data items used to calculate values displayed within cards. Data items are arranged in containers. Each data item
container can hold two data items. The first item contains actual data and the second item (optional) contains target data. If
both items are provided, cards show the difference between actual and target values. You can fill several data item containers
Cards
in the Cards section and use the Values drop-down menu to switch between the provided values. To invoke the Values menu,
click the icon in the dashboard item caption or use its context menu. This drop-down menu is available if the Series section
is not empty. Otherwise, a separate card is created for each data item container, and all cards are displayed simultaneously.

Series Contains data items whose values are used to label cards.

Sparkline Provide a dimension whose data will be used to visualize values using sparklines.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 332 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Layout
The Card dashboard item allows you to manage the position and visibility of elements displayed on cards. These elements include
actual and target values, a delta indicator and corresponding delta values, a sparkline, etc.
To manage the position and visibility of card elements, choose a predefined layout template and customize its settings.
Available Layout Templates
Default Layout
Change Layout

Available Layout Templates

The table below contains information about the available layout templates:

L AYO U T
T YPE E X AMPLE D ES CR IPTIO N

The Stretched layout template arranges card elements so that they occupy an
Stretched
entire card area.

The Centered layout template is used to center card elements so that they
Centered
occupy a specified width/height.

The Compact layout template is used to arrange card elements so that they
Compact
occupy the minimum area.

The Lightweight layout template displays the minimum set of elements within a
Lightweight
card.

For all layout types, you can change the visibility of its elements, or you can specify the display value type for data-bound
elements. To learn more, see the Change Layout paragraph below.

Default Layout
The Card dashboard item uses the Stretched layout template that arranges card visual elements in the following way by default:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 333 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To learn more about the available value types and visual elements, see Change Layout.
Note

Delta Indicator and delta values (such as Percent Variation or Absolute Variation) are colored depending on delta settings.
To learn how to manage delta settings, see Delta.

Change Layout
To change a card's layout in the Dashboard Designer, click the Options button (the icon) displayed next to the data item
container in the Cards section.

This invokes the Card Settings dialog.

On the Layout Options tab, select the required layout type in the Select template list and specify its settings:
Min width - Specifies the minimum width of the card content.
Max width - Specifies the maximum width of the card content. Use the Auto option to determine the maximum width
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 334 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

automatically.
You can show/hide the following values and visual elements within the card:

V ALU E D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Displays values of the last (bottommost) dimension placed in the Series

Title Microsoft Office Keyboard
section.

Displays combined values of all dimensions except the last (bottommost) Technology - Computer
Subtitle
dimension. Peripherals

Absolute
An absolute difference between the actual and target value (see Delta). +18.1K
Variation

Actual Value A summary value for a measure placed in the Actual placeholder. $392K

Card Name A card name. Revenue vs. Target

Percent of
A percent of a target value (see Delta). 104.85 %
Target

Percent
A percent difference between the actual and target value (see Delta). 4.85 %
Variation

Target Value A summary value for a measure placed in the Target placeholder. $374K

Dimension Allows you to display values of a specific dimension placed in the Series
Technology
{Name} section.

Element Description Example

Indicates whether the actual value is less or greater than the target value (see
Delta Indicator
Delta).

Sparkline Visualizes the variation of actual or target values. To learn more, see Sparkline.

Use the Apply to All Cards button to propagate the specified layout settings to all cards corresponding to Actual-Target pairs.
The Reset button resets all setting to their default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 335 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Delta
Cards allow you to visualize the difference between the actual and target values using special delta values and a delta indicator. If
the default layout is used (Stretched layout type), the card displays the following delta values/elements:

Delta Indicator - Indicates whether the actual value is less or greater than the target value.
Percent Variation and Absolute Variation - delta values that show a difference between the actual and target value. You
can also display the Percent of Target value. To do this, customize the card's layout.
To customize settings that relate to the calculation and display of delta values/elements, use the Options button (the icon)
displayed next to the data item container in the Cards section.

In the invoked Card Settings dialog, go to the Delta Options tab:

Then, specify the following settings:

Result Indication - You can specify the condition for displaying delta indication.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 336 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Greater is Good - The 'good' indication is displayed if the actual value exceeds the target value; if the target value
exceeds the actual value, the 'bad' indication displays.

Less is Good - The 'bad' indication displays if the actual value exceeds the target value; if the target value exceeds the
actual value, the 'good' indication displays.

Warning if Greater - A warning is displays only if the actual value exceeds the target value.

Warning if Less - A warning is displays only if the target value exceeds the actual value.

No Indication - Indication does not display.

Threshold type / Threshold value - For instance, you can specify that a specific indication should display when the actual
value exceeds the target value by 10% or by $2K. Use the Threshold type combo box to select whether you wish to specify
the comparison tolerance in percentage values or absolute values. Then use the Threshold value box to specify the
comparison tolerance.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 337 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Sparkline
Sparklines can be used to visualize the variation of actual or target values (for instance, over time).

To learn how to display the sparkline for different layout types, see Layout.
Data Binding Specifics
Change Sparkline Options

Data Binding Specifics

You need to provide a date-time or numeric dimension whose data is used as argument values to display a sparkline within the
card.

If you have provided both actual and target values, a sparkline visualizes the actual value's variation.

Change Sparkline Options

To manage sparkline settings, click the Options button (the icon) displayed next to the data item container. In the invoked Card
Settings dialog, go to the Sparkline Options tab:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 338 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The following options are available:

S PAR K LINE O PTIO NS D ES CR IPTIO N

Defines the sparkline’s view type. Sparkline data points can be represented as area, line, bars, or win and loss
Sparkline view type
squares.

Highlight min/max
Specifies whether to highlight the minimum/maximum points of a sparkline.
points

Highlight start/end
Specifies whether to highlight the start/end points of a sparkline.
points

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 339 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Formatting
The Card dashboard item formats the actual and target values displayed within cards using format settings specified for data
items. Click the options buttons (the icon) displayed next to the data item container in the Cards section to change format
settings for other values.

In the invoked Card Settings dialog, go to the Format Options tab and use the Select value type option to specify which
values’ format settings should change.

You can change format settings for the following value types:
Actual Value
Target Value
Absolute Variation
Percent of Target
Percent Variation
To learn more about format settings, see Formatting Numeric Values in the Formatting Data topic.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 340 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This section describes features that enable interaction between the Card dashboard item and other items. These features include
Master Filtering and Drill-Down.
The section contains the following topics.
Master Filtering
Drill-Down

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 341 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a card (or multiple cards by holding down the CTRL key) to make other dashboard
items only display data related to the selected card(s).

To learn how to enable Master Filtering in the Designer, see the Master Filtering topic.
To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the caption of the Card dashboard item, or the Clear Master
Filter command in the Card's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 342 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more about drill-down concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Drill-Down topic.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a card to view the details.

Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a card.
Drill-down requires that the Series section contains several dimensions, from the least to the most detailed dimension.

Note

In OLAP mode, you can perform drill-down for either a hierarchy data item or several dimension attributes.
To enable drill-down, click the Drill Down button in the Data Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the caption of the Card dashboard item, or
the Drill Up command in the Card's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 343 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Cards Arrangement
The Card dashboard item allows you to specify the number of columns or rows in which individual cards are arranged.
Use the buttons in the Content Arrangement group of the Design Ribbon tab to control how cards are arranged.
The Auto Arrange option is enabled by default, which automatically resizes cards to fit within the dashboard item.

You can also specify the number of columns in which cards are arranged. Click the Arrange in Columns button and specify the
appropriate number in the Count field.

Similarly, you can arrange cards in a specific number of rows.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 344 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 345 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Gauges
The Gauge dashboard item displays a series of gauges. Each gauge can communicate two values - one with a needle and the
other with a marker on the scale.

This section consists of the following subsections:

Providing Data
Provides information about how to supply the Gauge dashboard item with data.
Delta
Provides an overview of the Gauge dashboard item's capability to display the difference between two parameters.
Gauge Scale
Describes options that relate to the gauge scales.
Interactivity
Describes features that enable interaction between the Gauge dashboard item and other items.
Layout
Describes layout options of the Gauge dashboard item.
Style
Provides information about how to specify the gauge style.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 346 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner. To learn more, see the
Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic.
The only difference is in the data sections that the required dashboard item has. This topic describes how to bind a Gauge
dashboard item to data in the Designer.
The image below shows a sample Gauge dashboard item that is bound to data.

To bind the Gauge dashboard item to data, drag and drop a data source field to a placeholder contained in one of the available
data sections. A table below lists and describes Gauge's data sections.

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Contains data items used to calculate values displayed by gauges. Data items are arranged in containers. Each data item
container can hold two data items. The first item contains actual data and the second item (optional) contains target data. If
both items are provided, gauges show the difference between actual and target values. You can fill several data item containers
Gauges
in the Gauges section and use the Values drop-down menu to switch between the provided values. To invoke the Values
menu, click the icon in the dashboard item caption. This drop-down menu is available if the Series section is not empty.
Otherwise, a separate gauge is created for each data item container, and all gauges are displayed simultaneously.

Series Contains data items whose values are used to label gauges.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 347 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Delta
Gauges allow you to display the difference between the actual and target values of a particular parameter. This difference is called
delta.
Delta is shown with a delta indicator (indicating whether the actual value is less than or greater than the target value) and delta
values (representing this difference as an absolute value or a variation).

To customize settings that relate to the calculation and display of deltas, use the options buttons (the icon) displayed next to
the data item container in the Gauges section of the DATA ITEMS pane.

These buttons invoke the Gauge Options dialog.

Use it to define the condition for displaying delta indication, specify which delta values should be displayed, and introduce the
comparison tolerance.
Delta Values
Delta Indication
Comparison Tolerance

Delta Values
You can specify which values should be displayed within gauges. Use the Value type combo box in the Gauge Options window
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 348 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

to select the value that will be displayed as the delta value.

V ALU E T YPE R ES U LT

Actual Value

Absolute Variation

Percentage Variation

Percentage of Target

Delta Indication
You can specify the condition for displaying delta indication. To do this, use the Result indication combo box in the Gauge
Options window.
Greater is Good - The 'good' indication is displayed if the actual value exceeds the target value; if the target value exceeds
the actual value, the 'bad' indication is displayed.

Less is Good - The 'bad' indication is displayed if the actual value exceeds the target value; if the target value exceeds the
actual value, the 'good' indication is displayed.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 349 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

No Indication - Indication is not displayed.

Warning if Greater - A warning is displayed if the actual value exceeds the target value; otherwise, no indication is displayed.

Warning if Less - A warning is displayed if the target value exceeds the actual value; otherwise, no indication is displayed.

Comparison Tolerance
The comparison tolerance allows you to create more advanced conditions for displaying delta indication. For instance, you can
specify that a specific indication should be displayed when the actual value exceeds the target value by 10% or by $2K.
Use the Threshold type combo box to select whether you wish to specify the comparison tolerance in percentage values or in
absolute values. Then use the Threshold value box to specify the comparison tolerance.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 350 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Gauge Scale
By default, the Gauge dashboard item automatically determines the range of the gauge scales based on the values they display.

You can override this behavior and specify the maximum and minimum values on the scale.
To do this, invoke the Gauge Options window using the Options button displayed in the data item container in the Gauges
section of the DATA ITEMS pane.

In the Gauge Options window, uncheck the Auto check box for the maximum or minimum value, and specify this value in the
corresponding field.

The Format tab allows you to specify the numeric display formats for for different value types, as described in the Formatting
Data document.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 351 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The tab contains the following settings.

Format type - Specifies format types for numeric values.
Unit - Specifies the unit to convert the numeric values.
Precision - Specifies the number of fractional digits to display.
Currency - Specifies the currency symbol and format provided by the current culture settings.
Culture - Specifies the name of a culture that defines the currency symbol and format.
Include group separator - Specifies whether separators should be inserted between digit groups.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 352 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This section describes features that enable interaction between the Gauge dashboard item and other items. These features
include Master Filtering and Drill-Down.
The section contains the following topics.
Master Filtering
Drill-Down

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 353 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When master filtering is enabled, you can click a gauge (or multiple gauges by holding down the CTRL key) to make other
dashboard items only display data related to the selected gauge(s).

To learn how to enable master filtering in the Designer, see the Master Filtering topic.
To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the caption of the Gauge dashboard item, or the Clear
Master Filter command in the Gauge’s context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 354 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more about drill-down concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Drill-Down topic.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a gauge to view the details.

Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a gauge.
Drill-down requires that the Series section contains several dimensions, from the least detailed to the most detailed dimension.

Note

In OLAP mode, you can perform drill-down for either a hierarchy data item or several dimension attributes.
To enable drill-down, click the Drill Down button in the Data Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the caption of the Gauge dashboard item, or
the Drill Up command in the Gauge’s context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 355 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Layout
The Gauge dashboard item allows you to specify the number of columns or rows in which individual gauges are arranged.
To control how gauges are arranged, use the buttons in the Content Arrangement group of the Design Ribbon tab.
By default, the Auto Arrange option is enabled, which automatically resizes gauges to fit within the dashboard item.

You can also specify the number of columns in which gauges are arranged. Click the Arrange in Columns button and specify the
appropriate number in the Count field.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 356 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Similarly, you can arrange pies in a specific number of rows by clicking the Arrange in Rows button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 357 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Style
The Gauge dashboard item allows you to select the gauge type.
The following types are supported.
Full Circular:

Half Circular:

Left-Quarter Circular:

Right-Quarter Circular:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 358 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Three-Fourths Circular

Linear Horizontal:

Linear Vertical:

To select the gauge type, use the buttons in the Style group of the Design Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 359 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 360 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Pivot
The Pivot dashboard item displays a cross-tabular report that presents multi-dimensional data in an easy-to-read format.

This section consists of the following subsections:

Providing Data
Explains how to supply the Pivot dashboard item with data.
Interactivity
Describes features that enable interaction between the Pivot and other dashboard items.
Conditional Formatting
Describes the conditional formatting feature that provides the capability to apply formatting to cells whose values meet the
specified condition.
Layout
Describes the Pivot dashboard item's layout options.
Expanded State
Describes how to specify whether to expand column/row groups by default.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 361 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner. To learn more, see the
Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic.
The only difference is in the data sections that the required dashboard item has. This topic describes how to bind a Pivot
dashboard item to data in the Designer.
Binding to Data in the Designer
Transposing Columns and Rows

Binding to Data in the Designer

The image below shows a sample Pivot dashboard item that is bound to data.

To bind the Pivot dashboard item to data, drag and drop a data source field to a placeholder contained in one of the available data
sections. A table below lists and describes a Pivot's data sections.

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Values Contains data items used to calculate values displayed in the pivot table.

Columns Contains data items whose values are used to label columns.

Rows Contains data items whose values are used to label rows.

Transposing Columns and Rows

The Pivot dashboard item provides the capability to transpose pivot columns and rows. In this case, data items contained in the
Columns section are moved to the Rows section and vice versa.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 362 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To transpose the selected Pivot dashboard item, use the Transpose button in the Home ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 363 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the features that enable interaction between the Pivot and other dashboard items. These features
include Master Filtering.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data-aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
Data displayed in the Pivot dashboard item can be filtered by other master filter items. You can prevent the pivot from being
affected by other master filter items using the Ignore Master Filters button on the Data Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 364 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Conditional Formatting
The Pivot dashboard item supports the conditional formatting feature that provides the capability to apply formatting to cells
whose values meet the specified condition. This feature allows you to highlight specific cells or entire rows/columns using a
predefined set of rules. To learn more about conditional formatting concepts common for all dashboard items, see the
Conditional Formatting topic.
Conditional Formatting Overview
Create a Format Rule
Edit a Format Rule

Conditional Formatting Overview

The Pivot dashboard item allows you to use conditional formatting to measures placed in the Values section and dimensions
placed in the Columns/Rows sections.
Note

Note that you can use hidden measures to specify a condition used to apply formatting to visible values.
New appearance settings are applied to pivot data cell or cells corresponding to column/row field values.

Create a Format Rule

To create a new format rule for the Pivot's dimension/measure, do one of the following.
Click the Options button next to the required measure/dimension, select Add Format Rule and choose the condition.
Use the Edit Rules dialog.
Depending on the selected format condition, the dialog used to create a format rule for Pivot contains different settings. For
instance, the image below displays the Greater Than dialog invoked for the measure.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 365 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This dialog contains the following settings specific to Pivot.

Intersection mode specifies the level on which to apply conditional formatting to pivot cells. The following levels are
supported.
1. Auto - Identifies the default level. For the Pivot dashboard item, Auto identifies the First Level.
2. First Level - First level values are used to apply conditional formatting.
3. Last Level - The last level values are used to apply conditional formatting.
4. All Levels - All pivot data cells are used to apply conditional formatting.
5. Specific Level - Values from the specific level are used to apply conditional formatting.
If you specified the Intersection mode as Specific Level, use the Row dimension and Column dimension combo boxes
to set the specific level.
The Apply to row and Apply to column check boxes allow you to specify whether to apply the formatting to the entire
pivot row/column.
Note

If you are creating a new format rule for the dimension from the Columns/Rows section, the corresponding format condition
dialog would not contain any Pivot specific settings.

Edit a Format Rule

To edit format rules for the current Grid dashboard item, use the following options.
Click the Edit Rules button in the Home ribbon tab or use corresponding item in the Pivot context menu.
Click the menu button for the required data item and select Edit Rules.
All of these actions invoke the Edit Rules dialog containing existing format rules. To learn more, see Conditional Formatting.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 366 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Layout
This topic describes how to control the Pivot dashboard item layout, the visibility of totals and grand totals, etc.
Layout Type
Totals Visibility
Totals Position
Values Visibility
Values Position
Reset Layout Options

Layout Type
If the Pivot dashboard item contains a hierarchy of dimensions in the Rows section, you can specify the layout used to arrange
values corresponding to individual groups.

L AYO U T
T YPE E X AMPLE D ES CR IPTIO N

Displays values from different Row dimensions in a single column. Note that in this case
Compact
totals are shown at the top of a group, and you cannot change totals position.

Tabular Displays values from different Row dimensions in separate columns.

Use the Layout button in the Design ribbon tab to change the Pivot layout.

Totals Visibility
You can control the visibility of totals and grand totals for the entire Pivot dashboard item. For instance, the image below displays
the Pivot dashboard item with the disabled row totals.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 367 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To manage the visibility of totals and grand totals, use the Totals and Grand Totals buttons in the Design ribbon tab,
respectively.

These buttons invoke a popup menu that allows you to manage the visibility of column and row totals/grand totals separately.
Moreover, you can control the visibility of totals for individual dimensions/measures by using the data item's context menu
(Show Totals and Show Grand Totals options).

Totals Position
If necessary, you can change the Pivot dashboard item’s totals/grand totals position. For instance, in the image below the row
totals are moved from the bottom to the top.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 368 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To manage totals position, use the Row Totals Position and Column Totals Position buttons in the Design ribbon tab.

Values Visibility
The Pivot dashboard item can contain several measures in the Values section to hide summary values corresponding to specific
measures. For instance, the image below shows the Pivot with hidden Quantity values.

To do this, use the Show Values command in the measure menu.

Values Position
The Pivot dashboard item allows you to control the position of headers used to arrange summary values corresponding to
different measures. For instance, you can display values in columns or rows.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 369 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To manage this position, use the Values Position button in the Design ribbon tab.

Reset Layout Options

To reset layout options, click the Reset Layout Options button in the Design ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 370 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Expanded State
If the Columns or Rows section contains several data items, the Pivot column and row headers are arranged in a hierarchy and
make up column and row groups.

You can collapse and expand row and column groups using the and buttons. However, the current expanded state of column
and row groups do not save in the dashboard definition. If necessary, you can specify the default expanded state using the Initial
State button in the Design ribbon tab.

This button invokes the popup menu that allows you to select whether column and row groups should be collapsed or expanded
by default.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 371 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Choropleth Map
The topics in this section describe the features available in the Choropleth Map dashboard item.
The Choropleth Map dashboard item allows you to colorize the required areas in proportion to the provided values.

This section consists of the following subsections:

Providing Maps
Describes how to use default dashboard maps or provide custom maps.
Providing Data
Explains how to supply the Choropleth Map dashboard item with data.
Map Coloring
Details how to color map shapes based on the values provided.
Map Navigation
Explains how to manage map zooming and scrolling.
Interactivity
Describes features that enable interaction between the Choropleth Map and other dashboard items.
Labels
Describes how to display additional information related to map shapes.
Legend
Explains the map legend and its options.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 372 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Maps
This document explains how to use the default ReportsNow Dashboard maps, or provide custom maps.

Default Maps
ReportsNow Dashboard ships with a set of default maps showing various parts of the world. The following maps are included.
World Countries - a world map.
Europe - a map of Europe.
Asia - a map of Asia.
North America - a map of North America.
South America - a map of South America.
Africa - a map of Africa.
USA - a map of the USA.
Canada - a map of Canada.
Note

Note that the World Countries map has a lower level of detail than maps of specific regions and may not contain some
countries. As an alternative, you can load a custom map with the required granularity.
To select the required default map, use the Default Map button in the Open group of the Design ribbon tab.

As an alternative, use the corresponding command in the map context menu.

Custom Maps
ReportsNow Dashboard uses a Shapefile vector format to provide custom maps. Commonly, this format includes two file types.
.shp file - holds map shapes (points/lines/polygons).
.dbf file - contains attributes for each shape.
To open an existing shapefile, use the Load Map or Import Map button in the Ribbon, or the command in the context menu
(Load Map... or Import Map...).

In the invoked dialog, locate the required .shp file. Note that custom maps created in the Cartesian coordinate system are not
supported.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 373 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

If the map is opened using the Load Map button, the dashboard definition will contain the path to a map shapefile. If the map is
opened using the Import Map button, the dashboard definition will contain the map itself.
Note

Attributes from the corresponding .dbf file located in the same directory will be included in the map automatically.

Map Attributes
After you select the default map or a custom map, you can view supplemental information (such as the name of the country, state,
etc.). To do this, click the Options button next to the Attribute placeholder.

In the invoked Map Attribute Binding dialog, click Preview.

This table displays the available attributes for the current map. Each set of attribute values is related to a specific map shape.
To learn how to bind the map attribute to a data source field, see the Providing Data topic.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 374 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner. To learn more, see the
Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic.
The only difference is in the data sections that the required dashboard item has. This topic describes how to bind a Choropleth
Map dashboard item to data in the Designer.
The image below shows a sample Choropleth Map dashboard item that is bound to data.

To bind the Choropleth Map dashboard item to data, drag and drop a data source field to a placeholder contained in one of the
available data sections. The Choropleth Map provides two data item groups for data binding: DATA ITEMS and TOOLTIP DATA
ITEMS. Tables below list the available data sections.
DATA ITEMS
Attribute - Allows you to associate map shapes with data source field values.
To associate map shapes with data source field values, drag-and-drop the required dimension to the data item's placeholder
and select the required attribute in the Map Attribute Binding dialog. To invoke this dialog, click the Options button (the
icon) next to the Attribute placeholder.

Select the required attribute and click OK.

Maps - Contains data items whose values are used to color map shapes. Map shape colors vary based on the map type.
Click the Options button (the or icon depending on the map type) next to the Value placeholder and select the
required map type in the invoked Choropleth Map Options dialog.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 375 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

If you select Value, the Choropleth map colors map shapes depending on the values provided. To learn more, see
Map Coloring.
If you select Delta, the Choropleth map colors map shapes depending on the difference between two values. To learn
how to specify delta indication settings, see Delta.
Note

You can fill several data item containers in the Maps section and use the Values drop-down menu to switch between
the provided values. To invoke the Values menu, click the icon in the dashboard item caption.
TOOLTIP DATA ITEMS
Measures - Allows you to add supplementary content to the tooltips. Drag and drop the required measures to provide
additional data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 376 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Map Coloring
The Choropleth Map dashboard item colors map shapes depending on the data provided.
For instance, you can visualize a sales amount or population density.

Palette and Scale Settings

The Choropleth Map automatically selects palette and scale settings to color map shapes.
If you need to customize these settings, click the Options button next to the data item that contains these values.

This invokes the Choropleth Map Options dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 377 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can specify the following settings in this window.

Color palette - allows you to specify the start and end color of the palette.
Scale settings - specifies whether a percent scale or an absolute scale is used to define a set of colors. You can specify the
number of levels that represent the number of colors used to color the map.
Preview is used to display a full set of palette colors generated based on the start/end colors and the number of levels. Use
the Allow Edit check box to automatically change the generated colors or specify value ranges for each color.
To learn how to display a map legend, see Legend.
Also, the Choropleth Map allows you to visualize the difference between the actual and target values of a particular parameter. To
learn more, see the Delta topic.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 378 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Delta
The Choropleth Map allows you to indicate the difference between the actual and target values of a particular parameter. This
difference is called delta.

Delta Options
To specify delta indication settings, click the Options button next to the data item container.

This invokes the Choropleth Map Options dialog. When the map type is set to Delta, this dialog contains the following settings.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 379 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Value Type
You can specify which values to display within map tooltips. Use the Value type combo box to select the value that will be
displayed as the delta value.

V ALU E T YPE TO O LTIP

Actual value

Absolute variation

Percent variation

Percent of target

Result Indication
You can specify the condition that will be used to select the indicator color. To do this, use the Result indication combo
box.

R ES U LT IND ICATIO N AR E A CO LO R

Greater is good

Less is good

Warning if greater

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 380 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

R ES U LT IND ICATIO N AR E A CO LO R

Warning if less

No indication

Threshold type and Threshold value

You can specify that a required indicator should only be displayed when the difference between the actual and target values
exceeds a specified value. For instance, the actual value exceeds the target value by 10%, or by $2K.
Use the Threshold type combo box to select whether you wish to specify the threshold in percentage values or in absolute
values. Then use the Threshold value box to specify the threshold value.
The Format tab allows you to specify the numeric display formats for for different value types, as described in the Formatting
Data document.

The tab contains the following settings.

Format type - Specifies format types for numeric values.
Unit - Specifies the unit to convert the numeric values.
Precision - Specifies the number of fractional digits to display.
Currency - Specifies the currency symbol and format provided by the current culture settings.
Culture - Specifies the name of a culture that defines the currency symbol and format.
Include group separator - Specifies whether separators should be inserted between digit groups.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 381 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Map Navigation
The Choropleth Map dashboard item allows you to perform navigation actions such as zooming and scrolling.
The Dashboard Designer allows you to specify the initial zooming/scrolling state for the Choropleth map using the mouse.
You can disable the capability to scroll/zoom the map using the Lock Navigation button in the Design ribbon tab.

Use the Full Extent button to display the entire map within the dashboard item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 382 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the Master Filtering feature, which enables interaction between the Choropleth Map and other
dashboard items.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter).To learn
more about the filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a shape (or multiple shapes by holding down the CTRL key) to make other
dashboard items only display data related to the selected shape(s).

To learn how to enable Master Filtering in the Designer, see the Master Filtering topic.
To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the map's caption, or the Clear Master Filter command in
the map's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 383 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Labels
A Choropleth map provides the capability to display titles within map shapes and allows you to manage what data to show in the
shape tooltips.
To manage map titles and tooltips, click the Shape Labels button in the Design ribbon tab.

This invokes the Shape Label Settings dialog.

In this dialog, you can specify attributes whose values will be displayed within shapes and tooltips. Use the button to preview
the available attributes and their values for the current map.

Shape Titles
The Title attribute option allows you to select the attribute whose values are displayed within corresponding map shapes.

You can also use the Include summary value option to add summary values to shape titles.

Tooltips
The Choropleth Map dashboard item displays a tooltip that shows information related to a hovered shape.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 384 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can choose whether to use a binding attribute to display as the title of shape tooltips (the Use binding attribute option) or
specify a custom attribute using the Tooltip attribute option.

The Choropleth Map also allows you to add supplementary content to the tooltips using the TOOLTIP DATA ITEMS area. To learn
more, see the Providing Data topic.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 385 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Legend
A legend is an element of a map that shows values corresponding to each color.

Visibility
To display a legend within a map, use the Show Legend button in the Legend group of the Design Ribbon tab.

Position and Orientation

To specify the legend's position and orientation, select one of the predefined options from the gallery in the Design Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 386 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Geo Point Maps

The topics in this section describe various types of Geo Point Map dashboard items that allow you to place callouts, bubbles or
pies on the map using geographical coordinates.

This section consists of the following subsections.

Map Types Overview
Lists the available types of Geo Point maps and their features.
Providing Maps
Explains how to use default dashboard maps or provide custom maps.
Geo Point Map | Bubble Map | Pie Map
Describe specific capabilities of various Geo Point Map types.
Clustering
Describes the feature that enables grouping of neighboring map objects.
Interactivity
Describes features that enable interaction between the Geo Point maps and other dashboard items.
Labels
Describes how to display additional information related to map shapes.
Map Navigation
Explains how to manage map zooming and scrolling.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 387 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Map Types Overview

The Dashboard Designer allows you to create three types of Geo Point maps.
The Geo Point Map dashboard item allows you to place callouts on the map using geographical coordinates.

The Bubble Map dashboard item allows you to place bubbles on the map. Each bubble can represent data using its weight
and color.

The Pie Map dashboard item allows you to display pies on the map. Each pie visualizes the contribution of each value to the
total.

To create the required Geo Point Map dashboard item, use the Geo Point Maps button in the Home ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 388 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To learn more about common capabilities of all Geo Point map types, see the following topics.
Providing Maps
Explains how to use default dashboard maps or provide custom maps.
Clustering
Describes the feature that enables grouping of neighboring map objects.
Interactivity
Describes features that enable interaction between the Geo Point maps and other dashboard items.
Labels
Describes how to display additional information related to map shapes.
Map Navigation
Explains how to manage map zooming and scrolling.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 389 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Maps
This document explains how to use the default ReportsNow Dashboard maps, or provide custom maps.

Default Maps
ReportsNow Dashboard ships with a set of default maps showing various parts of the world. The following maps are included.
World Countries - a world map.
Europe - a map of Europe.
Asia - a map of Asia.
North America - a map of North America.
South America - a map of South America.
Africa - a map of Africa.
USA - a map of the USA.
Canada - a map of Canada.
Note

Note that the World Countries map has a lower level of detail than maps of specific regions and may not contain some
countries. As an alternative, you can load a custom map with the required granularity.
To select the default map, use the Default Map button in the Design ribbon tab.

As an alternative, use the corresponding command in the map's context menu.

Custom Maps
ReportsNow Dashboard uses a Shapefile vector format to provide custom maps. Commonly, this format includes two file types.
.shp file - holds map shapes (points/lines/polygons).
.dbf file - contains attributes for each shape.
To open an existing shapefile, use the Load Map or Import Map button in the Ribbon, or the command in the context menu
(Load Map... or Import Map...).

In the invoked dialog, locate the required .shp file. Note that custom maps created in the Cartesian coordinate system are not
supported.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 390 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

If the map is opened using the Load Map button, the dashboard definition will contain the path to a map shapefile. If the map is
opened using the Import Map button, the dashboard definition will contain the map itself.
Note

Attributes from the corresponding .dbf file located in the same directory will automatically be included in the map.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 391 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Geo Point Map

The Geo Point Map dashboard item allows you to place callouts on the map using geographical coordinates.

Topics in this section describe specific capabilities of the Geo Point Map dashboard item.
Providing Data

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 392 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
This topic describes how to bind the Geo Point Map dashboard item to data using the Dashboard Designer.
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner (see Binding
Dashboard Items to Data for details). The only difference is in the data sections that these dashboard items have.
The image below shows a sample Geo Point Map dashboard item that is bound to data.

Note that the Geo Point Map provides two data item groups for data binding: DATA ITEMS and TOOLTIP DATA ITEMS. Tables
below list the available data sections.
DATA ITEMS

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Latitude Accepts a dimension used to provide geographic latitude.

Longitude Accepts a dimension used to provide geographic longitude.

Value Accepts values related to geographic points. These values are displayed within map callouts.

TOOLTIP DATA ITEMS

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Dimensions Accepts dimensions allowing you to add supplementary content to the tooltips.

Measures Accepts measures allowing you to add summaries to the tooltips.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 393 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Bubble Map
The Bubble Map dashboard item allows you to place bubbles on the map. Each bubble can represent data using its weight and
color.

Topics in this section describe specific capabilities of the Bubble Map dashboard item.
Providing Data
Coloring
Legends

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 394 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
This topic describes how to bind the Bubble Map dashboard item to data using the Dashboard Designer.
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner (see Binding
Dashboard Items to Data for details). The only difference is in the data sections that these dashboard items have.
The image below shows a sample Bubble Map dashboard item that is bound to data.

Note that the Bubble Map provides two data item groups for data binding: DATA ITEMS and TOOLTIP DATA ITEMS. Tables below
list the available data sections.
DATA ITEMS
Latitude - Accepts a dimension used to provide geographic latitude.
Longitude - Accepts a dimension used to provide geographic longitude.
Weight - Accepts a measure used to evaluate the bubble's weight.
Color - Accepts a measure used to evaluate the bubble's color.
The Bubble Map dashboard item automatically selects palette and scale settings used to color bubbles. To customize these
settings, click the Options button next to the Color placeholder. This invokes the Color Scale Options dialog, which allows
you to specify the palette and scale options. To learn how to use this dialog, see Coloring.
TOOLTIP DATA ITEMS
Dimensions - Accepts dimensions allowing you to add supplementary content to the tooltips.
Measures - Accepts measures allowing you to add summaries to the tooltips.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 395 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Coloring
The Bubble Map dashboard item automatically selects palette and scale settings used to color bubbles depending on the provided
values.

To customize these settings, click the Options button next to the Color placeholder. This invokes the Color Scale Options dialog,
which allows you to specify the palette and scale options.

You can specify the following settings in this window.

Color palette - allows you to specify the start and end color of the palette.
Scale settings - specifies whether a percent scale or an absolute scale is used to define a set of colors. You can specify the
number of levels that represent the number of colors used to color the map.
Preview is used to display a full set of palette colors generated based on the start/end colors and the number of levels. Use
the Allow Edit check box to automatically change the generated colors or specify value ranges for each color.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 396 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Legends
Bubble Map provides two types of legends used to identify map objects - color and weighted legends.
Color Legend
Weighted Legend

Color Legend
The color legend helps you to identify which colors correspond to specific values.

To display a color legend within a map, use the Show Color Legend button in the Color Legend section of the Design Ribbon
tab.

To specify the legend's position and orientation, select one of the predefined options from the gallery in the Design Ribbon tab.

Weighted Legend
The weighted legend allows you to identify values corresponding to specific bubble sizes.

To select the required weighted legend type, use the Show Weighted Legend button in the Weighted Legend section of the
Design Ribbon tab.

To specify the legend's position, select one of the predefined options from the gallery in the Design Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 397 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 398 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Pie Map
The Pie Map dashboard item allows you to display pies on the map. Each pie visualizes the contribution of each value to the total.

Topics in this section describe specific capabilities of the Pie Map dashboard item.
Providing Data
Pie Options
Coloring
Legends

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 399 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
This topic describes how to bind the Pie Map dashboard item to data using the Dashboard Designer.
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner (see Binding
Dashboard Items to Data for details). The only difference is in the data sections that these dashboard items have.
The image below shows a sample Pie Map dashboard item that is bound to data.

Note that the Pie Map provides two data item groups for data binding: DATA ITEMS and TOOLTIP DATA ITEMS. Tables below list
the available data sections.
DATA ITEMS

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Latitude Accepts a dimension used to provide geographic latitude.

Longitude Accepts a dimension used to provide geographic longitude.

Accepts measures used to calculate pie values. In case of negative measure values, Pie Map uses their absolute values. If you
added a data item to the Argument section and several data items to the Values section, you can use the Values drop-down
Values
menu to switch between the provided values. To invoke the Values menu, click the icon in the map's caption or use the
map's context menu.

Argument Allows you to provide data for pie arguments.

TOOLTIP DATA ITEMS

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Dimensions Accepts dimensions allowing you to add supplementary content to the tooltips.

Measures Accepts measures allowing you to add summaries to the tooltips.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 400 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Pie Options
The Pie Map dashboard item allows you to take into account the weight of pies. In this case, the relative sizes of the pies depend
on the corresponding summary values.

To enable this capability, use the Weighted Pies button in the Design ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 401 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Coloring
Certain dashboard items provide the capability to color dashboard item elements by associating dimension values/measures and
specified colors. You can choose whether to use a global color scheme to provide consistent colors for identical values or specify a
local color scheme for each dashboard item. To learn more about coloring concepts common for all dashboard items, see the
Coloring section.
The Pie Map dashboard item allows you to manage the coloring of segments corresponding to various dimension
values/measures. For instance, the image below illustrates the Pie Map dashboard item whose argument values are colored by
hue.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 402 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Legends
The Pie Map provides two types of legends used to identify map objects - color and weighted legends.
Color Legend
Weighted Legend

Color Legend
The color legend helps you to identify which colors correspond to specific argument values.

To display a color legend within a map, use the Show Color Legend button in the Color Legend section of the Design Ribbon
tab.

To specify the legend's position and orientation, select one of the predefined options from the gallery in the Design Ribbon tab.

Weighted Legend
The weighted legend allows you to identify values corresponding to specific pie sizes.

Note

The Pie Map dashboard item does not display the weighted legend if weighed pies are disabled.
To select the required weighted legend type, use the Show Weighted Legend button in the Weighted Legend section of the
Design Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 403 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To specify the legend's position, select one of the predefined options from the gallery in the Design Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 404 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Clustering
When a Geo Point map contains a large number of objects (callouts, bubbles or pies), showing each object individually on the
map is not useful. The Dashboard Designer provides the capability to group neighboring map objects. This feature is called
Clustering.
For instance, the Geo Point Map dashboard item combines callouts to bubbles.

The Bubble Map and Pie Map dashboard items cluster bubbles/pies with other bubbles/pies.

To enable clustering in the Designer, use the Enable Clustering button in the Data ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 405 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the Master Filtering capability, which enables interaction between the Geo Point Map and other
dashboard items.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about the filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a callout/bubble/pie (or multiple callouts/bubbles/pies by holding down the CTRL
key) to make other dashboard items only display data related to the selected callout(s)/bubble(s)/pie(s).

Note

When you select a clustered bubble or pie, master filtering is applied by all points that are clustered into this bubble/pie.
To learn how to enable Master Filtering in the Designer, see the Master Filtering topic.
To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the map's caption, or the Clear Master Filter command in
the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 406 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Labels
Geo Point maps provide the capability to display titles within map shapes and allows you to add supplementary content to the
callout/bubble/pie tooltips.

Shape Titles
To manage map titles, click the Shape Title button in the Design ribbon tab.

This invokes the Shape Title Settings dialog.

In this dialog, you can specify attributes whose values will be displayed within shapes. Use the button to preview the available
attributes and their values for the current map.
The Title attribute option allows you to select the attribute whose values are displayed within corresponding map shapes.

Tooltips
Geo Point maps also allow you to add supplementary content to the callout/bubble/pie tooltips using the TOOLTIP DATA ITEMS
area. To learn more, see the Tooltip Data Items paragraph in the Providing Data topic.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 407 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Map Navigation
Geo Point maps allow you to perform navigation actions such as zooming and scrolling.
The Dashboard Designer allows you to specify the initial zooming/scrolling state for the Geo Point map using the mouse.
You can disable the capability to scroll/zoom the map using the Lock Navigation button in the Design ribbon tab.

Use the Full Extent button to display the entire map within the dashboard item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 408 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Range Filter
The Range Filter dashboard item allows you to apply filtering to other dashboard items. This item displays a chart with selection
thumbs that allow you to filter out values displayed along the argument axis.

This section consists of the following subsections.

Providing Data
Explains how to supply the Range Filter dashboard item with data.
Series
Enumerates and describes different types of series that can be displayed within the Range Filter dashboard item.
Interactivity
Describes features that enable interaction between the Range Filter and other dashboard items.
Predefined Ranges
Shows you how to add predefined date-time periods that can be used to perform a selection (for instance, year-to-date or
quarter-to-date).
Coloring
Describes coloring capabilities of the Range Filter dashboard item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 409 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner. To learn more, see the
Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic.
The only difference is in the data sections that the required dashboard item has. This topic describes how to bind a Range Filter
dashboard item to data in the Designer.
The image below shows a sample Range Filter dashboard item that is bound to data.

To bind the Range Filter dashboard item to data, drag and drop a data source field to a placeholder contained in one of the
available data sections. A table below lists and describes Range Filter data sections.

S ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Values Contains data items against which the Y-coordinates of data points are calculated.

Contains a data item that provides values displayed along the horizontal axis of the Range Filter. Filtering is performed based
Argument on these values. Note that the Options button (the icon) allows you to create predefined ranges used to select the
required date-time interval.

Series Contains data items whose values are used to create chart series.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 410 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Series
The Range Filter dashboard item supports various Line and Area series types.
To switch between series types in the Designer, click the options button next to the required data item in the Values section. In
the invoked Series Type dialog, select the required series type and click OK.

You can also do this using the buttons in the Series Type group of the Design Ribbon tab.

The Range Filter supports the following series types.

Line:

Stacked Line:

Full-Stacked Line

Area:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 411 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Stacked Area:

Full-Stacked Area:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 412 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the features that enable interaction between the Range Filter and other dashboard items. These
features include Master Filtering.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data-aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
Master filtering is always enabled for the Range Filter dashboard item. This Range Filter displays a chart with selection thumbs
that allow you to filter out values displayed along the argument axis.

To enable filtering across data sources for the Range Filter, use the Cross-Data-Source Filtering button in the Data Ribbon tab.

You can enable/disable ignoring of other master filter items using the Ignore Master Filters button in the Data Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 413 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Predefined Ranges
The Range Filter dashboard item allows you to add a number of predefined date-time periods that can be used to perform a
selection (for instance, year-to-date or quarter-to-date).

To add a period, click the Options button (the icon) next to the Argument placeholder or use the Edit Periods button in the
ribbon's Design tab. This invokes the Edit Periods dialog.

To add the selected period, use the button or double-click this period.

This period will be added to the right pane of the Edit Periods dialog. The following settings are available for the added period.
Caption - Specifies the caption corresponding to the period.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 414 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Period - Displays the date-time interval corresponding to the period.

Default - Allows you to use the selected period as the default selection in the Range Filter dashboard item.
If necessary, you can customize the selected period by clicking the Edit button in the Edit Periods dialog. This invokes the Period
dialog.

Note

Note that the Edit dialog above contains the displayed periods (Year, Quarter, Month, Day) if the group interval of the Range
Filter argument is set to Day-Month-Year.
This dialog allows you to add the following periods.
Year - A period duration is measured in years.
Previous Year - Identifies the entire previous year.
This Year - Identifies the entire current year.
Next Year - Identifies the entire next year.
Last Years - Identifies a specific number of previous years. Use the Include current option to specify whether or not
the period is ended with the current year.
Next Years - Identifies a specific number of next years. Use the Include current option to specify whether or not the
period is started from the current year.
Year-to-date - A period from the beginning of the current year and up to the current day.
Quarter - Period duration is measured in quarters.
Previous Quarter - Identifies the entire previous quarter.
This Quarter - Identifies the entire current quarter.
Next Quarter - Identifies the entire next quarter.
Last Quarter - Identifies a specific number of previous quarters. Use the Include current option to specify whether
or not the period ends with the current quarter.
Next Quarter - Identifies a specific number of following quarters. Use the Include current option to specify whether
or not the period starts from the current quarter.
Quarter-to-date - A period from the beginning of the current quarter and up to the current day.
Month - Period duration is measured in months.
Previous Month - Identifies the entire previous month.
This Month - Identifies the entire current month.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 415 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Next Month - Identifies the entire next month.

Last Month - Identifies a specific number of previous months. Use the Include current option to specify whether or
not the period ends with the current month.
Next Month - Identifies a specific number of the following months. Use the Include current option to specify
whether or not the period starts with the current month.
Month-to-date - A period from the beginning of the current month and up to the current day.
Day - Period duration is measured in days.
Previous Day - Identifies the entire previous day.
This Day - Identifies the entire current day.
Next Day - Identifies the entire next day.
Last Day - Identifies a specific number of previous days. Use the Include current option to specify whether or not the
period ends with the current day.
Next Day - Identifies a specific number of the following days. Use the Include current option to specify whether or
not the period starts with the current day.
Custom - A custom period.
Allows you to specify a period with the custom boundaries (Start point and End point).

You can specify the following settings for the start/end boundaries.
None - The selection will begin from the start/end of the visible range.
Fixed - Allows you to select a specific date value using the calendar.
Flow - Allows you to select a relative date value. The Interval option specifies the interval between the current
date and the required date. The Offset option allows you to set the number of such intervals.
Note

Note that the Offset option can accept negative and positive values. Negative values correspond to dates before
the current date, while positive values correspond to future dates.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 416 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Coloring
Certain dashboard items provide the capability to color dashboard item elements by associating dimension values/measures and
specified colors. You can choose whether to use a global color scheme to provide consistent colors for identical values or specify a
local color scheme for each dashboard item. To learn more about coloring concepts common for all dashboard items, see the
Coloring section.
By default, the Range Filter dashboard item colors different measures and series dimensions by hue. The image below illustrates
the Range Filter dashboard item whose series points corresponding to different categories are colored in different colors.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 417 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Images
The Dashboard Designer allows you to add images to a dashboard.

You can either add a static image or you can use the Bound Image as a detail item along with the Master Filtering feature.
Image Types Overview
Providing Images
Interactivity
Image Settings

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 418 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Image Types Overview

The Dashboard Designer allows you to create two types of an Image dashboard item.
The Image dashboard item allows you to add static images to a dashboard.

The Bound Image dashboard item can be bound to a set of images (for instance, stored in the database). You can use the
Bound Image as a detail item along with the Master Filtering feature.

To create the required Image dashboard item, use the Images button in the Home ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 419 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Images
Providing Static Images
To load an image to a dashboard item, use the Load Image and Import Image buttons in the Ribbon, or commands in the
context menu (Load Image... and Import Image..., respectively).

These commands invoke the Open dialog, which allows you to locate the desired image.
The Load Image command saves the path to the image in the dashboard definition, while the Import Image command saves
the image itself.

Binding the Bound Image to Data

The Bound Image dashboard item provides the Attribute data section containing the corresponding placeholder.

Specify the binding mode for the Bound Image by clicking the Options button (the icon) next to the Attribute placeholder. This
invokes the following dialog.

This dialog provides two options.

Binary Array - Use this mode if images are stored in the data source as byte arrays.
URI - Use this mode to locate images accessible by a predefined URI. In this case, the data source field should return strings
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 420 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

that are parts of URIs to these images.

For instance, the URI pattern in the form below specifies the path to the folder containing the required images.

Data source field values will be inserted to the position of the {0} placeholder. Thus, the Bound Image maps the current dimension
value with the image placed at the specified URI.
Note

Note that the Bound Image can display only a single image simultaneously. If Master Filtering is not applied to the Bound Image,
it selects the displayed image in the following ways.
In the Binary Array mode, the displayed image cannot be predicted precisely as a result of sorting limitations for the
image/binary data types. Use the Master Filtering feature to display the specified image.
In the URI mode, the Bound Image displays an image corresponding a first attribute value taking into account the attribute's
sort order.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 421 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the features that enable interaction between the Bound Image and other dashboard items. These
features include Master Filtering.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use most of the data-aware dashboard items as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter).
To learn more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
Data displayed in the Bound Image dashboard item can be filtered by other master filter items. For instance, the Bound Image
below shows an image corresponding to a category selected in the Grid dashboard item.

You can prevent the Bound Image from being affected by other master filter items using the Ignore Master Filters button on the
Data ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 422 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Image Settings
You can customize the representation of Image and Bound Image dashboard items in different ways.

Image Alignment
To specify how the image is aligned within the dashboard item, use the Alignment group in the Design ribbon tab.

Image Size Mode

You can specify the image size mode that defines how the image fits within the dashboard item.
To do this, use the Size Mode group in the Ribbon's Design tab.

The following table illustrates each size mode in two cases: when the image is smaller than the dashboard item, and vice versa.

IMAG E IMAG E
S MALLER L AR G ER
THAN THAN
S IZE D AS HB O AR D D AS HB O AR D
MO D E ITEM ITEM D ES CR IPTIO N

Clip The image is clipped if it is larger than the Image dashboard item.

Stretch The image is stretched or shrunk to fit the size of the Image dashboard item.

If the dimensions of the Image dashboard item exceed those of the image it contains, the
Squeeze image is shown in full-size. Otherwise, the image is resized to fit the dimensions of the
Image dashboard item.

The image is sized proportionally (without clipping), so that it best fits the Image dashboard
item. If the aspect ratio of the Image dashboard item is the same as the aspect ratio of the
image, it will be resized to fit into the Image dashboard item while maintaining its aspect
Zoom
ratio. Otherwise, the image will be resized in the closest fitting dimension (either the height
or the width), and the remaining dimension will be resized while maintaining the image's
aspect ratio.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 423 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Text Box
Use the Text Box dashboard item to display rich text within a dashboard.

You can either add a static text or you can use the Text Box as a detail item along with the Master Filtering or Filtering features.
Editing Text
Providing Data
Interactivity

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 424 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Editing Text
To edit the text within the Text Box, click the Edit button in the ribbon's Design tab or use the corresponding item in the context
menu.

This adds the Text Box Editor context category to the Dashboard Designer's ribbon and allows you to modify the content within
the Text Box.

To learn how to edit the content within the Text Box, see Rich Text Editor. After you change the document, click Edit again to finish
editing.
Note

Note that the Text Box can be bound to data. To learn how to do this, see Providing Data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 425 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Text Box dashboard item can be bound to data as other data-aware dashboard items. To do this, perform the following steps.
1. Drop the Name, RetailPrice and Description data source fields from the Products table to the Values section of the Text Box.

Note that summary types of the created measures are Min, Sum and Min, respectively.
2. Click the Edit button in the Design ribbon tab and add the Name, Retail Price and Description strings to the document.

3. Place the pointer next to Name, right-click the document and select Insert Field (or use the Insert Field button in the
ribbon). Then, click the Select value placeholder and select the Name (Min) measure.

4. Perform the third step for Retail Price and Description.

5. Click the Edit button again to leave the editing mode. The Text Box will show data in the following way.

You can use this Text Box as a detail item along with the Master Filtering feature to filter data according to the selected
product.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 426 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the features that enable interaction between the Text Box and other dashboard items. These features
include Master Filtering.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use most of the data-aware dashboard items as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter).
To learn more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
Data displayed in the Text Box dashboard item can be filtered by other master filter items. For instance, the Text Box below shows
data corresponding to a product selected in the List Box dashboard item.

You can prevent the Text Box from being affected by other master filter items using the Ignore Master Filters button on the
Data ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 427 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Treemap
Use the Treemap dashboard item to visualize data in nested rectangles that are called tiles.

This section is divided into the following subsections.

Providing Data
Interactivity
Layout
Grouping
Coloring
Labels

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 428 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a virtually uniform manner. To learn more, see the
Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic. The only difference is in the data sections that the required dashboard item has.
The Treemap dashboard item has the Values and Arguments data sections that provide numeric and discrete categorical data,
respectively. The steps below provide the most common scenarios of binding a Treemap to data.
1. Drop the Sales and Profit fields to the Values section.

The Treemap will draw two tiles whose sizes correspond to the Sales and Profit summary values.
2. Drop the Product Category field to Arguments.

Treemap will create individual tiles for all categories. You can switch between Sales and Profit values by clicking the icon
in the item's caption or you can use its context menu.
3. Drop the child Product Sub-Category field into Arguments.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 429 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Treemap will visualize all combinations of categories and corresponding sub-categories using individual tiles.
4. If the Arguments section contains several dimensions, you can group child tiles by values of the parent dimension. To
group sub-categories inside corresponding categories, click the CategoryName menu button and select Group Tiles.

Sub-category tiles will be grouped into category groups.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 430 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This section describes features that enable interaction between the Treemap dashboard item and other items. These features
include Master Filtering and Drill-Down.
The section contains the following topics.
Master Filtering
Drill-Down

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 431 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master Filtering
The Dashboard Designer allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items. To learn more,
see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
The Treemap dashboard item supports filtering by tiles/groups.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a tile or group caption (or multiple tiles/groups by holding down the CTRL key) to
make other dashboard items only display data related to the selected tile/group(s).

Note

If the Single Master Filter is used, you can select only tiles corresponding to the bottommost level.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 432 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more about drill-down concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Drill-Down topic.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a tile to view its details.
Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a tile.

Drill-down requires that the Arguments section contains several dimensions, from the least detailed to the most detailed
dimension.

Note

In OLAP mode, you can perform drill-down for either a hierarchy data item or several dimension attributes.
To enable drill-down, click the Drill Down button in the Data Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up ( ) button in the caption of the Treemap dashboard item, or the
Drill Up command in the context menu.
Note

Grouping is not in effect when the drill-down is enabled.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 433 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Layout
This topic describes how to change a layout algorithm used to arrange Treemap tiles. To do this in the Designer, use buttons from
the Layout group placed in the Design ribbon tab.

The following algorithms are available.

ALG O R ITHM E X AMPLE D ES CR IPTIO N

Slice and This layout algorithm divides the space between items, slicing it in the specified
Dice direction depending on item value.

The Squarified algorithm arranges tiles so that their width/height ratio will be
Squarified
closer to 1.

This algorithm is a modified version of the Squarified algorithm. The difference

Striped
here is that tiles are drawn side by side as columns or rows.

You can also set a layout direction to specify an arrangement of tiles depending on their sizes. To do this, click the Layout
Direction button and select the required direction.

Bottom Left - Top Right - Arrange tiles from the bottom-left to the top-right corner.
Bottom Right - Top Left - Arrange tiles from the bottom-right to the top-left corner.
Top Left - Bottom Right - Arrange tiles from the top-left to the bottom-right corner.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 434 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Top Right - Bottom Left - Arrange tiles from the top-right to the bottom-left corner.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 435 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Grouping
If you use several arguments in the Treemap, you can group tiles corresponding to child values by parent values. For instance, the
following Treemap dashboard item displays combinations of categories and sub-categories.

To group sub-categories inside corresponding categories, click the Product Category menu button and select Group Tiles.

Product tiles will be grouped into category groups.

Note that the icon will be displayed within the Product Category dimension.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 436 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Coloring
Certain dashboard items provide the capability to color dashboard item elements by associating dimension values/measures and
specified colors. You can choose whether to use a global color scheme to provide consistent colors for identical values or specify a
local color scheme for each dashboard item. To learn more about coloring concepts common for all dashboard items, see the
Coloring section.
By default, the Treemap dashboard item colors its tiles in the following way.
If the Treemap dashboard item contains only measures (the Values section), values corresponding to different measures
are colored by hue.
If the Treemap dashboard item contains arguments (the Arguments section), values corresponding to the first argument
are colored by hue.
If necessary, you can change the default behavior. For instance, the image below shows the Treemap dashboard item whose
measures and argument values are painted with the same color.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 437 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Labels
The Treemap displays labels that contain descriptions for tiles and groups, and provide tooltips with additional information.

You can specify which information should be displayed within tile and group labels separately. To do this, use the Labels and
Tooltips buttons in the Design Ribbon tab.

Use buttons within the Tile Labels/Group Labels ribbon groups to manage tile and group labels, respectively. These buttons
invoke the drop-down menu, which is similar for all buttons.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 438 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter Elements
Filter elements represent a special type of dashboard item that allows you to apply filtering to other dashboard items.
Topics in this section.
Filter Elements Overview
Providing Data
Interactivity

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 439 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter Elements Overview

The Dashboard Designer allows you to create three types of filter elements that provide the capability to filter other dashboard
items.
Combo Box
List Box
Tree View
To add the required filter element to the dashboard, use the Filter Elements button in the Home ribbon tab.

Combo Box
The Combo Box dashboard item allows you to select a value(s) from the drop-down list.
You can switch the combo box type in the ribbon Design tab.

CO MB O B O X T YPE E X AMPLE D ES CR IPTIO N

Standard Allows yous to select only a single value.

Checked Allows you to select multiple values in the invoked drop-down list.

List Box
The List Box dashboard item allows you to select a value(s) from the list.
You can switch the list box type in the ribbon Design tab.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 440 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

LIS T B O X T YPE E X AMPLE D ES CR IPTIO N

Checked Allows you to select multiple values in the list box.

Radio Allows you to select only a single value in the radio group.

Tree View
The Tree View dashboard item displays values in a hierarchical way and allows you to expand/collapse nodes.

You can manage the initial expanded state of filter values using the Auto Expand button in the Design ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 441 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Providing Data
This topic describes how to bind filter elements to data using the Dashboard Designer.
The Dashboard Designer allows you to bind various dashboard items to data in a consistent manner (see Binding Dashboard
Items to Data for details), the only difference being the data sections that these dashboard items comprise.

Binding Overview
All filter elements provide the Dimensions data section, which accepts dimensions used to provide filter values.
To learn about the specifics of binding various filter elements to data, see the table below.

D AS HB O AR D
ITEM D ATA S ECTIO NS D ES CR IPTIO N

The Combo Box filter element can contain several dimensions at the Dimensions data section.
Combo Box
In this case, the drop-down list will contain combinations of dimension values.

The List Box filter element can contain several dimensions at the Dimensions data section. In
List Box
this case, the list will contain combinations of dimension values.

The Tree View filter element allows you to display dimension values in a hierarchical way. This
can be the set of dimensions with different group intervals (for instance, Year/Quarter/Month)
Tree View
or the set of related dimensions (for instance, geographical data such as
continents/countries/cities).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 442 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the filtering capabilities supported by filter elements. You can use filter elements to apply master
filtering to other dashboard items or introduce hierarchical filtering by adding several connected filters.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
Im por tant

Note that filter elements do not support Master Filter selection modes. You can switch the selection mode by changing the type of
the required filter element.
Depending on the filter element type, you can select a value(s) to make other dashboard items display only data related to the
selected value(s).

You can also create a set of related filter elements containing relevant filter values. For instance, in the image below, the
State/Province filter element contains states related to the 'United States' value, while the City filter element contains cities
related to the 'New York' value.

Disable the Ignore Master Filters option for the required filter element to allow applying filtering to this element.

Filter Element Options

Standard Combo Box and Radio List Box filter elements have the (Allow Empty Filter) option that enables the filter mode without
selected items. To enable the mode, click the Allow Empty Filter button in the Design ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 443 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Enable Search button displays the search box that allows you to search and filter as you type:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 444 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Item Group

ReportsNow Dashboard provides the capability to combine dashboard items into a group. The dashboard item group serves two
main purposes.
Combine dashboard items within the dashboard into a separate layout group.
Manage interaction between dashboard items within and outside the group.
For instance, you can combine related filter elements and data visualization dashboard items into a group.

Create a Group
Interactivity

Create a Group
To create a new group, use the Group button in the Home ribbon tab.

You can add dashboard items to a group and manage item layout using drag-and-drop. To learn how to manage a group's
caption, see the Dashboard Item Caption topic.
Note

Note that a dashboard item group cannot be added to another group.

Interactivity
The dashboard item group provides the capability to manage interaction between dashboard items within and outside the group.
The Master Filter button allows you to specify whether the current group allows you to filter external dashboard items using
master filter items contained within the group. If this option is disabled, master filter items contained within the group can filter
only dashboard items from this group.****

The Ignore Master Filters button allows you to isolate dashboard items contained within the group from being filtered using
external master filter items.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 445 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Tab Container
The Tab container dashboard item allows you to split the dashboard layout into several pages. Common filter controls for large
elements in a dashboard can be located on a separate tab page.

Overview
Tab Order
Display Item as Page
Selection
Interactivity

Overview
To create a tab container, use the Tab Container button in the Home ribbon tab:

A newly created tab container contains an empty tab page (Page 1).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 446 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Click the + (plus) icon to add an empty page to the tab container. You can use drag-and-drop to add dashboard items to a tab
page and manage the layout. Tab containers cannot be nested, so you cannot add a tab container to another tab container.
However, a tab container can contain item groups.
See the Dashboard Item Caption topic to learn how to manage a tab container's caption.

Tab Order
To change the tab page order, click the Reorder Tabs button on the Tab settings group.

The Tabs Order dialog is invoked.

Click up and down arrows to change the order of the tab pages in the tab container.

Display Item as Page

The tab caption is above the caption of the content element on the page. If a tab page contains a single element, the Display Item
as Page feature is activated. It merges the dashboard item with a tab page and displays a single caption, as illustrated below.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 447 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To disable the Display Item as Page feature, use one of the following methods:
Select the tab page and click the Display Item as Page button in the Layout group on the Design ribbon tab of the Page
Tools contextual tab set.

Select the Display Item as Page command in the tab page context menu.

Selection
Click the element's border or use the item's context menu to select a page or a tab container:

Interactivity
The tab page allows you to manage the interaction between dashboard items inside and outside the page.
The Master Filter button (in the Interactivity group on the Data ribbon tab of the Page Tools contextual tab set) controls
whether the current tab page allows you to filter dashboard items outside the page using master filter items contained within the
page. If this button is switched off, master filter items in the page can filter only dashboard items in this page.
Note

The default tab page behaves opposite to the default group. While the group isolates filter items from the outside, the tab page
does not change the item's data interactivity behavior.

The Ignore Master Filters button (in the Interactivity group on the Data ribbon tab of the Page Tools contextual tab set)
allows you to isolate dashboard items contained within the page from external master filter items.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 448 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Shaping
This section describes how to perform various data shaping operations (such as grouping, sorting and filtering) in the Dashboard
Designer.
The section contains the following topics.
Summarization
Grouping
Sorting
Filtering
Top N
Formatting Data

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 449 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Summarization
To obtain numeric values that should be displayed within a dashboard item, Dashboard calculates a summary function against the
specified measure.

This topic describes how to specify which summary function should be calculated against a particular measure.
The following sections are available.
Summary Function Types
Changing Summary Type

Summary Function Types

The following summary functions are available.
Count - The number of values (excluding Null and DBNull values).
This is the only summary type that can be calculated against non-numeric data.
Count Distinct - The number of distinct values.
Sum - The sum of the values.

Min - The smallest value.

Max - The largest value.
Average - The average of the values.

StdDev - An estimate of the standard deviation of a population, where the sample is a subset of the entire population.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 450 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

StdDevP - The standard deviation of a population, where the population is the entire data to be summarized.

Var - An estimate of the variance of a population, where the sample is a subset of the entire population.

VarP - The variance of a population, where the population is the entire data to be summarized.

Median - The median of the values (excluding Null and DBNull values). A median is the number separating the higher half
of a value range from the lower half.

Changing Summary Type

By default, Dashboard calculates Sum for numeric measures and Count for measures that contain another type of data.
You can change the summary function type for numeric measures. To do this in the Designer, invoke the data item menu and
select the desired summary type. Less common summary types are organized in the More submenu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 451 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Grouping
The Dashboard Designer allows you to group dimension values and display summaries for entire groups rather than individual
values.
You can arrange dimension values in groups of different sizes by specifying the appropriate group interval. For instance, date-
time values can be grouped by years, months, quarters, etc.
This topic lists the supported text and date-time group intervals, and describes how to change the group interval.
The following sections are available.
Text Group Intervals
Date-Time Group Intervals
Changing Group Interval

Text Group Intervals

String values support the following grouping intervals.
No Grouping - each value is displayed "as is".
Alphabetical - values are grouped alphabetically (e.g., A, B, C, ... Z).

Date-Time Group Intervals

Date-time values support the following group intervals.
Note

Examples in the table below are formatted using the default settings. To learn how to customize format settings, see Formatting
Data.

G R O U P INTER V AL D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLES

Year Values are grouped by the year. 2010, 2011, 2012

Quarter Values are grouped by the quarter. Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4

Month Values are grouped by the month. January, February, March, ... December

Day Values are grouped by the day of the month. 1, 2, 3, ... 31

Hour Values are grouped by the hour. 0, 1, 2, ... 23

Minute Values are grouped by the minute. 0, 1, 2, ... 59

Second Values are grouped by the second. 0, 1, 2, ... 59

Day of the Year Values are grouped by the day of the year. 1, 2, 3, ... 365

Day of the Week Values are grouped by the day of the week. Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, ... Saturday

Week of the Year Values are grouped by the week of the year. 1, 2, 3, ... 52

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 452 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

G R O U P INTER V AL D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLES

Week of the Month Values are grouped by the week of the month. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

January 2012, February 2012, ... December 2012,

Month-Year Values are grouped by the year and month.
January 2013, ...

Quarter-Year Values are grouped by the year and quarter. Q3 2012, Q4 2012, Q1 2013, Q2 2013, ...

Day-Month-Year Values are grouped by date. 3/4/2012, 3/5/2012, 3/6/2012, ...

3/4/2012 0:00 AM, 3/4/2012 1:00 AM, 3/4/2012 2:00

Date-Hour Values are grouped by date with the hour value.
AM, ...

Values are grouped by date with the hour and minute 3/4/2012 0:00 AM, 3/4/2012 0:01 AM, 3/4/2012 0:02
Date-Hour-Minute
values. AM, ...

Date-Hour-Minute- Values are grouped by date with the hour, minute and 3/4/2012 0:00:00 AM, 3/4/2012 0:00:01 AM, 3/4/2012
Second second values. 0:00:02 AM, ...

Exact Date Each value is displayed "as is". 2009, Q2 2009, 6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM, ...

Changing Group Interval

To specify the group interval in the Designer, invoke the data item menu and select the desired group interval. Less common
group intervals are organized in the More submenus.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 453 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Sorting
The Dashboard Designer allows you to easily change the sort order of values within a dashboard item. You can also enable
sorting by parameter values.
Changing Sort Order
Sorting by Measure Values
OLAP Sorting Specifics

Changing Sort Order

The sort order of dimension values is indicated with an arrow.

To change the sort order in the Designer, click the data item. You can also toggle sorting from the data item menu.

Sorting by Measure Values

Dashboard allows you to sort dimension values by summary values calculated for a specific measure.
To enable sorting by measure in the Designer, use the Sort by submenu in the dimension's menu.

You can also sort dimension values by the values of hidden measures.

OLAP Sorting Specifics

In OLAP mode, you can use the following options to specify the sort order for attribute members.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 454 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

No Sorting - Specifies the default server sorting for the current attribute.
Sort by - Allows you to choose the OLAP member property by whose values sorting is performed:
(Value) - sorting is performed by member values;
(Display Text) - soring is performed by captions associated with members;
(Key) - sorting is performed by member keys;
(ID) - sorting is performed by member IDs.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 455 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to filter a query of the DAS report or apply filtering to a specific data-aware dashboard item.
This topic describes how to enable and reset filtering.

Apply Filtering
To configure filtering, select the target dashboard item and do one of the following.
If you are using a Ribbon menu, click the Edit Filter button in the Data tab.

Right-click a dashboard item and select Edit Filter from its context menu.

This will invoke the Filter Editor dialog. Use this dialog to build filter criteria with a convenient tree-like interface.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 456 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can use hidden dimensions within the Filter Editor dialog, allowing you to filter data based on their values.

Clear Filtering
To clear filtering in the Designer, select the target dashboard item and do one of the following.
If you are using a Ribbon menu, click the Clear button in the Data tab.

Right-click a dashboard item and select Clear from its context menu.

OLAP Filtering Specifics

You cannot apply filtering by building complex filter criteria in OLAP mode. Instead, you can filter dimension attributes and
hierarchies by manually selecting the values you wish (or do not wish) to include in the dashboard.
For dimension attributes, the Filter Editor contains a list of all values. You can select the values that you wish to display.

For hierarchies, a tree is displayed instead, allowing you to filter individual values at any hierarchy level.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 457 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 458 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Top N
The Top N feature allows you to display only a limited number of values that correspond to the highest or lowest values of a
particular measure.
To display the top values in a dimension, select Top N from the data item menu.

This invokes the Top N Values dialog.

In this dialog, check the Enabled check box and specify the following settings.

S E T TING D ES CR IPTIO N

Mode Specifies whether top or bottom values should be displayed.

Count The number of values to be displayed.

Measure The parameter that will determine the top or bottom value.

Show "Others" value If enabled, all values that are not the top/bottom values are consolidated in the "Others" value.

You can use the hidden measure as a parameter that will determine the top or bottom value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 459 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Formatting Data
Dashboard allows you to customize various data format settings for numeric and date-time values.
Formatting Numeric Values
Formatting Date-Time Values
Currency Formatting Specifics

Formatting Numeric Values

To specify a format for numeric values, select Format from the data item menu.

This invokes the Numeric Format window.

In the Format type field, select the required format type.

FO R MAT
T YPE D ES CR IPTIO N

Auto Format settings are automatically determined based on the data type.

General Converts a number to the most compact of either fixed-point or scientific notation, depending on the type of the number.

Converts a number to a string of the "-d,ddd,ddd.ddd…" form where "-" indicates a negative number symbol (if required), "d"
Number
indicates a digit (0-9), "," indicates a group separator, and "." indicates a decimal point symbol.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 460 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

FO R MAT
T YPE D ES CR IPTIO N

Converts a number to a string that represents a currency amount. To learn about currency formatting specifics, see the
Currency
Currency Formatting Specifics section of this document.

Scientific Converts a number to a string of the "-d.ddd…E+ddd" or "-d.ddd…e+ddd" form where each "d" indicates a digit (0-9).

Percent Multiplies a number by 100 and converts it to a percentage string.

Other format settings are in effect for only specific format types.

FO R MAT
S E T TING D ES CR IPTIO N T YPES

Number,
Unit The unit to which values should be converted.
Currency

Scientific,
Precision The number of fractional digits that should be displayed.
Percent

Defines the currency sign and format settings that should be used to display currency values. To learn
Currency Currency
about currency formatting specifics, see the Currency Formatting Specifics section of this document.

Currency
For currencies used in a region with several cultures, specifies the culture that defines format settings. Currency
culture

Include Number,
group Specifies whether or not separators should be inserted between digit groups. Currency,
separator Percent

Formatting Date-Time Values

To specify a format for date-time values, use the Format submenu in the data item menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 461 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This submenu lists the available format types that depend on the selected group interval (for details on group intervals, see
Grouping).
Note

Specific group intervals do not have format options. This means that corresponding values can only be presented in a single
manner. The Format submenu is not displayed for such group intervals.
The following list shows format types by group interval.
Year
Full - The full year pattern (Example - 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 2017 (en-US)).
Abbreviated - The year from 00 to 99 (Example - 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 17 (en-US)).
Quarter
Full - The full quarter pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Q2 (en-US)).
Numeric - The quarter from 1 through 4 (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 2 (en-US)).
Month
Full - The full name of the month (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> June (en-US)).
Abbreviated - The abbreviated name of the month (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Jun (en-US)).
Numeric - The month from 1 through 12 (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 6 (en-US)).
Hour
Long - Long hour pattern, 12-hour format (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 1:00 PM).
Short - Short hour pattern, 24-hour format (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 13).
Day of Week
Full - The full name of the day of the week (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Monday (en-US)).
Abbreviated - The abbreviated name of the day of the week (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Mon (en-US)).
Numeric - The day of the week from 1 through 7 (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 2 (en-US)).
Day-Month-Year
Long - Long date pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Monday, June 15, 2017 (en-US)).
Short - Short date pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2017 (en-US)).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 462 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Date-Hour
Long - Long date pattern, long hour pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Monday, June 15, 2017 1:00 PM (en-
US)).
Short - Short date pattern, long hour pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2017 1:00 PM (en-US)).
Time only - Long hour pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 1:00 PM (en-US)).
Date-Hour-Minute
Long - Long date pattern, long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Monday, June 15, 2017 1:45 PM (en-
US)).
Short - Short date pattern, long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2017 1:45 PM (en-US)).
Time only - Long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 1:45 PM (en-US)).
Date-Hour-Minute-Second
Long - Long date pattern, long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Monday, June 15, 2017 1:45:30 PM
(en-US)).
Short - Short date pattern, long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM (en-US)).
Time only - Long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 1:45:30 PM (en-US)).
The list below illustrates format types related to the Exact Date group interval.
Year
Full - The full year pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 2017 (en-US)).
Abbreviated - The year from 00 to 99 (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 17 (en-US)).
Quarter
n/a - The default year and full quarter pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Q2 2017 (en-US)).
Month
n/a - The default year pattern and the full name of the month (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> June, 2017 (en-
US)).
Day
Long - Long date pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Monday, June 15, 2017 (en-US)).
Short - Short date pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2017 (en-US)).
Hour
Long - Long date pattern, long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Monday, June 15, 2017 1:00 PM (en-
US)).
Short - Short date pattern, long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2017 1:00 PM (en-US)).
Time only - Long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 1:00 PM (en-US)).
Minute
Long - Long date pattern, long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Monday, June 15, 2017 1:45 PM (en-
US)).
Short - Short date pattern, long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2017 1:45 PM (en-US)).
Time only - Long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 1:45 PM (en-US)).
Second
Long - Long date pattern, long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> Monday, June 15, 2017 1:45:30 PM
(en-US)).
Short - Short date pattern, long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM (en-US)).
Time only - Long time pattern (Example: 6/15/2017 1:45:30 PM -> 1:45:30 PM (en-US)).

Currency Formatting Specifics

The Dashboard allows you to specify a currency format at two levels: for the entire dashboard and for individual data items.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 463 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

1. Data Item Currency

To specify which currency to use for a particular data item, select Format from the data item menu.

In the Numeric Format dialog, select Currency in the Format type field and use the Currency combo box to select the
required currency.

Note

This option only affects the way values are displayed. The Dashboard does not convert monetary amounts from one
currency to another.
For regions with several cultures, you can also select the culture that will be used to format currency values.

You can also apply the default dashboard currency by selecting Use dashboard settings in the Currency field.
2. Dashboard Currency

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 464 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can also specify the default currency for the dashboard. This setting will be applied to dashboard items that have no
currency defined.
To set the dashboard currency, click the Currency button in the Ribbon.

This invokes the Dashboard Currency window. In this window, select the required currency using the Currency combo
box.

Note

This option only affects the way values are displayed. The Dashboard does not convert monetary amounts from one
currency to another.
For regions with several cultures, you can also select the culture that will be used to format currency values.

Additionally, you can specify the client culture that should be used for the dashboard by selecting the Use client system
settings item. In this instance, the current system culture will be used in WinForms applications, and the client culture will be
used in Web applications.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 465 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This section describes features that enable interaction between various dashboard items. These features include Master Filtering
and Drill-Down.
The section consists of the following topics.
Master Filtering
Drill-Down
Neutral Filter Mode

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 466 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). You can
select elements in a Master Filter item (grid records, chart bars, pie segments, etc.) to filter data in other dashboard items by the
selected values.

Master Filtering Overview

Master Filter Settings
Apply Filtering

Master Filtering Overview

Dashboard items can be divided into four groups by their master filtering capabilities.
1. Data visualization dashboard items allow you to enable master filtering by specifying the selection mode. The following
dashboard items allow you to manage their master filtering mode.
Chart
Scatter Chart
Grid
Pies
Cards
Gauges
Choropleth Map
Geo Point Maps
Treemap
To learn how to manage master filtering for these items, see Master Filter Settings.
2. Filter elements represent a special type of dashboard item whose main purpose is to apply filtering to other dashboard
items. This capability is always enabled for these dashboard items.
The following filter elements are available.
Combo Box
List Box
Tree View
Instead of switching between standard master filtering modes, some filter elements allow you to switch their type.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 467 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This allows you to select a single value or multiple values.

To learn more, see the Filter Elements section.
3. Range Filter is a special type of dashboard item that displays a chart with selection thumbs and allows you to filter out
values displayed along the argument axis.
To learn more, see the Range Filter section.
4. Dashboard item group allows you to manage interaction between dashboard items in and out of the group.
To learn more about the interactivity capabilities of the dashboard item group, see the Interactivity paragraph in the
Dashboard Item Group topic.

Master Filter Settings

Master Filtering Modes
The Master Filter item supports two selection modes.
Multiple - Allows you to select multiple elements in the Master Filter item.
Single - Allows you to select only one element in the Master Filter item. When this mode is enabled, the default selection will
be set to a Master Filter element. You can change this selection, but cannot clear it.
To enable/disable master filtering, use the Multiple Master Filter or Single Master Filter buttons in the Data Ribbon tab.

Note

If the selected dashboard item contains several types of elements that can be used for filtering, the Ribbon or Toolbar will provide
the appropriate buttons to switch between these types (e.g., the Arguments and Series buttons in the Chart). For details, refer to
the documentation for individual dashboard items in the Designing Dashboard Items section.
Filtering Across D ata Sources
When different items in a dashboard are bound to different data sources, you can specify that a particular Master Filter should be
applied across data sources. This means that it will apply filtering to fields with matching names in all data sources.
Fields are matched by their full names. For fields in other data sources to be affected by Master Filtering, their names must match
the name of the field in the current data source, and they must belong to the same hierarchy level so that their full names also
match. For instance, Customer.City and Customer.Address.City will not be treated as matching fields.
To enable filtering across data sources, use the Cross-Data-Source Filtering button in the Data Ribbon tab.

P reventing I tems from B eing Filtered

You can prevent specific dashboard items from being affected by Master Filters. To do this, use the Ignore Master Filters button
in the Data Ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 468 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Apply Filtering
To learn how to apply filtering in a specific dashboard item, refer to the Master Filtering topic in the Interactivity section for
this item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 469 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
Dashboard provides the Drill-Down feature, which allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in a dashboard item.
The Drill-Down feature enables users to drill down to display detail data, or drill up to view more general information.

Enable Drill-Down
Perform Drill-Down

Enable Drill-Down
Drill-down requires that the data section contains several dimensions...

... or a hierarchy data item (in OLAP mode).

To enable drill-down, click the Drill-Down button in the Data Ribbon tab (or the button if you are using the toolbar menu).

Note

If the selected dashboard item contains several types of elements that can be used for drill-down, the Ribbon or Toolbar will
provide the appropriate buttons to switch between these types (e.g., Arguments and Series buttons in a Chart). For details, refer
to the documentation for the individual dashboard items in the Designing Dashboard Items topic.
The following dashboard items support the Drill-Down feature.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 470 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Chart
Scatter Chart
Grid
Pies
Cards
Gauges
Treemap

Perform Drill-Down
To learn how you can drill down using a particular dashboard item, refer to the Drill-Down topic in the Interactivity section for
this item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 471 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Empty on Load
The default behavior of filter elements is to show all items selected on initial rendering to indicate that no filtering is currently
taking place. For a dashboard in which the user is expected to select individual items, the user is forced to first deselect All before
selecting the individual items. This is both inefficient from a user interface standpoint, because the user must click twice, but also
from a performance standpoint, because the dashboard is initially rendered with all selection conditions and then again with
individual selection criteria.
The dashboard in the image below illustrates how the filter elements are initialized in standard filter mode.

To solve these issues, the Empty on Load feature is available. Selecting the Empty on Load button in the dashboard ribbon has
two consequences:
1. A neutral filtering mode is activated.
2. All non-filter widgets have the following criteria added to their filter condition: "?SYS_MasterFilterSet = True".
The result of selecting Empty on Load in our current example is as follows:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 472 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

All items are shown deselected. This means that an extra click is no longer required in this common scenario.
Note also that the dashboard will be completely reloaded when switching the mode.

Neutral filter mode

The neutral filtering mode that is activated by selecting Empty on Load is neutral in the sense that it does not apply any criteria
to the data source in its default state. This results in improved performance, because all selection criteria are not passed to the
underlying data source on initial rendering.
Another very important consequence is to avoid the potential for user interface "deadlock", due to the fact that multiple filter
elements influence each other. In the standard filtering mode, one master filter widget may reduce the set of available selections
in another master filter widget, and making a selection on the second widget may reduce the available selections on the first. This
can result in a state where certain selections can no longer be made available through the user interface other than by completely
refreshing the dashboard to its initially rendered state.
Because the neutral filtering mode completely clears its filter condition in its default state rather than selecting all available items
as is the case in the standard filter mode, deadlock is avoided by clearing the filter on individual widgets using their Clear Master
Filter button:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 473 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

SYS_MasterFilterSet
SYS_MasterFilterSet is a system generated parameter that reflects whether any master filter selection has been made interactively
on the dashboard. Adding this condition to non-filter widgets has the effect of making them empty until an interactive selection is
made. Note that the designer of a dashboard may choose to manually remove this condition from widget filter criteria after
activating the Empty on Load feature to selectively choose widgets that should show data regardless of whether an interactive
selection has been made.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 474 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Appearance Customization
The topics in this section describe how to customize the appearance of a dashboard or any of its elements using conditional
formatting and coloring.
This section contains the following topics.
Conditional Formatting
Coloring
Data Display Formatting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 475 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Conditional Formatting
The Dashboard Designer provides the capability to apply formatting to dashboard item elements whose values meet the specified
condition. This feature allows you to highlight specific elements using a predefined set of rules.
To learn more about specifics of using a conditional formatting feature for different dashboard items, see the following topics.
Conditional Formatting - Grid
Conditional Formatting - Pivot

The current topic describes the following common concepts.

Conditional Formatting Overview
Create a Format Rule
Specify Appearance Settings
Edit a Format Rule

Conditional Formatting Overview

Comparison rules used in conditional formatting can be divided into the following groups.
Value - Allows you to compare static values (such as Greater Than, Less Than, Between, etc.).
Top-Bottom - Highlights a specific number of topmost/bottommost values.
Average - Highlights values above the average value or below the average value.
A Date Occurring - Allows you to highlight date-time values that fall into a specified interval.
Expression - Allows you to use complex conditions to apply formatting. You can also pass dashboard parameters to
expressions.
Icon Ranges - Allows you to apply formatting by displaying specific icons for different ranges of values. You can select a
predefined set of icons or use a specific icon for each range.
Color Ranges - Allows you to apply formatting using specific colors for different ranges of values. You can select a
predefined set of colors or use custom appearance settings to highlight values within specified ranges.
Gradient Ranges - Allows you to apply formatting using gradient color scales.
Bar - Allows you to visualize numeric values using bars. You can also color bars corresponding to positive and negative
values using different colors.
Bar Color Ranges - Allows you to visualize numeric values using bars whose colors are contained in the specified color set.
Bar Gradient Ranges - Allows you to visualize numeric values using bars whose colors are contained in the specified color
gradient.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 476 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can create comparison rules for measures or dimensions. The list below shows format conditions that can be applied to
different types of data items.
Measure/numeric Dimension
Value
Top-Bottom
Average
Expression
Icon Ranges
Color Ranges
Gradient Ranges
Bar
Bar Color Ranges
Bar Gradient Ranges
string Dimension
Value with the condition type set to Equal To, Not Equal To or Text that Contains
Expression
date-time Dimension
Value
A Date Occuring for dimensions with the continuous date-time group interval
Expression
Icon Ranges
Color Ranges
Gradient Ranges
Bar
Bar Color Ranges
Bar Gradient Ranges

Create a Format Rule

To create a new rule used to apply formatting according to the required condition, do the following.
1. Choose a measure/dimension by whose values a format condition will be calculated. Click the measure/dimension menu
button, select Add Format Rule and choose the condition.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 477 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2. This invokes the dialog that depends on the selected format condition and the type of dashboard item. For instance, the
image below displays the Greater Than dialog corresponding to the Value format condition for the Grid dashboard item.

In this dialog, specify settings specific for the selected condition (for instance, specify a value to compare with
dimension/measure values). To learn more, see the documentation for the required condition.
3. Specify appearance settings applied to elements whose values meet the specified condition.
4. Specify the data item to whose values conditional formatting is applied using the Apply to combo box. Thus, you can create
a format rule for one data item and apply new appearance settings to the other data item. You can also create format rules
for hidden measures and apply formatting to values of visible data items.
Note

Different dashboard items can provide additional capabilities for creating a new format rule. To learn more, refer to
documentation for the required dashboard item.

Specify Appearance Settings

When creating a new format rule, you can select the required appearance settings applied according to the current format
condition. All format conditions allow you to customize appearance settings in a similar manner. For instance, the Value format
condition allows you to specify appearance settings in the following way:
The Appearance tab allows you to choose the predefined background color/font.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 478 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Icons tab allows you to add the predefined icon.

Use the Custom Appearance area in the Appearance tab to add presets containing custom appearance settings. To add a
new preset, click an empty square. This invokes the Custom Style Settings dialog, allowing you to specify the required
appearance settings.

In this dialog, you can specify the backgoround/foreground colors and font settings. Click Create to add a preset. The
created preset will be displayed in the Custom Appearance area.

Edit a Format Rule

To edit format rules for the selected dashboard item, click the Edit Rules button in the Home ribbon tab.

As an alternative, use the Edit Rules data item's menu item or the corresponding item in the dashboard item's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 479 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This invokes the Edit Rules dialog containing existing format rules for this dashboard item.

This dialog allows you to perform the following actions.

To edit the selected rule, use the Edit button or double-click the required rule.
To delete the selected rule, use the Delete button.
To reorder format rules, use the Up and Down buttons (the and icon, respectively). Reordering of rules allows you
to specify the priority of rules from higher (a bottommost rule) to lower (a topmost rule).
To enable/disable the required rule, use the corresponding check box on the left column.
To create a new rule, click the Add button and select the required format condition. The calculated by combo box allows
you to select the measure/dimension by whose values a format rule is applied.
To filter format rules by the specified data item, use the Filter by combo box.
To clear all rules for the specified data item, use the Clear Rules button in the data item's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 480 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Value
The Value format condition allows you to compare static values (such as Greater Than, Less Than, Between, etc.).
The following condition types are supported for measures or date-time dimensions:
Greater Than/Greater Than or Equal To
The "Greater Than"/"Greater Than or Equal To" format conditions allow you to apply formatting to elements whose values
are greater than/greater than or equal to the specified value. For instance, the following image displays a Grid dashboard
item whose Extended Price cells are filled in green if their values are Greater Than 150 000.

This format condition can be applied to measures or date-time dimensions.

Less Than/Less Than or Equal To
The "Less Than"/"Less Than or Equal To" format conditions allow you to apply formatting to elements whose values are less
than/less than or equal to the specified value. For instance, the following image displays a Grid dashboard item whose
Extended Price cells are filled in red if their values are Less Than 150 000.

This format condition can be applied to measures or date-time dimensions.

Equal To/Not Equal To
The "Equal To"/"Not Equal To" format conditions allow you to apply formatting to elements whose values are equal to/not
equal to the specified value. For instance, the following image displays a Grid dashboard item whose Sales Person cells are
filled in blue if their values are equal to 'Robert King'.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 481 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This format condition can be applied to measures, string or date-time dimensions.

Between/Not Between
The "Between"/"Not Between" format conditions allow you to apply formatting to elements whose values are between/not
between the specified values. For instance, the following image displays a Grid dashboard item whose Extended Price cells
are filled in orange if their values are Between 100 000 and 200 000.

This format condition can be applied to measures or date-time dimensions.

Text That Contains
The "Text That Contains" format condition allows you to apply formatting to elements whose values contain the specified
text. For instance, the following image displays a Grid dashboard item whose Sales Person cells are in cyan if their values
contain the 'An' text.

This format condition can be applied to measures, string or date-time dimensions.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 482 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Top-Bottom
The Top-Bottom format conditions allow you to highlight a specific number of topmost/bottommost values. You can specify this
number as an absolute or percent value.
The following condition types are supported for measures:
Top N
The "Top N" format condition allows you to apply formatting to elements whose values are ranked at the top. For instance,
the following image displays a Grid dashboard item whose top 3 Extended Price values filled in green.

Bottom N
The "Bottom N" format condition allows you to apply formatting to elements whose values are ranked at the bottom. For
instance, the following image displays a Grid dashboard item whose bottom 40 percent Extended Price values are filled in
red.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 483 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Average
The Average format conditions allow you to highlight values above or below an average value.
The following condition types are supported for measures:
Above Average/Above or Equal Average
The "Above Average"/"Above or Equal Average" format conditions allow you to apply formatting to elements whose values
are above/above or equal to the average. For instance, the following image displays a Grid dashboard item whose Extended
Price values that are above average (~ 141 000) filled in green.

Below Average/Below or Equal Average

The "Below Average"/"Below or Equal Average" format conditions allow you to apply formatting to elements whose values
are below/below or equal to the average. For instance, the following image displays a Grid dashboard item whose Extended
Price values that are below average (~ 141 000) filled in red.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 484 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Icon Ranges
Icon Ranges allow you to use predefined or custom sets of icons to apply conditional formatting to different ranges of values.
To format values according the required condition, click the data item menu button, select Add Format Rule | Icon Ranges and
choose the required icon set.

This invokes the Range Set dialog containing the set of value ranges and corresponding icons. The Grid dashboard item on the
right displays the default formatting applied using the predefined set of 3 icons.

This dialog allows you to change the following options specific to Icon Ranges.
The Format Style combo box allows you to change the icon set used to apply formatting.
The Use % ranges check box specifies whether the percent or absolute scale is used to generate ranges.
Note

Note that this option is not available for date-time dimensions.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 485 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To change the icon displayed for values corresponding to the specified range, click the button next to the required icon and
select a new icon.

Select No Style to disable the indication for the required range.

You can change range boundaries by specifying the required values.

Note

Note that a new value should fall into a range between corresponding values of the previous and next range.
To change the comparison logic for the required range, click the comparison sign and select the required option.

The greater or equal sign includes the smallest value of the current interval while the greater sigh excludes the smallest
value from the current interval and includes it in the next interval.
Use the Add and Delete buttons to add new ranges or delete the selected range respectively. Note that new range is added
below the selected range.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 486 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Color Ranges
Color Ranges allow you to use predefined sets of colors to apply conditional formatting to different ranges of values. You can also
use custom appearance settings for specific ranges.
To format values according the required condition, click the data item menu button, select Add Format Rule | Color Ranges and
choose the required icon set.

This invokes the Range Set dialog containing the set of value ranges and corresponding appearance settings. The Grid dashboard
item on the right displays the default formatting applied using the predefined set of 3 colors.

This dialog allows you to change the following options specific to Icon Ranges.
The Format Style combo box allows you to change the color set used to apply formatting.
The Use % ranges check box specifies whether the percent or absolute scale is used to generate ranges.
Note

Note that this option is not available for date-time dimensions.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 487 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To change the appearance settings applied to values corresponding to the specified range, click the button next to the
required color and select a new color or specify custom appearance settings. To learn how to specify custom settings, see
the Specify Appearance Settings paragraph in the Conditional Formatting topic.

Select No Style to disable the indication for the required range.

You can change range boundaries by specifying the required values.

Note

Note that a new value should fall into a range between corresponding values of the previous and next range.
To change the comparison logic for the required range, click the comparison sign and select the required option.

The greater or equal sign includes the smallest value for the current interval while the greater sigh excludes the smallest
value from the current interval and includes it in the next interval.
Use the Add and Delete buttons to add new ranges or delete the selected range respectively.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 488 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Gradient Ranges
Gradient Ranges allow you to use predefined color gradients to apply conditional formatting to different ranges of values. You
can also use specific colors to generate custom gradients.
To format values according the required condition, click the measure menu button, select Add Format Rule | Color Ranges and
choose the required color gradient.

This invokes the Gradient Ranges dialog containing the set of value ranges and corresponding appearance settings. The Grid
dashboard item on the right displays the default formatting applied using the predefined Red-Blue gradient.

This dialog allows you to change the following options specific to Gradient Ranges.
Number of ranges allows you to specify the number of ranges used to classify values. Click the Generate Ranges button
to generate a new gradient scale according to the specified number of ranges.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 489 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Use % ranges check box specifies whether the percent or absolute scale is used to generate ranges.
Note

Note that this option is not available for date-time dimensions.

To change the specific color in the gradient, click the button next to the required color and select a new color or specify a
custom background color. This allows you to create a color gradient based on more than two colors. In this case, the
specified colors are marked with an empty square.

To learn how to specify a custom color, see the Specify Appearance Settings paragraph in the Conditional Formatting
topic.
You can change range boundaries by specifying the required values.

Note

Note that a new value should fall into a range between corresponding values of the previous and next range.
To change the comparison logic for the required range, click the comparison sign and select the required option.

The greater or equal sign includes the smallest value in the current interval while the greater sigh excludes the smallest
value from the current interval and includes it in the next interval.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 490 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

A Date Occurring
A Date Occurring format condition allows you to highlight date-time values that fall into a specified interval. Note that this format
condition can be applied to dimensions with the continuous date-time group interval.
To format values according the Date Occurring condition, click the menu button of the required dimension and select Add
Format Rule | A Date Occurring.

This invokes the A Date Occurring dialog that allows you to select a date-time interval(s) whose value should be formatted.

The following intervals are supported.

Is beyond this year - Dates that follow the current year.
Is later this year - Dates of the current year starting from the following month.
Is later this month - Dates of the current month that follow the next week.
Is later this week - Dates of the current week starting from the day after tomorrow.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 491 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Is next week - Dates that belong to the following week.

Is tomorrow - Tomorrow.
Is today - Today.
Is yesterday - Yesterday.
Is earlier this week - Dates of the current week that are prior to yesterday.
Is last week - Dates of the previous week.
Is earlier this month - Dates of the current month that are prior to the previous week.
Is earlier this year - Dates of the current year that are prior to the current month.
Is prior to this year - Dates that are prior to the current year.
Empty - Does not specify any condition.
Beyond - Dates that belong to the month in three-months time and beyond.
ThisWeek - Dates that belong to the current week.
ThisMonth - Dates that belong to the current month.
MonthAfter1 - Dates that belong to the following month.
MonthAfter2 - Dates that belong to the month in two-months time.
MonthAgo1 - Dates that belong to the previous month.
MonthAgo2 - Dates that belong to the month two months ago.
MonthAgo3 - Dates that belong to the month three months ago.
MonthAgo4 - Dates that belong to the month four months ago.
MonthAgo5 - Dates that belong to the month five months ago.
MonthAgo6 - Dates that belong to the month six months ago.
Earlier - Dates that belong to the month seven months ago and earlier.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 492 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Expression
An Expression format condition allows you to use complex conditions to apply formatting.
To format values according to the Expression condition, click the menu button of the required data item and select Add Format
Rule | Expression.

This invokes the Expression dialog that allows you to specify the required expression. For instance, the following image displays
a Grid dashboard item whose rows are filled in green if the Extended Price/Quantity values are greater than 150 000 and 7 500,
respectively.

You can pass static values when creating conditions or pass a dashboard parameter to apply conditional formatting dynamically.
To learn more, see Passing Parameter Values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 493 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Bar
The Bar format condition allows you to visualize numeric values using bars. You can also paint bars corresponding to positive and
negative values using different colors.
To format values according to the Bar condition, click the menu button of the required data item and select Add Format Rule |
Bar.

This invokes the Bar dialog that allows you to specify the required settings. For instance, the following image displays a Grid
dashboard item whose Extended Price cell contains data bars corresponding to numeric values.

This dialog allows you to change the following options specific to the Bar format condition.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 494 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

By default, lengths of the shortest and longest bars correspond to minimum and maximum values, respectively. If necessary,
you can specify values corresponding to the shortest and longest bars manually. To do this, change the type of
minimum/maximum value from Automatic to Number or Percent, and specify the required values.
Style Settings and Negative Style Settings allow you to specify style settings used to color data bars corresponding to
positive and negative values, respectively. To learn how to specify custom style settings, see the Specify Appearance
Settings paragraph in the Conditional Formatting topic.
The Allow negative axis option allows you to specify whether negative data bars are displayed in the direction opposite to
the positive data bars.
The Draw axis option specifies whether to draw the vertical axis between positive and negative data bars.
The Show bar only option specifies whether to show bars without corresponding values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 495 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Bar Color Ranges

Bar Color Ranges allow you to visualize numeric values using bars whose colors are contained in the specified color set.
To format values according the required condition, click the data item menu button, select Add Format Rule | Bar Color Ranges
and choose the required color set.

This invokes the Color Range Bar dialog containing the set of value ranges and corresponding colors. The Grid dashboard item
on the right displays the default formatting applied using the predefined set of 3 colors.

This dialog allows you to change the following options specific to Bar Color Ranges.
The Format Style combo box allows you to change the color set used to apply formatting.
The Use % ranges check box specifies whether the percent or absolute scale is used to generate ranges.
Note

Note that this option is not available for numeric dimensions.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 496 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To change the appearance settings applied to values corresponding to the specified range, click the button next to the
required color and select a new color or specify custom appearance settings. To learn how to specify custom settings, see
the Specify Appearance Settings paragraph in the Conditional Formatting topic.

Select No Style to disable the indication for the required range.

You can change range boundaries by specifying the required values.

Note

Note that a new value should fall into a range between corresponding values of the previous and next range.
To change the comparison logic for the required range, click the comparison sign and select the required option.

The greater or equal sign includes the smallest value for the current interval, while the greater sign excludes the smallest
value from the current interval and includes it in the next interval.
Use the Add and Delete buttons to add new ranges or delete the selected range respectively.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 497 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Bar Gradient Ranges

The Bar Gradient Ranges allow you to visualize numeric values using bars whose colors are contained in the specified color
gradient.
To format values according the required condition, click the measure menu button, select Add Format Rule | Bar Gradient
Ranges and choose the required color gradient.

This invokes the Bar Gradient Ranges dialog containing the set of value ranges and corresponding appearance settings. The Grid
dashboard item on the right displays the default formatting applied using the predefined Red-Blue gradient.

This dialog allows you to change the following options specific to Bar Gradient Ranges.
Number of ranges allows you to specify the number of ranges used to classify values. Click the Generate Ranges button
to generate a new gradient scale according to the specified number of ranges.
The Use % ranges check box specifies whether the percent or absolute scale is used to generate ranges.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 498 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

Note that this option is not available for numeric dimensions.

To change the specific color in the gradient, click the button next to the required color and select a new color or specify a
custom background color. This allows you to create a color gradient based on more than two colors. In this case, the
specified colors are marked with an empty square.

To learn how to specify a custom color, see the Specify Appearance Settings paragraph in the Conditional Formatting
topic.
You can change range boundaries by specifying the required values.

Note

Note that a new value should fall into a range between corresponding values of the previous and next range.
To change the comparison logic for the required range, click the comparison sign and select the required option.

The greater or equal sign includes the smallest value in the current interval while the greater sign excludes the smallest
value from the current interval and includes it in the next interval.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 499 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Coloring
The Dashboard Designer provides the capability to manage coloring of dashboard item elements. You can choose whether to use
a global color scheme providing consistent colors for identical values across the dashboard or a local color scheme that provides
an independent set of colors for each dashboard item. The Dashboard Designer also allows you to edit colors automatically
assigned from the default palette.
The section contains the following topics.
Coloring Concepts
Customizing a Color Scheme

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 500 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Coloring Concepts
The Dashboard Designer provides you with the capability to color dashboard item elements by associating dimension
values/measures and specified colors. You can choose whether to use a global color scheme to provide consistent colors for
identical values or specify a local color scheme for each dashboard item.
Supported Dashboard Items
Color Schemes
Coloring Dimensions and Measures

Supported Dashboard Items

ReportsNow Dashboard allows you to manage coloring for the following dashboard items.
Chart
Scatter Chart
Pie
Pie Map
Range Filter
Treemap

Color Schemes
The dashboard provides two ways of coloring dashboard item elements.
Using a global color scheme that provides consistent colors for identical values across the dashboard. The image below
shows the dashboard containing Pie and Chart dashboard items. Pie segments and chart series points corresponding to
'Beverages', 'Condiments' and 'Diary Products' dimension values are colored using identical colors from the default palette.

To use global colors for coloring dashboard item elements, click the Global Colors button in the Design ribbon tab.

Im por tant

When a global color scheme is used, the dashboard reserves automatically generated colors for certain values regardless of
the filter state.
Using a local color scheme that provides an independent set of colors for each dashboard item.
To use local colors for coloring dashboard item elements, click Local Colors in the Design ribbon tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 501 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Im por tant

When a local color scheme is used, the dashboard reassigns palette colors when the filter state is changed.

Coloring Dimensions and Measures

Dashboard items allow you to manage the coloring of individual dimensions or all dashboard item measures using predefined
coloring modes.

CO LO R ING
MO D E D ES CR IPTIO N

Dimension values/measures are colored by default. To learn how specific dashboard items color their elements by default, see
Default
the Coloring topic for the corresponding dashboard item.

Hue Dimension values/measures are colored by hue. If coloring by hue is enabled, a data item indicates this using the indicator.

None Dimension values/measures are colored with the same color.

Coloring D imension Values

To specify the coloring mode for the required dimension, click the dimension's menu button and use the Color by submenu. For
instance, the image below shows the Chart dashboard item whose 'Country' dimension is colored by hue.

Coloring Measures
To specify the coloring mode for dashboard item measures, click the menu button of any measure and use the Color by
submenu. For instance, the image below shows the Pie dashboard item whose measures are colored by hue.

If you enabled coloring by hue for several dimensions/measures, all combinations of dimension values/measures will be
automatically colored using different colors from the default palette. To learn how to customize these colors, see Customizing a
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 502 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Color Scheme.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 503 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customizing a Color Scheme

The Dashboard Designer provides the capability to edit colors contained in global and local color schemes. You can select the
required color from the default dashboard palette or specify a custom color.
Invoke a Color Scheme Dialog
Edit Colors
Add a New Value
Add a New Color Table

Invoke a Color Scheme Dialog

To edit colors, use the Color Scheme dialog. You can invoke this dialog in the following ways.
To edit colors in a global color scheme, use the Edit Colors button in the Home ribbon tab or the Edit Colors button in the
dashboard item's Design tab.

To edit colors in a local color scheme, use the Edit Colors button in the contextual Design ribbon tab.

Lets consider a Chart dashboard item whose dimensions and measures are colored by hue using local colors.

For this dashboard item, the Color Scheme dialog will contain combinations of all dimension values and a specific measure.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 504 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

In this dialog, you can perform the following actions.

Edit automatically assigned colors or specify new colors.
Add new values to a color table.
Add new color tables containing values whose colors are not yet assigned.

Edit Colors
You can customize automatically assigned colors in several ways.
To retain the automatically assigned color for the selected value, right-click the required value in the Value column and
select Retain this color.

This reserves the current palette color for the selected value.
You can select another palette color by clicking the required cell in the Color column.

To specify a custom color, click More Colors... and pick any color using the RGB or HSB color model in the invoked Select
Color dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 505 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can reset the customized color for the selected value using the Reset menu item.

Add a New Value

The Color Scheme dialog allows you adding a new value with the specified color to the selected color table. To do this, click the
New Value... button.

In the invoked New Value dialog, specify the dimension values, add the required measures and click OK. This creates a new value
whose color can be specified as described in Edit Colors.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 506 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can remove manually added values using the Remove context menu item.

Add a New Color Table

The Color Scheme dialog also allows you to add a new color table containing values whose colors are not yet assigned. To do
this, click New Color Table... button.

In the invoked dialog, specify the data source, add the required dimensions and enable the 'MeasureNames' Dimension check-
box if you need to add measures to a color table.
Click OK to add the color table to a color scheme. Then, you can add values to this table (see Add a New Value) and specify its
colors (see Edit Colors).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 507 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Display Format

The ReportsNow Dashboard allows you to specify format settings for numeric and date-time values, as described in the
Formatting Data document. However, certain data labels and delta values can be formatted independently to give you more ways
to improve data readability and optimize screen space usage.
Visual elements whose format can be customized are different for different dashboard items. For more information refer to the
topics listed below.
Chart X-Axis Format
Chart Y-Axis Format
Scatter X and Y Axes Formats
Grid Delta Column Formats
Gauge Scale Label Format
Choropleth Map Delta Format
Card Formats

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 508 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Analysis
This section describes how to perform advanced data analysis using the aggregate and window functions, dashboard parameters,
etc.
The section consists of the following topics.
Aggregations
Window Calculations
Using Dashboard Parameters

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 509 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Aggregations
Topics in this section describe functions used to introduce additional aggregation levels to prepare underlying data.
Summary Level Aggregations
Intermediate Level Aggregations

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 510 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Summary Level Aggregations

The Dashboard Designer allows you to perform aggregations when constructing a calculated field expression. This allows you to
evaluate calculated fields on a summary level.
In the Dashboard Designer, you can use the following set of predefined aggregate functions.

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Aggr(SummaryExpression, Aggregates underlying data using the detail level specified by a predefined set of dimensions and a specified
Dimensions) summary function. To learn more, see Intermediate Level Aggregations.

Avg(Value) Returns the average of all the values in the expression.

Count() Returns the number of values.

CountDistinct(Value) Returns the number of distinct values.

Max(Value) Returns the maximum value across all records.

Min(Value) Returns the minimum value across all records.

Median(Value) Returns the median of the values.

Sum(Value) Returns the sum of all values.

Var(Value) Returns an estimate of the variance of a population where the sample is a subset of the entire population.

Varp(Value) Returns the variance of a population where the population is the entire data to be summarized.

Returns an estimate of the standard deviation of a population where the sample is a subset of the entire
StdDev(Value)
population.

StdDevp(Value) Returns the standard deviation of a population where the population is the entire data to be summarized.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 511 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

These functions can be used for all types of numeric fields. After creating such calculated fields, you can use them as measures
contained in an OLAP cube.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 512 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Intermediate Level Aggregations

The Dashboard can aggregate and summarize data on different levels.
Dashboard items aggregate and summarize data at a visualization level using dimensions and measures, respectively. To
learn more, see Binding Dashboard Items to Data.
The Aggr function allows you to introduce an intermediate detail level that is not related to the visualization level. This
allows you to create custom aggregations at different levels and combine these aggregations with existing visualizations.

Overview
The Aggr function aggregates and summarizes underlying data using the detail level specified by a predefined set of dimensions
and a specified summary function. This function can be used during the creation of a new calculated field in the Expression Editor.
The Aggr function has the following syntax.

Aggr(summaryExpression, dimension1, dimension2, ...)

The first argument is a summary expression calculated against a specific data source field. The next arguments are the set of
dimensions whose values are aggregated and used to calculate summaries specified using the first argument. For instance, the
following function calculates sums of sales for each product within the specified category.

Aggr(Sum([Sales]), [Category], [Product])

If you created the calculated field that includes the Aggr function and dropped the created field into an existing dashboard item,
the Dashboard joins the resulting aggregation with the already displayed data. This means that you can add data with the
increased or decreased granularity to the dashboard item. There are two main scenarios.
In the first scenario, an aggregation has a less detailed granularity than visualized data.
In this scenario, an underlying data source contains the list of orders for two categories and corresponding products.

To aggregate this data by individual categories, create a calculated field with the following expression.

Aggr(Sum([Sales]), [Category])

The following internal table will be generated for this calculated field.

The sample Grid dashboard item contains more detailed data and includes the following columns: Category, Product and
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 513 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

the sum of Sales.

If you drop the created calculated field to the Grid, the sum of sales for each category will be repeated for each Grid row.

For instance, you can use these values later to calculate a contribution of each product to a category’s sales.
An aggregation has a more detailed granularity than visualized data.
To aggregate this data by categories and products, create a calculated field with the following expression.

Aggr(Sum([Sales]), [Category], [Product])

The following internal table will be generated for this calculated field.

Drop the created calculated field to the Grid and set its summary type to Min. The Grid will display minimum product sales
within each category.

Example 1 - Best/Worst Sales by Year

The following example shows how to display best and worst monthly sales for each year.
In this example, the Chart dashboard item shows the sum of sales by different years. The Sales field is placed in the Values section
and the OrderDate (with the Year group interval) is placed in the Arguments section.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 514 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To display sales by the best/worst months for each year, create a new calculated field with the following expression.

Aggr(Sum([Sales]), GetYear([OrderDate]), GetMonth([OrderDate]))

Drop this field (Sales by Year/Month in the image below) to the Values section and set its summary type to Max. Then, drop this
field to Values again and set its summary type to Min. The Chart will visualize sales by the best/worst months in a year.

Example 2 - Percent of Total

This example will demonstrate how to calculate a contribution of individual quarter sales to year sales.
In this example, the Pivot dashboard item displays the sum of sales by year/quarter. The Sales field is placed in the Values section
and the hierarchy of OrderDate fields (with the Year and Quarter group intervals) is placed in Rows.

To calculate a contribution of each quarter to a year sales, do the following.

Calculate totals for each year using the Aggr function by creating the following calculated field.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 515 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Aggr(Sum([Sales]), GetYear([OrderDate]))

Set the name of the created field to Sales by Year.

Calculate a contribution of each quarter to year sales by creating the following calculated field.

Sum([Sales]) / Max([Sales by Year])

Name this field Percent of Total and drop it to Values to see the result.

Example 3 - Customer Acquisition

In this example, a customer acquisition will be evaluated by grouping customers by the quarter/year of their first purchase to
compare sales contributions.
The Chart dashboard item below visualizes sales by quarter/year.

The following expression determines the minimum order date (the first purchase date) per customer.

Aggr(Min(GetDateQuarterYear([OrderDate])), [CustomerID])

Set the name of the created field to Customer First Order and drop this field to the Series section to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 516 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Example 4 - Customer Order Count

In this example, you will learn how to divide customers count by the number of orders they made.
The Chart below shows the number of orders that is made by each customer.

The calculated field below evaluates the number of unique orders made by each customer.

Aggr(CountDistinct([OrderID]), [CustomerID])

Set the name of this field to Customer Order Count and drop this field to arguments. Then, drop the CustomerID field to Values
and change its summary type to Count Distinct.

The Chart will show the number of customers that made a specific number of orders.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 517 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Example 5 - Best Product Sales by Year

This scenario requires the use of nested aggregations. In this example, the dashboard will show products with the best sales in a
year along with sales values.
The initial Grid dashboard item shows sales of all products by year (the OrderDate column with the Year group interval and the
Sales column). The data source also contains the ProductName field.

To implement this scenario, perform the following steps.

Create the calculated field that will return product sales for individual years.

Aggr(Sum([Sales]), GetYear([OrderDate]), [ProductName])

Set its name to Product Sales by Year.

Create the calculated field that will return maximum sales values.

Aggr(Max([Product Sales by Year]), GetYear([OrderDate]))

Set its name to Max Product Sales by Year.

Finally, create a calculated field returning the name of the product with the best sales and a corresponding sales value.

Iif([Max Product Sales by Year] = [Product Sales by Year], [ProductName] + ' ($ ' + [Product Sales by
Year] + ')', null)

Specify the name as Best Sales Product. Then, drop this field to the Columns section to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 518 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Window Calculations
Window calculations provide the capability to apply specific computations to measure values and allow you to perform different
analytical tasks such as to compute running totals, percentages of totals, differences, etc.
Topics in this section.
Window Calculations Overview
Window Definition
Creating Window Calculations
Calculation Functions Reference
Window Calculation Limitations

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 519 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Window Calculations Overview

Window calculations provide the capability to apply specific computations to measure values and allow you to perform different
analytical tasks such as to compute running totals, percentages of totals, differences, etc.

The Dashboard Designer allows you to apply window calculations to values of the specified measure. The following calculation
types are supported.
Running Total - Allows you to calculate a cumulative total for a set of measure values.

Moving Calculation - Allows you to apply a moving calculation, which uses neighboring values to calculate a total. Note
that neighboring values are specified using offsets from the currently processed value.

Difference - Allows you to compute differences between measure values.

Percent of Total - Allows you to calculate a contribution of individual measure values to a total.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 520 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Rank - Allows you to rank values of the specified measure.

Note that the computing of calculations depends on two factors.

The type of the dashboard item.
In this case, you need to specify a calculation direction that depends on the dashboard item type. For instance, the Pivot
dashboard item provides the capability to apply calculations along with its columns or rows.
The set of dimensions that are used to calculate measure values.
In this case, a calculation direction depends on the dimensions' order.
In both cases, measure values participating in a calculation fall into a specified window. To learn more, see Window Definition.
To learn how to create a calculation in the Dashboard Designer, see Creating Window Calculations.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 521 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Window Definition
A window definition specifies a window that limits measure values participating in a calculation. To learn more, see Window
Calculations Overview.

Dashboard Item Window Definition

The following table lists window definitions in terms of the Pivot dashboard item. A calculation is performed using the Index
function along the following directions.

D IR ECTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE E X AMPLE D ES CR IPTIO N

In this example, a window is a

A calculation is performed
Columns combination of Country/Category
horizontally through Pivot columns.
dimensions.

In this example, a window is a

A calculation is performed vertically
Rows combination of Year/Quarter
through Pivot rows.
dimensions.

A calculation is performed
Columns / In this example, a window is the entire
horizontally through Pivot columns,
Rows pivot table.
then rows.

Rows / A calculation is performed vertically In this example, a window is the entire

Columns through Pivot rows, then columns. pivot table.

Columns A calculation is performed In this example, a window is a

within horizontally through Pivot columns combination of the Country/Category
Groups within groups. and Year dimensions.

Rows In this example, a window is a

A calculation is performed vertically
within combination of the Year/Quarter and
through Pivot rows within groups.
Groups Country dimensions.

Columns /
A calculation is performed In this example, a window is a
Rows
horizontally through Pivot columns combination of Country/Year
within
then rows within groups. dimensions.
Groups

Rows /
A calculation is performed vertically In this example, a window is a
Columns
through Pivot rows, then columns combination of Country/Year
within
within groups. dimensions.
Groups

* Group - an area that is limited by a set of values corresponding to the bottommost partitioning dimensions.

Specific Window Definition

If necessary, you can manually specify the set of dimensions that fall into the window. These dimensions are called window
dimensions.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 522 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

For instance, the Index function is applied to measure values of the pivot table below using the OrderDate (Year) and Country
window dimensions.

The Specific Window Definition dialog allows you to do this.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 523 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Creating Window Calculations

The Dashboard Designer allows you to add a window calculation for numeric measures. To do this, invoke the data item menu
and select the required calculation type.

The image above shows a calculation menu of the Pivot dashboard item. The following items are available.
Percent of Column Grand Total - Calculates a contribution of individual measure values to a column grand total.
Percent of Row Grand Total - Calculates a contribution of individual measure values to a row grand total.
Percent of Grand Total - Calculates a contribution of individual measure values to a grand total.
Running Summary along Columns - Calculates a cumulative total for measure values along columns (horizontally).
Running Summary along Rows - Calculates a cumulative total for measure values along rows (vertically).
Difference along Columns - Calculates differences between measure values along columns (horizontally).
Difference along Rows - Calculates differences between measure values along rows (vertically).
Percent Difference along Columns - Calculates percentage differences between measure values along columns
(horizontally).
Percent Difference along Rows - Calculates percentage differences between measure values along rows (vertically).
Rank along Columns - Ranks measure values along columns (horizontally).
Rank along Rows - Ranks measure values along rows (vertically).
Rank along Cells - Ranks measure values along cells (throughout the entire pivot table).
Custom... - Allows you to create a custom calculation by specifying various settings. Clicking this item invokes the
Customize Calculation dialog that allows you to add additional customizations to calculations.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 524 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To learn more, see descriptions of the available calculations below.

Note

Note that the list of available items in this menu can be changed by the Dashboard Designer dynamically. For instance, if the Pivot
dashboard item does not contain dimensions in the Rows section, menu items related to rows will be disabled.

Running Total
The Running Total calculation can be used to compute a cumulative total for the specified measure across a window. For example,
the Grid below displays cumulative sales across all quarters.

The Customize Calculation dialog provides the following settings for the Running Total calculation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 525 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Running along - Specifies a window and direction used to calculate running totals.
Summary function - Specifies a summary function used to apply calculation. To learn more about the available summary
functions, see the Summary Function Types in the summary function topic.

Moving Calculation
The Moving calculation uses neighboring values to calculate a total. For example, the Grid below shows a moving average across
all quarters.

The Customize Calculation dialog provides the following settings for the Moving calculation.

Moving along - Specifies a window and direction used to apply a calculation.

Summary function - Specifies a summary function used to apply a calculation. To learn more about the available summary
functions, see the Summary Function Types in the summary function topic.
Start offset / End offset - Specify start/end offsets from the currently processed value. For instance, if you specified offsets
as 1/1, the previous and next values will be used along with the current value to apply the Moving calculation.

Difference
The Difference calculation can be used to compute the difference between measure values across a window. For example, the Grid
below shows absolute differences between quarterly sales.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 526 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Customize Calculation dialog provides the following settings for the Difference calculation.

Calculate along - Specifies a window and direction used to calculate differences.

Difference from - Specifies the value used to calculate the difference. The following values are available: Previous, Next,
First and Last.
You can also use the Percent Difference option to specify whether the absolute or percentage difference is displayed.

Percent of Total
A calculation is used to compute a percentage of the total for the specified measure across a window. For example, the Grid below
shows a contribution of individual quarterly sales to total sales.

The Customize Calculation dialog provides the following settings for the Percent of Total calculation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 527 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Percent of Total - Specifies a window and direction used to apply a Percent of Total calculation.

Rank
Use the Rank calculation to compute rankings for the specified measure across a window. For example, the Grid below shows a
ranking of sales for individual quarters.

The Customize Calculation dialog provides the following settings for the Rank calculation.

Rank along - Specifies a window and direction used to rank values.

Rank type - Specifies the type of ranking. The following rank types are available: Unique, Competition, Dense, Modified and
Percentile.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 528 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Order - Specifies the order of ranking. You can select Ascending or Descending.

Expression
Use Expression to specify a custom calculation by adding the required calculation functions inside the measure expression.

Click the Edit in Expression Editor button to invoke the Expression Editor and specify the required expression.

The Expression type provides the Calculate along option that specifies the window and direction used to calculate differences.
Note that this option is in effect if the expression contains a calculation function.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 529 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculation Functions Reference

This topic contains the descriptions of window functions that can be used to specify measure expressions.

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE IMAG E

Returns the
number of rows
Last() from the current Last()
row to the last row
in the window.

Returns the
number of rows
First() from the current First()
row to the first row
in the window.

Returns the index

Index() of the current row Index()
in the window.

Returns the
Size() number of rows in Size()
the window.

Returns the value

of the expression in
a target position
Lookup(SummaryExpression, Position) specified as a Lookup(Sum([Sales]), 3)
relative offset from
the current
position.

Returns the standard competition

RankCompetition(SummaryExpression, [ RankCompetition(Sum([Sales]),
'desc' ]) rank for the current row in the
'asc' 'asc')
window.

Returns the dense rank for the

RankDense(SummaryExpression, [ 'asc' 'desc' ]) RankDense(Sum([Sales]), 'asc')
current row in the window.

Returns the unique rank for the RankUnique(Sum([Sales]),

RankUnique(SummaryExpression, [ 'asc' 'desc' ])
current row in the window. 'asc')

Returns the modified competition

RankModified(Sum([Sales]),
RankModified(SummaryExpression, [ 'asc' 'desc' ]) rank for the current row in the
'asc')
window.

Returns the percentile rank for the RankPercentile(Sum([Sales]),

RankPercentile(SummaryExpression, [ 'asc' 'desc' ])
current row in the window. 'desc')

Returns the
running average of
the specified
RunningAvg(SummaryExpression) expression from RunningAvg(Sum([Sales]))
the first row in the
window to the
current row.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 530 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE IMAG E

Returns the
running count of
the specified
RunningCount(SummaryExpression) expression from RunningCount(Sum([Sales])) -
the first row in the
window to the
current row.

Returns the
running maximum
of the specified
RunningMax(SummaryExpression) expression from RunningMax(Sum([Sales]))
the first row in the
window to the
current row.

Returns the
running minimum
of the specified
RunningMin(SummaryExpression) expression from RunningMin(Sum([Sales]))
the first row in the
window to the
current row.

Returns the
running sum of the
specified
RunningSum(SummaryExpression) expression from RunningSum(Sum([Sales]))
the first row in the
window to the
current row.

Returns the
average of the
expression within
WindowAvg(SummaryExpression, WindowAvg(Sum([Sales]), First(),
the window, which
StartOffset, EndOffset) Last())
is defined using
offsets from the
current row.

Returns the count

WindowCount(SummaryExpression, WindowCount(Sum([Sales]),
of the expression
StartOffset, EndOffset) First()+2, Last())
within the window.

Returns the distinct

WindowCountDistinct(SummaryExpression, count of the WindowCountDistinct(Sum([Sales]),
-
StartOffset, EndOffset) expression within First(), Last())
the window.

Returns the
WindowMax(SummaryExpression, maximum of the WindowMax(Sum([Sales]), First(),
StartOffset, EndOffset) expression within Last())
the window.

Returns the
WindowMin(SummaryExpression, minimum of the WindowMin(Sum([Sales]), First(),
StartOffset, EndOffset) expression within Last())
the window.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 531 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE IMAG E

Returns the
WindowMedian(SummaryExpression, median of the WindowMedian(Sum([Sales]),
StartOffset, EndOffset) expression within First(), Last())
the window.

Returns the sum of

WindowSum(SummaryExpression, WindowSum(Sum([Sales]),
the expression
StartOffset, EndOffset) First()+2, Last())
within the window.

Returns the
WindowVar(SummaryExpression, variance of the WindowVar(Sum([Sales]), First(),
-
StartOffset, EndOffset) expression within Last())
the window.

Returns the biased

WindowVarp(SummaryExpression, variance of the WindowVarp(Sum([Sales]), First(),
-
StartOffset, EndOffset) expression within Last())
the window.

Returns the sample

WindowStdDev(SummaryExpression, standard deviation WindowStdDev(Sum([Sales]),
-
StartOffset, EndOffset) of the expression First(), Last())
within the window.

Returns the biased

WindowStdDevp(SummaryExpression, standard deviation WindowStdDevp(Sum([Sales]),
-
StartOffset, EndOffset) of the expression First(), Last())
within the window.

Returns the total

for the specified
expression in a
calculation window.
Note that the
Total(SummaryExpression) Total function Total(Sum([Sales]))
calculates the total
based on values
from the
underlying data
source.

Im por tant

Note that window functions cannot be used inside Aggr.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 532 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Window Calculation Limitations

Supported Dashboard Items
Window calculations can be applied to measures of the following dashboard items.
Chart
Grid
Pies
Cards
Gauges
Pivot
Range Filter

Data Shaping Limitations

The use of calculations imposes the following limitations related to data shaping features.
Sorting by measure cannot be applied if the target measure has a calculation applied.
Top N cannot be applied if its target measure has a calculation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 533 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Using Dashboard Parameters

You can use dashboard parameters when it is necessary to pass data of a certain type to a dashboard (e.g., to pass a specific
value to the data source filter string or a calculated field).
The topics in this section describe how to use dashboard parameters.
Creating Parameters
Passing Parameter Values
Requesting Parameter Values

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 534 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Creating Parameters
This topic explains how to create a new dashboard parameter and specify its settings.
Creating Parameters in the Dashboard Designer
Look-Up Editor Settings

Creating Parameters in the Dashboard Designer

To create dashboard parameters in the Dashboard Designer, do the following:
1. Click the Parameters button on the Ribbon's Data Source tab.

2. In the invoked dialog, click the Add button to add a new parameter.

3. Specify the following settings.

Visible - Specifies whether or not the parameter editor is visible in the Dashboard Parameters dialog.
Allow Null - Specifies whether or a not null value can be passed as a parameter value.
Allow Multiselect - Specifies whether or not multi-selection is enabled for the current parameter. The following
limitations are applied to parameters with multi-selection enabled.
Use the is any of or is none of operators to pass a multi-select parameter to a filter criteria or to the Expression
format condition.
Use the In or Not In operators to pass a multi-select parameter to a calculated field expression.
Name - Specifies the parameter name. When creating and modifying parameter names, follow the rules below.
A name can contain letters, numbers and underscores.
A name cannot contain spaces.
A name cannot be an empty string.
The dashboard cannot contain parameters with the same name.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 535 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Names are case-sensitive. For example, you can create the names Parameter and PARAMETER .
Description - Specifies the parameter's description. The parameter's description is the value displayed in the
Parameter Name column of the Dashboard Parameters dialog.
Look-Up Settings - Specifies the parameter's look-up editor settings.
Select All Values - Specifies whether or not all parameter values should be selected in the initial state of the
Dashboard Viewer.
Note that this option is in effect when Allow Multiselect is set to true.
Type - Specifies the parameter type.
Value - Specifies the default parameter’s value. Note that when Allow Multiselect is set to true, the Value option
allows you to select multiple parameter values.
Then, click OK to add the created parameters to the dashboard.

Look-Up Editor Settings

There are three types of look-up editor settings that can be specified for a parameter. Select the required type from the
LookUpSettings drop-down list.

No Look-Up - set the Value to use a static value as a parameter.

Static List - click the ellipsis button to add static values for the current dashboard parameter.

In this case, the Value specifies the default parameter's value.

Dynamic List - allows you to use a list of values from the existing data source as a parameter. You need to select the
required Data Source from the list of available data sources and data members for the dashboard parameter's display
name and value, respectively.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 536 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

1. First, select the required Data Source from the list of available data sources. For the DAS report data source, select the
required Data Member that specifies the query from the selected Data Source.
2. Then, specify data members for the dashboard parameter's value and display name using Value Member and
Display Member, respectively.
3. If necessary, specify the data member used to sort parameter values using the Sort By option. Sort Order specifies
the required sort order.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 537 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Passing Parameter Values

In this topic, you will learn how to pass parameter values to a dashboard.
Filtering
Conditional Formatting
Calculated Fields
Window Calculations

Filtering
You can apply filtering to a specific dashboard item according to the current parameter value(s) using the Filter Editor.
In the Filter Editor, you can compare a field value with the following objects.
A static value (represented by the icon). Click this button to switch to the next item mode ("another field value"), to
compare the field value with another field value.
Another field value (represented by the icon). Click this button to switch to the next item mode (“parameter value”), to
compare the field value with a parameter value.
A parameter value (represented by the icon). Click this button to switch back to the initial mode ("static value"), to
compare the field value with a static value.
Thus, to compare a field value with a parameter value, click the button, then click the button.

Conditional Formatting
You can apply conditional formatting to a specific dashboard item according to the current parameter value when creating the
Expression format condition. In the Expression dialog, you can compare a field value with parameter values in the same manner
as in the Filter Editor dialog.

Calculated Fields
You can use parameters when constructing expressions for calculated fields. This allows you to dynamically evaluate values of the
calculated field depending on the current parameter value.
To include the required parameter in the calculated field expression, click Parameters in the Expression Editor dialog and double-

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 538 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

click the required parameter.

Window Calculations
You can use parameters when customizing expressions for window calculations. This allows you to apply a calculation
dynamically, depending on the current parameter value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 539 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Requesting Parameter Values

The dashboard provides a built-in Dashboard Parameters dialog, which provides the capability to change dashboard parameter
values. This dialog is created automatically, depending on the parameter type and visibility settings.
To invoke the Dashboard Parameters dialog in the Dashboard Designer, click the Parameters ( ) button in the dashboard title.
Depending on the visibility state of the created dashboard parameters, this invokes the following dialog.

Select the required parameter values in the Dashboard Parameters dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes.
To reset the changes to the default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 540 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Converting Dashboard Items

The Dashboard Designer provides the capability to convert data-bound dashboard items to another type. To convert the selected
dashboard item to another type, use the Convert button in the ribbon's Home tab or the corresponding command in the item's
context menu.

The Dashboard Designer always preserves the following settings for data-bound dashboard items.
The set of data items used to bind the dashboard item to data.
Data shaping settings of data items and their names.
A custom name displayed within the dashboard item caption.
The following settings are kept if the dashboard item is being converted to an item that also supports this feature.
Master Filtering settings (e.g., the specified master filter mode) and Drill-Down settings (e.g., the target dimension).
Conditional Formatting settings.
Coloring settings.
Calculation settings.
For different types of dashboard items, some specific settings can be preserved. For example, the following settings are preserved.
Legend settings for the Chart/Scatter Chart dashboard items.
Series types for the Chart/Range Filter dashboard items.
Element arrangement settings for the Pie/Card/Gauge dashboard items.
Caption settings for the Pie/Gauge dashboard items.
Navigation settings for Choropleth Map/Geo Point Maps.
The attribute whose values are displayed within shape titles for Choropleth Map/Geo Point Maps.
Legend settings for the Choropleth Map/Geo Point Maps.
Clustering settings for Geo Point Maps.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 541 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Layout
This section describes the features related to the Dashboard layout.
The section consists of the following topics.
Dashboard Title
Dashboard Item Caption
Dashboard Items Layout

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 542 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Title
The Dashboard Title is located at the top of the dashboard surface. It can contain text or image content.

If you are using the Ribbon menu in the Dashboard Designer, you can change title settings by clicking the Title button.

This invokes the Dashboard Title dialog, which allows you to change the text within the dashboard title, add an image, etc.

This dialog allows you to specify the following options.

Visible - Specifies whether or not the dashboard title is visible.
Show Master Filter state - Specifies whether or not to show the state of master filter items in the dashboard title.
When you hover over the filter icon ( ), all master filters applied to the dashboard are displayed in the invoked popup.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 543 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Alignment - Specifies the alignment of the dashboard title.

Load button - Allows you to specify the image displayed within the dashboard title. In this case, the dashboard definition
will contain the URL to access the image.
Import button - Allows you to specify the image displayed within the dashboard title. In this case, the dashboard definition
will contain an image as a byte array.
The dashboard title can contain command buttons.
Export To button - allows you to print/export the dashboard. To learn more about printing and exporting, see the Printing
and Exporting topic.
Parameters button - allows you to modify dashboard parameter values. To learn more about parameters, see the Using
Dashboard Parameters topic.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 544 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Item Caption

Each dashboard item has a caption that is displayed at the top of the item. The caption contains static text along with other
information, as well as command buttons.

To show or hide the caption of a dashboard item, click the Show Caption button in the Design Ribbon tab...

...or right-click the item when designing the dashboard, and click the Show Caption menu item.

Note

The caption of the Range Filter dashboard item is not visible by default.
The caption of the Dashboard item contains the following information and buttons, depending on the dashboard item type:
Dashboard Item Name - represents the static text within a dashboard item's caption.
Data Item Container Name - represents the name of the data item container. To learn more about data item containers,
see the Providing Data topic for the corresponding dashboard item.
You can change the default name of the dashboard item or data item container using the Edit Names dialog. To invoke this
dialog, right-click the item when designing the dashboard, and click the Edit Names... menu item (alternatively, you can use
the Edit Names button in the Design Ribbon tab).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 545 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down value - shows the value or values from the current drill-down hierarchy. To learn more, see the Drill-Down
topic.
Export to button - allows you to print or export a dashboard item. To learn how to print individual dashboard items, see the
Printing and Exporting topic.
Values button - invokes a drop-down menu that allows you to switch between the provided values (in the pie, card, gauge
and map dashboard items). To learn more, see the Providing Data topic for the corresponding dashboard item.
Clear Master Filter button - allows you to reset filtering when a dashboard item acts as the Master Filter. To learn more,
see the Master Filtering topic in the Interactivity section for the corresponding dashboard item.
Drill Up button - allows you to return to the previous detail level when the drill-down capability is enabled for this item. To
learn more, see the Drill-Down topic in the Interactivity section for the corresponding dashboard item.
Clear Selection button - allows you to clear the selection inside an item.
Initial Extent button - restores the Map dashboard items' default size and position.
Select Date Time Periods button / menu - allows you to select date-time periods for the Range Filter.
Multiselection button - allows you to filter data by selecting multiple elements in dashboard items.
Maximize button - expands any dashboard item into the whole dashboard size to examine data in greater detail. Refer to
Dashboard Items Layout for more information.
Restore button - restores the expanded item to its initial state.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 546 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Items Layout

The Dashboard Designer provides the capability to arrange and resize dashboard items and groups in various ways, using
simple drag-and-drop operations.

Layout Concepts
Item Resizing
Maximize and Restore Item
Item Positioning

Layout Concepts
The dashboard arranges dashboard items and groups using layout items and layout groups. They are special containers that are
used to present a dashboard layout as a hierarchical structure.
A layout item is used as a container that displays an individual dashboard item.
A layout group is used as a container that is used to arrange layout items (or other layout groups) either horizontally or
vertically. At the same time, layout groups are used as containers that display dashboard item groups.
Thus, a dashboard layout is hierarchically arranged from the root layout group to bottommost layout items, which display
individual dashboard items.

Item Resizing
You can resize individual items/groups of items by dragging their edges.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 547 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

By default, a 2x2 layout group of dashboard items is horizontally oriented and contains two child layout groups. This arranges
dashboard items in two 'columns' and allows you to set a different height for items in different columns. You can switch the
orientation of the 2x2 group to Vertical using the indicator at the group intersection.

This allows you to specify different widths for dashboard items in different 'rows'. The table below lists and describes different
modes.

IND ICATO R R ES U LT D ES CR IPTIO N

Orients the layout group horizontally and allows you to change the height of individual
items and the width of 'columns'.

Orients the layout group vertically and allows you to change the width of individual
items and the height of 'rows'.

Maximize and Restore Item

You can expand any dashboard item into the whole dashboard size to examine data in greater detail. The expanded dashboard
item size in this case is the same as the root layout group.
To maximize a dashboard item, click the Maximize button in the dashboard item caption.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 548 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To restore the item size, click Restore.

Item Positioning
You can change the position of a dashboard item by using drag-and-drop and one of the following approaches.
If the caption of the dashboard item is visible, click it and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the item.
If the caption of the dashboard item is not visible, click the icon in the top left corner, and hold down the left mouse
button while dragging the item.
Depending on the required dashboard item position, a new layout group is created (if required) to maintain the arrangement of
items. Thus, the dashboard item can be inserted to the desired area of a new or existing dashboard layout group.
The following table illustrates how a dashboard item is dragged.

ACTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Select the required dashboard item.

Drag the dashboard item to the expected area. The drag indicator ( ) will
show possible positions for the dashboard item.

Move the mouse cursor to the required position. The drop indicator ( )
highlights the hovered position.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 549 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

ACTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Then, the drop indicator sequentially displays areas that can be occupied by the dashboard
item. Release the left mouse button when the drop indicator displays the required area.

The dashboard item is moved to a new position.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 550 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Undo and Redo Operations

The Dashboard Designer keeps track of all user actions, and allows you to undo or repeat them using the Undo/Redo buttons.

To undo/redo the last action, use the following buttons.

To undo/redo several actions at once, click the arrow next to Undo/Redo button and select the actions in the list that you want to
undo/redo.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 551 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Automatic and Manual Updates

When you perform a data-aware operation in the Dashboard Designer (for instance, change the binding of a specified dashboard
item or apply filtering), the dashboard sends a query to a data source and updates itself automatically according to the returned
data. If the dashboard is bound to a large data source, updating the dashboard according to each change can consume a
significant amount of time. In this case, you can disable automatic updates and update the dashboard manually when needed.
Automatic updates are enabled by default and can be managed using the Automatic Updates button in the Home ribbon tab.

Click this button to disable automatic updates. In this case, the dashboard item will not be updated automatically according to
each change. Imagine that you have a Grid dashboard item containing the dimension and measure columns. If you change the
sort order of the Sales Person column or change the summary type of the Extended Price column, the Grid will be shaded and will
display the icon within its caption.

This indicates that this dashboard item requires the update to reflect changes. To update the Grid manually, click the Update
button in the Home ribbon tab.

Note that the state of the Automatic Updates option is saved to the dashboard definition but affects only the Dashboard
Designer.
Note

Note that automatic updates are disabled if you click the Cancel button on the loading panel when performing a time-consuming
operation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 552 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

The Dashboard Designer provides the capability to print or export an entire dashboard and individual items.
Printing and Exporting Dashboards
Printing and Exporting Dashboard Items

Printing and Exporting Dashboards

To print or export the entire dashboard, click the button in the dashboard title area and choose the required action.

P rint P review...
Allows you to customize the document before printing/exporting. For instance, the following settings can be changed: the
orientation and size of the printed page, page margins, etc.
Export to P D F
Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to a PDF file with specific options. The following options
are available.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard. You can select between Portrait, Landscape, and
Auto. Note that in the Auto mode, page orientation is selected automatically depending on the horizontal and vertical sizes
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 553 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

of a dashboard.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size (for instance, Letter or A4).
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard title to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard.
Note

Note that this option is in effect when Page Layout is set to a value different from Auto.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor (in fractions of 1) by which a dashboard is scaled.
Note

This option is in effect if Scale Mode is set to Use Scale Factor.

Auto Fit Page Count - Specifies the number of horizontal/vertical pages spanning the total width/height of a dashboard.
Note

This option is in effect if Scale Mode is set to Auto Fit to Page Width.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Export to I mage
Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to an image in the specified format. The following options
are available.

Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard is exported. The following formats are available: PNG,
JPEG, and GIF.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard title to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Export to Excel
Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export dashboard's data to the Excel file. The following options are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 554 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel workbook format in which the dashboard's data is exported. You can select between
XLSX and XLS.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in the invoked dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Printing and Exporting Dashboard Items

To print or export a dashboard item, click the button in its caption and choose the required action.

Print Preview... - Allows you to customize the document before printing/exporting.

Export to PDF - Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to a PDF file with specific options.
Export to Image - Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to image in the specified format.
Export to Excel - Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard item's data to the Excel workbook
or CSV file.
To learn more about printing/exporting specifics of different dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic for the
required dashboard item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 555 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

UI Elements
The topics in this section describe the main elements of a Dashboard Designer application.
This section consists of the following topics.
Data Source Browser
Data Items Pane
Print Preview

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 556 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Source Browser

The Data Source Browser allows you to navigate through dashboard data sources. It displays the data source structure and
allows you to bind dashboard items to the required data source fields using drag-and-drop operations. The Data Source Browser
also enables you to manage calculated fields.

The Data Source Browser contains the following elements.

Data Source drop-down list - allows you to select the required data source.
Query/Data Member drop-down list - allows you to select the required query or data member.
The following Command buttons are available.

The button groups fields by type.

The and buttons are used to switch the sort order.

The button is used to refresh the Field List.
Field List displays data source fields. You can drag these fields to the data item placeholders to specify data binding.
The Data Source Browser identifies the following data field types.

ICO N D ES CR IPTIO N

Boolean

Byte

Date-time

Numeric

String

Calculated field

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 557 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Items Pane

The DATA ITEMS pane is placed side-by-side with the Data Source Browser, and allows you to create and modify data binding
using drag-and-drop operations.
To learn how to bind dashboard items to data source fields, see the Binding Dashboard Items to Data topic.

The DATA ITEMS pane can contain the following elements.

Data Item placeholder - used to create a data binding using drag-and-drop operations.
Data Item - identifies a data binding by mapping to a particular data source field. Each data item has the Data Item menu
button, used to invoke a menu that allows you to perform various data shaping operations.
Data Section - corresponds to a particular dashboard item area or element.
Data Item container - used to provide data item sets (e.g., for calculating the difference between two measures). Data item
containers have Options buttons that allow you to change specific dashboard item settings (e.g., to switch between chart
series types or grid column types).
Sort indicator - shows the current sort order for the data item.
Coloring indicator - indicates whether coloring by hue is enabled for the data item.
Specific dashboard items have command buttons that allow you to perform various operations, for instance, to add a new pane to
the chart dashboard item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 558 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Print Preview
This document describes the Print Preview window, which displays the dashboard/dashboard item as it will appear on paper.

Specific Options
In the Print Preview, you can change the orientation and size of the printed page, specify the margins, scale the document, etc. To
learn more, see Print Preview for WinForms.
You can also customize printing options specific to a dashboard/dashboard item. To do this, click the Options button in the Print
group. When previewing the dashboard, the following Options dialog will be invoked.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to show the dashboard title/dashboard item caption as the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 559 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This dialog can contain different options, depending on the dashboard item. To learn more, see the documentation for the
required dashboard item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 560 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Viewer
The Dashboard Viewer provides the capability to display dashboards in Windows Forms applications.

Data Presentation
The topics in this section provide information on how the Dashboard Viewer presents data.
Data Presentation Basics
Master Filtering
Drill-Down
Dashboard Layout

Dashboard Parameters
This topic describes how to change dashboard parameter values.
Requesting Parameter Values

Printing and Exporting

A Dashboard Viewer provides the capability to print or export both individual items of a dashboard, as well as the entire
dashboard.
Printing and Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 561 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Items
Dashboard items are used to present information in various ways.
Chart
Scatter Chart
Grid
Pies
Cards
Gauges
Pivot
Choropleth Map
Geo Point Maps
Range Filter
Image
Text Box
Treemap
Filter Elements

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 562 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Dashboard Viewer is used to present dashboards in Windows Forms applications. A wide range of dashboard items are
used to display visual or textual information.

D AS HB O AR D
ITEM IMAG E D ES CR IPTIO N

Chart Displays data graphically using bars, lines, points, etc.

Scatter Chart Visualizes relationships between numeric variables.

Grid Presents data in tabular form.

Displays a series of pies or donuts that represent the contribution of each value to the
Pies
total.

Cards Displays a series of cards, each illustrating the difference between two values.

Gauges Visualizes data within a series of gauges.

Pivot Displays cross-tabular reports and allows you to analyze multi-dimensional data.

Choropleth
Colorizes areas in proportion to the provided values.
Map

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 563 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D AS HB O AR D
ITEM IMAG E D ES CR IPTIO N

Geo Point
Displays callouts on the map using geographical coordinates.
Map

Bubble Map Displays bubbles on the map using geographical coordinates.

Pie Map Places pies on the map using geographical coordinates.

Range Filter Allows you to apply filtering by dragging selection thumbs along the argument axis.

Images Displays images.

Text Box Displays rich text within a dashboard.

Treemap Visualizes data in nested rectangles.

Combo Box Allows you to select a value(s) from the drop-down list.

List Box Allows you to select a value(s) from the list.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 564 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D AS HB O AR D
ITEM IMAG E D ES CR IPTIO N

Displays values in a hierarchical way and allows you to filter other dashboard items by
Tree View
selecting parent/child values.

The Dashboard Viewer enables interaction between various dashboard items. These features include Master Filtering and Drill-
Down.
Master Filtering
Drill-Down
To learn more about the dashboard layout, see the Dashboard Layout topic.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 565 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data-aware dashboard item as a filter for the entire dashboard (Master Filter). You can
select elements in a Master Filter item (chart bars, pie segments, grid records, etc.) to filter data in the rest of the dashboard by
the selected values.

Master Filtering Modes

The Master Filter item supports two selection modes.
Multiple
Allows you to select multiple elements in the Master Filter item.
To clear the selection in the Master Filter item, use the Clear Master Filter button in the dashboard item's caption.

Single
Allows you to select only one element in the Master Filter item. When this mode is enabled, the default selection will be set
to a Master Filter element. You can change this selection, but cannot clear it.
To learn how to filter dashboard data via a specific dashboard item, refer to the documentation for this item in the Dashboard
Items section.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 566 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
Dashboard provides the drill-down feature, which allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in a dashboard item.
This feature allows you to drill down to display the details, or drill up to view more general information.

To learn how to drill down using a particular dashboard item, refer to the documentation for this item in the Dashboard Items
topic.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the dashboard item's caption, or the
corresponding command in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 567 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Layout
This topic describes the features related to the dashboard layout.
Dashboard Title
Dashboard Item Caption
Resizing Dashboard Items

Dashboard Title
The Dashboard Title is located at the top of the Dashboard. The dashboard title can contain text or image content, elements
selected in the master filter item and command buttons.

When you hover over the filter icon ( ), all master filters applied to the dashboard are displayed in the invoked popup.

The dashboard title can contain the following command buttons.

Export To button (the icon) - allows you to print/export the dashboard. To learn more about printing and exporting, see
the Printing and Exporting topic.
Parameters button (the icon) - allows you to modify dashboard parameter values. To learn how to modify dashboard
parameter values, see the Requesting Parameter Values topic.

Dashboard Item Caption

Each dashboard item has a caption that is displayed at the top of this item. The caption contains static text along with other
information, as well as command buttons.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 568 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The caption of the Dashboard item contains the following information and buttons, depending on the dashboard item type:
Dashboard Item Name - represents the static text within a dashboard item's caption.
Data Item Container Name - represents the name of the data item container.
Drill-Down value - shows value(s) from the current drill-down hierarchy. To learn more, see the Drill-Down topic.
Export to button - allows you to print or export a dashboard item. To learn how to print individual dashboard items, see the
Printing and Exporting topic.
Values button - invokes a drop-down menu that allows you to switch between provided values (in the pie, card, gauge and
map dashboard items). To learn more, see the Data Presentation Basics topic for the corresponding dashboard item.
Clear Master Filter button - allows you to reset filtering when a dashboard item acts as the Master Filter. To learn more,
see the Interactivity topic for the corresponding dashboard item.
Drill Up button - allows you to return to the previous detail level when the drill-down capability is enabled for this item. To
learn more, see the Interactivity topic for the corresponding dashboard item.

Resizing Dashboard Items

The Dashboard Viewer provides the capability to resize dashboard items.

You can resize individual items (or a group of items) by dragging their edges.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 569 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Requesting Parameter Values

The Dashboard Viewer provides a built-in Dashboard Parameters dialog, which allows you to change dashboard parameter
values.
This dialog can be used to apply filtering to dashboard data.

To invoke the Dashboard Parameters dialog in the Dashboard Viewer, click the Parameters button (the icon) in the
dashboard title.
Select the required parameter values in the Dashboard Parameters dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes.
To reset changes to the default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 570 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

The Dashboard Viewer provides the capability to print or export an entire dashboard and individual items.
Printing and Exporting Dashboards
Printing and Exporting Dashboard Items

Printing and Exporting Dashboards

To print or export the entire dashboard, click the button in the dashboard title area and choose the required action.

P rint P review...
Allows you to customize the document before printing/exporting. For instance, the following settings can be changed: the
orientation and size of the printed page, page margins, etc.
Export to P D F
Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to a PDF file with specific options. The following options
are available:

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard. You can select between Portrait, Landscape, and
Auto. Note that in the Auto mode, page orientation is selected automatically depending on the horizontal and vertical sizes
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 571 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

of a dashboard.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size (for instance, Letter or A4).
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard title to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard.
Note

Note that this option is in effect when Page Layout is set to a value different from Auto.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor (in fractions of 1) by which a dashboard is scaled.
Note

This option is in effect if Scale Mode is set to Use Scale Factor.

Auto Fit Page Count - Specifies the number of horizontal/vertical pages spanning the total width/height of a dashboard.
Note

This option is in effect if Scale Mode is set to Auto Fit to Page Width.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Export to I mage
Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to an image in the specified format. The following options
are available:

Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard is exported. The following formats are available: PNG,
JPEG, and GIF.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard title to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Export to Excel
Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export dashboard's data to the Excel file. The following options are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 572 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel workbook format in which the dashboard's data is exported. You can select between
XLSX and XLS.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in the invoked dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Printing and Exporting Dashboard Items

To print or export a dashboard item, click the button in its caption and choose the required action.

Print Preview... - Allows you to customize the document before printing/exporting.

Export to PDF - Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to a PDF file with specific options.
Export to Image - Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to image in the specified format.
Export to Excel - Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard item's data to the Excel workbook
or CSV file.
To learn more about printing/exporting specifics of different dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic for the
required dashboard item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 573 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Items
The ReportsNow Dashboard provides a number of visualization elements (dashboard items) designed to effectively present
visual or textual information in a dashboard.
This section describes the available dashboard items.
Chart
Scatter Chart
Grid
Pies
Cards
Gauges
Pivot
Choropleth Map
Geo Point Maps
Range Filter
Image
Text Box
Treemap
Filter Elements

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 574 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Chart
The topics in this section describe the Chart dashboard item, which visualizes data in XY-diagrams of different kinds - from line
and bar charts to candle stick and bubble charts.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Printing and Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 575 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Chart dashboard item presents data visually using different types of series.

A series represents a grouping of related data points. The most important characteristic of a series is its type, which determines a
particular visual representation of data.
The Chart dashboard item includes the following series types.

A Bar series displays data as sets of rectangular bars with lengths proportional to the values that they represent.
Point and Line series display data as standalone points or points joined by a line.
An Area series displays data by a line that joins points, and the shaded area between the line and the argument axis.
A Range series is the area between two simple series displayed as a shaded area, or bars that stretch from a point in
one series to the corresponding point in another series.
A Weighted series displays data using a third dimension, expressed by a bubble's size.
Financial series are useful in analyzing stock and bond prices, as well as the behavior of commodities.

Tooltip
The Chart dashboard item can display a tooltip that shows information on a hovered series point.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 576 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Chart and other dashboard items. These features include Master
Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
The Chart dashboard item supports filtering by argument or series values.
Filtering by Arguments
When filtering by arguments is enabled, you can click series points to make other dashboard items display only data related
to selected argument values.

Filtering by Series
When filtering by series is enabled, you can click a series point to make other dashboard items display only data related to
the selected series.

Filtering by Points
When filtering by points is enabled, you can click a individual point to make other dashboard items display only data related
to the selected point.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 577 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button in the Chart's caption, or corresponding command in the Chart's context
menu.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
The Chart dashboard item supports drill-down on argument or series values.
Drill Down on Arguments
When drill-down on arguments is enabled, you can click a series point to view a detail chart for the corresponding
argument value.

Note

When Filtering by Arguments is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a series point.
Drill-Down on a Series
When drill-down on a series is enabled, you can click a series point (or corresponding legend item) to view a detail chart for
the corresponding series.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 578 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

When Filtering by Series is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a series point.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button within the Chart caption area, or the corresponding
command in the Chart's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 579 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing concepts
common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes printing/exporting specifics for the Chart dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
If you are printing the Chart dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the Options
button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Size Mode - Allows you to specify the print size mode for the Chart dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF
The following options are available when exporting the Chart dashboard item to a PDF.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 580 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a Chart dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Chart dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Chart dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 581 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 582 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Scatter Chart
The topics in this section describe the Scatter Chart dashboard item, which visualizes summaries using numerical X/Y-axes and
the size of data points.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Printing and Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 583 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Scatter Chart dashboard item visualizes summaries using three dimensions: the X-axis, the Y-axis and the size of data points.

Point Labels and Tooltips

The Scatter Chart dashboard item can display point labels and tooltips that show information on data points. To see a tooltip,
hover over the required point.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 584 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Scatter Chart and other dashboard items. These features
include Master Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a point (or multiple points by holding down the CTRL key) to make other
dashboard items only display data related to the selected point(s).

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the Chart's caption area, or the Clear Master Filter
command in the Chart's context menu.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a point to view the details.

Note

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 585 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a point.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) within the Chart's caption area or the Drill Up
command in the Chart's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 586 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

The Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. See the Printing and Exporting
topic to learn more about printing concepts common to all dashboard items.
This topic describes printing/exporting specifics for the Scatter Chart dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
You can customize the following options (via the Options button) before printing the Scatter Chart dashboard item using the
Print Preview:

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the printed document title.
Size Mode - Allows you to specify the Scatter Chart dashboard item's print size mode.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the printed document. You can select from Below
and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To PDF
The following options are available when exporting the Chart dashboard item to a PDF:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 587 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used when exporting a Scatter Chart dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the exported document's title.
Size Mode - Specifies the Scatter Chart dashboard item's export size mode.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Scatter Chart dashboard item. Click the Reset
button to reset changes to the default values.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 588 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 589 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Grid
The topics in this section describe the Grid dashboard item, which displays data in a two-dimensional table.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Printing and Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 590 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Grid displays data in a two-dimensional table that supports four types of columns.

The dimension column displays values from the bound data item "as is".
The measure column displays summaries calculated from data in the bound data item.
The delta column, bound to two measures, calculates summaries for both measures, and displays the difference between
these summaries.
The sparkline column visualizes the variation of summary values over time.

Sort Grid Rows

To sort records by a column's values and replace existing sort conditions that are applied to the current or other columns, click the
target column's header until an Up or Down arrow icon is displayed within the header. The Up and Down arrows indicate
ascending and descending sort orders, respectively.

To sort records by a column's values while preserving existing sort conditions, click a column header while holding the SHIFT key
until an Up or Down arrow icon is displayed within the header.

To remove sorting by a column, click a column header while holding down the CTRL key.

Filter Grid Data

To filter grid data, click the filter button (the icon) and select the required filter value in the invoked filter dropdown list.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 591 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Click Custom to construct filter criteria involving up to two conditions. This will invoke the Custom AutoFilter dialog, allowing
you to compare a column with one or two values.

To clear the filter applied to a specific column, invoke the filter dropdown list and click All.

To clear all filter criteria, click the Close Filter button within the Filter Panel.

Tooltips
A Grid dashboard item can display a tooltip when the mouse pointer is hovered over the bar in the measure column.

The tooltip shows the value in the measure column as text.

When the mouse pointer is hovered over the cell in the sparkline column, the tooltip can display start/end values and
minimum/maximum values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 592 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 593 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Grid and other dashboard items. These features include Master
Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a grid row (or multiple rows by holding down the CTRL key) to make other
dashboard items only display data related to the selected record(s).

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the Grid's caption area, or the Clear Master Filter command
in the Grid's context menu.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
The Grid dashboard item supports drill-down for rows.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a grid row to view the details.

Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a grid row.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) within the Grid's caption area, or the Drill Up
command in the Grid's context menu.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 594 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting a Grid dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
If you are printing the Grid dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the Options
button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Print Headers on Every Page - Specifies whether to print column headers of the Grid dashboard item on every page.
Fit to Page Width - Specifies whether the size of the grid dashboard item is changed according to the width of the
exported page.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 595 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Print Headers on Every Page - Specifies whether to print column headers of the Grid dashboard item on every page.
Fit to Page Width - Specifies whether the size of the grid is changed according to the width of the exported page.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor (in fractions of 1) by which a dashboard item is scaled.
Auto Fit Page Count - Specifies the number of horizontal/vertical pages spanning the total width/height of a dashboard
item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Grid dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 596 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 597 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Pies
The topics in this section describe the Pie dashboard item, which displays a series of pies or donuts that represent the
contribution of each value to a total.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Printing and Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 598 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Pie dashboard item displays a series of pies or donuts that represent the contribution of each value to a total.

Tooltip
A Pie dashboard item can display a tooltip that shows information about the hovered pie segment.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 599 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Pie and other dashboard items. These features include Master
Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
The Pie dashboard item supports filtering by argument or series values.
Filtering by Arguments
When filtering by arguments is enabled, you can click a pie segment to make other dashboard items only display data
related to the selected argument value.

Filtering by a Series
When filtering by a series is enabled, you can click a pie to make other dashboard items display only data related to the
selected pie.

Filtering by a Points
When filtering by points is enabled, an you can click a single pie segment to make other dashboard items display only data
related to the selected segment.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 600 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the caption area of the Pie dashboard item, or the Clear
Master Filter command in the context menu.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
The Pie dashboard item supports drill-down on argument or series values.
Drill Down on Arguments
When drill-down on arguments is enabled, you can click a pie segment to view a detail diagram for the corresponding
argument value.

Note

When Filtering by Arguments is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a pie segment.
Drill-Down on a Series
When drill-down on a series is enabled, you can click a pie chart to view a detail diagram for the corresponding series value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 601 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

When Filtering by Series is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a pie chart.
To return to the previous detail level (drill-up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the caption area of the Pie dashboard item,
or the Drill Up command in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 602 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting a Pie dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
If you are printing the Pie dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the Options
button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Auto Arrange Content - Specifies whether pies are arranged automatically on the printed document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 603 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Auto Arrange Content - Specifies whether pies are arranged automatically in the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor (in fractions of 1) by which a dashboard item is scaled.
Auto Fit Page Count - Specifies the number of horizontal/vertical pages spanning the total width/height of a dashboard
item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Pie dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 604 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 605 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Cards
The topics in this section describe the Card dashboard item, which displays a series of cards. Each card can display a single value,
or show the difference between two values.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Printing and Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 606 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Card dashboard item displays a series of cards. Each card illustrates the difference between two values. This difference can be
expressed as an absolute value, an absolute variation or a percentage variation.

The Card dashboard item can illustrate this difference for various sets of values. You can switch between these sets using the
Values button (the icon) in the dashboard item caption area or in the context menu.

Tooltip
A Card dashboard item can display a tooltip for cards containing a sparkline. When the mouse pointer is hovered over the
sparkline, the tooltip can display start/end values and minimum/maximum values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 607 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Card and other dashboard items. These features include Master
Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a card (or multiple cards by holding down the CTRL key) to make other dashboard
items only display data related to the selected card(s).

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the caption area of the Card dashboard item, or the Clear
Master Filter command in the context menu.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a card to view the details.

Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a card.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the caption area of the Card dashboard
item, or the Drill Up command in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 608 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting a Card dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
If you are printing the Card dashboard item using a Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the Options
button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Auto Arrange Content - Specifies whether or not cards are arranged automatically on the printed document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 609 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Auto Arrange Content - Specifies whether or not cards are arranged automatically in the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor (in fractions of 1) by which a dashboard item is scaled.
Auto Fit Page Count - Specifies the number of horizontal/vertical pages spanning the total width/height of a dashboard
item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Card dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 610 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 611 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Gauges
The topics in this section describe the Gauge dashboard item, which displays a series of gauges.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Printing and Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 612 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Gauge dashboard item displays a series of gauges. Each gauge can communicate two values - one with a needle and the
other with a marker on the scale.

The Gauge dashboard item can illustrate the difference for various sets of values. You can switch between these sets using the
Values button (the icon) in the dashboard item caption or in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 613 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Gauge and other dashboard items. These features include
Master Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a gauge (or multiple gauges by holding down the CTRL key) to make other
dashboard items only display data related to the selected gauge(s).

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the caption area of the Gauge dashboard item, or the Clear
Master Filter command in the context menu.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a gauge to view the details.

Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a gauge.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the caption area of the Gauge dashboard
item, or the Drill Up command in the context menu.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 614 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting a Gauge dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
If you are printing a Gauge dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the Options
button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Auto Arrange Content - Specifies whether or not gauges are arranged automatically on the printed document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 615 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the Gauge caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Auto Arrange Content - Specifies whether or not gauges are arranged automatically in the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor (in fractions of 1) by which a dashboard item is scaled.
Auto Fit Page Count - Specifies the number of horizontal/vertical pages spanning the total width/height of a dashboard
item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Gauge dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 616 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 617 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Pivot
The Pivot dashboard item displays a cross-tabular report that presents multi-dimensional data in an easy-to-read format.

Expanding and Collapsing Groups

To expand and collapse row and column groups, use the and buttons, respectively.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 618 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing and
exporting concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting a Pivot dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
If you are printing the Pivot dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the Options
button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Print Headers on Every Page - Specifies whether to print column headers of the Pivot dashboard item on every page.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 619 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the Pivot caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Print Headers on Every Page - Specifies whether or not to print column headers of the Pivot dashboard item on every
page.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor (in fractions of 1) by which a dashboard item is scaled.
Auto Fit Page Count - Specifies the number of horizontal/vertical pages spanning the total width/height of a dashboard
item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Pivot dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 620 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 621 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Choropleth Map
The topics in this section describe the Choropleth Map dashboard item, which colorizes the required areas in proportion to the
provided values.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Printing and Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 622 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Choropleth Map dashboard item colorizes map areas in the following two ways.
Based on the values provided.

By indicating the difference between the actual and target values of a particular parameter.

You can switch between the provided values using the Values button (the icon) in the map's caption area, or by using the
context menu.

Map Zooming and Scrolling

You can use the mouse wheel to change the current zoom level for the map. To scroll the map, hold down the left mouse button
and drag it.
To move to the initial zooming and scrolling state, select the Initial Extent menu item in the map's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 623 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Tooltip
The Choropleth Map dashboard item can display a tooltip that shows information on a hovered area.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 624 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the features that enable interaction between the Choropleth Map and other dashboard items. These
features include Master Filtering.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a shape (or multiple shapes by holding down the CTRL key) to make other
dashboard items only display data related to the selected shape(s).

You can also select multiple shapes in the following way.

Hold the SHIFT key and the left mouse button;
Drag the mouse pointer to mark an area that includes the desired shapes;
Release the left mouse button. All shapes within the area will be selected.
To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the Map's caption, or the Clear Master Filter command in
the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 625 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing and
exporting concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting a Choropleth Map dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
If you are printing the Choropleth Map dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the
Options button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Size Mode - Allows you to specify the print size mode for the Choropleth Map dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 626 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the Choropleth Map caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Choropleth Map dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Choropleth Map dashboard item. To reset
changes to the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 627 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 628 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Geo Point Maps

The topics in this section describe various types of Geo Point Map dashboard items which places callouts, bubbles or pies on the
map using geographical coordinates.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Printing and Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 629 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Dashboard supports three types of Geo Point maps.
The Geo Point Map dashboard item allows you to place callouts on the map using geographical coordinates.

The Bubble Map dashboard item allows you to place bubbles on the map. Each bubble can represent data via its weight
and color.

The Pie Map dashboard item allows you to display pies on the map. Each pie visualizes the contribution of each value to the
total.

Map Zooming and Scrolling

You can use the mouse wheel to change the current zoom level for a map. To scroll the map, hold down the left mouse button
and drag it.
To move to the initial zooming and scrolling state, click the Initial Extent menu item in the map's context menu.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 630 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Tooltip
A Geo Point Map dashboard item can display a tooltip that shows information on a hovered callout/bubble/pie.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 631 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the capabilities that enable interaction between Geo Point maps and other dashboard items. These
capabilities include Master Filtering.

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a callout/bubble/pie (or multiple callouts/bubbles/pies by holding down the CTRL
key) to make other dashboard items only display data related to the selected callout(s)/bubble(s)/pie(s).

You can also select multiple callouts/bubbles/pies in the following way.

Hold the SHIFT key and the left mouse button;
Drag the mouse pointer, to mark an area that includes the desired elements;
Release the left mouse button. All elements within the area will be selected.
To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the Map's caption area, or the Clear Master Filter command
in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 632 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing and
exporting concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting a Geo Point Map dashboard items.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
If you are printing the Geo Point Map dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the
Options button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Size Mode - Allows you to specify the print size mode for the Geo Point Map dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 633 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the Geo Point Map caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Geo Point Map dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Geo Point Map dashboard item. To reset
changes to the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 634 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 635 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Range Filter
The Range Filter dashboard item allows you to apply filtering to other dashboard items. This item displays a chart with selection
thumbs that allow you to filter out values displayed along the argument axis.

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter command in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 636 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing and
exporting concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting a Range Filter dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
If you are printing the Range Filter dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the
Options button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Size Mode - Allows you to specify the print size mode for the Range Filter dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 637 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the Range Filter caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Range Filter dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Range Filter dashboard item. To reset
changes to the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 638 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 639 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Image
The Image dashboard item is used to display images within a dashboard.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 640 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing and
exporting concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting an Image dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image

Printing
If you are printing the Image dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the Options
button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when printing an image.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor (in fractions of 1) by which an image is scaled.
Auto Fit Page Count - Specifies the number of horizontal/vertical pages spanning the total width/height of an image.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 641 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the Image caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor (in fractions of 1), by which a dashboard item is scaled.
Auto Fit Page Count - Specifies the number of horizontal/vertical pages spanning the total width/height of a dashboard
item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Image dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image

Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the Image caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 642 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Image dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 643 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Text Box
The Text Box dashboard item is used to display rich text within a dashboard.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 644 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing and
exporting concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting a Text Box dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image

Printing
If you are printing a Text Box dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the Options
button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 645 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the Text Box caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Text Box dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image

Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the Text Box caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Text Box dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 646 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Treemap
The Treemap dashboard item visualizes data in nested rectangles that are called tiles.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Printing and Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 647 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Treemap dashboard item visualizes data in nested rectangles that are called tiles.

Labels and Tooltips

The Treemap displays labels that contain descriptions for tiles and groups, and provide tooltips with additional information.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 648 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Treemap and other dashboard items. These features include
Master Filtering and Drill-Down

Master Filtering
The Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To learn
more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a tile/group caption (or multiple tiles/group captions by holding down the CTRL
key) to make other dashboard items only display data related to the selected tile(s).

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the Treemap's caption area, or the Clear Master Filter
command in the Treemap's context menu.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more about drill-down concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Drill-Down topic.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a tile to view its details.

Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by double-clicking a tile.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 649 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing and Exporting

Dashboard allows you to print/export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about printing
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Printing and Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of printing/exporting a Treemap dashboard item.
Printing
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Printing
If you are printing the Treemap dashboard item using the Print Preview, you can customize the following options (via the
Options button) before printing.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the printed document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the printed document.
Size Mode - Allows you to specify the print size mode for the Treemap dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the printed document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the printed document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the printed document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in the Options dialog and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To PDF
The following options are available when exporting the Treemap dashboard item to a PDF.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 650 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a Treemap dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Treemap dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Treemap dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

Show Title - Specifies whether to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies of the exported document's title.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export the dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 651 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select between
Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the master filter and parameter values' position in the exported document. You can select from Below
and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. Click the Reset button to
reset changes to the default values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 652 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The topics in this section describe the Filter Elements dashboard items used to apply master filter to other items.
Filter Elements Overview
Neutral Filter Mode

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 653 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter Elements
Filter elements provide the capability to filter other dashboard items.
Combo Box
List Box
Tree View

Combo Box
The Combo Box dashboard item allows you to select a value(s) from the drop-down list.
The Standard type allows you to select only a single value.

The Checked type allows you to select multiple values in the invoked drop-down list.

List Box
The List Box dashboard item allows you to select a value(s) from the list.
The Checked type allows you to select multiple values in the list box.

The Radio type allows you to select only a single value in the radio group.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 654 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Tree View
The Tree View dashboard item displays values in a hierarchical way and allows you to expand/collapse nodes.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 655 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Empty on Load filter mode

The filter elements show all items selected by default, to indicate that no filtering is currently taking place. Starting from this state,
users typically begin each filtering operation by deselecting All, before they select individual items.
An extra click is required to begin any actual filtering operation, because the standard filter mode shows all items selected. This
is not an optimal implementation for performance reasons, because it generates filtering criteria that are evaluated by the data
layer and/or the database.
To solve these issues, the Empty on Load is implemented. It is neutral in the sense that it does not apply any criteria to the data
source in its default state, resulting in improved performance.

All items are shown deselected. This means that an extra click is no longer required in the most common scenarios, and this
behavior is familiar to end users from websites world-wide.

Built-in UI does not provide a command to switch the filter mode. The dashboard will be reloaded after switching the mode.

The Empty on Load helps in a situation when there is a potential “dead lock”, due to the fact that multiple filter elements
influence each other. The Clear Master Filter button resets the filters.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 656 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 657 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Tab Container
The Tab container dashboard item allows you to split the dashboard layout into several pages. Common filter controls for large
elements in a dashboard can be located on a separate tab page.

Click the tab page's header to switch between tab pages:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 658 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Web Dashboard - Viewer Mode

The Web Dashboard provides the capability to display dashboards in web browsers on desktop and mobile devices.

Data Presentation
The topics in this section provide information on how the Web Dashboard presents data.
Data Presentation Basics
Master Filtering
Drill-Down
Dashboard Layout

Mobile Layout
The Web Dashboard uses a mobile layout to display dashboards on phones and tablets.
Mobile Layout

Dashboard Parameters
The following topic describes how to change dashboard parameter values.
Requesting Parameter Values

Exporting
The Web Dashboard provides the capability to export individual items of a dashboard, as well as the entire dashboard.
Exporting
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 659 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Items
Dashboard items are used to present information in various ways.
Chart
Scatter Chart
Grid
Pies
Cards
Gauges
Pivot
Choropleth Map
Geo Point Maps
Range Filter
Image
Text Box
Treemap
Filter Elements
Tab Container

View Detail Data

You can view the data behind the dashboard items with the pop-out to grid feature.
Pop-out to grid

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 660 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Web Dashboard can be used to present dashboards on the web. A wide range of dashboard items are used to display visual
or textual information.

D AS HB O AR D
ITEM IMAG E D ES CR IPTIO N

Chart Displays data graphically using bars, lines, points, etc.

Scatter Chart Visualizes relationships between numeric variables.

Grid Presents data in tabular form.

Displays a series of pies or donuts that represent the contribution of each value to the
Pies
total.

Cards Displays a series of cards, each illustrating the difference between two values.

Gauges Visualizes data within a series of gauges.

Pivot Displays cross-tabular reports and allows you to analyze multi-dimensional data.

Choropleth
Colorizes areas in proportion to the provided values.
Map

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 661 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D AS HB O AR D
ITEM IMAG E D ES CR IPTIO N

Geo Point
Displays callouts on the map using geographical coordinates.
Map

Bubble Map Displays bubbles on the map using geographical coordinates.

Pie Map Places pies on the map using geographical coordinates.

Range Filter Allows you to apply filtering by dragging selection thumbs along the argument axis.

Images Displays images.

Text Box Displays rich text within a dashboard.

Treemap Visualizes data in nested rectangles.

Combo Box Allows you to select a value(s) from the drop-down list.

List Box Allows you to select a value(s) from the list.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 662 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D AS HB O AR D
ITEM IMAG E D ES CR IPTIO N

Displays values in a hierarchical way and allows you to filter other dashboard items by
Tree View
selecting parent/child values.

The Web Dashboard enables interaction between various dashboard items. These features include Master Filtering and Drill-
Down.
Master Filtering
Drill-Down
To learn more about the dashboard layout, see the Dashboard Layout topic.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 663 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master Filtering
The Web Dashboard allows you to use any data-aware dashboard item as a filter for the entire dashboard (Master Filter). You
can select elements in a Master Filter item (chart bars, pie segments, grid records, etc.) to filter data in the rest of the dashboard
by the selected values.

Master Filtering Modes

The Master Filter item supports two selection modes.
Multiple
Allows you to select multiple elements in the Master Filter item. To enable multiple element selection, use the Multi-Select
button (the icon) in the dashboard item caption area.
To clear the selection in the Master Filter item, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the dashboard item
caption area.
Single
Allows you to select only one element in the Master Filter item. When this mode is enabled, the default selection will be set
to a Master Filter element. You can change this selection, but you cannot clear it.
To learn how to filter dashboard data via a specific dashboard item, refer to the documentation for this item in the Dashboard
Items section.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 664 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
The Web Dashboard provides the drill-down feature, which allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in a
dashboard item. This feature allows you to drill down to display the details, or drill up to view more general information.

Note

You cannot drill down to view the details if Multi-Select is enabled in Multiple Master Filter mode.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the dashboard item's caption area.
To learn how to drill down using a particular dashboard item, refer to the documentation for this item in the Dashboard Items
topic.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 665 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Layout
This topic describes the features related to the dashboard layout.
Dashboard Title
Dashboard Item Caption
Resizing Dashboard Items

Dashboard Title
The Dashboard Title is located at the top of the dashboard. The dashboard title can contain text or image content, elements
selected in the master filter item, and command buttons.

When you hover over the filter icon ( ), all master filters applied to the dashboard are displayed in the invoked popup.

The dashboard title can contain the following command buttons.

Export To button - allows you to export the dashboard. To learn more about exporting, see the Exporting topic.
Parameters button - allows you to modify dashboard parameter values. To learn how to modify dashboard parameter
values, see the Requesting Parameter Values topic.

Dashboard Item Caption

Each dashboard item can include a caption that is displayed at the top of this item. The caption contains static text along with
other information, as well as command buttons.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 666 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

If the dashboard item caption is not visible, command buttons are displayed at the top right corner of the item.
The caption of the dashboard item contains the following information and buttons, depending on the dashboard item type.
Names
Dashboard Item Name - represents the static text within a dashboard item's caption.
Data Item Container Name - represents the name of the data item container.
Interactivity Information
Drill-Down value - shows a value or values from the current drill-down hierarchy. To learn more, see the Drill-Down
topic.
Command Buttons
Export to button - allows you to export a dashboard item. To learn how to print individual dashboard items, see the
Exporting topic.
Values button - invokes a drop-down menu that allows you to switch between provided values (in the pie, card,
gauge and maps dashboard items). To learn more, see the Data Presentation Basics topic for the corresponding
dashboard item.
Clear Master Filter button - allows you to reset filtering when a dashboard item acts as the Master Filter. To learn
more, see the Master Filtering topic.
Drill Up button - allows you to return to the previous detail level when the drill-down capability is enabled for this
item. To learn more, see the Drill-Down topic.
Multi-Select button - allows multiple element selection in the Master Filter item, when Multiple Master Filter mode is
enabled.

Resizing Dashboard Items

You can resize individual items (or a group of items) by dragging their edges.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 667 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 668 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Mobile Layout
This topic describes the Web Dashboard's mobile layout that enables you to display dashboards on mobile phones.

Mobile Layout's Views

Dashboard Items Behavior
Note

You can export only dashboard items when the Web Dashboard displays dashboards on mobile phones.

Mobile Layout's Views

Web Dashboard in the mobile layout consists of the following views:
List V iew
The List view displays all dashboard items used in the current dashboard. The item's interactivity is disabled. Filter elements are
not displayed in the List view (see Dashboard Items Behavior).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 669 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

I tem V iew
The Item view displays the selected item. Interactivity is supported. Filter elements are not displayed in the Item view (see
Dashboard Items Behavior).

Filter Panel

The Filter panel displays filters that are applied to the entire dashboard / dashboard items. Click the Filter button (the icon)
in the List view / Item view to see the filters applied to the entire dashboard / dashboard item, respectively. Click the required filter
in the Filter panel to open the corresponding filter element and filter data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 670 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Items Behavior

The items listed below are displayed with the following specifics when used in the mobile layout:
G rid
The Grid always adjusts columns automatically to the minimum width required to completely display its content.
Grid hides columns to adapt the content to the screen or container size. Click the ellipsis button in the Grid's row to display
hidden data inside the adaptive detail row.
The default column fit of the sparkline and bars is two times tighter then in a desktop version.
Column resizing is disabled.
Cards
Cards in the mobile layout are always arranged automatically.
Filter Elements
Filter elements are displayed only in the Filter panel and are hidden in the List and Item views.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 671 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Requesting Parameter Values

The Web Dashboard provides a built-in Dashboard Parameters dialog, which allows you to change dashboard parameter
values.
To invoke the Dashboard Parameters dialog, click the Parameters button (the icon) in the dashboard title.

Select the required parameter values and click the Submit button to apply the changes. To reset changes to the default values,
click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 672 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard provides the capability to export an entire dashboard and individual items.
Exporting Dashboards
Exporting Dashboard Items

Exporting Dashboards
To export the entire dashboard, click the button in the dashboard title area and select the required format.

Export to P D F
Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to a PDF file with specific options. The following options
are available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard. You can select between Portrait, Landscape and
Auto. Note that in the Auto mode, page orientation is selected automatically depending on the horizontal and vertical sizes
of a dashboard.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size (for instance, Letter or A4).
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard title to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard.
Note

Note that this option is in effect when Page Layout is set to a value different from Auto.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 673 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Export to I mage
Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to an image in the specified format. The following options
are available.

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard title to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard is exported. The following formats are available: PNG,
JPEG and GIF.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Export to Excel
Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows end-users to export dashboard's data to the Excel file. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel workbook format in which the dashboard's data is exported. You can select between
XLSX and XLS.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 674 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in the invoked dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Exporting Dashboard Items

To export a dashboard item, click the button in its caption and choose the required action.

Export to PDF - Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to a PDF file with specific options.
Export to Image - Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard to image in the specified format.
Export to Excel - Invokes a corresponding dialog that allows you to export a dashboard item's data to the Excel workbook
or CSV file.
To learn more about exporting specifics of different dashboard items, see the Exporting topic for the required dashboard item.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 675 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Dashboard Items
ReportsNow Dashboard provides a number of visualization elements (dashboard items) designed to effectively present visual
or textual information in a dashboard.
This section describes the available dashboard items.
Chart
Scatter Chart
Grid
Pies
Cards
Gauges
Pivot
Choropleth Map
Geo Point Maps
Range Filter
Image
Text Box
Treemap
Filter Elements
Tab Container

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 676 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Chart
The topics in this section describe the Chart dashboard item, which visualizes data in XY-diagrams of different kinds - from line
and bar charts to candle stick and bubble charts.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 677 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Chart dashboard item presents data visually using different types of series.

A series represents a grouping of related data points. The most important characteristic of a series is its type, which determines a
particular visual representation of data.
The Chart dashboard item includes the following series types.

A Bar series displays data as sets of rectangular bars with lengths proportional to the values that they represent.
Point and Line series display data as standalone points or points joined by a line.
An Area series displays data by a line that joins points, and the shaded area between the line and the argument axis.
A Range series is the area between two simple series displayed as a shaded area, or bars that stretch from a point in
one series to the corresponding point in another series.
A Weighted series displays data using a third dimension, expressed by a bubble's size.
Financial series are useful in analyzing stock and bond prices, as well as the behavior of commodities.

Tooltip
The Chart dashboard item can display a tooltip that shows information on a hovered series point.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 678 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Chart and other dashboard items. These features include Master
Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Web Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To
learn more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
The Chart dashboard item supports filtering by argument or series values.
Filtering by Arguments
When filtering by arguments is enabled, you can click series points to make other dashboard items display only data related
to selected argument values.

Filtering by Series
When filtering by series is enabled, you can click a series point to make other dashboard items display only data related to
the selected series.

To clear the selection in the Master Filter item, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the chart's caption area.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
The Chart dashboard item supports drill-down on argument or series values.
Drill Down on Arguments
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 679 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When drill-down on arguments is enabled, you can click a series point to view a detail chart for the corresponding
argument value.

Note

When Filtering by Arguments is enabled, you can view the details by clicking a selected series point.
Drill-Down on a Series
When drill-down on a series is enabled, you can click a series point (or corresponding legend item) to view a detail chart for
the corresponding series.

Note

When Filtering by Series is enabled, you can view the details by clicking a selected series point.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the chart's caption.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 680 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Chart dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title -Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Chart dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Chart dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 681 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 682 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

between Below and Separate Sheet.

Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 683 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Scatter Chart
The topics in this section describe the Scatter Chart dashboard item, which visualizes summaries using numerical X/Y-axes and
the size of data points.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 684 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Scatter Chart dashboard item visualizes summaries using three dimensions: the X-axis, the Y-axis and the size of data points.

Point Labels and Tooltips

The Scatter Chart dashboard item can display point labels and tooltips that show information on data points. To see a tooltip,
hover over the required point.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 685 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Scatter Chart and other dashboard items. These features
include Master Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Web Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To
learn more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a point (or multiple points) to make other dashboard items only display data
related to the selected point(s).

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the Chart's caption area, or the Clear Master Filter
command in the Chart's context menu.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a point to view the details.

Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by clicking a selected point.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 686 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) within the Chart's caption area, or the Drill Up
command in the Chart's context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 687 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Scatter Chart dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF
The following options are available when exporting the Scatter Chart dashboard item to a PDF.

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title -Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Scatter Chart dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Scatter Chart dashboard item. To reset
changes to the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 688 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

are available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 689 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 690 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Grid
The topics in this section describe the Grid dashboard item, which displays data in a two-dimensional table.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 691 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Grid displays data in a two-dimensional table that supports four types of columns.

The dimension column displays values from the bound data item "as is".
The measure column displays summaries calculated from data in the bound data item.
The delta column, bound to two measures, calculates summaries for both measures, and displays the difference between
these summaries.
The sparkline column visualizes the variation of summary values over time.

Sort Grid Rows

To sort records by a column's values and replace the existing sort conditions applied to the current or other columns, click the
target column's header until the Up or Down arrow icon is displayed within the header. The Up and Down arrows indicate
ascending and descending sort orders, respectively.

You can also apply the required sort condition by right-clicking a column header and selecting Sort Ascending or Sort
Descending from the invoked context menu.

To remove sorting by a column, select Clear Sorting from the context menu or click a column header while holding down the
CTRL key.

Tooltips
A Grid dashboard item can display a tooltip when the mouse pointer is hovered over the bar in the measure column.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 692 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The tooltip shows the value in the measure column as text.

When the mouse pointer is hovered over the cell in the sparkline column, the tooltip can display start/end values and
minimum/maximum values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 693 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Grid and other dashboard items. These features include Master
Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Web Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To
learn more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a grid row (or multiple rows) to make other dashboard items only display data
related to the selected record(s).

To clear the selection in the Master Filter item, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the grid's caption area.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
The Grid dashboard item supports drill-down for rows.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a grid row to view the details.

Note

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by clicking the selected row.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 694 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the grid's caption area.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 695 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Grid dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Print Headers on Every Page - Specifies whether to print column headers of the Grid dashboard item on every page.
Fit to Page Width - Specifies whether the size of the grid is changed according to the width of the exported page.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Grid dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 696 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 697 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

between Below and Separate Sheet.

Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 698 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Pies
The topics in this section describe the Pie dashboard item, which displays a series of pies or donuts that represent the
contribution of each value to a total.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 699 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Pie dashboard item displays a series of pies or donuts that represent the contribution of each value to a total.

Tooltip
A Pie dashboard item can display a tooltip that shows information about the hovered pie segment.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 700 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Pie and other dashboard items. These features include Master
Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Web Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To
learn more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
The Pie dashboard item supports filtering by argument or series values.
Filtering by Arguments
When filtering by arguments is enabled, you can click a pie segment to make other dashboard items only display data
related to the selected argument value.

Filtering by Series
When filtering by series is enabled, you can click a pie to make other dashboard items display only data related to the
selected pie.

To clear the selection in the Master Filter item, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the pie's caption area.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 701 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
The Pie dashboard item supports drill-down on argument or series values.
Drill Down on Arguments
When drill-down on arguments is enabled, you can click a pie segment to view a detail diagram for the corresponding
argument value.

Note

When Filtering by Arguments is enabled, you can view the details by clicking a selected pie segment.
Drill-Down on Series
When drill-down on a series is enabled, you can click a pie chart to view a detail diagram for the corresponding series value.

Note

When Filtering by Series is enabled, you can view the details by clicking a selected pie chart.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the pie's caption area.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 702 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Pie dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Auto Arrange Content - Specifies whether pies are arranged automatically in the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Pie dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 703 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 704 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

between Below and Separate Sheet.

Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 705 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Cards
The topics in this section describe the Card dashboard item, which displays a series of cards. Each card can display a single value,
or show the difference between two values.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 706 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Card dashboard item displays a series of cards. Each card illustrates the difference between two values. This difference can be
expressed as an absolute value, an absolute variation or a percentage variation.

The Card dashboard item can illustrate this difference for various sets of values. You can switch between these sets using the
Values button (the icon) in the card's caption.

Tooltip
A Card dashboard item can display a tooltip for cards containing a sparkline. When the mouse pointer is hovered over the
sparkline, the tooltip can display start/end values and minimum/maximum values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 707 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Card and other dashboard items. These features include Master
Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Web Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To
learn more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a card (or cards) to make other dashboard items only display data related to the
selected card (or cards).

To clear the selection in the Master Filter item, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the card's caption.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a card to view the details.

Note
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 708 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by clicking a selected card.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the card's caption.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 709 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Card dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Auto Arrange Content - Specifies whether cards are arranged automatically in the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Card dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 710 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 711 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

between Below and Separate Sheet.

Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 712 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Gauges
The topics in this section describe the Gauge dashboard item, which displays a series of gauges.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 713 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Gauge dashboard item displays a series of gauges. Each gauge can communicate two values - one with a needle and the
other with a marker on the scale.

The Gauge dashboard item can illustrate this difference for various sets of values. You can switch between these sets using the
Values button (the icon) in the gauge's caption.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 714 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Gauge and other dashboard items. These features include
Master Filtering and Drill-Down.

Master Filtering
The Web Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To
learn more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a gauge (or multiple gauges) to make other dashboard items only display data
related to the selected gauge or gauges.

To clear the selection in the Master Filter item, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the dashboard item caption.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more, see Drill-Down.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a gauge to view the details.

Note
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 715 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When Master Filtering is enabled, you can view the details by clicking a selected gauge.
To return to the previous detail level (drill up), use the Drill Up button (the icon) in the dashboard item's caption.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 716 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Gauge dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Auto Arrange Content - Specifies whether gauges are arranged automatically in the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Gauge dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 717 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 718 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

between Below and Separate Sheet.

Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 719 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Pivot
The Pivot dashboard item displays a cross-tabular report that presents multi-dimensional data in an easy-to-read format.

Expanding and Collapsing Groups

To expand or collapse row and column groups, use the and buttons, respectively.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 720 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Pivot dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Print Headers on Every Page - Specifies whether to print column headers of the Pivot dashboard item on every page.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Pivot dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 721 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 722 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

between Below and Separate Sheet.

Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 723 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Choropleth Map
The topics in this section describe the Choropleth Map dashboard item, which colorizes the required areas in proportion to the
provided values.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 724 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Choropleth Map dashboard item colorizes map areas in two ways.
Based on the provided values.

Based on the difference between the actual and target values of a particular parameter.

You can switch between the provided values using the Values button (the icon) in the map's caption.

Map Zooming and Scrolling

Use the following actions to scroll a map.
Zooming
Use the mouse scroll wheel to change the current zoom level for the map.
On a touchscreen device, use pinch or spread gestures to change the current zoom level.

Scrolling
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 725 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To scroll the map, hold down the left mouse button and drag it.
On a touchscreen device, use flick gestures to scroll the map.

Tooltip
The Choropleth Map dashboard item can display a tooltip that shows information on a hovered area.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 726 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the Master Filtering feature, which enables interaction between the Choropleth Map and other
dashboard items..

Master Filtering
The Web Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To
learn more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a shape (or multiple shapes) to make other dashboard items only display data
related to the selected shape (or shapes).

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the map's caption.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 727 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Choropleth Map dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title -Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Choropleth Map dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Choropleth Map dashboard item. To reset
changes to the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 728 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 729 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

between Below and Separate Sheet.

Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 730 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Geo Point Maps

The topics in this section describe various types of Geo Point Map dashboard items which places callouts, bubbles or pies on the
map using geographical coordinates.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 731 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Web Dashboard supports three types of Geo Point maps.
The Geo Point Map dashboard item places callouts on the map using geographical coordinates.

The Bubble Map dashboard item displays bubbles on the map. The color and size of each bubble relay data particular to
that color and size.

The Pie Map dashboard item displays pies on the map. Each pie shows the relative contribution that different values
contribute to the total.

You can switch between the provided values using the Values button (the icon) in the map's caption.

Map Zooming and Scrolling

Use the following actions to scroll a map.
Zooming
Use the mouse scroll wheel to change the current zoom level for the map.
On a touchscreen device, use pinch or spread gestures to change the current zoom level.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 732 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Scrolling
To scroll the map, hold down the left mouse button and drag it.
On a touchscreen device, use flick gestures to scroll the map.

Tooltip
A Geo Point Map dashboard item can display a tooltip that displays information in a hovered callout/bubble/pie.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 733 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This document describes the Master Filtering feature, which enables interaction between the Geo Point Map and other
dashboard items.

Master Filtering
The Web Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To
learn more, see the Master Filtering topic, which describes filtering concepts common to all dashboard items.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a callout/bubble/pie (or multiple callouts/bubbles/pies by holding down the CTRL
key) to make other dashboard items only display data related to the selected callout(s)/bubble(s)/pie(s).

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the map's caption.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 734 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting Geo Point Map dashboard items.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title -Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Geo Point Map dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Geo Point Map dashboard item. To reset
changes to the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 735 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 736 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

between Below and Separate Sheet.

Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 737 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Range Filter
The Range Filter dashboard item allows you to apply filtering to other dashboard items. This item displays a chart with selection
thumbs that allow you to filter values displayed along the argument axis.

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 738 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Range Filter dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title -Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Range Filter dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Range Filter dashboard item. To reset
changes to the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
are available:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 739 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 740 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

between Below and Separate Sheet.

Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 741 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Image
The Image dashboard item is used to display images within a dashboard.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 742 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting an Image dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title -Specifies the title of the exported document.
Scale Mode - Specifies the mode for scaling when exporting a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Image dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 743 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title -Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Image dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 744 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Text Box
The Text Box dashboard item is used to display rich text within a dashboard.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 745 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items, or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Text Box dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image

Export To PDF

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF file.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title -Specifies the title of the exported document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Text Box dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 746 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title -Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Text Box dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 747 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Treemap
The Treemap dashboard item visualizes data in nested rectangles that are called tiles.
Data Presentation Basics
Interactivity
Exporting

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 748 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Data Presentation Basics

The Treemap dashboard item visualizes data in nested rectangles that are called tiles. Tiles corresponding to child values can be
combined by parent values into groups. For example, the Treemap below displays combinations of categories and sub-categories.

Labels and Tooltips

The Treemap displays labels that contain descriptions for tiles and groups, and provide tooltips with additional information.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 749 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
This topic describes features that enable interaction between the Treemap and other dashboard items. These features include
Master Filtering.

Master Filtering
The Web Dashboard allows you to use any data aware dashboard item as a filter for other dashboard items (Master Filter). To
learn more about filtering concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Master Filtering topic.
When Master Filtering is enabled, you can click a tile/group caption (or multiple tiles/group captions) to make other dashboard
items only display data related to the selected tile(s).

To reset filtering, use the Clear Master Filter button (the icon) in the Treemap's caption area, or the Clear Master Filter
command in the Treemap's context menu.

Drill-Down
The built-in drill-down capability allows you to change the detail level of data displayed in dashboard items on the fly. To learn
more about drill-down concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Drill-Down topic.
When drill-down is enabled, you can click a tile to view the details.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 750 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting
The Web Dashboard allows you to export individual dashboard items or the entire dashboard. To learn more about exporting
concepts common to all dashboard items, see the Exporting topic.
This topic describes the specifics of exporting a Treemap dashboard item.
Export To PDF
Export To Image
Export To Excel

Export To PDF
The following options are available when exporting the Treemap dashboard item to a PDF.

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported PDF.

Page Layout - Specifies the page orientation used to export a dashboard item.
Size - Specifies the standard paper size.
Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title -Specifies the title of the exported document.
Size Mode - Specifies the export size mode for the Treemap dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Page.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the Treemap dashboard item. To reset changes to
the default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Image
All data-bound dashboard items provide the same set of options when exporting them to an Image format. The following options
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 751 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

are available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Image file.

Show Title - Specifies whether or not to apply the dashboard item caption to the exported document title.
Title - Specifies the title of the exported document.
Image Format - Specifies the image format in which the dashboard item is exported.
Resolution (dpi) - Specifies the resolution (in dpi) used to export a dashboard item.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

Export To Excel
Data visualized within all data-bound dashboard items can be exported to the required Excel format. The following options are
available:

File Name - Specifies the name of the exported Excel file.

Excel Format - Specifies the Excel format in which the dashboard item is exported. You can use the XLSX, XLS or CSV
formats.
Separator - Specifies the string used to separate values in the exported CSV document.
Include | Filters - Allows you to include master filter values to the exported document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 752 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Include | Parameters - Allows you to include parameter values to the exported document.
Position - Specifies the position of the master filter and parameter values in the exported document. You can select
between Below and Separate Sheet.
Specify the required options in this dialog and click the Export button to export the dashboard item. To reset changes to the
default values, click the Reset button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 753 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter Elements
Filter elements provide the capability to filter other dashboard items.
Combo Box
List Box
Tree View

Combo Box
The Combo Box dashboard item allows you to select a value(s) from the drop-down list.
The Standard type allows you to select only a single value.

The Checked type allows you to select multiple values in the invoked drop-down list.

List Box
The List Box dashboard item allows you to select a value(s) from the list.
The Checked type allows you to select multiple values in the list box.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 754 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Radio type allows you to select only a single value in the radio group.

Tree View
The Tree View dashboard item displays values in a hierarchical way and allows you to expand/collapse nodes.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 755 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 756 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Tab Container
Like the Dashboard Item Group, the Tab Container dashboard item allows you to combine elements within a dashboard. The
main Tab Container's purpose is to split the dashboard layout into several pages.

Click the tab page's header to switch between tab pages:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 757 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

View Detail Data

When viewing a dashboard in a mobie® portal, you can see the data behind each widget by using the popout grid feature.
On the toolbar of each widget, there is a magnifying glass you can click on to view the underlying data that is being rendered in
the widget. Click on the magnifying glass (Show Detail Data) to show a grid view of the widget's data.

Disabling the Popout Grid

By default, the "Show Detail Data" magnifying glass will be shown for all widgets. It is possible for the designer of the dashboard
to disable this feature for individual widgets by going to the Design ribbon tab for the widget and disabling the "Enable Popout"
button:

Note that the popout grid feature is not available within the designer - it is a Web viewer only feature.

Data Filtering
Unlike the grid widget that can be shown in the dashboard that summarizes rows of data depending on the set of dimension
columns that are selected for the grid widget, the popout grid shows all of the data rows subject to selection criteria. Selection
criteria include criteria specified in the design of the dashboard as well as filtering that is the result of interactive selection.

Available Columns
The set of columns shown in the popout grid are the set of columns that are selected for use in the widget. This includes all
dimensions and measures, including hidden data items. One use for hidden data items in the designer is to add columns to the
available set shown in the popout grid on the Web.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 758 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Grid Layout
Once in the pop-out grid view, the default layout of the grid simply shows the grid without any particular organization. Users may
change the appearance of the grid in numerous ways, such as:
Drag column headers to rearrange their order
Right click on column headers to change sorting, grouping, and filtering
Left click on column headers to toggle their sort order
Drag column edges to resize column widths
Right click in grid footer areas to add summaries
One available option when right-clicking on column headers is to "Auto Group and Sort". Selecting this will automatically group
and sort the grid according to characteristics of the original dashboard widget. In particular, dimensions will be grouped and
summarized and specified sort orders will be applied. Note that adding grouping and sorting to a popout grid may be slow and
result in significant cost to the database.
Changes made to the layout of the popout grid may be saved by supplying a name for the layout and clicking on the save button
to the right of the layout dropdown in the upper right corner of the grid. Publishers of dashboards may edit the default layout that
is shown to all users by first clicking on the pencil icon when the "<default>" layout is selected prior to making any changes and
then saving after changes have been applied. Other layouts saved by the publisher of the dashboard may also be made available
to subscribers of the dashboard by marking them as shared by using the toggle in the layout dropdown.

Limitations
Dashboard widgets that use calculated fields will not show data in a popout grid if they use aggregation/windowing functions as
these do not translate well to the notion of showing individual detail rows. Summarization functions are removed from
expressions in calculated fields prior to processing and are allowed in conjunction with the popout grid.

Exiting the Popout Grid

When you are finished viewing the grid data, click on the back arrow <- to return to the dashboard.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 759 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Report Designer for WinForms

The Report Designer allows you to create data-bound reports and provides a rich set of tools to construct report layouts that meet
your requirements.

The following sections are available in this guide.

First Look at the Report Designer
Add New Reports
Open Reports
Introduction to Banded Reports
Create Popular Reports
Configure Design Settings
Use Report Elements
Shape Report Data
Lay out Dynamic Report Content
Customize Appearance
Add Navigation
Provide Interactivity
Add Extra Information
Use Expressions
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 760 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Report Designer Tools

Bursting
Note

Specific features described in this guide may differ from what you see in your application. This depends on your application
vendor.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 761 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

First Look at the Report Designer

The design surface displays a report's structure and contents. You can use the tools on the Report Designer's panels to design the
report:
access the report's data source schema in the Field List;
drop report controls from the Toolbox to the design surface;
use the Ribbon toolbar and Property Grid to set up the report controls;
access the report's elements in the Report Explorer;
use the Group and Sort panel to manage the report's group and sort settings.
A blank report's design surface displays page margins and an empty detail band.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 762 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use the zoom panel to change the Report Designer's default zoom factor.

Switch to the Preview tab. This opens a Print Preview and displays the generated report document with the data source's data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 763 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 764 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add New Reports

This topic explains how to create a new report in ProReports.

Create a New Report

You can use one of the following commands to create a new report. The created report contains three bands - Top Margin,
Detail, and Bottom Margin. Refer to the Use Report Elements section for information on how to add controls to the report.
Click the ProReport button on the main toolbar or the 'New' object button.

The ProReport designer will come up and immediately prompt you for a DAS report for your ProReport. All ProReports are built
over one to many DAS reports. Our DAS reports are used to access and transform most any type of data source.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 765 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Open ProReports
You can open private or published ProReports from the home screen of DAS. You can also open these reports from you private
workspace or, if the ProReport is published, from your Public Workspace.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 766 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Introduction to Banded Reports

Banded reports provide a generalized report layout notion. When you preview a banded report, a report document is generated
based on the report layout and data source.

Report Bands
A report layout consists of bands that contain report controls and define their location on document pages. A blank report
contains the following bands:
The Detail Band is printed for every record in a data source unless you filtered the data.
Every report should have a detail band, and you cannot delete it.
The Top Margin and Bottom Margin bands. These bands are repeated once on every document page.

You can also add the following bands:

Report Header and Report Footer
The Report Header is the report's first band (margins are "out-of-page" zones). Use this band to display the report's name,
company logo, date of creation, username, etc.
The Report Footer is placed before the Page Footer and Bottom Margin on the report's last page. You can use the Report
Footer band for report summaries or conclusions.
Page Header and Page Footer
These bands are at the top and bottom of every page in a report. They display information that should be printed on every
page.
Group Header and Group Footer
These bands are above and below each group. The Group and Sort Panel create these bands automatically.
 Tip

Only the detail and group bands can be used to display dynamic data source contents. Other bands display titles, summaries, and
extra information.
The following image illustrates a sample report layout and the Report Explorer that reflects the report's structure:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 767 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Vertical Bands
You can replace the Detail band with the Vertical Header, Vertical Detail and Vertical Total bands to display record fields vertically
and print data records horizontally - from left to right (and vise versa if the report's RTL mode is enabled).

To add vertical bands to your report, right-click the report in the Report Designer and choose Insert Vertical Band in the invoked
context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 768 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

If your report's Detail band contains report controls, this band and all these controls are lost when you add a vertical band (the
same behavior takes place in the opposite situation).
The following vertical bands are available:
Vertical Header
Contains headers of the report's data fields. These headers are arranged vertically.
Vertical Details
This band is printed for every record in a data source unless you filtered the data. The records are displayed one after
another in a horizontal direction.
Vertical Total
This band is placed at the rightmost position (leftmost when RTL is enabled). You can use the Vertical Total band for report
summaries or conclusions.
You can use the Report Wizard to create a report with vertical bands. Refer to the Create a Vertical Report topic for instructions on
how to create a report with vertical bands.

Create Band Copies

You can create functional copies of a band, for example, to display different contents based on a specific condition. To do this, add
sub-bands to bands.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 769 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

 Tip

See Laying out Dynamic Report Contents for details on how to specify the location of bands' content on document pages.

Manage Report Bands

H ide B ands in the Report D esigner
Click the arrow button on the band's title to collapse or expand the band.

H ide B ands in the Report D ocument

You can avoid printing a band's content in a document. To do this, set the band's Height property to a zero or disable its Visible
property. Select the band and set these properties in the Property Grid.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 770 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Remove B ands
Select a band on the report design surface and press DELETE. This removes the band and all its content.
Add B ands
To add a band, right-click a report's design surface, and in the invoked context menu, choose Insert Band.

Access the B ands Collection

Click the Edit and Reorder Bands context link in a report's smart tag to access the report's bands collection.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 771 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This command is also available in a band's context and smart tag menus.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 772 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Bind to Data
DAS ProReports are bound to DAS reports. A DAS report can be bound to a JDE report or an external data source.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 773 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Publishing a ProReport
Designers may publish ProReports to other users within DAS or to mobie®.
This does come with a limitation where a ProReport that is published to mobie® cannot also be published within DAS. The
designer will have to publish the ProReport with a different name in order to be published in both environments.
Publishing ProReports within DAS
Describes how to publish ProReports within DAS to share with other users.
Publishing ProReports to mobie®
Describes how to publish ProReports for sharing in a web portal on the internet.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 774 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Publishing a ProReport within DAS

Designers may publish ProReports to other users within DAS or to mobie®.
To publish a ProReport, choose the Publish As Report button from the ribbon bar or the File menu. If these buttons are not visible,
contact your DAS administrator to grant the report publishing permission.

As with other reports, you can publish a ProReport to other users within DAS.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 775 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Publishing a ProReport to mobie®

Designers may publish ProReports to mobie®.
Mobie (mobie®) is the ReportsNow data warehousing tool for mobile ProReports and Dashboards. When Publish To Web is
selected from the ProReport Designer, a URL is created containing the ProReport, which can be viewed on a computer or
handheld device. The URL is added to the Portal list and associated with a DataBox Table.
Use your web browser to open the url and see the published ProReport.

The web Portal provides internet access to view the ProReport. Each recipient of published ProReports must have a mobie®
license, be set up in the mobie® Admin settings by a DAS Administrator, and be assigned to a Portal, as discussed in the mobie®
Admin Manual for your DAS Administrator to set up.
Im por tant

A ProReport with visible mapped parameters cannot be published to mobie. If you wish to use mapped parameters for a
ProReport in the Portal, you must set the Visible property to No within the parameter editor. Data filtering in mobie needs to be
handled at the data-source level. For details, see Filter Data at the Data Source Level

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 776 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create Popular Reports

The following tutorials illustrate how to create table and invoice reports:
Create a Table Report
Create a Vertical Report
Create an Invoice Based on a Template
The following topics describe how to display hierarchical data in your reports:
Create a Master-Detail Report (Use Subreports)
The tutorials listed below demonstrate various layout options available for reports:
Create Labels and Badges
Create a Multi-Column Report
The following tutorial illustrates interactive report features:
Create an Interactive E-Form
Note

See the Provide Interactivity documentation section to learn about providing a drill-down functionality to your reports.
See Use Report Parameters to learn how to customize reports by submitting parameter values in Print Preview.
The following tutorial explains how to use the Pivot Grid control in your reports:
Create a Cross-Tab Report
Note

See the Use Charts and Pivot Grids documentation section to learn more about using Pivot Grids and Charts in your reports.
The following tutorial shows how to run a ProReport as a burst target from a standard report:
Create a ProReport as a Burst Target

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 777 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create a Table Report

This tutorial describes how to create a data-bound report displaying information in a tabular format. Table reports should not be
confused with hierarchical master-detail reports, nor with cross-tab reports.
1. Create a new report or open an existing one.
2. Bind the report to a required data source.
3. Add the Page Header band to the report to print the column headers at the top of every document page. To do this, right-
click the report's surface, and select Insert Band | PageHeader in the context menu.

4. Switch to the Field List and select the required fields by clicking them while holding the CTRL or SHIFT key. Then, drop them
onto the Page Header band with the right mouse button to quickly create column headers.

This creates a Table in which each cell shows a field name.

5. To provide dynamic content to the report, switch to the Field List again and select the same fields. Click the selected fields
and drag-and-drop them onto the Detail band.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 778 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This creates a table with the same number of cells as the number of fields selected with each cell bound to the appropriate
data field.
6. Select a table by clicking its handle, which appears when you hover the table with the mouse cursor. To select both tables
simultaneously, click their handles while holding the CTRL key.

7. Use the Toolbar's Font, Alignment and Borders sections to customize the tables' appearance.

8. Define a currency format for the UnitPrice cell. Click the cell's smart tag, and then, click the Format String property's
ellipsis button. Select the appropriate format in the invoked Format String Editor editor and click OK.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 779 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

9. To further improve the table readability, you can apply different visual styles to its odd and even rows. See Report Visual
Styles to learn more.

See the Use Tables section to learn how to add or remove the table's rows and cells, as well as convert the table's cells to
separate label controls.
Switch to Print Preview to see the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 780 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 781 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create an Invoice Based on a Template

This document describes how to create an invoice report based on a predefined template using the Report Wizard.
Do the following to select an invoice template and configure its settings:
1. Click Report Wizard button in the Toolbar's Quick Start tab.

2. On the first wizard page, select Template and click Next.

3. On the next wizard page, choose the report template that specifies elements' arrangement and appearance settings.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 782 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Click Next to proceed to the next wizard page.

1. The next wizard page enables you to specify the relationships between the data source' s fields and predefined template
fields.
Drag and drop the required data field form the tree on the left-hand side onto the corresponding template field's column.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 783 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can also select a data field from the Template Field Value drop-down list or manually enter a static field value in this
column.
If you do not provide values to specific template fields, the corresponding elements are automatically added to the resulting
report.
Click Next to proceed.
2. On the last wizard page, select the currency symbol and price values' format.
You can also specify the following discount/tax options:
Range - Defines whether the discount/tax value should not be taken into account (None), or should be used for
individual items (Unit) or the entire order (Total).
Value- Specifies the discount/tax value that can be static or bound to the data source field.
Type - Specifies the type of the discount/tax value (flat, fixed or percentage).
Inclusive (for the tax only) - Indicates whether the tax value is included in product prices.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 784 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Click Finish to complete the wizard and get the report layout according to the selected template and specified options.

Switch to Print Preview to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 785 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 786 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create a Master-Detail Report (Use Subreports)

This tutorial demonstrates how to create a master-detail report using the Subreport control. This approach is useful if your data
source does not contain master-detail relationship or you prefer to store master and detail reports in different files.

Create a Master Report

1. Create a new report or open an existing one to use it as a master report.
2. Bind the report to a required data table.
3. Drop the required data fields from the Field List onto the Detail band.

Create the Detail Report

1. Add one more blank report to use it as a detail report.
2. Bind it to data. For instance, use another table of the same database as for the master report.
3. Switch to the Field List, select the data fields while holding down CTRL or SHIFT and drag-and-drop them onto the Detail
band.

4. Add parameter to the detail report. Right-click the Parameters section in the Field List and choose Add Parameter in the
context menu.

5. In the invoked Add New Parameter dialog, specify the parameter's Name and Type as well as disable the Show in the
parameters panel option.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 787 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

6. Click the report's smart tag, and in its actions list, click the Filter String property's ellipsis button.
In the invoked FilterString Editor, construct an expression where the required data field is compared to the created
parameter. To access the parameter, click the icon on the right until it turns into a question mark.

7. Save the detail report by selecting Save | Save As in the toolbar.

Embed the Subreport

1. Switch back to the master report and drop the Subreport control from the Toolbox onto the Detail band.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 788 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2. Click the subreport's smart tag and clcik the Report Source URL property's ellipsis button. In the invoked Open dialog,
select the previously saved detail report.

3. Bind the subreport's parameter used as a filter criterion to the master report's corresponding data field, which serve as a
source of the parameter value. To do this, click the subreport's smart tag and select Edit Parameter Bindings in the
invoked actions list.

4. In the invoked Parameter Binding Collection Editor, click Add to add new binding. In the property list, specify the data
field to which you want to bind a subreport parameter and the name of the parameter that you want to bind.

5. If required, customize the report's appearance and format values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 789 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

View the Result

Switch to Print Preview to see the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 790 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create a Vertical Report

This tutorial describes how to use vertical bands to create a report where record fields are arranged vertically and data records are
printed horizontally.

1. Create a new report or open an existing one.

2. Bind the report to a required data source.
3. Click the report's smart tag and choose Design in Report Wizard....

4. In the invoked Report Wizard, select Vertical Report and click Next.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 791 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

5. Select the data fields that should be included in the report.

6. Specify group data fields to create a report with grouped data (the report in this tutorial does not have group fields).
7. Add summary fields to the report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 792 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

8. Change the report page layout to landscape so that the vertical table fit the report.

9. You can set the report's color scheme.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 793 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

10. Specify the report's title.

Click Finish and the generated report opens in the Report Designer.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 794 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The wizard adds report controls to the following bands:

Vertical Header band
Contains a table with a single column that displays headers of the report's data fields.
Vertical Details band
Contains a table with a single column that is printed so many times as there are records in the report's data source.
Vertical Total band
Contains a table with a single column that has so many labels in cells as there are summary functions you specified for each
field in the Report Wizard (only the sum function for each field in this demo).
Switch to the Preview tab to see the result.

 Tip

You can create a vertical report without using the Report Wizard. Right-click the report in the Report Designer and choose Insert
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 795 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Vertical Band in the invoked context menu. Refer to the Introduction to Banded Reports topic for more information.

Set Vertical Table Options

You can set the following options in the Property Grid to modify the vertical table:
Disable the Vertical Header band's Repeat Every Page property to display field headers once - on the first report page.
Set the Vertical Detail band's Band Layout property to Across Then Down to print the data records that do not fit a page on
the same page, otherwise, they are printed on the next page (as in this demo).
Specify the Vertical Detail band's Sort Fields property to sort the report's data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 796 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create Labels and Badges

This tutorial describes the steps to create a label report that contains employee badges.
1. Create a new report and bind it to a required data source (for instance, to a table that contains information about
employees).
2. Click the report's smart tag, and in the invoked actions list, click Design in Report Wizard.

3. The wizard guides you through the process of creating a label report. Refer to Label Report for detailed instructions on the
wizard's steps.

4. After performing the above steps you will see that the report's Detail band is now divided into three differently colored
areas. The first area at the left-hand side indicates the actual available band area for controls to be placed within it. The gray
area at the right-hand side is intended for the columns in which labels will be displayed, so it cannot be occupied by
controls. Finally, the white area specifies an indent between the available and reserved areas.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 797 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

5. Drop the required fields from the Field List onto the available Detail band's area and adjust the layout.

If required, you can apply mail merge to combine several fields within the same Label control.
For the Picture Box control, you can set its Sizing property to Zoom Image.
Switch to Print Preview to see the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 798 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create a Multi-Column Report

This document describes how to arrange report data in multiple columns, which can be used to create mailing labels, business
cards or multi-column directories.

Settings
To access the multi-column settings of a report's Detail band, use its smart tag or the Property Grid.

Multi-Column Mode
Enables you to select one of the following modes:
None
Disables the multi-column layout.
Use Column Count
Makes the report display a specific number of columns based on the Column Count value. When this property is set to 1,
the report looks as though its multi-column layout is disabled.
Use Column Width
Makes the report columns have a specific width based on the Column Width value. With this setting, the report displays as
many columns as it is possible according to the specified column width, column spacing and report page size.
Column Spacing
Specifies the distance between adjacent columns. This value is measured in report units.
Multi-Column Layout
Specifies the preferred direction for arranging report data within columns.
First Across, then Down
The report data is arranged horizontally and is wrapped to the next row on reaching the right page margin.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 799 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When the report data is grouped, the multi-column layout is applied to each group individually.

First Down, then Across

The report data is arranged vertically and is wrapped to the next column on reaching the bottom page margin.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 800 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When the report data is grouped, you can make each group start on a new column by setting the Page Break property of
the Group Footer to After the Band.

How It Works
The following image illustrates a report designer with a multi-column layout applied to the report:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 801 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

In multi-column mode, the report's design surface is limited to the area defined by the column width. This is the only area
intended to contain report controls.
The rest of this surface defines the space on a page remaining for printing columns and column spacing area.
In the above image, the report data in the Detail band is contained within a Panel that provides borders around the enclosed
content.

You can also specify a custom background color for the Panel. To learn how to change this color dynamically (based on the
report's underlying data), see Conditionally Change a Control's Appearance.
When the report data is grouped (as in the above image), and the First Down, then Across multi-column layout is used, you can
make each group start on a new column. To do this, set the Page Break property of the Group Footer to After the Band or After
the Band, Except for the Last Entry. When there is no data to display in the Group Footer, set the band height to zero.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 802 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create an Interactive E-Form

This tutorial describes how to create a form that is fillable in Print Preview.

To get started with this tutorial, create a new report or open an existing one.

Add Form Fields

Add the Label report controls to the report and arrange them according to the form's template. Set the labels' Text property to
the form's field names.

Add Fillable Cells

Use the Character Comb control for the form's text fields. This control displays letters in individual cells and allows you to fill
these cells in Print Preview.
1. Drop the Character Comb item from the Toolbox onto the report.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 803 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2. Select all the added Character Combs and set their properties in the Property Grid:
Cell Size Mode
Cell Height,
Cell Width,
and other cell settings.

3. Enable the Character Combs' Edit Options | Enabled property.

4. Choose editors for the Character Comb controls' edit mode.

Controls that allow you to enter letters
Invoke a drop-down list for the Editor Name property and select the Only Uppercase Letters item in the Letters
category.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 804 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Controls that allow you to enter integers

Invoke a drop-down list for the Editor Name property and select the Positive Integer item in the Numeric category.

Add Check Box Editors

Add Check Box controls for the Male/Female fields.

Use the following properties to set up these controls:

Set the Text property.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 805 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Set appearance properties.

Enable the Edit Options | Enabled property switch check box states in Print Preview.
Set the Edit Options | Group ID property to the same value to combine these two check boxes into a logical group. This
allows you to select only one option at a time.

Add the Signature Editor

Add the PictureBox report control for the form's Signature field.

Do the following to enable drawing in Print Preview:

1. Enable the control's Edit Options | Enabled property.
2. Set the Edit Options | Editor Name property to Signature.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 806 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Get the Result

Switch to the Preview tab to see the result.

Click the button on the Print Preview toolbar to highlight all the editable fields on the form.

Click a field to invoke its editor.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 807 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use TAB and SHIFT+TAB to navigate between editable fields.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 808 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create a Cross-Tab Report

A cross-tab report displays complex multi-dimensional data, such as summary statistics, surveys, and market research
information. This report uses a Pivot Grid control that calculates automatic summaries and grand totals across grouped rows and
columns.

Add a Pivot Grid and Bind It to Data

1. Create a new report or open an existing one.
2. Drop the Pivot Grid control from the Toolbox onto the Detail band.

You cannot place a Pivot Grid in another report control (for example, Table Cell or Panel) because its width cannot be
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 809 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

determined at design time.

Define the Pivot Grid's Content

1. Customize the Pivot Grid's layout. To do this, switch the Pivot Grid Tools toolbar tab and click Run Designer.

2. In the Pivot Grid Designer's Fields page, click the Retrieve Fields button to obtain fields from the control's data source.

3. Switch to the Layout page in the navigation bar on the left and drag-and-drop the required fields onto the appropriate
areas to define the Pivot Grid's layout.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 810 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Designer.

Note

To see how the pivot grid looks when it is populated with data, switch to the report's Preview.
Return to the Report Designer and invoke the Pivot Grid Designer. The pivot grid fields are now populated with actual data and
you can customize the grid.

Adjust the Pivot Grid's Layout

Set the report's Vertical Content Splitting property to Smart to split the Pivot Grid along the column borders if it does not fit
the report's page in Print Preview.

Specify the Pivot Grid's Print Options

Use the Pivot Grid Tools toolbar tab's Print Options section to specify print options and define which Pivot Grid elements are
printed.
Disable the Data Headers option to prevent data fields' headers from being printed.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 811 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Enable the Row Area On Every Page option to repeat row headers on each document page when the Pivot Grid's layout is
divided horizontally across several pages.

Switch to Print Preview to see the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 812 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

ProReports as Burst Targets

DAS ProReports can be used in Bursting as a burst target. To demonstrate I will use Address Book (F0115).

Setup the ProReport for bursting

1. Create a simple DAS report from the F0115 table and drag the Address Number column to the parameter's panel to create
the Address Number parameter that will be used by your bursted ProReport.

2. Create a ProReport using the Address Book report you created in step 1.
3. Drag at least the Prefix, Phone Number, Line Number columns into your detail band.

4. Create a header band.

5. Add some column header labels for your columns.

6. Click on the Map Parameters button and map the parameter to the DAS report's Address Number parameter.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 813 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

7. If you go to Print Preview, you should be able to select an address number and click the Submit button to see similar results
to these.

By mapping the DAS parameter in the ProReport, the value selected in the Parameters panel will be passed to the DAS
report for filtering.

Create the DAS report to drive the ProReport

Now that you've created the ProReport burst target, we'll create a DAS report to drive it.
1. Create a DAS report from the F0101 and keep at least the Address Number column and, for testing purposes, select a small
list of AB numbers that have phone numbers.
2. Create the Burst calc
1. In the Input parameter values choose our new ProReport.

2. Select your filter criteria, the Address Number; this will be passed to the ProReport's parameter as a filter for each row.

3. Set your Output Destination.

1. Output Type: PDF
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 814 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2. File Name:

3. Destination:

Ready to run
Everything should be setup and ready to run.

Disable Simulate output to generate your output files.

Running your report should result in Address Book reports for users that have phone numbers in the F0115 table.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 815 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Configure Design Settings

The documents in this section describe how to specify a report's various design settings:
Change a Report's Measurement Units
Learn how to switch your reports between using the imperial or metric system for specifying the size and location of report
elements, or use pixels as a measurement.
Change a Report's Page Settings
Learn how to specify the settings of the default printer or page settings that affect the layout of the report's design surface.
Right-To-Left Support
Learn how to mirror your reports' layout for audiences using a right-to-left writing system.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 816 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Change a Report's Measurement Units

Most metrics of report elements (i.e., element locations, dimensions and margins) can be expressed in units that correspond to
one of the following systems of measurement.
Imperial system (in hundredths of an inch)
This is the default system that is assigned to each new report.
Metric system (in tenths of a millimeter)
Screen coordinates (in pixels)
To assign a system of measurements to a report, use its Measure Units property. You can specify this property either in the
report's smart tag...

... or in the Property Grid's Behavior tab.

Changing the system of measurement results in converting the corresponding property values and updating the layout of all
report elements in the Report Designer. Notably, the system of measurement determines the minimum increment with which an
element's location and size can be changed.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 817 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Change a Report's Page Settings

In the Report Designer, page settings of a report can be specified in one of two ways. The first approach forces the default printer
settings to be used when the report is printed, while the other one enables you to alter page settings independently.

Use Settings of the Default Printer

For the orientation and paper size, you can specify a requirement that applies the corresponding printer settings instead of the
report's. In this instance, the page properties in the Property Grid are disabled and displayed as grayed out. This may be useful
when the report is printed in several places with different printers and printer settings.

Specify the Report's Page Settings

While designing the report, you can specify the report's page settings in the Property Grid's Miscellaneous tab:

You can set the page orientation and modify the margins. The margin values are expressed in the report's measurement units.
You can select from the predefined paper sizes (Paper Kind property), choose Custom and create your own paper size, or select
one which is already defined for this printer (Paper Name property).
These settings affect the layout of the report's design surface. After their modification, you may notice red warning marks,
indicating that the controls go beyond the page width. These warnings can be switched off by setting the Show Printing
Warnings property of the report to No.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 818 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can also modify the page settings in Print Preview using the Page Setup dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 819 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Enable the Right-To-Left Layout

The report and most of the report controls provide the Right to Left property.

This property specifies content layout within a control (for most controls, this property affects the direction of their text, and for
the Check Box, this property also affects the check box position within the control).
Left-To-Right

Right-To-Left

By default, all report controls have this property set to Inherit, so enabling it for a report will apply this setting to all its controls.
The following controls support this feature:
Label
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 820 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Check Box
Page Info
Panel
Pivot Grid
Table
Table of Contents
For the Panel and Table, this option only affects the controls contained in them.
When the Right to Left property of a report is set to Yes, you can also enable the Right To Left Layout property that specifies
the position of controls within report bands. Enabling the right-to-left layout will also swap the page margins of a document (it
will become impossible to place controls outside the right page margin).

The controls' coordinates will remain unchanged and only the point and direction of reference will change (the X coordinate will
be calculated starting with the top right corner).
The right-to-left layout is preserved when exporting a report to any of the supported formats (e.g., PDF, Excel, or RTF).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 821 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Report Elements

The documents in this section describe how to use various controls in a report, manipulate report elements and customize the
report layout:
Manipulate Report Elements
Use Basic Report Controls
Use Tables
Use Bar Codes
Use Charts and Pivot Grids
Use Gauges
Draw Lines and Shapes

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 822 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Manipulate Report Elements

The following topics describe how to add various controls to a report, manipulate report elements and customize the report
layout:
Add Controls to a Report
Select Report Elements and Access Their Settings
Move and Resize Report Elements
Copy Report Controls
Arrange Report Controls
Add Report Controls to Containers
Validate the Report Layout

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 823 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Controls to a Report

Add Report Controls
To display a data field's value in your report, drag the corresponding item from the Field List and drop it onto the report's detail
band. This creates a new report control bound to the corresponding field.

You can also use the Toolbox to add other controls to your report and display content such as text, images, charts, barcodes, and
so on.

This document describes how to add the most commonly used controls to a report. See Use Report Elements for a complete list of
available controls.

Display Text
Use the following controls to display text in a report:
Label
Displays plain text in a report.

Rich Text
Displays rich text in a report. You can apply different font settings to the control's content and load content from an external
file.

Table
Contains any number of cells arranged in one or more rows. Each table cell can display plain text or contain other controls.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 824 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Character Comb
Displays each character in a separate cell and can be used to create printed forms.

Double-click any of these controls to invoke an in-place editor where you can enter and format text.

Press CTRL+Enter to submit changes and close this mode.

You can use the corresponding toolbar elements to access the selected control's font and alignment settings.

Labels and other text-oriented controls can display the following content:
Static content
A control's content does not change once it is specified in a published document.

Dynamic content
A connected data source supplies this content. In a published document, it changes according to the printed data source
record.

You can use a control's smart tag to format dynamic content.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 825 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Display Page Information

Use the Page Info control to display information about document pages, such as the current page number and/or total number of
pages.

You can also use this control to add information about a report's author and the document's creation date.
See the following tutorials for detailed instructions:
Add Page Numbers
Display the User Name in a Report
Display the Current Date and Time in a Report

Display Check Boxes, Images and Bar Codes

Drop a Boolean data field from the Field List onto a report to create a Check Box control bound to that field.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 826 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Check boxes can display different states depending on the underlying data values.

Use the Picture Box control to display images in a report. You can load an image from an external file or bind this control to a
binary data source field.

To display bar codes, use the Bar Code control.

Drawing Lines and Shapes

Use the Shape control to draw simple graphics in a report (circles, crosses or arrows).

The Line control enables you to draw straight or slanted lines in a single band.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 827 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Cross-Band Line and Box controls enable you to draw lines and boxes spanning multiple report bands.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 828 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Select Report Elements and Access Their Settings

You can click a report control or band to select it, and press TAB/SHIFT+TAB to select the next/previous control.
Do one of the following to select multiple report controls:
Press and hold the SHIFT or CTRL key and click the controls.
Click an empty place on a report's surface and draw a rectangle around the controls.

Click the gray area around the design surface to select a report.
You can use smart tags to access the most commonly used element properties. Smart tags are available for reports and most
report controls and bands.

Smart tags can also contain context links that enable you to perform various actions.

The Toolbar provides a corresponding contextual tab when you select a report control. This tab allows you to specify settings and
perform actions applicable to the selected element's type.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 829 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can use the Property Grid to access the whole set of settings that the selected element supports.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 830 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Move and Resize Report Elements

You can use the mouse or keyboard to move a report control to a new location.

You can also select multiple controls and move them in the same way as individual report controls.

To resize a control, select it and then drag a rectangle drawn on its edge or corner.

Drag a band's header strip to resize the band.

You can also press SHIFT+ARROW or CTRL+SHIFT+ARROW to resize a selected element.

See Arrange Report Controls for information about tools that help you align report controls to each other and layout edges.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 831 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Copy Report Controls

You can clone an existing report control by selecting it using the mouse, holding the CTRL key and moving the mouse to the
required location. A cloned control has the same settings as the initial control.

You can also copy report controls to the clipboard using CTRL + C or the Copy command, and then paste these controls to a new
container or band.
The original control positions are preserved when inserting controls by pressing CTRL + V or using the Paste toolbar
command.

The pasted controls are repositioned by an offset of 10 units on both axes if another control already occupies the target
position.
When inserting controls using the Paste context menu command, controls are inserted at the mouse position where you
invoked the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 832 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Arrange Report Controls

The following tools allow you to control report elements' size, location, alignment and maintain the distance between them:
Rulers
The Report Designer provides horizontal and vertical rulers to help you determine report elements' size and location.

Layout Toolbar
The Layout toolbar tab enables you to align report controls to each other, change the report element's size, change the
stacked elements' order, and so on.

Snapping
Use the Snapping toolbar group or a report's Snapping Mode property to enable automatic report control snapping to a
grid and/or snap lines.
Snap Grid
The design surface displays a visual grid that allows you to determine elements' size and location in a report. Use the
Snap Grid Size and Snap Grid Step Count properties to customize the grid's settings.

To hide the grid, disable the Grid Lines option in the toolbar's View tab or disable a report's Draw the Grid property.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 833 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Relocating a report control with the mouse or ARROW keys automatically aligns the control to the nearest grid cell.
You can use the Align to Grid toolbar button or context menu item to align the selected controls to the grid's cells.

You can temporarily ignore snapping when you move and resize controls:
hold down ALT if you move or resize controls using the mouse;
hold down CTRL if you move or resize controls using the keyboard.
Snap Lines
The Report Designer displays snap lines when you move or resize report controls. These lines appear around the
report controls and indicate the distance to other report elements (controls and bands).

When you use the ARROW keys to move a report control or press SHIFT+ARROW to resize the control, it is aligned to
the nearest report element in that direction based on snap lines.
A report control's Snap Line Margin property and a band's or panel's Snap Line Padding property allows you to
maintain a uniform distance between elements in a report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 834 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To avoid snapping controls, do the following:

hold down ALT if you move or resize controls using the mouse;
hold down CTRL if you move or resize controls using the keyboard.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 835 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Report Controls to Containers

The Panel control allows you to place various report controls on it to combine them into a group.

You can use this panel to move, copy, change appearance settings, etc. instead of adjusting individual controls.

A table cell can also act as a container for other controls.

Both panel and table cell cannot contain the following report controls:
Pivot Grid
Subreport
Page Break
Table of Contents
Cross-Band Line and Box
If a panel or table cell includes only one control, you can position it within the container using the Fit Bounds to Container
context menu command or toolbar button. This command resizes the control so that it occupies all the available space (excluding
borders).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 836 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 837 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Validate the Report Layout

Your report layout should meet the following requirements to correctly print and export it:
Avoid intersecting controls
The Report Designer highlights intersecting report controls to warn you that the report layout can be exported incorrectly to
HTML, RTF, DOCX, XLS, XLSX, CSV and TXT formats.

Disable the Export Warnings option in the toolbar to ignore this rule and not highlight intersecting controls.

Do not place controls outside page margins

The Report Designer highlights report controls that do not fit into the printable page area and overlap the right page
margin. This warns you that extra pages can appear when document is printed.

Disable the Printing Warnings option in the toolbar to hide these warnings.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 838 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Basic Report Controls

The following documents describe the basic controls that display data in a report:
Label
Character Comb
Rich Text
Check Box
Picture Box
The controls below allow you to embed other reports and customize the report layout:
Subreport
Panel
Page Break
Use the following controls to display auxiliary information in a report:
Table of Contents
Page Info

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 839 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Label
Label Overview
The Label control displays plain text in a report. You can add this control by dragging the Label item from the Toolbox onto the
report's area.

You can double-click the label to invoke its in-place editor and enter the desired static text.

Press CTRL+Enter to submit text changes and exit the label's in-place editing mode.

Bind to Data
D isplay Field Values
You can bind the label's Text property to a data field obtained from a report's data source. Click the control's smart tag, expand
the Expression drop-down list and select the required data field.

Clicking the Expression option's ellipsis button invokes the Expression Editor. You can use this editor to construct a complex
binding expression involving two or more data fields.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 840 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can also drag and drop a numeric or text field from the Field List to create a new label bound to this field.

See the Bind Controls to Data topic to learn more about creating data-aware controls.
The Process Duplicates Mode, Process Duplicates Target and Process Null Values options enable you to hide a control
when a duplicated or null value appears in an assigned data source.

You can also specify output values' format using the Format String property.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 841 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D isplay Summaries
You can make the label display a summary function's result by setting the Summary Running property to the required range
and selecting the summary function in the Summary Expression Editor.

Adjust the Label Size and Content

Static Content
You can change a label's size to fit its static text using the Fit Bounds To Text button in the Toolbar's Text Tools contextual tab:
If the Word Wrap option is enabled, the command displays control content in multiple lines. It decreases the control's
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 842 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

height and adjusts the width to fit this content.

If the Word Wrap option is disabled and the control's content is partially visible, the command adjusts the control's size to
display this content.

This command's result also depends on the control's Text Alignment and Right To Left settings.
Use the Fit Text To Bounds button to adjust the control's font size to fit its area. The Word Wrap option defines whether the
resulting text can occupy multiple lines or should be in a single line.

These commands are not available in the following cases:

A label's text is an empty string;
A label's text is bound to data;
A label's Angle property is specified.
D ata - B ound Labels
The Can Grow and Can Shrink properties allow you to increase or decrease the control's height according to its content in Print
Preview.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 843 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

CAN G R O W IS ENAB LED CAN G R O W IS D IS AB LED

CAN S HR INK IS ENAB LED CANS HR INK IS D IS AB LED

The Auto Width property specifies whether to adjust a data-bound label's width to its content automatically.
You can also use the opposite Text Fit Mode property to adjust a control's font size to fit its boundaries in Print Preview. This
property is not available if the Can Grow, Can Shrink or Auto Width option is enabled.

TE X T FIT MO D E = TE X T FIT MO D E = G R O W TE X T FIT MO D E = S HR INK TE X T FIT MO D E = S HR INK AND

NO NE O NLY O NLY G ROW

See the Lay out Dynamic Report Content topic for more information on these options.

Interactivity
You can enable editing a label's content in Print Preview by enabling the Enabled option in the Edit Options category.

Clicking this label in a previewed document invokes the appropriate editor.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 844 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use the label's Interactive Sorting option to enable sorting report data by clicking this label in Print Preview. Set the Target
Band property to the required Group Header or Detail band, and the Field Name property to the corresponding data field.

Refer to Sort a Report in Print Preview for a step-by-step tutorial.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 845 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Character Comb
Overview
The Character Comb control displays text so that each character is printed in an individual cell.

To add a Character Comb to the report, drag the Character Comb item from the Toolbox onto the report's area.

The number of cells displayed by the control in Print Preview depends on the Can Shrink and Auto Width settings.
If both these properties are enabled, the number of cells corresponds to the number of characters in the control's text.
Otherwise, the number of cells corresponds to the specified cell size and the control size.
See the Content Layout and Position section to learn more on using these properties.
You can also adjust the character comb's size to match its characters using the Fit Bounds To Text toolbar button or context
menu command:
If the Word Wrap option is enabled, the command keeps control content displayed in multiple lines. It decreases the
control's height and adjusts the width to fit this content.

If the Word Wrap option is disabled, the command adjusts the control's height and width to completely display the
control's content in a single line. As a result, the number of cells corresponds to the number of characters.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 846 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When exporting this control to third-party formats, consider the following

When a report is exported to an XLS or XLSX file, the cells of the Character Comb correspond to the cells of a resulting Excel
sheet.
When a report is exported to a CSV (or TXT) file, the content of individual cells is separated (or spaced) by a specified
Separator character.
In most aspects, the Character Comb is similar to the Label control from which it inherits most of its properties and its basic
behavior. For general information about binding these controls to data and display summary function results, see the Label topic.
To learn about Character Comb specifics, see the following sections in this document.

Main Options
The following properties are specific to the Character Comb control:
Cell Vertical Spacing and Cell Horizontal Spacing
Specify the spacing between adjacent cells (measured in report units). These values do not depend on the specified border
width of a control.
The following image illustrates a Character Comb with Cell Vertical Spacing set to 15 and Cell Horizontal Spacing set to
5.

Border Width
Specifies the width of cell borders in pixels, as a floating point value.
When the cell spacing is set to zero, the borders of adjacent cells are merged (i.e., the actual border width is not doubled).
The following images illustrate how cell spacing affects the Border Width property behavior:

CELL S PACING = 0 CELL S PACING = 1

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 847 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When the control's content is to be printed on multiple pages, a page break horizontally splits the cell border based on the
cell spacing setting, as shown below.

CELL S PACING = 0 CELL S PACING > 0

Cell Size Mode

Specifies whether or not the cell size should depend on the current font size of a control. The following cell size modes are
supported:
Custom
The cell size is determined by the Cell Height and Cell Width property values and does not depend on the assigned
font size.
With this setting, the actual cell size is less than the specified Cell Height and CellWidth by the Border Width value.
Auto Size
The cell size depends on the current font size of a control (the Cell Height and Cell Width properties are ignored).
With this setting, the actual cell size does not depend on the specified border width of a control.
Auto Height
Only the cell height depends on the current font size of a control (the Cell Height property is ignored), and the Cell
Width value is specified manually.
With this setting, the following behavior is expected:
The actual cell height does not depend on the specified border width of a control.
The actual cell width is the difference between the specified Cell Width and Border Width values.
Auto Width
Only the cell width depends on the current font size of a control (the Сell Width property is ignored), and Cell
Height value is specified manually.
With this setting, the following behavior is expected:
The actual cell width does not depend on the specified border width of a control.
The actual cell height is the difference between the specified Cell Height and Border Width values.

Content Layout and Position

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 848 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This section describes the Character Comb properties that affect the control's position on a page and content layout.
The following image illustrates the behavior of the Auto Width property that specifies whether or not the width of a control
depends on its text.

AU TO W ID TH = TR U E AU TO W ID TH = FALS E

The following image illustrates the behavior of the Can Shrink property that specifies whether or not the height of a control
depends on its text.

CANS HR INK = TR U E CANS HR INK = FALS E

The Text Alignment property specifies the alignment of text within a control.

TE X TALIG NMENT = TO P LEF T TE X TALIG NMENT = MID D LE CENTER TE X TALIG NMENT = B O T TO M R IG HT

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 849 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Rich Text
Overview
The Rich Text control displays formatted text (static, dynamic or mixed) in your report.
To add this control to a report, drag the Rich Text item from the Toolbox onto the report's area.

You can load RTF or HTML content from an external file. Click the control's smart tag and select Load File.

In the invoked Open dialog, use the drop-down list to define the file's extension (.rtf, .docx, .txt, .htm or .html), select the file
and click Open.
You can double-click the Rich Text to invoke its in-place editor and enter static text. Use the Toolbar's Font group to format the
text.

Press CTRL+Enter to submit changes and exit the in-place editor.

Note

The Rich Text's content is exported as plain text only when exporting to XLS or XLSX format.

Bind to Data
You can bind the control's RTF property to a data field obtained from a report's data source. Click the control's smart tag, expand
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 850 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

the Rtf Expression's drop-down list and select the data field.

You can bind the control to a data field that provides HTML content in the same way. To do this, click the control's smart tag and
use the Html Expression's drop-down list.
Click the Rtf Expression or Html Expression option's ellipsis button to invoke the Expression Editor. This editor allows you to
construct a complex binding expression with two or more data fields.
You can also drag and drop any field from the Field List with the right mouse button and select the Rich Text menu item. This
creates a new Rich Text control bound to this field.

The Rich Text also enables you to merge data fields and static content in its text.

See the Bind Controls to Data and Use Embedded Fields topics for more information.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 851 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Check Box
Check Box Overview
The Check Box control displays Yes/No or Checked/Unchecked/Indeterminate values in a report.
You can add this control by dragging the Check Box item from the Toolbox onto the report's area.

Use one of the following properties to set the check box's state:
Checked - indicates whether the check box is selected (displays a check mark) or not (is empty).
Check State - specifies one of the following check box states:

ICO N CHECK S TATE

Unchecked

Checked

Indeterminate

The Text property specifies the check box's caption. You can double-click the check box to invoke its in-place editor and type the
desired text.

Use the Glyph Alignment and Text Alignment properties to define the glyph and text alignment within the check box.

Bind to Data
You can bind the Check State property to a data field obtained from a report's data source. Click the control's smart tag, expand
the Expression drop-down list for the Check State property and select the required data field.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 852 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The data field value determines the check box state in the following manner:
True or 1 activates the Checked state;
False or 0 activates the Unchecked state;
Any other value activates the Indeterminate state.
In the same way, expand the Expression drop-down list for the Text property and bind it to the desired data field.
Clicking the Expression option's ellipsis button invokes the Expression Editor, in which you can construct a complex binding
expression involving two or more data fields.

You can also drag and drop a Boolean type data field from the Field List to create a new check box bound to this field.

See the Bind Report Controls to Data topic to learn more about creating data-aware controls.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 853 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interactivity
You can enable changing the check box state in Print Preview by enabling the Enabled option in the Edit Options category.

The Group ID setting defines the check box's behavior in Print Preview:
When you set this property to an empty string value, a check box can be switched to either the "checked" and "unchecked"
state independently on other available check boxes.

Otherwise, the field editor behaves like a radio button, and editors that have the same ID belong to a single logical group
(that is, only one option can be selected in a group at a time).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 854 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Picture Box
Overview
You can use the Picture Box control to embed static (stored with the report definition) or dynamic (obtained from a data source)
images into a report. The images can have one of the following formats: BMP, JPG, JPEG, GIF, TIF, TIFF, PNG, ICO, DIB, RLE, JPE,
JFIF, EMF, WMF, SVG.
To add the Picture Box control to a report, drag the Picture Box item from the Toolbox onto the report's area.

Specify one of the following properties to set an image:

ImageSource
Use this property to save images along with a report definition.
ImageUrl
Use this property to save only the path to the image.

Bind a Picture Box to Data

You can use the Picture Box to display an image dynamically obtained from a data source. Click the control's smart tag, expand
the Image property's Expression drop-down list and select the data field.

You can bind the Image URL property to data in the same way.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 855 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Click the Expression option's ellipsis button to invoke the Expression Editor. This editor allows you to construct a complex
binding expression with two or more data fields.
You can also drag and drop a field that contains image data from the Field List to create a new Picture Box bound to this field.

See the Bind Report Controls to Data topic for more information about how to create data-aware controls.

SVG Support Limitations

The Picture Box control does not support the following SVG content:
Gradient colors
Text (you can convert text to curves as a workaround)
Animations
External .css styles
Export (except for PDF) has the following limitations:
SVG images are converted to metafiles because document viewers may not support SVG format.
SVG images are exported as PNG in the Microsoft Azure environment.
The Medium Trust permission level does not support SVG.

Image Size Modes

Use the Sizing property to specify an image's position in the Picture Box.

This control supports the following image size modes:

Normal
The image is displayed at the top left corner with its original dimensions. The image is clipped if it does not fit the control's
boundaries.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 856 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Stretch Image
The image is stretched or shrunk to fill the control's width and height.

Auto Size
The control's dimensions are adjusted to the image's size.

Zoom Image
The image is resized proportionally without clipping it to fit the control dimensions.

Squeeze
The image is centered and shown full-size if the control dimensions exceed the image size. Otherwise, the image is resized
to fit the control's boundaries.

Tile
The original image is replicated within the control starting from the top left corner. The replicated image is clipped if it does
not fit the control's boundaries.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 857 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can also use the Image Alignment property in the Normal, Squeeze and Zoom Image modes to specify the alignment in
relation to the control's boundaries.

Interactivity
You can add a possibility to load/change an image and/or draw a signature in a picture box when it is displayed in Print Preview.
To do this, enable the Edit Options | Enabled property.

Click the picture box in a previewed document and an editor invokes.

 Tip

You can draw borders for the picture box to make the editor visible in Print Preview, if an image is not specified.
Refer to the Content Editing in Print Preview topic for details and to the Create-an-Interactive-E-Form tutorial to see how the E-
Form demo report uses this picture box mode.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 858 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Subreport
The Subreport control is used to embed other reports into the current report.
To add this control to the report, drag the Subreport item from the Toolbox onto the report's area.

The Subreport control allows you to solve the following tasks:

Reuse reports
This can be useful if there is a particular report structure (template) that needs to be included in many reports, and the
report must have consistent appearance and functionality. A good example is a report header that always contains the same
information (the company information, logo, date, etc.).
Create master-detail reports
Another reason for using subreports is to create master-detail reports (reports with hierarchically linked data). For more
details on this, see Create a Master-Detail Report (Use Subreports).
Use the ProReport property to set the referenced ProReport to use for this subreport. The referenced ProReport ID indicates the
ProReport name and whether the report is published ('Report') or if it is private ('Layout').
The designer for the nested subreport can be opened up via the subreport's smart tag.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 859 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Panel
The Panel control is a container that frames separate report controls and allows you to move, copy and paste them. The panel
also visually unites report controls in Print Preview (for instance, with borders or a uniform color background).
To add a panel to a report, drag the Panel item from the Toolbox and drop it onto the required report band.

Drop the desired report controls onto the panel to combine them to a group.

You can use this panel to move, copy, change appearance settings, etc. instead of adjusting individual controls.

The Report Explorer displays controls placed onto a panel as its subordinate nodes.

The panel cannot contain the following report controls:

Pivot Grid
Subreport
Page Break
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 860 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Table of Contents
Cross-Band Line and Box
If a panel includes only one control, you can use the Fit Bounds to Container command in the context menu or in the Layout
toolbar tab. This command resizes the control so that it occupies all the available container space (excluding borders).

You can also enable the panel's Can Shrink property to automatically adjusts the panel's size to fit all the inner controls. For
instance, this allows preventing blank areas when you conditionally hide specific controls.

Note

The Panel control cannot span several report bands as cross-band controls can.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 861 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Break
The Page Break control's sole purpose is to insert a page delimiter at any point within a report.
You can add this control by dragging the Page Break item from the Toolbox onto the report's area.

This control is visually represented by a short line attached to the report's left margin.
The Page Break control is useful when you need to insert a page break between controls within a report band (for example, to
divide subreports so that the second subreport starts printing on a new page).

You can also insert a page break before or after a specific report band using the band's Page Break property.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 862 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Table of Contents
Overview
Once bookmarks have been assigned to specific report elements, you can generate a table of contents that displays page
numbers containing the elements included into the document map.
To implement a table of contents, drop the Table Of Contents control from the Toolbox onto the report's area. If the report does
not contain a Report Header at the moment, it is created automatically so that the table of contents can be added to it.

The following image illustrates the difference in displaying information by a table of contents within a report and in a published
document.

Table of Contents Structure

The table of contents contains the following elements:
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 863 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

1. A title that displays text and formatting options specified by the Level Title property.
2. One or more document levels that provide individual formatting settings to specific nodes of a document map's tree. To
access the collection of levels, use the Levels property.
Unless levels have been added to a table of contents, a single default level is used to provide common settings to the
elements of a document map for which no specific level has yet been assigned.
Refer to the Add a Table of Contents topic for a step-by-step tutorial.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 864 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Page Info
The Page Info control is used to display auxiliary information on report pages, such as date, time, page numbers or user name.
To add a new Page Info control to a report, drag the Page Info item from the Toolbox and drop it onto the required report band.

Use the Page Information property to define the kind of information the control displays: page numbers, system date-time, or
user name.

For examples of different uses of this control, see the corresponding tutorials:
Add Page Numbers
Display the User Name in a Report
Display the Current Date and Time in a Report
Note

Because usually this information is displayed in the Page Header/Footer and Top/Bottom Margin bands, you cannot bind the
Page Info property to a field from a data source. So, in order to display dynamic information, use the Label or Rich Text controls
instead.
In addition, a format string can be applied to a control's contents. For example, you can change the control's format to Page {0}
of {1} using the Text Format String property.

When a report contains at least one group, you can specify individual page numbers for report groups by setting the Running
Band property to the name of the required group.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 865 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Tables
The documents in this section describe the Table control and illustrate its main features:
Table Overview
Bind Table Cells to Data
Manage Table Structure
Manipulate Table Elements
Hide Table Cells
Note

Refer to Create a Table Report for a step-by-step tutorial on creating a data-bound table report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 866 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Table Overview
The Table control displays information in a tabular format and allows you to create table reports.
You can add a table control by dragging the Table item from the Toolbox onto the report's area.

You can also create two tables simultaneously, for instance, one that shows column titles in the Page Header and one that shows
regular information in the Detail band. Select the Table item in the Toolbox and draw a rectangle across these bands.

The table control contains one or more rows. Each row contains one or more cells. See the Report Explorer for a table structure
example.

You can double-click the cell to invoke its in-place editor and type the desired static text.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 867 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can adjust the font size of a cell's static text to fit into the cell's boundaries. Use the Fit Text to Bounds button in the
toolbar's Text contextual tab, or right-click this cell and select Fit Text to Bounds in the context menu.

Refer to Bind Table Cells to Data to learn about providing dynamic content to table cells.
A table cell is like an Label control - it provides the same options for text formatting, alignment, appearance, interactivity, etc.
You can also make a table cell act as a container for other report controls by dropping the required control from the toolbox on
this cell.

If a table cell includes only one control, you can right-click this control and use the Fit Bounds to Container command in the
context menu. The same command is available in the toolbar's Layout tab. This command resizes the control so that it occupies
all the available cell space (excluding borders).

To transform a table into a set of Label controls, right-click a table or any of its cells and select Convert To Labels. Table cells
containing other controls are converted to Panel controls.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 868 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can assign different visual styles for even and odd table rows to improve readability.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 869 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Bind Table Cells to Data

You can create a table control with cells bound to data fields obtained from a report's data source using the Field List. Select data
fields by clicking them while holding the CTRL or SHIFT key and drop them onto the Detail band.

Drag and drop the same fields with the right mouse button to create column headers with the corresponding field names.

You can bind individual table cells to data in the same ways as Label controls. Dropping a data field onto an existing cell binds this
cell to a corresponding field.

Alternatively, click the cell's smart tag, expand the Expression drop-down list and select the required data field

Clicking the Expression option's ellipsis button invokes the Expression Editor. This allows you to construct a complex binding
expression involving two or more data fields.
See the Bind Report Controls to Data topic to learn more about creating data-aware controls.
The Process Duplicates Mode and Process Duplicates Target options enable you to merge cells with identical values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 870 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 871 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Manage Table Structure

Insert Table Rows and Columns
You can use the Insert group in the toolbar's Table Tools contextual tab or the Insert context menu items to add new rows and
columns. The added cells inherit the source cells' size and appearance settings.

Insert Row Above

Inserts a row above the current cell and shifts the existing rows up if there is enough space above the table (otherwise, shifts
the existing rows down).

Insert Row Below

Inserts a row below the current cell and shifts the existing rows down. This command increases the band height to
accommodate all the rows if there is not enough space under the table.

Insert Column to Left

Inserts a new column to the left of the current cell and shifts the leftmost columns to the left (otherwise, shifts these
columns to the right).

Insert Columns to Right

Inserts a new column to the right of the current cell and shifts the rightmost columns to the right. This command decreases
all columns' width proportionally to accommodate all the columns if there is not enough space to the right of the table.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 872 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Insert, Split and Merge Table Cells

Insert Cell (context menu item)
Divides the current cell width in half and inserts a new cell to the right. The added cell copies the source cell's appearance
settings.

Merge Cells
Merges the selected cells. This command is available if the selection has a rectangle form.

Split Cells
Invokes the Split Cells dialog where you can specify the number of columns and rows to split the selected cells. You can
apply this change to each selected cell individually, or merge the cells and then split the resulting cell.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 873 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Delete Table Elements

Use the Delete group in the toolbar's Table Tools contextual tab or the Delete context menu items to remove table elements.

Delete Cell
Deletes a table cell and stretches the previous cell to occupy the remaining space. If this cell is the first in the row, the next
cell is stretched.

Delete Row
Deletes a row and shifts the existing rows up.

Delete Column
Deletes a column and shifts the existing columns to the left.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 874 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Delete Table
Deletes the entire table.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 875 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Manipulate Table Elements

Select Table Elements
You can click a table cell to select it and access its settings. To select multiple cells, hold the SHIFT or CTRL key and click cells.

Use the arrow that appears when a mouse cursor hovers over the table edges to select an entire row or column.

Click the button at the table's left bottom corner to select the whole table. You can also use this button to move the table.
The Select group in the toolbar's Table Tools contextual tab also enables you to select the current row, the current column or the
entire table.

Resize Table Elements

You can resize a table or its cell by dragging the rectangle drawn on its edge or corner.
The following column resizing modes are supported:
Resizing a column changes the next column's width without affecting the other columns (keeps the table dimensions intact).

Resizing a column while holding the CTRL key changes the next columns' width while maintaining their proportion to the
overall table (keeps the table dimensions intact).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 876 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Resizing a column while holding the SHIFT key shifts the next columns without changing their size.

The following row resizing modes are supported:

Resizing a row changes the next row's width without affecting the other rows (keeps the table dimensions intact).

Resizing a row while holding the SHIFT key shifts the next rows without changing their size.

You can set the same size for multiple table columns or rows. Select the required rows or the whole table, right-click the selected
area and choose Distribute Rows Evenly.

If the cell's content is partially visible in the resulting row, this row automatically increases its height to fit its content and also
adjusts the other rows accordingly.
You can resize columns equally in a similar way by selecting the columns or the table itself and choosing Distribute Columns
Evenly in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 877 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Stretch Table Cells

You can stretch a cell so that it occupies several rows and columns. To stretch a cell across several columns, remove a neighboring
cell by pressing DELETE or selecting Delete | Cell in the context menu and resize the remaining cells.

Use a table cell's Row Span property to specify the number of rows the table cell spans.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 878 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Hide Table Cells

You can hide a specific table cell conditionally, for instance, based on a report parameter value.
Right-click the Parameters section in the Field List and select Add Parameter.

In the invoked Add New Parameter dialog, specify the parameter's name and description for Print Preview, and set the type to
Boolean.

Specify an expression for the cell's Visible property to define a logical condition for displaying or hiding this cell.
The image below demonstrates how to provide the visibility expression for the cell bound to the CategoryID field. For a
report to display correctly, you should specify the same expression for the cell that displays the field caption in the Page
Header.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 879 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Process Hidden Cell Mode property allows you to define how to distribute the remaining space between the table's visible
cells.

The image below illustrates how the original table looks like:

The following modes are available to process hidden cells:

StretchPreviousCell - A cell to the left of the hidden cell is stretched to occupy the available space. If the hidden cell is the
first in the row, the next cell is stretched.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 880 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

StretchNextCell - A cell to the right of the hidden cell is stretched to occupy the available space. If the hidden cell is the last
in the row, the previous cell is stretched.

ResizeCellsEqually - All visible cells are resized to divide the space that a hidden cell reserved equally.

ResizeCellsProportionally - All visible cells are resized to proportionally divide the space that a hidden cell reserved based
on their weights in the whole table width.

DecreaseTableWidth - The table width is decreased, and visible cells are shifted to a hidden cell's location without
changing their size.

LeaveEmptySpace (the default mode) - A space remains at a hidden cell's location, and other cells are not affected.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 881 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Bar Codes

The following topics provide basic information about using bar codes:
Add Bar Codes to Reports
Bar Code Recognition Specifics
See the following topics to learn about the supported one-dimensional bar codes:
Codabar
Code 11 (USD-8)
Code 128
Code 39 (USD-3)
Code 39 Extended
Code 93
Code 93 Extended
EAN 8
EAN 13
GS1-128 - EAN-128 (UCC)
GS1 - DataBar
Industrial 2 of 5
Intelligent Mail Package
Interleaved 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
MSI - Plessey
PostNet
UPC Shipping Container Symbol (ITF-14)
UPC Supplemental 2
UPC Supplemental 5
UPC-A
UPC-E0
UPC-E1
See the following topics to learn about the supported two-dimensional bar codes:
ECC200 - Data Matrix
GS1- Data Matrix
Intelligent Mail
PDF417
QR Code

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 882 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Bar Codes to a Report

Overview
To insert a bar code into a report, drag the Bar Code item from the Toolbox onto the report's area.

After creating the bar code, select the bar code type (symbology) in the Bar Code Tools toolbar tab's Symbology gallery.

After specifying the symbology, you can customize the type-specific options of the bar code, which are listed in the Property Grid
under the Symbology property.

Main Options
You can use the Binary Data property to supply the data that a bar code should encode.
To specify the bar width (a bar code's resolution), use the following options:
Automatically calculate the bar width according to a bar code's dimensions by enabling the Auto Module option;
Provide a fixed bar width value using the Module property.
The following are some additional bar code options:
Use the bar code's Text property to provide accompanying text. The Show Text property allows you to show or hide this
text.
Use the Orientation property to rotate a bar code.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 883 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use the Padding property to specify the indent between bars and the bar code's inner boundaries.

Bind to Data
You can bind the bar code's Text property to a data field obtained from a report's data source. Click the control's smart tag,
expand the Expression drop-down list and select the data field.

You can also click the Expression option's ellipsis button to invoke the Expression Editor. This editor allows you to construct a
complex binding expression with two or more data fields.

Common Errors
The following section explains how to work around the most frequently encountered errors related to the incorrect use of bar
codes.
The following error message is shown in place of the bar code if the control's dimensions are too small to fit the bar code
with its specified resolution.

To get rid of this error, enable the Auto Module property and/or increase the bar code's dimensions.
The following error message appears when the data supplied to a bar code contains characters that are not supported by
this bar code type.

To avoid this error, supply data that applies to a particular bar code specification.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 884 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Bar Code Recognition Specifics

This document describes the main specifics of bar code recognition and how to resolve the most frequently encountered issues
when working with bar codes.

Choose an Appropriate Bar Code Type

Selecting an appropriate bar code type (symbology) depends on your specific business requirements and the applied industrial
standards.
In general, consider using Bar Code 2 of 5 Interleaved for encoding digits and Bar Code 39 for encoding the full range of ASCII
characters.

Insert the Function Code One Character (FNC1) or the Application

Identifier into a Bar Code
Some encodings enable you to insert a special FNC1 character for separating application identifiers from the rest of the bar code.
According to the GS1 specification, the FNC1 character is always inserted at the first position of the encoded data. Other
identifiers can be inserted manually using the default "#" character.
Although you can use any ASCII character as the FNC1 placeholder, it will not be a part of the encoded data as it does not have
any direct ASCII representation.
Note

For the Code 128 symbology, only FNC1 characters are currently supported. At present, there is no way to define FNC2 - 4
characters for this bar code.
For the list of the available application identifiers, refer to the official documentation at www.gs1.org.

Specify the Bar Code Resolution on Export to Third-Party Formats

At present, only export to PDF preserves the original bar code in its vector form. Export to other formats will keep only the
rasterized version of a bar code (with the default DPI set to 96).
For XLSX and XLS export, the output resolution can be set up manually using the Rasterization Resolution property.

Common Issues
This document section provides solutions to the most common issues that you may encounter when creating bar codes.
The bar code is too "dense"
The more information you wish to encode, the more bars should be drawn and the larger the bar code should become.
The bar code's Module property specifies the width of the narrowest bar in a bar code. Although you can set this property
to a very small value, the actual value is determined by the maximum resolution of your bar code printer device.
Alternatively, consider using the Auto Module option to automatically calculate the optimal bar size based on the current
bar code dimensions.
Note

When bar codes are "dense" and you are manually specifying the Module value, make sure that multiplying this value by
the bar code printer resolution results in an integer number. Otherwise, rounding errors may occur on calculating the
resulting bar width.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 885 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

For example, when the Module is set to 0.015 inches and the printer resolution is 300 DPI, their product equals 4.5, which
may be rounded to 4 or 5 pixels for different bars and result in bar code recognition errors. In this case, the Module
property should be set to 0.01333 (to make the bar width equal to 4 pixels) or to 0.01667 (to make the bar width equal to 5
pixels).
The bar code is correctly displayed on the preview but it is not scanned
Make sure that your scanner has been correctly set up to be able to recognize a specific kind of a bar code. If you are not
certain about how to operate the scanner properly, please refer to its product manual.
Avoid scanning bar codes from the monitor screen (e.g., using an application installed on your smartphone), because the
screen DPI may not be sufficient to effectively recognize each particular bar.
The bar code is correctly displayed on the preview but it is scanned incorrectly
The cause for this problem may be an encoding issue specific to the "binary" input mode.
By default, the UTF-16 encoding is used. However, your scanner device may use a different encoding model or even a
codepage (i.e., a specific table that maps abstract values to real human-understandable characters). For additional
information on this subject, please refer to the specification of your scanner device.
The "There are invalid characters in the text" error occurs
Different bar code symbologies define different ranges of allowed characters under different character sets. To avoid this
error, please check the bar code specification.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 886 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Codabar
The Codabar is a discrete, self-checking symbology that may encode 16 different characters, plus an additional 4 start/stop
characters. This symbology is used by U.S. blood banks, photo labs, and on FedEx air bills.

The following properties are specific to the Codabar type and listed in the Property Grid under the Symbology property:
StartSymbol
Gets or sets the first (start) symbol used to code the bar code's structure.
StopSymbol
Gets or sets the last (stop) symbol used to code the bar code's structure.
Wide Narrow Ratio
Specifies the density of a bar code's bars.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 887 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Code 11 (USD-8)
Code 11, also known as USD-8, was developed as a high-density numerical-only symbology. It is used primarily in labeling
telecommunications equipment.
The symbology is discrete and is able to encode the numbers 0 through to 9, the dash symbol (-), and start/stop characters.

The are no properties specific to the Code 11 bar code type.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 888 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Code 128
Code 128 is a very effective, high-density symbology which permits the encoding of alphanumeric data. The symbology includes
a checksum digit for verification, and the bar code can also be verified character-by-character, allowing the parity of each data
byte to be verified.
This symbology has been widely implemented in many applications where a relatively large amount of data must be encoded in a
relatively small amount of space. Its specific structure also allows numerical data to be effectively encoded at double-density.

The following property is specific to the Code 128 type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology property:
Character Set
Specifies the set of symbols which can be used when setting the bar code's text.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 889 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Code 39 (USD-3)
Code 39, the first alpha-numeric symbology to be developed, is still widely used, particularly in non-retail environments. It is the
standard bar code used by the United States Department of Defense, and is also used by the Health Industry Bar Code Council
(HIBCC). Code 39 is also known as "3 of 9 Code" and "USD-3".

The following properties are specific to the Code 39 type and listed in the Property Grid under the Symbology property:
Calculate a Checksum
Specifies whether to calculate a checksum for the bar code.
Wide Narrow Ratio
Specifies the density of a bar code's bars.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 890 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Code 39 Extended
Using Code 39's "Full ASCII Mode", it is possible to encode all 128 ASCII characters. This is accomplished by using the ($), (/), (%),
and (+) symbols as "shift" characters. These characters combined with the single character that follows indicate which Full ASCII
character is to be used.

The following properties are specific to the Code 39 Extended type and listed in the Property Grid under the Symbology
property:
Calculate a Checksum
Specifies whether to calculate a checksum for the bar code.
Wide Narrow Ratio
Specifies the density of a bar code's bars.
The Code 39 Extended bar code, as opposed to Code 39, automatically replaces all necessary characters with special symbols,
when required. This means that you do not need to do this manually, otherwise, the result will be incorrect.
For example, if you want to insert a "TAB" character into a bar code's text, use "\t", which will be replaced by "$I" for coding, and
then into "TAB" after scanning:

PR O PER T Y V ALU E

Bar code's text: "12345\t678"

Coded text: "12345$I678"

Scanned text: "12345[TAB]678"

The checksum is not considered to be part of a bar code's text and checksum characters are never replaced. When the bar code's
Show Text and Calculate a Checksum properties are enabled, the bar code will not display a checksum character. This is
required to avoid mistakenly treating a checksum as part of bar code text.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 891 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Code 93
Code 93 was designed to supplement and improve upon Code 39.
Code 93 is similar in that, like Code 39, can represent the full ASCII character set by using combinations of 2 characters. It differs
in that Code 93 is a continuous symbology and produces denser code. It also encodes 47 characters (compared to Code 39's 43
characters).

The following property is specific to the Code 93 type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology property:
Calculate a Checksum
Specifies whether to calculate a checksum for the bar code.
Note

A checksum of a Code 93 bar code can contain characters that are not supported by this bar code symbology. For this
reason, the checksum is not included in the Code 93 bar code's displayed text.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 892 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Code 93 Extended
Using Code 93's "Full ASCII Mode", it is possible to encode all 128 ASCII characters. This is accomplished by using the ($), (/), (%),
and (+) symbols as "shift" characters. These characters combined with the single character that follows indicate which Full ASCII
character is to be used.

The following property is specific to the Code 93 Extended type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology
property:
Calculate a Checksum
Specifies whether to calculate a checksum for the bar code.
Note

A checksum of a Code 93 Extended bar code can contain characters that are not supported by this bar code symbology.
For this reason, the checksum is not included in the Code 93 Extended bar code's displayed text.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 893 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

EAN 13
EAN-13, based upon the UPC-A standard, was implemented by the International Article Numbering Association (EAN) in Europe.
At present, the GS1 organization is responsible for the maintenance of bar code standards.
The EAN-13 bar code contains 13 digits, no letters or other characters. The first two or three digits represent the country. The
leading zero actually signifies the USA, and UPC-A coding. The last digit is the "check digit", the checksum. The check digit is
calculated using the first twelve figures when the bar code is constructed. So, for the correct EAN-13 code, you should specify
only the first 12 digits.
The recommended dimensions are shown in the following image. The standard allows magnification up to 200%, and reduction
of up to 80% of the recommended size.

There should be two quiet zones before and after the bar code. They provide reliable operation of the bar code scanner. The quiet
zone recommended length is 3.63 mm for the left zone and 2.31 mm for the right zone.
The are no properties specific to the EAN 13 bar code type.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 894 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

EAN 8
EAN-8 is the EAN equivalent of UPC-E in the sense that it provides a "short" bar code for small packages.

The are no properties specific to the EAN 8 bar code type.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 895 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

ECC200 - Data Matrix

Data Matrix code (ISO/IEC 16022 international standard) is a two-dimensional matrix bar code consisting of black and white
"cells" arranged in a rectangular pattern. The information to be encoded can be text or raw data.
Every Data Matrix is composed of two solid adjacent borders in an "L" shape (called the "finder pattern"), and two other borders
consisting of alternating dark and light cells or modules (called the "timing pattern"). Within these borders are rows and columns
of cells that encode information. The finder pattern is used to locate and orient the symbol, while the timing pattern provides a
count of the number of rows and columns in the symbol.

The following properties are specific to the ECC200 - Data Matrix type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology
property:
Compaction Mode
Specifies whether textual information or a byte array should be used as the bar code's data, as well as its encoding.
Matrix Size
Specifies the bar code matrix size.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 896 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

GS1 - DataBar
The GS1 DataBar bar code is based on a family of symbols often used in the GS1 DataBar Coupon (coupon codes commonly
used in retail).
These bar codes can encode up to 14 digits, which makes them suitable for GTIN 8, 12, 13 and 14.
GS1 DataBar Expanded and GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked can encode up to 74 numeric or 41 alphanumeric characters,
and provide the capability to utilize all GS1 Application Identifiers (e.g., expiration date, batch and serial number). These bar
codes are often used in manufacturer coupons.

The following properties are specific to the GS1 DataBar type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology property:
FNC1 Functional Character
Specifies the symbol (or set of symbols) in the bar code text that will be replaced with the FNC1 functional character when
the bar code's bars are drawn.
Segments In Row
Specifies the number of data segments per row in the Expanded Stacked type of a GS1 DataBar bar code.
Type
Specifies the type of a GS1 DataBar bar code.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 897 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

GS1- Data Matrix

The GS1 Data Matrix uses a special start combination to differentiate the GS1 DataMatrix symbol from other Data Matrix ECC
200 symbols. This is achieved by using the Function 1 Symbol Character (FNC1) in the first position of the encoded data. It
enables scanners to process the information according to the GS1 System Rules.

The following properties are specific to the GS1 DataMatrix type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology
property:
FNC1 Functional Character
Specifies the symbol (or set of symbols) in the bar code text that will be replaced with the FNC1 functional character when
the bar code's bars are drawn.
Human-Readable Text
Specifies whether or not parentheses should be included in the bar code's text to improve the readability of the bar code's
text.
Matrix Size
Specifies the bar code matrix size.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 898 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

GS1-128 - EAN-128 (UCC)

GS1-128 (EAN-128) was developed to provide a worldwide format and standard for exchanging common data between
companies.
While other bar codes simply encode data with no respect for what the data represents, GS1-128 encodes data and encodes what
that data represents.

The following properties are specific to the GS1-128 (EAN-128) type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology
property:
Character Set
Specifies the set of symbols which can be used when setting the bar code's text.
FNC1 Functional Character
Specifies the symbol (or set of symbols) in the bar code text that will be replaced with the FNC1 functional character when
the bar code's bars are drawn.
Human-Readable Text
Specifies whether or not parentheses should be included in the bar code's text to improve the readability of the bar code's
text.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 899 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Industrial 2 of 5
Standard 2 of 5 is a low-density numerical bar code that is used in the photofinishing and warehouse sorting industries, as well
as to sequentially number airline tickets.

The following properties are specific to the Industrial 2 of 5 type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology
property:
Calculate a Checksum
Specifies whether to calculate a checksum for the bar code.
Wide Narrow Ratio
Specifies the density of a bar code's bars.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 900 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Intelligent Mail
The Intelligent Mail (IM) code is a 65-bar code for use on mail in the United States. This bar code is intended to provide greater
information and functionality than its predecessors POSTNET and PLANET.
The Intelligent Mail bar code has also been referred to as One Code Solution and 4-State Customer bar code abbreviated
4CB, 4-CB or USPS4CB.

The are no properties specific to the Intelligent Mail bar code type.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 901 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Intelligent Mail Package

The Intelligent Mail Package Barcode (IMPB) was developed for the use on mail in the United States. Bar codes of this
symbology are used only for packages as opposed to Intelligent Mail bar codes, which are used for postcards, letters, and flats.
This bar code is capable of encoding package tracking information required for more efficient sorting and delivering of packages
with the capability of piece-level tracking.

The following property is specific to the Intelligent Mail Package type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology
property:
FNC1 Functional Character
Specifies the symbol (or set of symbols) in the bar code text that will be replaced with the FNC1 functional character when
the bar code's bars are drawn.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 902 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Interleaved 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5 is a higher-density numerical bar code based upon the Standard 2 of 5 symbology. It is used primarily in the
distribution and warehouse industry.

The following properties are specific to the Interleaved 2 of 5 type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology
property:
Calculate a Checksum
Specifies whether to calculate a checksum for the bar code.
Wide Narrow Ratio
Specifies the density of a bar code's bars.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 903 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5 is a linear one-dimensional bar code. Matrix 2 of 5 is a self-checking numerical-only bar code.
Unlike the Interleaved 2 of 5, all of the information is encoded in the bars; the spaces are of a fixed width and used only to
separate the bars. Matrix 2 of 5 is used primarily for warehouse sorting, photo finishing, and airline ticket marking.

The following properties are specific to the Matrix 2 of 5 type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology property:
Calculate a Checksum
Specifies whether to calculate a checksum for the bar code.
Wide Narrow Ratio
Specifies the density of a bar code's bars.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 904 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

MSI - Plessey
MSI was developed by the MSI Data Corporation, based on the original Plessey Code. MSI, also known as Modified Plessey, is
used primarily to mark retail shelves for inventory control.
MSI is a continuous, non-self-checking symbology. While an MSI bar code can be of any length, a given application usually
implements a fixed-length code.

The following property is specific to the MSI type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology property:
MSI Checksum
Specifies the bar code's checksum type, which defines the appearance of checksum bars added to the bar code.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 905 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

PDF417
PDF417 (Portable Data File) is a stacked linear two-dimensional bar code used in a variety of applications; primarily transport,
postal, identification card and inventory management. It has spawned an Open Source decoder project together with an Open
Source encoder.
The PDF417 bar code is also called a symbol bar code and usually consists of 3 to 90 rows, each of which is like a small linear bar
code.

The following properties are specific to the PDF417 type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology property:
Columns
Specifies the number of bar code columns, which allows you to control the logic width of the bar code.
Compaction Mode
Specifies whether textual information or a byte array should be used as the bar code's data.
Error Correction Level
Specifies the amount of redundancy built into the bar code's coding, to compensate for calculation errors.
Rows
Specifies the number of bar code rows, which allows you to control the logic height of the bar code.
Truncate Symbol
Specifies whether the special end-symbol should be appended to the bar code.
Y to X Ratio
Specifies the height-to-width ratio of a logical unit's graphic representation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 906 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

PostNet
PostNet was developed by the United States Postal Service (USPS) to allow faster mail sorting and routing. PostNet codes are
the familiar and unusual looking bar codes often printed on envelopes and business return mail.
Unlike most other bar codes, in which data is encoded in the width of the bars and spaces, PostNet actually encodes data in the
height of the bars. That's why all the bars are of the same width, but not the same height.

The are no properties specific to the PostNet bar code type.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 907 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

QR Code
A QR Code (QR is the abbreviation for Quick Response) is a two-dimensional code, readable by QR scanners, mobile phones
with a camera, and smartphones. QR Code can encode textual, numeric and binary data.

The following properties are specific to the QR type and available in the Property Grid under the Symbology property:
Auto Module Gets or sets whether the Module property value should be calculated automatically based upon the
barcode's size.
Compaction Mode
Specifies whether numeric, alpha-numeric or byte information should be used as the bar code's data.
Error Correction Level
Specifies the amount of redundancy built into the bar code's coding, to compensate for calculation errors.
Version
Specifies the bar code's size.
Logo
Specifies the image that overlays the QR code.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 908 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

UPC Shipping Container Symbol (ITF-14)

The UPC Shipping Container Symbol (ITF-14) bar code is used to mark packaging materials that contain products labeled with
a UPC or EAN product identification number.
This bar code provides a GS1 implementation of an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code for encoding a Global Trade Item Number (an
identifier for trade items developed by GS1). This bar code always uses a total of 14 digits.
The thick black border around the symbol (the Bearer Bar) is intended to improve bar code reading reliability.

The following properties are specific to the ITF-14 type and listed in the Property Grid under the Symbology property:
Calculate a Checksum
Specifies whether to calculate a checksum for the bar code.
Wide Narrow Ratio
Specifies the density of a bar code's bars.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 909 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

UPC Supplemental 2
2-digit supplemental bar codes should only be used with magazines, newspapers and other periodicals.
The 2-digit supplement represents the issue number of the magazine. This is useful so that the product code itself (contained in
the main bar code) is constant for the magazine, so that each issue of the magazine doesn't have to have its own unique bar code.
Nevertheless, the 2-digit supplement can be used to track which issue of the magazine is being sold, for example, for sales
analysis or restocking purposes.

The are no properties specific to the UPC Supplemental 2 bar code type.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 910 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

UPC Supplemental 5
5-digit supplemental bar codes are used on books to indicate the suggested retail price.

The are no properties specific to the UPC Supplemental 5 bar code type.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 911 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

UPC-A
The UPC-A bar code is by far the most common and well-known symbology, especially in the United States. A UPC-A bar code is
the bar code you will find on virtually every consumer item on the shelves of your local supermarket, as well as books, magazines,
and newspapers. It is called simply, a "UPC bar code" or "UPC Symbol."

The UPC-A bar code contains 12 digits, no letters or other characters. The first digit is the prefix signifying the product type. The
last digit is the "check digit". The check digit is calculated using first eleven figures when the bar code is constructed. So, for the
correct UPC-A you should specify only the first 11 digits.
The recommended dimensions are shown in the picture. The standard allows magnification up to 200%, and reduction of up to
80% of the recommended size.
There should be two quiet zones before and after the bar code. They provide reliable operation of the bar code scanner. The quiet
zone recommended length is 2.97 mm for the bar code of standard width and height.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 912 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

UPC-E0
UPC-E is a variation of UPC-A which allows for a more compact bar code by eliminating "extra" zeros. Since the resulting UPC-E
bar code is about half the size as an UPC-A bar code, UPC-E is generally used on products with very small packaging, where a full
UPC-A bar code could not reasonably fit.
The UPC-E0 is a kind of UPC-E code with the number system set to 0. In the human readable string of the bar code the first digit
signifies the number system (always 0 for this code type), and the last digit is the check digit of the original UPC-A code.
In the example below, the original UPC-A code is "04210000526". We should remove the leading zero when assigning the string
to the control's property, since the code format itself implies its presence. The checksum digit (4) is calculated automatically, and
the symbology algorithm transforms the rest of the numeral string. The result is 425261, and it is encoded along with the number
system prefix and the check digit into the scanner-readable form.

Not every UPC-A code can be transformed into the UPC-E0 (it must meet special requirements).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 913 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

UPC-E1
UPC-E is a kind of UPC-A, which allows a more compact bar code by eliminating "extra" zeros. Since the resulting UPC-E bar
code is about half the size of the UPC-A bar code, UPC-E is generally used on products with a very small packaging where a full
UPC-A bar code does not fit.
The UPC-E1 is a variation of UPC-E code with the number system set to "1". In the human readable string of the bar code the first
digit signifies the number system (always 1 for this code type), the last digit is the check digit of the original UPC-A code.
In the example below, the original UPC-A code is "14210000526". We should remove the leading "1" when assigning the string
to the control's property, since the code format itself implies its presence. The checksum digit (1) is calculated automatically, and
the symbology algorithm transforms the rest of the numeral string. The result is 425261, and it is encoded along with the number
system prefix and the check digit into the scanner-readable form.

Not every UPC-A code can be transformed into the UPC-E1 (it must meet special requirements).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 914 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Charts and Pivot Grids

Refer to the following topics for instructions on how to add charts and pivot grids to reports:

Chart
Use the Chart control to add a chart to a report.
Use Charts in Reports
Add a Chart (Set Up Series Manually)
Add a Chart (Use a Series Template)
Use Charts to Visualize Data in Report Groups

Pivot Grid
Use the Pivot Grid control to add a pivot grid to a report.
Create a Cross-Tab Report

Use Chart and Pivot Grid Linked Together

Link a Chart and a Pivot Grid

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 915 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Charts in Reports

Overview
You can use the Chart control to add a chart to a report. This control provides 2D or 3D views to visualize data series (for
instance, Bar, Point, Line, Pie and Doughnut, Area, etc.).

2 D S ER IES V IE W 3 D S ER IES V IE W

The Chart control can display multiple series.

B AR AND PO INT S ER IES NES TED D O U G HNU T S ER IES

The Chart control contains various visual elements (diagrams, series, legends, primary and secondary axes, titles and labels, etc.).
You can select these elements in the Report Designer and customize their settings in the Property Grid.
The Report Designer provides the Chart Designer that allows you to create and customize charts.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 916 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Bind to Data
To provide data to a chart, use the Data Source property.
You can assign a Pivot Grid to a chart's data source. This allows the Pivot Grid to supply data to the chart. Refer to the Link a
Chart and a Pivot Grid topic for details.
When the chart data source is not assigned, the chart obtains data from the report's data source
A chart can display report data in the following ways:
Place a chart on the report header/footer band to display a summary for the detail report data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 917 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Place a chart on a group header/footer to visualize data in each report group. Refer to the Use Charts to Visualize Data in
Report Groups step-by-step tutorial for more information.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 918 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The chart in the Detail band is printed as many times as there are records in the report's data source.
Specify the following settings to provide data to a chart's series.
The Argument Data Member property specifies the data field that provides point arguments.
The Value Data Members property specifies the data fields that supply point values.
You can specify these settings in the following ways:
Bind each series individually
Add a new series to the chart and specify the argument and value data members. Refer to the Add a Chart (Set Up Series
Manually) step-by-step tutorial for details.
Create series dynamically
Assign the data field that contains series names to the chart's Series Data Member property and specify the argument and
value data members using the series template. Refer to the Add a Chart (Use a Series Template) step-by-step tutorial for
more information.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 919 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add a Chart (Set Up Series Manually)

This document describes how to add a chart to a report, provide data for the chart series, and set up a chart's elements. In this
example, series data has a single data source. You can also use different data sources for different series.

Add a Chart to a Report

1. Drop the Chart control from the Toolbox onto the Detail band.

After you drop the chart, the Chart Designer is automatically invoked if its Display the designer every time a new chart
is added option is enabled. Close the designer at this step.
1. Click the chart's smart tag and make sure that the Data Source and Data Member properties were specified correctly.

Note

The report's Data Source property should be set to None because you placed the Chart in the Detail band. When a report has its
Data Source property specified, the Chart is repeated in the preview as many times as there are records in the report's data
source.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 920 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Series to the Chart

1. Switch to the Chart Tools toolbar tab and click Run Designer.

2. Do the following in the invoked Chart Designer to add a new series to the chart control:
Locate the Series element in the chart elements tree and click the plus button.
Select the type (for example, Bar) in the invoked series type list.

3. Perform the following steps to populate the created series with points:
Select the series in the tree and switch to the Data tab to the right of the designer's window.
Select an existing data source in the corresponding drop-down list.
Drag-and-drop the data fields onto the Argument and Value cells to define series points' coordinates.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 921 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Properties tab displays the Argument Data Member and Value Data Members settings that are automatically
assigned to the corresponding fields.
4. Click the Data Filters property's ellipsis button to filter series data. You can create and adjust the filter criteria in the
invoked dialog.

5. Create another series with the same settings. For instance, select the Point view type for this series.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 922 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

6. You can do the following to see how the chart looks when it is populated with data:
save changes made in the Chart Designer;
close the Chart Designer;
switch to Print Preview.
Return to the Report Designer and invoke the Chart Designer. The chart axes are now populated with actual data, and
you can customize the chart.

Customize the Chart

Apply the following adjustments to improve the chart's appearance:
Remove the chart's legend (the chart series are bound to the same data).
Select Legend in the chart elements tree.
Disable the Visibility check box in the Options tab.
Select the Label node under this series and disable the Visibility check box to hide Series1's point labels.
Customize the Series2 markers' appearance. Set the View.Point Marker Options.Kind property to InvertedTriangle and
View.Point Marker Options.Size to 12 to replace the default circle with an upside down triangle.
Customize the chart's appearance settings. For instance, select Nature Colors in the Palette's drop-down list.

View the Result

Switch to Print Preview to see the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 923 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add a Chart (Use a Series Template)

This document describes how to create a report with a Chart control bound to data and generate all series automatically based on
a common template.

Add a Chart to a Report

1. Drop the Chart control from the Toolbox onto the Detail band.

After you drop the chart, the Chart Designer is automatically invoked if its Display the designer every time a new chart
is added option is enabled. Close the designer at this step.
2. Click the chart's smart tag and make sure that the Data Source and Data Member properties were specified correctly.

Note

The report's Data Source property should be set to None because the Chart is in the Detail band. When a report has its Data
Source property specified, the Chart is repeated in preview as many times as there are records in the report data source.

Adjust the Series Template

1. Switch to the Chart Tools toolbar tab and click Run Designer.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 924 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2. In the invoked Chart Designer, go to the Data tab to the right of the designer's window. Select a data source in the
corresponding drop-down list and drag-and-drop the data fields onto the corresponding cells.
The Series cell specifies a data field that should provide data for series names. A new series should be created for each
record in this data field. Use the Argument and Value cells to define where to get data for point arguments and values.

3. Switch to the Properties tab and expand the Series Template option. The Argument Data Member and Value Data
Members properties are automatically assigned to the corresponding data fields. Make sure that the Argument Scale
Type and Value Scale Type properties are set to appropriate values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 925 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customize the Chart

Perform the following customization to improve the chart's appearance:
Use the chart's Series Name Template property to add text to the beginning or end of each series name. For example, set
the Begin Text inner property to "GSP in ".
Set the Labels Visibility property to False to avoid overlapping series labels.
Specify the color settings used to draw the chart's series. For instance, select Nature Colors in the Palette's drop-down list.

View the Result

Switch to Print Preview to see the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 926 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Charts to Visualize Data in Report Groups

This tutorial describes how to use charts to visualize data in each report group.

Group Report Data

Do the following to group data in a report:
Bind the report to the required database table (for instance, Products).
Drop the ProductName field from the Field List onto the report's Detail band.

In the Group and Sort panel, click Add a Group and select group criteria (for example, the CategoryID field).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 927 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Enable the Show Footer check box to add a Group Footer to the report.

Drop the Category ID field onto the Group Header to display group titles in the report.

Create a Chart
Do the following to add a chart to the report:
Drop the Chart control from the Toolbox onto the Group Footer.

The Chart Designer is invoked. If it is not, open the Toolbar's Chart Tools contextual tab and click the Run Designer button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 928 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

In the Chart Designer, click the plus button to add a new series and select a series view (for example, Bar).

Select the created series and switch to the Data tab.

On this tab, drop the Product Name field onto the Argument area and the Unit Price field onto the Value area.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 929 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Switch to the Properties tab and click the Data Filters property's ellipsis button.

In the Data Filter Collection Editor, click Add to create a new filter.
Set the filter's Column Name and Value Binding properties to the CategoryID field that is used as group criteria in the
report.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 930 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Only the Value Binding setting is taken into account when the Value and Value Binding properties are specified for a
data filter.
Switch to Print Preview to see the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 931 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Link a Chart and a Pivot Grid

This tutorial demonstrates how to use the Chart control to visualize the Pivot Grid control's data.

Create a Pivot Grid

1. Drop the Pivot Grid control from the Toolbox onto the Detail band.

1. Switch the Pivot Grid Tools toolbar tab and click Run Designer. In the invoked Designer, click Retrieve Fields to obtain
fields from the control's data source.

2. Switch to the Layout page and drag-and-drop the data fields onto the Row Fields, Column Fields and Data Items areas
to define the Pivot Grid's layout.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 932 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Click Apply and close the Designer.

Link a Chart with the Pivot grid

1. Drop the Chart control from the Toolbox onto the Detail band below the Pivot Grid.

2. The Chart Designer is invoked automatically after you drop the Chart onto the Detail band. Switch to the Data tab at the
right of the Designer's window and choose the Pivot Grid in the drop-down list.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 933 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This adjusts all the Chart's binding and layout settings automatically. Make sure that Series, Argument and Value cells are
filled with the corresponding fields. Note that field values are generated based on the Pivot Grid's columns, rows, and data
items.

3. Select the Label node under auto-generated series in the chart elements tree and switch to the Options tab. Disable the
Visibility check box to avoid overlapping series labels.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 934 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

4. (optionally) You can customize various settings that determine a linked Chart and Pivot Grid pair's common behavior. To do
this, use the Chart's Pivot Grid Data Source Options property. This property is synchronized with the Pivot Grid's
Options Chart Data Source property.

View the Result

Switch to Print Preview to see the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 935 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 936 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Gauges
The topics in this section describe how to add graphical content to your reports:
Add Gauges to a Report

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 937 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Gauges to a Report

Gauge Overview
The Gauge control provides you with the capability to embed graphical gauges into your report.
To add this control to the report, drag the Gauge item from the Toolbox and drop it onto the report.

Use the Toolbar's Gauge Tools contextual tab to select a gauge's appearance.

View
Specifies the type of the displayed gauge. The following view types are available:
Linear

Supported view styles: Horizontal and Vertical.

Circular

Supported view styles: Full, Half, Quarter Left, Quarter Right and Three Fourth.
Theme
Specifies the gauge's color theme. The Flat Light and Flat Dark view themes are supported.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 938 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The following properties allow you to customize the gauge scale and specify its displayed values.
Actual Value - specifies the value displayed by a gauge.
Target Value - specifies the position of the target value marker.
Maximum - specifies the gauge's maximum value.
Minimum - specifies the gauge's minimum value.

Bind a Gauge to Data

To bind the gauge's displayed value to data, click the control's smart tag and in the invoked actions list, expand the Expression
drop-down list for the Actual Value property and select the required data field.

In the same way, you can bind the Target Value, Minimum and Maximum properties to data. To do this, expand the
Expression drop-down list for the corresponding property and select the required data field.
Clicking the Expression option's ellipsis button invokes the Expression Editor, in which you can construct a complex binding
expression involving two or more data fields.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 939 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Draw Lines and Shapes

The topics in this section describe how to draw various lines and shapes in a report:
Draw Lines
Draw Shapes
Draw Cross-Band Lines and Boxes

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 940 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Draw Lines
The Line control draws a line in a specified direction, style, width, and color. You can use it to decorate and visually separate a
report's sections.
To add a line to a report, drag the Line item from the Toolbox onto the report's area.

The actions list of the line's smart tag provides the main control properties:

Line Direction
Enables you to draw a line horizontally, vertically, and across the rectangle the line occupies from one corner to another
(Horizontal, Vertical, Slant and Back Slant types).

Line Style
You can select the solid (by default), dashed, dotted, or mixed line style.

Line Width
Specifies the line width in pixels as a floating point value.
Anchor Vertically
Specifies the vertical anchoring style, so that after page rendering a control stays attached to the top control, bottom control,
or both.
Note

The Line control cannot span several bands. See Draw Cross-Band Lines and Boxes to learn about drawing lines through several
bands.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 941 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Draw Shapes
The Shape control allows you to draw various shapes in a report.
To add a shape to a report, drag the Shape item from the Toolbox onto the report's area.

Click a control's smart tag and use the Shape property to select the shape type. You can also choose the shape type in the
Toolbar's Shape Tools contextual tab.

The smart tag provides the following main properties common to all shape types:
Fill Color - specifies the the shape's color.
Stretch - specifies whether to stretch a shape to fill its client rectangle area when it is rotated.
Line Width - specifies the width of the line used to draw the shape.
Angle - specifies the shape's rotation angle.
Each shape type provides its own specific set of properties which are detailed below.

Arrow
The image below illustrates the Arrow type's shape.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 942 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This shape type has the following additional properties:

Fillet - specifies how the shape's corners are rounded (as a percentage). This value should be between 0 and 100.
Arrow Height - specifies the arrow's relative height (as a percentage). This value should be between 0 and 100.
Arrow Width - specifies the arrow's relative width (as a percentage). This value should be between 0 and 100.

Brace
The image below illustrates the Brace type's shape.

Use the following properties to set up a brace:

Tip's Length - specify the length of a brace's tip.
Fillet - specifies how the shape's corners are rounded (as a percentage). This value should be between 0 and 100.
Tail's Length specify the length of a brace's tail.

Bracket
The following image demonstrates the Bracket type's shape:

The Tip's Length property is specific to this shape type and defines the length of a bracket's tip.

Cross
The image below shows the Cross type's shape.

This shape type has the following properties:

Fillet - specifies how the shape's corners are rounded (as a percentage). This value should be between 0 and 100.
Horizontal Line Height - specifies the relative width of a cross's horizontal line (as a percentage). This value should be
between 0 and 100.
Vertical Line Width - specifies the relative width of a cross's vertical line (as a percentage). This value should be between 0
and 100.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 943 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Ellipse
The image below shows Ellipse type shapes.

Line
The following image demonstrates Line type shapes:

Polygon
The image below illustrates the Polygon type's shape:

This shape type has the following properties:

Fillet - specifies how the polygon's corners are rounded (as a percentage). This value should be between 0 and 100.
Number Of Sides - specifies the number of polygon sides.

Rectangle
The image below illustrates Rectangle type shapes.

This shape type's Fillet property specifies the rectangle's relative roundness (as a percentage, between 0 and 100).

Star
The following image shows a Star type shape:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 944 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This shape type has the following properties:

Fillet - specifies the relative roundness of the star's points (as a percentage). This value should be between 0 and 100.
Count of Star Points - specifies the number of points that make up the star.
Concavity - specifies the concavity level (as a percentage) between two neighboring start points. This value should be
between 0 and 100.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 945 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Draw Cross-Band Lines and Boxes

Cross-band controls allow you to draw lines and rectangles through several report bands.
The Report Designer provides the following two cross-band controls:
The Cross-Band Line control draws vertical lines that can span multiple report bands. You can use this control to
emphasize a report area that consists of different bands.
The Cross-Band Box control draws rectangles through several report bands. You can use this control to encompass a
report section that includes multiple band areas.
To add a cross-band control to a report, select the corresponding item in the Toolbox and draw a rectangle across required bands.

The following properties define a cross-band control's location in a report:

Start Band - determines the band from which the control starts to draw;
Start Point - specifies the exact coordinates (measured in report units) within the start band where the control starts to
draw;
End Band - determines the band where the cross-band control stops to draw;
End Point - specifies the exact coordinates (measured in report units) within the end band where the control finishes to
draw.

The following image illustrates how the Report Explorer reflects cross-band controls:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 946 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 947 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Shape Report Data

The topics in this section describe the data shaping features reports support:
Filter Data
Group and Sort Data
Shape Data (Expression Bindings)
Use Calculated Fields
Use Report Parameters

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 948 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter Data
The topics in this section describe different approaches to filtering data in your reports:
Filter Data at the Report Level
Use the report's settings demonstrated in this tutorial if you want to load the entire dataset and filter it on the client.
Filter Data at the Data Source Level
Filter records at data source level using your data connection query if you are binding to a large data source and want to
speed up the retrieval process.
Limit the Number of Records to Display
Options described in this topic allow you to emulate the Top N feature in a sorted report or increase the Print Preview
performance by rendering only a subset of a report’s data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 949 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter Data at the Report Level

This tutorial illustrates how to filter data at the report level, as opposed to the data source level. This approach is useful when
dealing with relatively small data sources, when data load times are acceptable.
1. Create a new report or open an existing one.
2. Bind you report to a required data source. See the Bind to Data section to learn more about providing data to reports.
3. Switch to the Field List and drop the required fields onto the report's Detail band.

4. Click the report's smart tag and click the Filter String property's ellipsis button.
In the invoked FilterString Editor, construct an expression in which the data fields are compared with the required values.

Every filter condition consists of three parts:

A field of a data source to which a report is bound or the name of the calculated field, which exists in this data source
at the same level.
Criteria operator, such as Equals, Is less than, Is between, etc.
A static operand value, another data field or a report parameter. To access parameters, click the icon on the right until
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 950 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

it turns into a question mark.

You can arrange specific conditions into groups with And, Or, Not And, and Not Or operators.
Your report is now ready to be generated. Switch to Print Preview to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 951 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter Data at the Data Source Level

This tutorial illustrates how to filter data at the report data source level, as opposed to the report level. This approach is
recommended when dealing with comparatively large data sources when the retrieval process is slow.
1. Create a new report or open an existing one.
2. Bind you report to a required data source. See the Bind to Data section to learn more about providing data to reports.
3. Switch to the Field List and drop the required fields onto the report's Detail band.

4. Select the data source in the Report Explorer, expand its Queries collection property in the Property Grid and click the
ellipsis for the Filter String property of the required query.

5. In the invoked Filter Editor, construct an expression where the data fields are compared with the required values as shown
below.

Every filter condition consists of three parts:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 952 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

A data field name.

Criteria operator, such as Equals, Is less than, Is between, etc.
A static operand value or another data field. You can arrange specific conditions into groups with And, Or, Not And,
and Not Or operators.
Switch to Print Preview to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 953 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Limit the Number of Records to Display

You can filter records displayed in Print Preview using Report Print Options. You can specify them in the Property Grid's
Miscellaneous tab.

Limit the Number of Records

The Detail Count at Design Time property enables you to limit the number of records a report shows in Print Preview
embedded into the Report Designer. This option is also available in the report's smart tag.

Use the Detail Count option to define how many times to print the Detail band when generating a report document to display in
Print Preview.

Print on Empty Data Source

Disable the Print when Data Source is Empty option to avoid generating a report when its data source is empty. You can use
this setting in master-detail reports to hide the detail report if its data source contains no records.
The Detail Count when Data Source is Empty property allows you to specify how many times to print the Detail band when a
report does not have a data source. You can use this property to create static reports that are not connected to a data source and
display the same static content several times.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 954 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Group and Sort Data

The following documents describe how to group and sort a report's data:
Sort Data
Group Data
Sort Data by a Custom Field
Group Data by a Custom Field
Sort Groups by a Summary Function's Result

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 955 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Sort Data
Sort a Report's Data
Do the following to sort data in your report:
1. Create a new or open an existing data-bound report.
You cannot apply sorting unless your report is bound to a data source.
2. Switch to the Group and Sort panel, click Add a Sort and select the required data field in the invoked drop-down menu.

Note

See the Sort Data by a Custom Field tutorial to learn how to sort a report's data by a custom field.
This adds a corresponding sort field to the Sort Fields collection. You can access this collection by clicking the Detail band's
smart tag.

3. Back in the Group and Sort panel, you can specify the sort order (ascending or descending).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 956 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

4. When a report has multiple sort fields, you can change their order by clicking Move Up or Move Down.

5. Drag the corresponding field from the Field List onto the report area and switch to Print Preview to see the result.

Interactive Sorting in Print Preview

You can allow sorting report data directly in Print Preview by clicking a designated element.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 957 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

See Sort a Report in Print Preview for more information.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 958 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Group Data
Group a Report's Data
Do the following to group data in your report:
1. Create a new or open an existing data-bound report.
You cannot apply grouping unless your report is bound to a data source.
2. Switch to the Group and Sort panel, click Add a Group and select the required data field in the invoked drop-down menu.

Note

See the Group Data by a Custom Field tutorial to learn how to group a report's data by a custom field.
This creates an empty Group Header with a corresponding group field added to its Group Fields collection. You can access
this collection by clicking the Group Header's smart tag.

You can use the Group Field Collection Editor to group data by multiple criteria. Click Add to create a new group field
and specify its Field Name property.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to specify the order in which these criteria are applied to the report's data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 959 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

3. Back in the Group and Sort panel, you can specify the group fields' sorting order (ascending or descending).
Select None if your groups are already ordered in the data source, and you do not need to sort them in the report.

4. Click Show Footer to create an empty footer for this group.

5. When a report has multiple groups, you can change their order by clicking Move Up or Move Down.

The following images illustrate how a report looks when it is grouped by multiple criteria:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 960 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

A S ING LE G R O U P W ITH MU LTIPLE G R O U P FIELD S NES TED G R O U P HE AD ER B AND S

6. Drag the corresponding field from the Field List and drop it onto the group footer to display the group field's value in the
report.

The resulting report looks as follows:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 961 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify the Group's Settings

You can use the group band's smart tag to customize the group's layout settings:
Use the Group Union property to keep a group's content on the same page when possible.

Use the Keep Together property to print the Group Header/Footer on the same page as the group's contents.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 962 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use the Repeat Every Page property to print the group band on each page.

Use the Page Break property to start a new page before or after each group.

When you need to display page numbers for individual groups, add the Page Info control to the Group Header or Footer and set
its Running Band property to the Group Header's name.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 963 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Accurate page numbering requires that different groups do not appear on the same page. For this reason, you need to set the
Group Header's Page Break property to After Band, or place the Page Break control at the band's bottom.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 964 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Sort Data by a Custom Field

This tutorial illustrates how to sort a report against a custom criteria, in particular, sort data by the number of characters in the
data field value.
1. Create a new or open an existing data-bound report.
You cannot apply grouping unless your report is bound to a data source.
2. Create a calculated field. Switch to the Field List, right-click any item inside the data source and select Add Calculated
Field.

3. Select the calculated field, and in the Property Grid, click the Expression property's ellipsis button.

4. In the invoked Expression Editor, select the required date-time function and define the data field's name in [square
brackets]. For example, use the Len([ProductName]) function to return the number of characters extracted from the
ProductName data field.

Click OK to close the editor and save the changes.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 965 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

5. In the Group and Sort panel, click Add a Sort and select the calculated field from the invoked drop-down menu.

The Sort Order drop-down list allows you to define the sort order within the group (ascending or descending).
6. Drag the corresponding field from the Field List onto the report area and switch to Print Preview to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 966 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Group Data by a Custom Field

This tutorial illustrates how to group a report against a custom criteria, in particular, group data by days of the week.
1. Create a new or open an existing data-bound report.
You cannot apply grouping unless your report is bound to a data source.
2. Create a calculated field. Switch to the Field List, right-click any item inside the data source and select Add Calculated
Field.

3. Select the calculated field, and in the Property Grid, click the Expression property's ellipsis button.

4. In the invoked Expression Editor, select the required date-time function and define the data field's name in [square
brackets]. For example, use the GetDayOfWeek([OrderDate]) function to return a zero-based index of the day of the
week, extracted from the OrderDate data field.

Click OK to close the editor and save the changes.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 967 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

5. Use the Group and Sort panel to quickly create a Group Header band associated with the calculated field.
To create a group criteria, click Add a Group and select the calculated field from the invoked drop-down menu.

You can also use this panel to specify whether or not the corresponding Group Footer band should be visible. The Sort
Order drop-down list allows you to define the sort order within the group (ascending or descending) or disable sorting in
grouped data.
6. Switch to the Field List and drop the required data fields onto the report's area.

7. Click the smart tag of the label in the Group Header and set the Format String property to {0:dddd}. This makes the label
only display the day of the week, and not the date.

Switch to Print Preview to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 968 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 969 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Sort Groups by a Summary Function's Result

This tutorial explains how to sort groups by a summary function result, in particular, by the number of records groups contain.
1. Create a new or open an existing data-bound report.
You cannot apply grouping unless your report is bound to a data source.
2. Group the report by the required data field, calculate the record count in each group and construct the required report
layout.

3. Click the Group Header band's smart tag, and click the Sorting Summary property's ellipsis button.
In the invoked Group Sorting Summary Editor, turn on the Enabled option, set the Field option to the data field from the
Detail band, and set the Summary function to Count.

In this editor, you can also define the sorting direction for the group, as well as specify whether or not the Null values
should be ignored.
Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog.
Switch to Print Preview to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 970 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 971 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Shape Data (Expression Bindings)

The tutorials in this section illustrate how to solve various tasks related to shaping report data when expression bindings are
enabled in the Report Designer (the Property Grid provides the PropertyName Expression item in the property marker's
context menu).
Format Data
Conditionally Change a Control's Appearance
Conditionally Change a Label's Text
Conditionally Filter Report Data
Conditionally Suppress Controls
Limit the Number of Records per Page
Calculate a Summary
Calculate an Advanced Summary
Display Row Numbers in a Report, Group or Page
Count the Number of Records in a Report or Group
Count the Number of Groups in a Report

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 972 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Format Data
This document demonstrates how to specify value formatting for report elements (for instance, format numeric values as a
currency or apply a percent format).
After you bound your report to data and specified a bound data field in a report control's Expression property, you can format
data values in a report.
1. Invoke the control's smart tag and click the Format String property's ellipsis button.

2. This invokes the Format String Editor where you can specify the required format.

Alternatively, you can use the FormatString function within the expression you specified for the report control.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 973 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When switching to Print Preview, you can view the report control displaying values with the specified format.

You can use the control's Xlsx Format String property to assign a native Excel format that is used for exporting reports to XLSX.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 974 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Conditionally Change a Control's Appearance

This document describes how to change a report control's appearance based on a specific condition.
1. Switch to the Report Explorer and right-click the Styles category to create a new visual style.

2. Right-click the created style and select Edit Styles.

3. In the invoked Styles Editor, customize the created style's appearance settings.

4. Create another style by cloning the existing one.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 975 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

5. Customize the new style's appearance settings and close the editor.

6. Back in the Report Explorer, select a report element to which you wish to assign the created styles.

7. Open the Property Grid's Appearance tab, click the Style property's marker and select Style Expression in the context
menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 976 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

8. In the invoked Expression Editor, specify the required condition for switching between the created styles.

Switch to Print Preview to view the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 977 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Conditionally Change a Label's Text

This document describes how to display different values in a report control based on a specified logical condition.
After you bound your report to data and specified a bound data field in a report control's Expression property, you can make this
control display different values based on a specified logical condition:
1. Invoke the control's smart tag and click its Expression property's ellipsis button.

2. In the invoked Expression Editor, specify the required expression.

Use the Iif function to define the condition. For example:

Iif([UnitsOnOrder] == 0, 'None', [UnitsOnOrder])
This expression means that if the data field's value is zero, the control's text is set to 'None'; otherwise, it displays the actual
field value.
When switching to Print Preview, you can see the report control displaying the assigned values.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 978 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Evaluate as Caption
This property is enabled by default for all labels and table cells added to a group header by the Quick Start tab. When this
property is enabled, the control will evaluate a column expression reference as a caption header instead of a value in the column.
This allows the ProReport to automatically translate a dynamic DAS caption such as <description><year> to become something
like 'June 2019' for example.
This property should be disabled for the column reference in the detail band so that the actual value is shown.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 979 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Conditionally Filter Report Data

This document describes how to filter a report's data based on a specific condition.
1. Switch to the Field List, right-click the Parameters section and add a new report parameter.

2. Specify the parameter's description in Print Preview and set its type to Number (Integer).

3. Select the report's detail band and switch it to the Property Grid. Navigate to its Behavior tab, click the Visible property's
marker and select Visible Expression in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 980 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

4. In the invoked Expression Editor, specify the required visibility condition. For example:

The expression above enables/disables the Visible property depending on whether the field value is below the specified
parameter value.
Switch to Print Preview to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 981 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Conditionally Suppress Controls

This document describes how to display or hide a report control in a published document based on a specified logical condition.
1. Create a new report or open an existing one and prepare the report layout.

2. Select the required control and switch to the Property Grid. Open the Behavior tab, click the Visible property's marker and
select Visible Expression in the context menu.

3. In the invoked Expression Editor, specify the required expression.

Use the Iif function to define the required condition. For example:
Iif([Discontinued] == False, False, [Discontinued])
This expression means that if the data field's value is False, the control's Visible property is disabled.
When switching to Print Preview, you can view the report control's visibility changes according to the assigned condition.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 982 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

See Hide Table Cells to learn how to conditionally suppress table cells and define the mode for processing them.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 983 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Limit the Number of Records per Page

This document describes how to specify the number of data source records displayed on report pages.
After you bound your report to data and provided content to the report's Detail band, you can limit the number of records each
report page displays. This example demonstrates how to pass the required record count as a parameter value.
1. Switch to the Field List, right-click the Parameters section and add a new report parameter.

2. Specify the parameter's description displayed in Print Preview and set its type to Number (Integer).

3. Drop a Page Break control onto the report's detail band and switch to the Property Grid. Open the Behavior tab, click the
Visible property's marker and select Visible Expression in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 984 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

4. In the invoked Expression Editor, specify the required expression.

For example:
([DataSource.CurrentRowIndex] % ?parameter1 == 0) And ([DataSource.CurrentRowIndex] !=0)
When switching to Print Preview, you can specify how many rows each report page should display by entering the corresponding
parameter value:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 985 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 986 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculate a Summary
This document describes how to calculate various summaries across a report and its groups.
1. Create a new report or open an existing one and bind it to a data source.
2. Switch to the Group and Sort panel and group the report's data by the required field. Display the footer for the created
group.

3. Prepare the report layout and drop a required data field onto the group footer to display the summary result.
4. Click the label's smart tag and invoke its Summary Running drop-down list. Select the range for which to calculate a
summary (the entire report, a specific report group or document page).

5. Click the Expression property's ellipsis button.

6. This invokes the Summary Expression Editor where you can select the required summary in the Functions | Summary
section. Report summary functions start with the "sum" prefix to make it easy to differentiate them from aggregate
functions.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 987 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

 Tip

See the Expression Constants, Operators, and Functions topic for a complete list of supported summary functions.
7. You can use the Format String property to format the summary's value.

Switch to Print Preview to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 988 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculate an Advanced Summary

This document describes how to calculate an advanced summary for report groups using a built-in summary function and
arithmetical or logical functions.
1. Create a new report or open an existing one and bind it to a data source.
2. Switch to the Group and Sort panel and group the report's data by the required field. Display the footer for the created
group.

3. Drop a Label onto the group footer to display the summary result. Click the label's smart tag and set its Summary Running
property to Group.

4. Click the ellipsis button for the label's Expression property.

5. This invokes the Summary Expression Editor where you can specify a custom expression with the required summary
functions and other logical or arithmetical functions. For example:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 989 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

 Tip

See the Expression Constants, Operators, and Functions topic for a complete list of supported summary functions.
6. You can use the Format String property to format the summary's value.

Switch to Print Preview to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 990 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Display Row Numbers in a Report, Group or Page

This document describes how to show the current row number for each data source value displayed in a report.
A label can display row numbers after binding your report to data and specifying a bound data field in the Label's Expression
property.
1. Click the label's smart tag and invoke its Summary Running drop-down list. Select Report to increment the row numbers
throughout the entire report, or select Group or Page to reset the row numbers for every group or page.

2. Click the ellipsis button for the Expression property.

3. In the invoked Summary Expression Editor, select the sumRecordNumber function in the Functions | Summary
section.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 991 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

4. Use the Format String property to format the resulting value.

You can switch to Print Preview to see the record numbers displayed for the specified range.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 992 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Count the Number of Records in a Report or Group

This document describes how to display the number or records in a report or group.
1. Right-click the report's design surface and add a Report Header or Footer to display the record count for the entire report.

Note

Use a Group Header/Footer for displaying record counts for groups, and a Page Header/Footer for displaying record counts
for pages.
2. Switch to the Field List and drop the corresponding data table field onto the created band to create a data-bound label.

3. Click the label's smart tag and invoke its Summary Running drop-down list. Select Report to count the records
throughout the entire report, or select Group or Page to reset the record count for every group or page.

4. Click the Expression property's ellipsis button.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 993 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

5. In the invoked Summary Expression Editor, select the sumCount function in the Functions | Summary section.

6. Use the Format String property to format the resulting value.

You can switch to Print Preview to see the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 994 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 995 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Count the Number of Groups in a Report

This document describes how to count the number of groups in a report.
1. Switch to the Group and Sort panel and create a new group. Enable the Show Header option to display the Group Header
in the report.

2. Switch to the Field List and drop the group field onto the created Group Header.

3. Right-click the report's surface and add a Report Footer to the report.

4. Drop a label onto the Report Footer and invoke its smart tag. Set its Summary Running property to Report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 996 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

5. Click the ellipsis button for the label's Expression property.

6. In the invoked Summary Expression Editor, select the sumDCount summary function in the Functions | Summary
section.

7. Use the Format String property to format the summary's value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 997 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can see the group count in the report footer when switching to Print Preview.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 998 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Calculated Fields

The topics in this section describe how to add custom fields to a report's data source and use them to perform various
calculations in the report:
Calculated Fields Overview
Calculate an Aggregate Function
Calculate a Weighted Average Function

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 999 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculated Fields Overview

Calculated fields are primarily used in data-aware reports when using both standard data binding and mail merge. Calculated
fields allow you to pre-process a report's input data, based on a certain expression. So, using calculated fields allows you to apply
complex expressions to one or more data fields that are obtained from your report's underlying data source. Moreover, you can
both group and sort your report data based on a calculated field's value.

Calculated Fields Overview

To create a calculated field, switch to the Field List, right-click any item inside the data source and select Add Calculated Field.

Right-click the calculated field in the Field List and select Edit Expression. Alternatively, you can select the calculated field, and in
the Property Grid, click the Expression property's ellipsis button.

In the invoked Expression Editor, construct the required expression. You can use data fields, report parameters, predefined
constants as well as various date-time, logical, math and string functions. See the next document section for more information
about expression syntax.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1000 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

The Expression Editor displays only those data fields that are obtained from a data source specified by the calculated field's Data
Source and Data Member property values.
The report's Calculated Fields property provides access to the calculated field collection.

You can click the Add Calculated Field button in the Toolbar's Home tab to invoke the Calculated Field Collection Editor.

You can drag the calculated field from the Field List onto the required band like an ordinary data field.

You can also group and sort your report data based on the calculated field values.

Expression Syntax
A data field is inserted into the expression's text using its name in [square brackets], and parameters are inserted using a question
mark before their names.
A calculated field's expression can evaluate the values of other calculated fields if you make sure to avoid circular references.
Note

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1001 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When creating calculated fields, avoid dots in their names, because reports use them to address data source members.
Date-time constants must be wrapped in hashtags (#) (e.g., [OrderDate] >= #1/1/2009#). To represent a null reference (one that
does not refer to any object), use a question mark (e.g., [Region] != ?). To denote strings, use apostrophes ('), otherwise an error
will occur.
To embed an apostrophe into an expression's text, it should be preceded by another apostrophe (e.g., 'It''s sample text').
The type of a value returned by a calculated field is defined by its Field Type property.
If a calculated field expression involves the use of different types, it is necessary to convert them to the same type (e.g.,
Max(ToDecimal([Quantity]),[UnitPrice]))
Although a value that is returned by a calculated field is usually converted to a string (to be displayed in a text-aware report
control), it can return a value of any kind. For example, if a database field contains an image, you can set a calculated field's
expression to "=...", after which this calculated field can be bound to the Picture Box control.
To construct a valid aggregate expression, use the following format, which consists of four parts.
[<Collection>][<Condition>].<Aggregate>(<Expression>)
<Collection> - Specifies a collection against which an aggregated value should be calculated. It can be the relationship
name in a case of a master-detail relationship, or the name of a collection property exposed by the target class. For example,
[CategoriesProducts][[CategoryId]>5].Count(). Empty brackets [] indicate the root collection.
<Condition> - Specifies a condition defining which records should participate in calculating an aggregate function. To
obtain an aggregated value against all records, delete this logical clause along with square brackets (for example, [].Count()).
<Aggregate> - Specifies one of the available aggregate functions.
<Expression> - Specifies an expression evaluating values to be used to perform calculation. For example, [][[CategoryID] >
5].Sum([UnitPrice]*[Quantity]). The Count function does not require field values to count the records, so leave the round
brackets empty for this function.
You can refer to the currently processed group using the Parent Relationship Traversal Operator ('^'). This allows you to calculate
aggregates within groups using expressions like the following: [][[^.CategoryID] == [CategoryID]].Sum([UnitPrice]).
For more information, see Expression Syntax.

Examples
The following tutorials demonstrate the use of calculated fields in various environments:
Calculate an Aggregate Function
Calculate a Weighted Average Function
Sort Data by a Custom Field
Group Data by a Custom Field

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1002 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculate an Aggregate Function

This tutorial describes the steps required to create a report with an aggregate function. In this example, products that are not
discontinued and have a total unit value greater than $500 will be displayed.
1. Create a new or open an existing data-bound report. This tutorial starts with the following report layout:

2. Create a new calculated field and set the field name to "AggregateField".
3. Select the calculated field, switch to the Property Grid and click the Expression property's ellipsis button.

4. In the invoked Expression Editor, double click the [CategoriesProducts] field and choose Functions | Aggregate. Then,
double click the Count() function and insert the following text into the empty square brackets:
"Not[Discontinued]And[UnitTotal] >= 500".

To construct a valid aggregate expression, use the following format, which consists of four parts.
[<Collection>][<Condition>].<Aggregate>(<Expression>)
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1003 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

<Collection> - Specifies a collection against which an aggregated value should be calculated. It can be the relationship
name in a case of a master-detail relationship, or the name of a collection property exposed by the target class. For
example, [CategoriesProducts][[CategoryId]>5].Count(). Empty brackets [] indicate the root collection.
<Condition> - Specifies a condition defining which records should participate in calculating an aggregate function. To
obtain an aggregated value against all records, delete this logical clause along with square brackets (for example,
[].Count()).
<Aggregate> - Specifies one of the available aggregate functions.
<Expression> - Specifies an expression evaluating values to be used to perform calculation. For example, []
[[CategoryID] > 5].Sum([UnitPrice]*[Quantity]). The Count function does not require field values to count the records,
so leave the round brackets empty for this function.
You can refer to the currently processed group using the Parent Relationship Traversal Operator ('^'). This allows you
to calculate aggregates within groups using expressions like the following: [][[^.CategoryID] ==
[CategoryID]].Sum([UnitPrice]).
For more information, see Expression Syntax.
5. Click OK to close the dialog and save the expression.
6. Add three Labels to the Detail Band and customize their content as shown in the following image:

The report is now ready. Switch to Print Preview to see the result.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1004 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1005 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculate a Weighted Average Function

This tutorial demonstrates how to calculate a weighted average function in a report, for instance, calculate a weighted average
price for the units in stock within each product category: Sum (Unit Price * Units In Stock) / Sum (Units In Stock).

Use Report Summary Functions (Recommended)

You can calculate a weighted average at report level by specifying a control's expression using several built-in report summary
functions.
Note

You can use this approach if expression bindings are enabled in the Report Designer (the Property Grid provides the
Expressions tab).
See the next document sections to learn about alternative approaches.
1. Open an existing report or create a new one from scratch.
2. Bind a report to a required data source.
3. Group the report's data using the Group and Sort Panel and construct a layout like the following:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1006 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

4. Add the Group Footer band to the report and drop a Label control on this band to display the summary result.
Click the label's smart tag and set its Summary Running property to Group.

5. Click the Expression property's ellipsis button. This invokes the Summary Expression Editor where you can specify a
custom expression with multiple built-in functions from the Functions | Summary section. Report summary functions start
with the "sum" prefix to help differentiate them from aggregate functions.

6. You can also use the control's Format String property to format the summary's value. For instance, set this property to
Weighted Average Price: {0:c2}.

Use Aggregate Functions

You can create a calculated field and use a standard aggregate function in its expression to evaluate a weighted average at the
report level.
1. Open an existing report or create a new one from scratch.
2. Bind a report to a required data source and construct the required report layout.
3. Right-click any item in the Field List's data source node, and in the invoked context menu, select Add Calculated Field.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1007 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

4. Select the created calculated field and switch to the Property Grid. Specify the Name property, set the Field Type to
Decimal and click the Expression property's ellipsis button.

5. In the invoked Expression Editor, specify the expression using the Sum aggregate function. For example:
[][[CategoryID] == [^.CategoryID]].Sum([UnitPrice] * [UnitsInStock]) / [][[CategoryID] ==
[^.CategoryID]].Sum([UnitsInStock])

To construct a valid aggregate expression, use the following format, which consists of four parts.
[<Collection>][<Condition>].<Aggregate>(<Expression>)
<Collection> - Specifies a collection against which an aggregated value should be calculated. It can be the relationship
name in a case of a master-detail relationship, or the name of a collection property exposed by the target class. For
example, [CategoriesProducts][[CategoryId]>5].Count(). Empty brackets [] indicate the root collection.
<Condition> - Specifies a condition defining which records should participate in calculating an aggregate function. To
obtain an aggregated value against all records, delete this logical clause along with square brackets (for example,
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1008 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

[].Count()).
<Aggregate> - Specifies one of the available aggregate functions.
<Expression> - Specifies an expression evaluating values to be used to perform calculation. For example, []
[[CategoryID] > 5].Sum([UnitPrice]*[Quantity]). The Count function does not require field values to count the records,
so leave the round brackets empty for this function.
You can refer to the currently processed group using the Parent Relationship Traversal Operator ('^'). This allows you
to calculate aggregates within groups using expressions like the following: [][[^.CategoryID] ==
[CategoryID]].Sum([UnitPrice]).
For more information, see Expression Syntax.
6. Add the created calculated field to the report as an ordinary data field and format its value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1009 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Report Parameters

The topics in this section describe how to use parameters in your report:
Parameters Overview
Provides general information about using report parameters.
Create Multi-Value and Cascading Report Parameters
Describes how to enable report parameters to accept multiple values at once, and filter the values of one parameter based
on another parameter's value.
Request and Pass Report Parameter Values
Lists the standard editors available for submitting report parameter values in a Print Preview.
Parameter Mapping to DAS reports
Describes how to map ProReport parameters to the underlying DAS report parameters for data filtering.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1010 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Parameters Overview
You can use report parameters to pass data to a report before it has been published. Parameter values are specified in a Print
Preview's Parameters panel.

Create Parameters
To create a report parameter, switch to the Field List, right-click the Parameters node and click Add Parameter in the context
menu.

Alternatively, you can click the Add Parameter button in the Toolbar's Home tab.

This invokes the Add New Parameter dialog where you can customize the created parameter.

This dialog provides the following options:

Name - specifies the unique name by which the parameter can be referred to.
Description - specifies the text that will be displayed in a Print Preview along with the corresponding value editor.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1011 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Type - specifies the parameter's value type, according to which an appropriate value editor is displayed in a Print Preview.
Default value - specifies the default parameter value.
Show in the parameters panel (corresponds to the parameter's Visible property) - enable this option to request the
parameter value in a Print Preview. Otherwise, the default parameter value is silently passed to the report.
Supports the collection of standard values - you can enable this option if the parameter is visible (i.e., its value should
be requested in a Print Preview). In this case, you can choose a value from a predefined list. You can either manually
populate this list with possible values, or specify a data source from where these values should be obtained.
Dynamic values
On this tab, you can specify a data source, data adapter (if required) and data member storing parameter values. The
value member defines a data field that will provide values to the parameter. The display member defines a data field
storing values displayed in a Print Preview.

The value type of the specified data member should match the specified parameter type.
You can filter the list of values by specifying the Filter String property. Using this property, you can implement
cascading parameters.
You can sort the list of values by specifying the Sort Member and Sort Order properties.
Static values
Switch to this tab to specify a static list of possible values. Each value should have a description that is displayed in a
Print Preview.

Allow multiple values (corresponds to the parameter's Multi-Value property) - when this option is enabled, a parameter
can be assigned a collection of values.
Allow null value (corresponds to the parameter's Allow Null property) - indicates whether the parameter's value can be
unspecified.

Use Parameters
You can use report parameters to solve the following tasks:
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1012 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Filter Data
When filtering report data, parameters can be used for providing values to a report's Filter String property.

Bind to Data
You can bind a report control to a parameter and display its value in the report. To create a new label bound to a parameter,
drag the parameter from the Field List and drop it onto the required band.

When using mail merge, you can refer to a parameter by adding a question mark before its name.

Specify Expressions
Parameters can be used as part of expressions. To refer to a report parameter, use a question mark before its name.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1013 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create Multi-Value and Cascading Parameters

This document describes the implementation of multi-value and cascading parameters. Multi-value parameters can accept more
than a single value, and cascading parameters display values corresponding to current values of other parameters.

Multi-Value Parameters
To assign a collection of values to a parameter, enable its Multi-Value property. In the Add New Parameter dialog, this option
corresponds to the Allow multiple values checkbox.

Multi-value parameters are useful when you need to filter report data against a list of values. The following image illustrates a
correct filtering expression that incorporates a multi-value parameter. This expression is assigned to the report's Filter String
property.

The following image demonstrates an editor for a multi-value parameter in a Print Preview.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1014 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Cascading Parameters
The list of values available for a parameter in a Print Preview can be filtered based on the current value of another parameter.
To filter the list of parameter values, click the ellipsis button for the parameter's Filter String property in the Add New
Parameter dialog window and specify a filter string that refers to another parameter.

Click the report's smart tag, and in the invoked actions list, click the ellipsis button for the Filter String property. In the invoked
FilterString Editor, construct an expression that uses both parameters:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1015 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The following image illustrates cascading parameters.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1016 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Request and Pass Report Parameter Values

This document illustrates how to assign the default and custom values to a report's parameters and describes the editors that are
used to request these values in a Print Preview.

Requesting Parameter Values in a Print Preview

The parameter's Value property specifies the parameter's actual value. This value must correspond to the parameter's value type
the Type property defines.

A parameter's value is not requested from end-users and is automatically passed to the report when the parameter's Visible
property is disabled. When a report has at least one visible parameter, a Print Preview provides the Parameters panel for
submitting parameter values.
When loading a Print Preview, a report document is not created by default unless values for all visible parameters are submitted.
To create report documents without requesting parameter values (and using their default values instead), disable the report's
Request Parameters property.

Standard Parameter Editors

The parameter's Type property determines which values a parameter can accept. The corresponding value editors are created
automatically for the following standard parameter types:
String
Date
Number
16-bit integer
32-bit integer
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1017 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

64-bit integer
floating point
double-precision floating point
decimal
Boolean
GUID (Globally Unique Identifier)
The following image illustrates the standard editors for parameter values:

Look-Up Parameter Editors

You can list a parameter's values in a lookup editor:
Assign a Static List of Values to a Parameter
A parameter can be provided with a predefined set of static values, without creating a separate data source. Each value is
accompanied by a description that appears in the Print Preview's user interface.

Assign a Dynamic List of Values to a Parameter

A parameter can obtain a list of values from a specified data source.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1018 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Assign Multiple Values to a Parameter

A parameter can also be allowed to accept multiple values by enabling its Multi-Value property.

When creating cascading parameters, the list of values available for one parameter is filtered based on another parameter's
current value. See Create Multi-Value and Cascading Report Parameters for more information.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1019 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Mapping parameters for DAS reports

Mapping parameters to the underlying DAS reports can be an integral part of data filtering for the underlying DAS reports.
From the Home tab, choose the Map Parameters button to map a ProReport parameter to a DAS report parameter.

To map the parameter Business Unit, click the double arrow. A unique parameter name will be generated and can be used as the
parameter name. You also have the option of changing that name. The name must be unique and properly formatted to be set. In
addition, you also have the option of mapping report variables as well as mobie variables.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1020 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

If your ProReport uses 2 DAS reports that have parameters with the same name, it is possible to link those parameters to a single
ProReport parameter. This is done by default when you map the parameter. The parameter in italics with the same name is also
linked to that ProReport parameter so both DAS report can be set using one ProReport parameter value.

When Print Preview is clicked, choose the parameter value and then choose your data size. The parameter value will be set on
both DAS reports for filtering and the reports will be run.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1021 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Lay out Dynamic Report Content

You can use Print Preview to see what the resulting document looks like because data-aware controls' contents are not available
at design time.
This section contain topics describe how to maintain report elements' correct location in a published document:
Maintain the Band Location on a Page
Keep Content Together
Maintain the Size and Content of Data-Bound Controls
Anchor Controls
Suppress Controls

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1022 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Maintain the Band Location on a Page

Use the Group and Report Footer's Print At Bottom property to choose whether these bands should appear at the bottom of a
page or immediately after the previous band.

PR INT AT B O T TO M = NO PR INT AT B O T TO M = YES

Use the Page Header and Footer's Print On property to avoid printing these bands on the same page with a Report Header
and/or Footer.

Print On = All Pages

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1023 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Print On = Not With Report Header

Use the Group Header and Footer's Repeat Every Page property to repeat these bands on every page.

Repeat Every Page = No

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1024 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Repeat Every Page = Yes

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1025 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Keep Content Together

You can choose whether a control's content can be split across several pages using its Keep Together property.

" K EEP TO G E THER" IS D IS AB LED " K EEP TO G E THER" IS ENAB LED

Enabling this property for a single control makes the same band's controls behave like this option is enabled.
Use the band's Keep Together property to enable this feature for all controls within a specific band.
Note

This feature is not available for the Chart and Subreport controls.
In a master-detail report, you can print the detail band on the same page as the detail report band using the detail band's Keep
Together With Detail Reports property.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1026 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Maintain the Size and Content of Data-Bound Controls

Use the control's Can Grow and Can Shrink properties to make a data-bound control automatically adjust its height to its
contents.

CAN G R O W = NO CAN G R O W = YES

CAN S HR INK = NO CAN S HR INK = YES

Note

This feature does not work with anchoring enabled, as well as for labels that are used to display summary function results.
Use the Auto Width property to make a data-bound Label or Character Comb automatically adjust its width to its content. This
option behavior depends on the control's current horizontal alignment (Text Alignment property value).
Text Alignment = Left

Text Alignment = Right

Text Alignment = Center

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1027 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The control's Word Wrap property allows you to make a control display its contents in multiple lines when it does not fit into the
control's dimensions.

AU TO W ID TH = NO, W O R D W R AP = NO AU TO W ID TH = NO, W O R D W R AP = YES

AU TO W ID TH = YES , W O R D W R AP = NO AU TO W ID TH = YES , W O R D W R AP = YES

You can also use the opposite Text Fit Mode property to adjust a label or table cell's font size to fit the control's bounds.

TE X T FIT MO D E = TE X T FIT MO D E = G R O W TE X T FIT MO D E = S HR INK TE X T FIT MO D E = S HR INK AND

NO NE O NLY O NLY G ROW

This property is not available in the following cases:

The Can Grow, Can Shrink or Auto Width option is enabled;
The label's Angle property is specified;
The control's Anchor Horizontally or Anchor Vertically property is set to Both.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1028 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Anchor Controls
You can anchor a control to the top, bottom, or both edges of its parent container using the Anchor Horizontally and Anchor
Vertically properties.

Anchor Horizontally = None

Anchor Horizontally = Right

Anchor Horizontally = Both

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1029 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Suppress Controls
Avoid Duplicated and Empty Values
When identical or null values appear in a report's data source, you can suppress these values in a report using the following
properties:
Process Duplicates Mode
Specifies how to process report controls with identical values (leave them as is, merge, suppress, or suppress and shrink).
Process Null Values
Specifies how to process report controls receiving null values from a data source (leave them as is, suppress, or suppress
and shrink).
Process Duplicates Target
Specifies whether to process duplicate the control's Text or Tag property values.

These properties are available for the following controls:

Bar Code
Label
Character Comb
Rich Text
Table Cell
Picture Box

Conditionally Suppress a Control

You can suppress a control when a specified logical condition is met by specifying the required Visible property expressions as
described in the Conditionally Suppress Controls topic.
In this case, a space remains in the band at the control's location. You can avoid this by placing these controls onto an Panel and
enabling its Can Shrink property.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1030 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

For this feature to work correctly, consider the following:

Specify the Visible property's expression to the controls in the panel (and not to the panel itself).
Do not assign borders to the panel container. Otherwise, they are printed when the panel's content is suppressed.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1031 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customize Appearance
The topics in this section describe how to customize the report elements' appearance:
Appearance Properties
Report Visual Styles
Report Style Sheets

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1032 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Appearance Properties
This document describes the purpose and implementation of the appearance properties - a special set of properties that allow
you to customize the appearance of a report or any of its elements.

Properties Overview
Every report element (control or band), and a report itself, has a set of properties that specify its appearance. They are listed in the
following table.

PR O PER T Y NAME D ES CR IPTIO N

Background Color Gets or sets a background color to a report element and its child controls.

Border Color Gets or sets a border color to a report element and its child controls.

Border Dash Style Gets or sets a border dash style to a report element and its child controls.

Borders Gets or sets borders (top, right, bottom,left), which should be visible for a report element and its child controls.

Border Width Gets or sets a border width to a report element and its child controls.

Font Gets or sets the font options (its name, size, etc.) to a report element and its child controls.

Foreground Color Gets or sets the foreground color to a report element and its child controls.

Padding Gets or sets the indent values which are used to render the contents of a report element and its child controls.

Text Alignment Gets or sets the text alignment to a report element and its child controls.

Access Appearance Properties

Use the Report Designer's Toolbar to access the appearance properties.

More appearance properties are available in the Property Grid's Appearance tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1033 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Property Value Inheritance

By default, appearance properties for every control or a band are set to empty values, which means that their real values are
obtained from a control's parent, or a parent of its parent and so on.

Note

The appearance properties may not be used by all descendants of the current report element for which they are defined. For
example, the Page Break element ignores the Back Color property.
To reset values of these properties, click the property marker in the Property Grid, and select Reset in the invoked menu. Then, the
control's actual appearance will be determined by the appropriate properties settings of its parent.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1034 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

If a report element has a style assigned to it, the priority of the properties defined by this style is determined by the StylePriority
property. Note that when a conditional formatting is involved, the appearance it defines is of greater priority than the properties
described above.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1035 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Report Visual Styles

This topic describes how to combine appearance properties into styles and apply them to report elements.

Create a Report Style

Use the following approaches to create a visual style in your report:
Extract a Style
Specify a report control's appearance properties and press Extract Style in the report's toolbar.

Create a new Style

Press the caption button in the toolbar's Styles group to invoke the Styles Editor.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1036 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Press the Add a style button and specify the new style's appearance properties. Close the Styles Editor.
The created style is added to the Style gallery. You can access this gallery in the following places:
the Styles group in the report's toolbar;

the Styles group in the Report Explorer.

Assign a Style to a Report Element

Select a report element and press a style in the toolbar's Styles group.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1037 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This assigns the style to the report element's Style property.

Assign Odd and Even Styles

You can use the Odd Style and Even Style properties to apply different styles to alternating rows in a report.

Customize a Style
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1038 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Press the caption button in the toolbar's Styles group to invoke the Styles Editor.

Select a style and modify its property values. All the report elements apply the updated style immediately.

Style Inheritance
Nested elements inherit their parent element's style if they do not have an applied style.

Override Styles
You can specify a different value for a report element's appearance property to override the corresponding property value in the
report element's style.
Note

If you apply conditional formatting, its appearance property values have a higher priority than both the individually specified
properties and the style's properties.
Note

You can combine styles into style sheets and reuse them in reports.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1039 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Report Style Sheets

You can combine report styles into a style sheet and reuse them in reports. This topic explains how to create and use style sheets
in reports.

Save Styles as Style Sheets

Press the caption button in the toolbar's Styles group to invoke the Style Editor.

Press the button to save the styles as a style sheet (external REPSS file).

Add a Style Sheet to a Report

Do the following to embed a style sheet's styles in a report:
invoke the Styles Editor;

press and choose a style sheet file in the Open dialog.

All the styles are now available in the report's toolbar and Report Explorer.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1040 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Reuse Style Sheets in Reports

You can utilize styles from a style sheet in a report. To do this, specify the path to the style sheet file in the report's Style Sheet's
Path property.

The attached style sheet's styles are now available in the report's toolbar and the Report Explorer. You cannot edit these styles.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1041 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Navigation
The topics in this section describe how to use navigation features in your reports:
Add Page Numbers
Add Cross-References and Hyperlinks
Add Bookmarks and a Document Map
Add a Table of Contents
Note

See Provide Interactivity to learn how to create drill-down reports.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1042 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Page Numbers

The tutorial describes how to add page numbers to your reports.

Add Page Numbers

Do the following to add page numbers to a report:
Create a PageFooterBand in your report. To do this, right-click anywhere in the report designer, and in the context menu
point to Insert Band, and then click PageFooter.

Drop the Page Info control from the Toolbox to the PageFooter band.

To change the control's display format, click its smart tag, and in the invoked actions list, specify the Text Format String
property (e.g., Page {0} of {1}, to display the current page number out of the total number of pages).

The following image illustrates the resulting report:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1043 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Page Numbers for Groups

Do the following to make your report display page numbers for groups or detail reports:
Add the GroupFooter band. To do this, right-click anywhere on the report's surface, and in the invoked menu, point to
Insert Band and click GroupFooter.

Note

You can force the group header and/or the group footer to be repeated on each page, using the GroupBand's Repeat Every
Page property.
Next, force each new group to start on a separate page. Otherwise, group page numbers will be calculated incorrectly.
To do this, select the Group Footer, and set its Page Break property to After the Band.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1044 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drop the Page Info control from the Toolbox onto the GroupFooter (or GroupHeader) band.

Select the created control, and set its Running Band property to GroupHeader1.

 Tip

You can use the Text Format String and Page Information properties to adjust the way the control represents its
contents.
The following image illustrates the resulting report:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1045 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1046 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Cross-References and Hyperlinks

This document describes how to make an element navigate to other elements in a report or external resources by clicking it in a
Print Preview.

Add Cross-References
You can improve report navigation using a cross-reference because the link's target is in the same document.
You can add a cross-reference for a report control by setting the following properties:
1. Set the Navigation Target property to _self to specify that the link is in the same document.

2. Set the Navigation URL property to the target control's Name property value.

In this case, the control behaves like a link meaning that the cursor automatically changes to a hand in a report's preview when
hovering the control. You can make a control resemble a link by specifying its appearance properties (for example, change the
text's color to blue and underline it).

The link uses the first occurrence if there are multiple instances of an object marked as a link's target.
 Tip

A report's cross-references are preserved when exporting it to PDF.

Add Hyperlinks
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1047 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

A hyperlink means that a link's target is outside the report.

You can use any control as a link by setting the Navigation Url property to the required target document's URL.

Note

Remember to use the "http://" or "https://" prefix when specifying the URL.
You can make a control resemble a link by specifying its appearance properties (for instance, set the underlined text and blue
color).
The cursor automatically changes to a hand when hovering the control in a report's preview.

Use the link's Navigation Target property to specify where to open the target document (in the same preview window, in a new
blank window, etc.).
 Tip

A link's behavior is preserved when exporting a report to most of the available formats (in particular to PDF, HTML, MHT, RTF and
Excel).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1048 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Bookmarks and a Document Map

This document describes how to use bookmarks for mapping the report elements' hierarchy to the Document Map that is
displayed in a Print Preview, and speeds up the navigation through complex reports.
The example below is based on the following report:

This report displays products that are grouped by the CategoryName field.
The following image illustrates the resulting report with a hierarchical Document Map. Clicking any bookmark navigates the Print
Preview to the document section containing the associated element.

Use the following steps to generate a Document Map in your grouped report:
1. Select the label placed in the Group Header band and switch to the Property Grid's Miscellaneous tab. Click the
Bookmark property's marker and select the Bookmark Expression item. In the invoked Expression Editor, select the
CategoryName data field.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1049 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

In the legacy binding mode (if the Property Grid does not provide the Bookmark Expression item), you can specify this
property in the Property Grid's Data Bindings category.

2. In the same way, select the label in the Detail band and bind its Bookmark property to the ProductName data field.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1050 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Most of the reporting controls (for example, Table, TableCell, CheckBox, etc.) supports the Bookmark property.
3. Set the same label's Parent Bookmark property to the label in the group band. This arranges bookmarks into a parent-
child structure reflecting the report elements' hierarchy in the Document Map.

Note

Avoid cyclic bookmarks that occur when you assign two bookmarks as parents to each other. In this scenario, an exception
raises when you attempt to create the report document.
4. Select the report itself and assign text to its Bookmark property to determine the root node's caption in the Document
Map.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1051 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The root bookmark displays the report name if you do not specify this property.
Note

Duplicated bookmarks are suppressed to prevent adding multiple bookmarks with the same name to a final document. You can
disable the report's Bookmark Duplicate Suppress property to allow duplicated bookmarks.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1052 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create a Table of Contents

This tutorial describes the steps to create a report with a table of contents. A table of contents is automatically created based on
the bookmarks existing in a report.
Do the following to create a table of contents in a report:
1. From the Control Toolbox, drop the Table of Contents control onto the Report Header band.

2. Double-click the title of the table of contents and specify its text.

3. To customize the title appearance, use the Level Title option's settings available in the Properties window.

4. To customize the appearance of all other levels, use the Level Default option's settings.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1053 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

5. To customize a specific level individually, add a corresponding item to the Levels collection of the table of contents and
customize its properties.

The following image demonstrates the result in Print Preview:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1054 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1055 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Provide Interactivity
The documents in this section provide information on the interactive features that enable report customization in Print Preview.
Create Drill-Down Reports
Sort a Report in Print Preview
Content Editing in Print Preview

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1056 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create Drill-Down Reports

This tutorial describes how to create a drill-down report. Clicking a link in such a report displays the previously hidden detailed
information in the same report:

Do the following to create a drill-down report:

1. Create a report with two reports where there is a master/detail relationship between the two bound using a common
parameter to the report.
2. Drop a label onto the report's detail band. Clicking this label should expand or collapse the hidden report details.
3. Select the detail report band by clicking its header and expand the drop-down menu for the band's DrillDownControl
property in the Property Grid.
This menu displays all report controls available on the report band that is one level above the current band in the report
bands' hierarchy. Select the corresponding label in the menu to make the label expand or collapse the detail report's band
when clicked in the Print Preview.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1057 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

You can also specify the band's Drill Down Expanded property to define whether or not the band is initially expanded.
This property is enabled by default.
4. Click this label's smart tag and select the Expression property.

This invokes the Expression Editor where you can make the label display different text based on the detail report's
DrillDownExpanded property value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1058 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1059 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Sort a Report in Print Preview

This tutorial illustrates how to enable sorting report data in Print Preview.
In this tutorial, we will start with the following report displaying products grouped by category names.

You can implement interactive sorting for both the detail data and report groups.

Sort Report Groups

To enable sorting report groups in Print Preview, select the label displaying product category names located in the Group Header
band and switch to the Property Grid.

Expand the label's InteractiveSorting property, and set the TargetBand property to GroupHeader1 and FieldName to
CategoryName.
Switch to the Preview tab to sort report groups by the CategoryName field. When a mouse pointer hovers over the category
name, it changes to a hand indicating the sorting capability. The arrow displayed at the element's right edge indicates the sorting
order.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1060 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Sort Detail Data

To enable sorting data in the Detail band, select the table cell displaying the Product Name title and switch to the Property Grid.

Set the TargetBand property to Detail and access the SortField property.
In the invoked collection editor, add a new group field and set its FieldName to ProductName.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1061 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Set the table cell's FieldName property to the ProductName field.

On switching to the Preview tab, you can now sort data in the Detail band by the ProductName field.

If you provide interactive sorting to multiple fields, clicking another field clears all the previously applied data sorting. Hold the
SHIFT key while clicking to preserve the existing sorting settings and thus sort against multiple fields.
To disable data sorting against a specific field, hold the CTRL key on its caption click.
Note

Reports embedded into the current report using the Subreport control do not support interactive data sorting.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1062 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Edit Content in Print Preview

This document describes how to customize field values in a previewed document.

Content Editing Overview

Enable a report control's Edit Options | Enabled property and leave the Edit Options | Read Only property disabled to make
the control's content editable in Print Preview.

Print Preview provides the Editing Fields toolbar button if content editing is enabled for at least one control in the displayed
report. Click this button to highlight all editable fields available in the document.

Use the TAB and SHIFT+TAB keys to navigate between editable fields forward and back.
Click an editable field to invoke an editor and specify a value.
You can enable content editing for data-aware and unbound report controls.
The following report controls support content editing in Print Preview:
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1063 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TE X T B O O LE AN IMAG E

Label Check Box Picture Box

Table Cell

Character Comb

The sections below provide information about options these controls expose. You can use these options to set up content editing.

Content Editing Limitations

Changes made to a control's content in Print Preview does not effect the document's other parts (for example, summary
results, grouping, sorting, bookmarks and other settings that were processed before the document was generated).
A control's Can Grow setting is ignored for editable fields. The edited area cannot exceed the control's original dimensions.
Multi-line values can only be entered when no mask is applied to an editable field.
Values entered into editable fields are reset after the document is refreshed (for example, when you submit report
parameter values or expand/collapse data in a drill-down report).
It is not possible to edit content in bands if their DrillDownControl property is specified.
The entered values are not preserved in the Top Margin and Bottom Margin bands when the report is exported as a single
file to the following formats:
TXT
CSV
HTML
MHT
RTF
XLS
XLSX
image

Text Editors
Text editors are used to customize the Label, Table Cell and Character Comb report controls' content in Print Preview.
The default text editor is a memo edit.

Specify the Edit Options | Editor Name property to use one of the following text editors:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1064 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

NU MER IC D ATE- TIME LE T TER S

Integer Date Only Letters

Positive Integer Only Uppercase Letters

Fixed-Point Only Lowercase Letters

Positive Fixed-Point Only Latin Letters

Each editor has a specific mask.

Note

If a table cell contains other controls, you cannot edit this cell (they can edit the cell's controls). The following image illustrates this:

Check Box Editor

The check box editor is used to customize the Check Box report control's content in Print Preview.

You can combine several check box editors into a radio group so that you can select only one option within a group at a time. For
this, set the Check Box report controls' Group ID property to the same value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1065 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Image Editors
Image editors are used to customize the XRPictureBox report control's content in Print Preview.
Use the control's Edit Options | Editor Name property to assign one of the following image editors.
Image Editor
Allows you to load an image and specify the image's size options.

Signature Editor
Allows you to specify brush options and draw a signature.

Image and Signature Editor (default)

Allows you to load an image and draw a signature. The image's size options and brush options are available.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1066 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

All these image editors include the button. This button allows you to restore the initial image.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1067 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Extra Information

The topics in this section describe how to identify your reports by displaying information about their context:
Add Watermarks to a Report
Display the Current Date and Time in a Report
Display the User Name in a Report
Note

See Add Navigation to learn how to add page numbers and a table of contents to your reports.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1068 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Watermarks to a Report

This tutorial describes how to add watermarks to a report and use preprinted forms.

Add a Watermark to a Report

To add a watermark to a report, do the following.
1. Switch to the toolbar's Page page and press Watermark.

2. In the invoked Watermark dialog, select either the Text Watermark or Picture Watermark tab, depending on the type of
watermark you wish to add.
For a text watermark, specify the text, direction and font options.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1069 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

For a picture watermark, you need to specify an image. To do this, click the ellipsis button for the Load image option.

In the invoked Select Picture dialog, select the file containing the image that you wish to use as a watermark and click
Open. Next, specify the size mode and alignment options for the picture.
Additionally, for both textual and picture watermarks, you can adjust the transparency, position (in front of or behind the
document content), and the page range in which the watermark will be printed.

Supply a Preprinted Form

You can use a picture watermark as a template, to display an image of the preprinted form on the report's body at design time.
To display a watermark at design time, switch to the toolbar's View page and activate Watermark.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1070 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The following image illustrates a report with a watermark shown at design-time that contains a template of a preprinted form.

Place report controls on the report's body according to the layout of the preprinted form.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1071 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Display the User Name in a Report

This tutorial demonstrates how to insert the current user name in a report using the Page Info control.

Do the following to insert the user name into a report:

1. Typically, the user name is displayed within the Report Header band. To add it to the report, right click anywhere on the
report's surface. In the invoked menu, point to Insert Band and click ReportHeader.

2. Drop the Page Info control from the Toolbox onto the ReportHeader band.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1072 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

3. Set the control's Page Information property to User Name (e.g. using the smart tag).

4. Next, to apply a format string to the control's contents, type Current User: {0} into its Text Format String property.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1073 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Display the Current Date and Time in a Report

This tutorial demonstrates how to insert the current system date and time into a report using the Page Info control.

Do the following to include information about the current date and time into a report:
1. Typically, the current date and time are displayed within the Report Header band. To add it to the report, right click
anywhere on the report's surface. In the invoked menu, point to Insert Band and click ReportHeader.

2. Drop the Page Info control from the Toolbox onto the ReportHeader band.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1074 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

3. Set the control's PageInformation property to DateTime (e.g. using the smart tag).

4. To apply a format string to the control's contents, type Created at {0:h:mm tt dd MMMM yyyy} into its
TextFormatString property.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1075 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use Expressions
Expressions are used to specify criteria for retrieving and formatting data, creating calculated fields and calculating summaries,
conditionally shaping data and changing a report control's appearance.

Expression Syntax
An expression is a string that, when parsed and processed, evaluates a value. Expressions consist of field names, constants,
operators, and functions. Field names must be wrapped in brackets. Here are examples of expressions:
"[Quantity] * [UnitPrice] * (1 - [BonusAmount])"
"[FirstName] + ' ' + [LastName]"
"[Country] == 'USA'"
"[OrderDate] > #8/16/1994# AND [Quantity] > 20"
There is a list of operators, constants and functions that you can use in expressions. Refer to the Expression Syntax topic for details
on their usage.

Expression Editor
The Report Designer allows you to use the Expression Editor that provides functions, operators, data source fields, report
elements, constants and variables to construct expressions.

The Expression Editor supports syntax highlighting and intelligent code completion (suggesting functions and available data
elements as you type).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1076 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Expression Editor displays all the errors it finds in the specified expression.

Filter Editor
The Report Designer allows you to use the Filter Editor to specify filter criteria. The Filter Editor provides a visual interface for
constructing filter criteria with an unlimited number of filter conditions combined by logical operators. You can also switch to the
Text mode to type a filter string manually.

The Filter Editor supports intelligent code completion (suggesting functions and available data elements as you type) and error
validation features.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1077 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1078 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Expression Constants, Operators, and Functions

The table below contains constants, operators, and functions you can use in expressions.

Constants
CO NS TANT D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

String Wrap string constants in apostrophes. [Country] == 'France'

constants If a string contains an apostrophe, double the apostrophe. [Name] == 'O''Neil'

Date-time
Wrap date-time constants in '#'. [OrderDate] >= #2018-03-22 13:18:51.94944#
constants

True Represents the Boolean True value. [InStock] == True

False Represents the Boolean False value. [InStock] == False

[Status] == 1
You cannot specify an enumeration value using its
qualified name. The following criteria is incorrect:
[Status] = Status.InProgress
Enumeration Specify an enumeration value using its underlying integer value.
You can use the class' static methods to register
custom enumerations, and then refer to enumeration
values as follows:
Status = ##Enum#MyNamespace.Status,InProgress#

Wrap a Guid constant in curly braces. Use Guid constants in a [OrderID] == {513724e5-17b7-4ec6-abc4-
Guid
relational operation with equality or inequality operators only. 0eae12c72c1f}

Specify different numeric constant types in a string form using

suffixes:
Int32 (int) - 1
Numeric Int16 (short) - 1s [Price] == 25.0m
Byte (byte) - 1b
Double (double) - 1.0
Single (float) - 1.0f
Decimal (decimal) - 1.0m

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1079 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Represents a null reference that does not refer to any object.

? We recommend using the IsNull unary operator (for example, " [Region] != ?
[Region] is null") or the IsNull logical function (for example,
"IsNull([Region])") instead.

Operators
O PER ATO R D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

[UnitPrice] + 4
+ Adds the value of one numeric expression to another or concatenates two strings. [FirstName] + ' '
+ [LastName]

- Finds the difference between two numbers. [Price1] - [Price2]

[Quantity] *
* Multiplies the value of two expressions. [UnitPrice] * (1 -
[BonusAmount])

/ Divides the first operand by the second. [Quantity] / 2

% Returns the remainder (modulus) obtained by dividing one numeric expression by another. [Quantity] % 3

Performs a bitwise inclusive OR on two numeric expressions. Compares each bit of its first operand to
[Number] |
| the corresponding bit of its second operand. If either bit is 1, the corresponding resulting bit is set to 1.
[Number]
Otherwise, the corresponding resulting bit is set to 0.

The bitwise AND operator. Compares each bit of its first operand to the corresponding bit of its second
& operand. If both bits are 1, the corresponding resulting bit is set to 1. Otherwise, the corresponding [Number] & 10
resulting bit is set to 0.

[Number] ^
^ Performs a bitwise exclusive OR on two numeric expressions.
[Number]

==
Returns true if both operands have the same value; otherwise, it returns false. [Quantity] == 10
=

[Country] !=
!= Returns true if the operands do not have the same value; otherwise, it returns false.
'France'

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1080 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

< Less than operator. Used to compare expressions. [UnitPrice] < 20

<= Less than or equal to operator. Used to compare expressions. [UnitPrice] <= 20

>= Greater than or equal to operator. Used to compare expressions. [UnitPrice] >= 30

> Greater than operator. Used to compare expressions. [UnitPrice] > 30

[Country] In
In (,,,) Tests for the existence of a property in an object.
('USA', 'UK', 'Italy')

Between Specifies a range to test. Returns true if a value is greater than or equal to the first operand and less [Quantity]
(,) than or equal to the second operand. Between (10, 20)

[InStock] And
([ExtendedPrice]>
And 100)
Performs a logical conjunction on two Boolean expressions.
&& [InStock] &&
([ExtendedPrice]>
100)

[Country]=='USA'
Or
Or [Country]=='UK'
Performs a logical disjunction on two Boolean expressions.
|| [Country]=='USA'
||
[Country]=='UK'

~ Performs a bitwise negation on a numeric expression. ~[Roles] = 251

Not Not [InStock]

Performs a logical negation on a Boolean expression.
! ![InStock]

+ Returns a numeric expression's value (a unary operator). +[Value] = 10

- Returns the negative of a numeric expression's value (a unary operator). -[Value] = 20

Is Null Returns true if an expression is a null reference, the one that does not refer to any object. [Region] is null

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1081 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Functions (Basic)
Aggregate Functions
FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Avg(Value) Evaluates the average of the values in the collection. [Products].Avg([UnitPrice])

Count() Returns the number of objects in a collection. [Products].Count()

Exists() Determines whether the object exists in the collection. [Categories][[CategoryID] == 7].Exists()

Max(Value) Returns the maximum expression value in a collection. [Products].Max([UnitPrice])

Min(Value) Returns the minimum expression value in a collection. [Products].Min([UnitPrice])

Single() Returns a single object from the collection. [Accounts].Single() is not null

Sum(Value) Returns the sum of all the expression values in the collection. [Products].Sum([UnitsInStock])

D ate - time Functions

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Returns a date-time value that is the specified

AddDays(DateTime, DaysCount) AddDays([OrderDate], 30)
number of days from the specified DateTime.

Returns a date-time value that is the specified

AddHours(DateTime, HoursCount) AddHours([StartTime], 2)
number of hours from the specified DateTime.

AddMilliSeconds(DateTime, Returns a date-time value that is the specified

AddMilliSeconds(([StartTime], 5000))
MilliSecondsCount) number of milliseconds from the specified DateTime.

AddMinutes(DateTime, Returns a date-time value that is the specified

AddMinutes([StartTime], 30)
MinutesCount) number of minutes from the specified DateTime.

AddMonths(DateTime, Returns a date-time value that is the specified

AddMonths([OrderDate], 1)
MonthsCount) number of months from the specified DateTime.

AddSeconds(DateTime, Returns a date-time value that is the specified

AddSeconds([StartTime], 60)
SecondsCount) number of seconds from the specified DateTime.

Returns a date-time value that is the specified

AddTicks(DateTime, TicksCount) AddTicks([StartTime], 5000)
number of ticks from the specified DateTime.

AddTimeSpan(DateTime, Returns a date-time value that is from the specified

AddTimeSpan([StartTime], [Duration])
TimeSpan) DateTime for the given TimeSpan.

Returns a date-time value that is the specified

AddYears(DateTime, YearsCount) AddYears([EndDate], -1)
number of years from the specified DateTime.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1082 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Returns the number of day boundaries between

DateDiffDay(startDate, endDate) DateDiffDay([StartTime], Now())
two non-nullable dates.

Returns the number of hour boundaries between

DateDiffHour(startDate, endDate) DateDiffHour([StartTime], Now())
two non-nullable dates.

DateDiffMilliSecond(startDate, Returns the number of millisecond boundaries

DateDiffMilliSecond([StartTime], Now())
endDate) between two non-nullable dates.

DateDiffMinute(startDate, Returns the number of minute boundaries between

DateDiffMinute([StartTime], Now())
endDate) two non-nullable dates.

DateDiffMonth(startDate, Returns the number of month boundaries between

DateDiffMonth([StartTime], Now())
endDate) two non-nullable dates.

DateDiffSecond(startDate, Returns the number of second boundaries between

DateDiffSecond([StartTime], Now())
endDate) two non-nullable dates.

Returns the number of tick boundaries between two

DateDiffTick(startDate, endDate) DateDiffTick([StartTime], Now())
non-nullable dates.

Returns the number of year boundaries between

DateDiffYear(startDate, endDate) DateDiffYear([StartTime], Now())
two non-nullable dates.

GetDate(DateTime) Extracts a date from the defined DateTime. GetDate([OrderDateTime])

GetDay(DateTime) Extracts a day from the defined DateTime. GetDay([OrderDate])

Extracts a day of the week from the defined

GetDayOfWeek(DateTime) GetDayOfWeek([OrderDate])
DateTime.

Extracts a day of the year from the defined

GetDayOfYear(DateTime) GetDayOfYear([OrderDate])
DateTime.

GetHour(DateTime) Extracts an hour from the defined DateTime. GetHour([StartTime])

GetMilliSecond(DateTime) Extracts milliseconds from the defined DateTime. GetMilliSecond([StartTime])

GetMinute(DateTime) Extracts minutes from the defined DateTime. GetMinute([StartTime])

GetMonth(DateTime) Extracts a month from the defined DateTime. GetMonth([StartTime])

GetSecond(DateTime) Extracts seconds from the defined DateTime. GetSecond([StartTime])

Extracts the time of the day from the defined

GetTimeOfDay(DateTime) GetTimeOfDay([StartTime])
DateTime in ticks.

GetYear(DateTime) Extracts a year from the defined DateTime. GetYear([StartTime])

IsApril(DateTime) Returns True if the specified date falls within April. IsApril([OrderDate])

IsAugust(DateTime) Returns True if the specified date falls within August. IsAugust([OrderDate])

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1083 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Returns True if the specified date falls within

IsDecember(DateTime) IsDecember([OrderDate])
December.

Returns True if the specified date falls within

IsFebruary(DateTime) IsFebruary([OrderDate])
February.

Returns True if the specified date falls within

IsJanuary(DateTime) IsJanuary([OrderDate])
January.

IsJuly(DateTime) Returns True if the specified date falls within July. IsJuly([OrderDate])

IsJune(DateTime) Returns True if the specified date falls within June. IsJune([OrderDate])

Returns True if the specified date falls within the

IsLastMonth(DateTime) IsLastMonth([OrderDate])
previous month.

Returns True if the specified date falls within the

IsLastYear(DateTime) IsLastYear([OrderDate])
previous year.

IsMarch(DateTime) Returns True if the specified date falls within March. IsMarch([OrderDate])

IsMay(DateTime) Returns True if the specified date falls within May. IsMay([OrderDate])

Returns True if the specified date falls within the

IsNextMonth(DateTime) IsNextMonth([OrderDate])
next month.

Returns True if the specified date falls within the

IsNextYear(DateTime) IsNextYear([OrderDate])
next year.

Returns True if the specified date falls within

IsNovember(DateTime) IsNovember([OrderDate])
November.

Returns True if the specified date falls within

IsOctober(DateTime) IsOctober([OrderDate])
October.

Returns True if the specified date/time values fall

IsSameDay(DateTime) IsSameDay([OrderDate])
within the same day.

Returns True if the specified date falls within

IsSeptember(DateTime) IsSeptember([OrderDate])
September.

Returns True if the specified date falls within the

IsThisMonth(DateTime) IsThisMonth([OrderDate])
current month.

Returns True if the specified date falls within the

IsThisWeek(DateTime) IsThisWeek([OrderDate])
current week.

Returns True if the specified date falls within the

year-to-date period. This period starts from the first
IsYearToDate(DateTime) IsYearToDate([OrderDate])
day of the current year and continues to the current
date (including the current date).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1084 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Returns True if the specified date falls within the

IsThisYear(DateTime) IsThisYear([OrderDate])
current year.

Returns a date-time value corresponding to the day AddDays(LocalDateTimeDayAfterTomorrow(),

LocalDateTimeDayAfterTomorrow()
after Tomorrow. 5)

Returns the DateTime value corresponding to the

LocalDateTimeLastMonth() AddMonths(LocalDateTimeLastMonth(), 5)
first day of the previous month.

Returns a date-time value corresponding to the first

LocalDateTimeLastWeek() AddDays(LocalDateTimeLastWeek(), 5)
day of the previous week.

Returns the DateTime value corresponding to the

LocalDateTimeLastYear() AddYears(LocalDateTimeLastYear(), 5)
first day of the previous year.

Returns a date-time value corresponding to the first

LocalDateTimeNextMonth() AddMonths(LocalDateTimeNextMonth(), 5)
day of the next month.

Returns a date-time value corresponding to the first

LocalDateTimeNextWeek() AddDays(LocalDateTimeNextWeek(), 5)
day of the following week.

Returns a date-time value corresponding to the first

LocalDateTimeNextYear() AddYears(LocalDateTimeNextYear(), 5)
day of the following year.

Returns a date-time value corresponding to the

LocalDateTimeNow() AddDays(LocalDateTimeNow(), 5)
current moment in time.

Returns a date-time value corresponding to the first

LocalDateTimeThisMonth() AddMonths(LocalDateTimeThisMonth(), 5)
day of the current month.

Returns a date-time value corresponding to the first

LocalDateTimeThisWeek() AddDays(LocalDateTimeThisWeek(), 5)
day of the current week.

Returns a date-time value corresponding to the first

LocalDateTimeThisYear() AddYears(LocalDateTimeThisYear(), 5)
day of the current year.

LocalDateTimeToday() Returns a date-time value corresponding to Today. AddDays(LocalDateTimeToday(), 5)

Returns a date-time value corresponding to

LocalDateTimeTomorrow() AddDays(LocalDateTimeTomorrow(), 5)
Tomorrow.

Returns the DateTime value corresponding to the AddMonths(LocalDateTimeTwoMonthAway(),

LocalDateTimeTwoMonthsAway()
first day of the following month. 5)

Returns the DateTime value corresponding to the

LocalDateTimeTwoWeeksAway() AddDays(LocalDateTimeTwoWeeksAway(), 5)
first day of the following week.

Returns the DateTime value corresponding to the

LocalDateTimeTwoYearsAway() AddYears(LocalDateTimeTwoYearsAway(), 5)
first day of the following year.

Returns the DateTime value corresponding to the AddYears(LocalDateTimeYearBeforeToday(),

LocalDateTimeYearBeforeToday()
day one year ago. 5)

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1085 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Returns a date-time value corresponding to

LocalDateTimeYesterday() AddDays(LocalDateTimeYesterday(), 5)
Yesterday.

Now() Returns the current system date and time. AddDays(Now(), 5)

Returns the current date. Regardless of the actual

Today() time, this function returns midnight of the current AddMonths(Today(), 1)
date.

Returns the current system date and time,

UtcNow() AddDays(UtcNow(), 7)
expressed as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Logical Functions

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Returns one of several specified values depending upon the

values of logical expressions.
The function can take 2N+1 arguments (N - the number of
specified logical expressions):
Iif(Expression1, True_Value1, ..., Each odd argument specifies a logical expression; Iif(Name = 'Bob', 1, Name =
ExpressionN, True_ValueN,
Each even argument specifies the value that is returned if 'Dan', 2, Name = 'Sam', 3, 4)")
False_Value)
the previous expression evaluates to true;
...
The last argument specifies the value that is returned if
the previously evaluated logical expressions yielded false.

IsNull(Value) Returns True if the specified Value is NULL. IsNull([OrderDate])

Returns Value1 if it is not set to NULL; otherwise, Value2 is IsNull([ShipDate],

IsNull(Value1, Value2)
returned. [RequiredDate])

Returns True if the specified String object is NULL or an empty

IsNullOrEmpty(String) IsNullOrEmpty([ProductName])
string; otherwise, False is returned.

Math Functions
FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Abs(Value) Returns the given numeric expression's absolute, positive value. Abs(1 - [Discount])

Returns a number's arccosine (the angle in radians, whose cosine is the given float
Acos(Value) Acos([Value])
expression).

Returns a number's arcsine (the angle in radians, whose sine is the given float
Asin(Value) Asin([Value])
expression).
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1086 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Returns a number's arctangent (the angle in radians, whose tangent is the given float
Atn(Value) Atn([Value])
expression).

Atn2(Value1,
Returns the angle whose tangent is the quotient of two specified numbers in radians. Atn2([Value1], [Value2])
Value2)

BigMul(Value1, BigMul([Amount],
Returns an Int64 containing the full product of two specified 32-bit numbers.
Value2) [Quantity])

Ceiling(Value) Returns the smallest integer that is greater than or equal to the numeric expression. Ceiling([Value])

Cos(Value) Returns the angle's cosine, in radians. Cos([Value])

Cosh(Value) Returns the angle's hyperbolic cosine, in radians. Cosh([Value])

Exp(Value) Returns the float expression's exponential value. Exp([Value])

Floor(Value) Returns the largest integer less than or equal to the numeric expression. Floor([Value])

Log(Value) Returns a specified number's natural logarithm. Log([Value])

Log(Value, Base) Returns the logarithm of a specified number in a specified Base. Log([Value], 2)

Log10(Value) Returns a specified number's base 10 logarithm. Log10([Value])

Max(Value1,
Returns the maximum value from the specified values. Max([Value1], [Value2])
Value2)

Min(Value1, Value2) Returns the minimum value from the specified values. Min([Value1], [Value2])

Power(Value,
Returns a specified number raised to a specified power. Power([Value], 3)
Power)

Rnd() Returns a random number that is less than 1, but greater than or equal to zero. Rnd()*100

Round(Value) Rounds the given value to the nearest integer. Round([Value])

Round(Value, Rounds the given value to the nearest integer, or to a specified number of decimal
Round([Value], 2)
Precision) places.

Sign(Value) Returns the positive (+1), zero (0), or negative (-1) sign of the given expression. Sign([Value])

Sin(Value) Returns the sine of the angle defined in radians. Sin([Value])

Sinh(Value) Returns the hyperbolic sine of the angle defined in radians. Sinh([Value])

Sqr(Value) Returns the square root of a given number. Sqr([Value])

Tan(Value) Returns the tangent of the angle defined in radians. Tan([Value])

Tanh(Value) Returns the hyperbolic tangent of the angle defined in radians. Tanh([Value])

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1087 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

ToDecimal(Value) Converts Value to an equivalent decimal number. ToDecimal([Value])

ToDouble(Value) Converts Value to an equivalent 64-bit double-precision floating-point number. ToDouble([Value])

ToFloat(Value) Converts Value to an equivalent 32-bit single-precision floating-point number. ToFloat([Value])

ToInt(Value) Converts Value to an equivalent 32-bit signed integer. ToInt([Value])

ToLong(Value) Converts Value to an equivalent 64-bit signed integer. ToLong([Value])

String Functions
FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Ascii(String) Returns the ASCII code value of the leftmost character in a character expression. Ascii('a')

Char(Number) Converts an integerASCIICode to a character. Char(65) + Char(51)

CharIndex(String1, Returns the starting position of String1 within String2, beginning from the zero CharIndex('e',
String2) character position to the end of a string. 'reportsnow')

CharIndex(String1, Returns the starting position of String1 within String2, beginning from the CharIndex('e',
String2, StartLocation) StartLocation character position to the end of a string. 'reportsnow', 2)

Concat(String1, ... , Returns a string value containing the concatenation of the current string with any Concat('A', ')',
StringN) additional strings. [ProductName])

Contains(String1, Contains([ProductName],
Returns True if SubString1 occurs within String1; otherwise, False is returned.
SubString1) 'dairy')

EndsWith(String1, Returns True if the end of String1 matches SubString1; otherwise, False is EndsWith([Description],
SubString1) returned. 'The end.')

Insert(String1,
Inserts String2 into String1 at the position specified by StartPositon Insert([Name], 0, 'ABC-')
StartPosition, String2)

Returns an integer containing either the number of characters in a string or the

Len(Value) Len([Description])
nominal number of bytes required to store a variable.

Lower(String) Returns String in lowercase. Lower([ProductName])

Left-aligns the defined string's characters, padding its left side with white space
PadLeft(String, Length) PadLeft([Name], 30)
characters up to a specified total length.

PadLeft(String, Length, Left-aligns the defined string's characters, padding its left side with the specified
PadLeft([Name], 30, '<')
Char) Char up to a specified total length.

Right-aligns the defined string’s characters, padding its left side with empty space
PadRight(String, Length) PadRight([Name], 30)
characters up to a specified total length.

PadRight(String, Length, Right-aligns the defined string’s characters, padding its left side with the specified
PadRight([Name], 30, '>')
Char) Char up to a specified total length.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1088 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Remove(String,
Deletes all the characters from this instance, beginning at a specified position. Remove([Name], 3)
StartPosition)

Remove(String, Deletes a specified number of characters from this instance, beginning at a

Remove([Name], 0, 3)
StartPosition, Length) specified position.

Replace(String,
Returns a copy of String1, in which SubString2 has been replaced with String3. Replace([Name], 'The ', '')
SubString2, String3)

Reverse(String) Reverses the order of elements within String. Reverse([Name])

StartsWith(String1, StartsWith([Title], 'The

Returns True if the beginning of String1 matches SubString1; otherwise, False.
SubString1) best')

Substring(String, Retrieves a substring from String. The substring starts at StartPosition and has a Substring([Description],
StartPosition, Length) specified Length. 2, 3)

Substring(String, Substring([Description],
Retrieves a substring from String. The substring starts at StartPosition.
StartPosition) 2)

ToStr(Value) Returns a string representation of an object. ToStr([ID])

Trim(String) Removes all leading and trailing SPACE characters from String. Trim([ProductName])

Upper(String) Returns String in uppercase. Upper([ProductName])

Functions for Expression Bindings and Calculated Fields

Below is a list of functions that are used to construct expression bindings and calculated fields:

FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

[CategoryName]+NewLine()+
[Description]
Result:
NewLine() Returns the newline string defined for the current environment.
Beverages
Soft drinks, coffees, teas,
beers and ales.

FormatString('{0:$0.00}',
FormatString(Format, Returns the specified string with formatted field values. See Format Data for [UnitPrice])
Value1, ... , ValueN) details.
Result: $45.60

Rgb(30,200,150)
Rgb(Red, Green, Returns a string defining a color using the Red, Green, and Blue color channel
Blue) values. Result: '30,200,150'

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1089 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Argb(Alpha, Red, Returns a string defining a color using the Alpha, Red, Green, and Blue color Argb(1,200, 30, 200)
Green, Blue) channel values. Result: '1,200,30,200'

Join(?CategoriesParameter)
Concatenates the multi-value report parameter's values into a string. This
function is useful when you bind a multi-value parameter to a label to display the Result: Beverages,
parameter's values in a report. Condiments

This function has two overloads: Join(?CategoriesParameter,

Join() newline())
Join(parameter) - concatenates the specified parameter's values using
comma as a separator. Result:
Join(parameter, separator) - concatenates the specified parameter's values Beverages
using the specified separator.
Condiments

## Functions for Summary Expression Editor Use the following functions when calculating summaries across a report and its
groups:
FU NCTIO N D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

Calculates the average of all the values within the specified summary
sumAvg(Expression) sumAvg([UnitPrice])
region (group, page or report).

Counts the number of values within the specified summary region

(group, page or report). In a simple scenario, you may not pass a
sumCount(Expression) parameter. sumCount([UnitPrice])
See also: Counting the Number of Records in a Report or Group,
Counting the Number of Groups in a Report

Calculates the average of all the distinct values within the specified
sumDAvg(Expression) sumDAvg([UnitPrice])
summary region (group, page or report).

Counts the number of distinct values within the specified summary

sumDCount(Expression) region (group, page or report). In a simple scenario, you may not pass a sumDCount([UnitPrice])
parameter.

Calculates the standard deviation of all the distinct values within the
sumDStdDev(Expression) sumDStdDev([UnitPrice])
specified summary region (group, page or report).

Calculates the standard population deviation of all the distinct values

sumDStdDevP(Expression) sumDStdDevP([UnitPrice])
within the specified summary region (group, page or report).

Calculates the total of all the distinct values within the specified
sumDSum(Expression) sumDSum([UnitPrice])
summary region (group, page or report).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1090 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculates the amount of variance for all the distinct values within the
sumDVar(Expression) sumDVar([UnitPrice])
specified summary region (group, page or report).

Calculates the population variance of all the distinct values within the
sumDVarP(Expression) sumDVarP([UnitPrice])
specified summary region (group, page or report).

Calculates the maximum of all the values within the specified summary
sumMax(Expression) sumMax([UnitPrice])
region (group, page or report).

Finds the middle number within a sequence.

Note that if the total number of elements is odd, this function returns
sumMedian(Expression) the value of the middle number in a sequence. If the total number of sumMedian([UnitPrice])
elements is even, this function returns the arithmetical mean of the two
middle numbers.

Calculates the minimum of all the values within the specified summary
sumMin(Expression) sumMin([UnitPrice])
region (group, page or report).

Calculates the percent ratio of the current data row's value to the total
sumPercentage(Expression) of all the values within the specified summary region (group, page or sumPercentage([UnitPrice])
report).

Returns the current record number in the specified summary region

(group, page or report). This means for instance, if the summary is
calculated for a group, then the record number is calculated only within
sumRecordNumber(Expression) that group, and is reset every time a new group is started. sumRecordNumber()
In a simple scenario, you may not pass a parameter.
See also: Displaying Row Numbers in a Report, Group or Page

Summarizes all the values, which were printed before the current data
sumRunningSum(Expression) sumRunningSum([UnitPrice])
row, with the current data row's value.

Calculates the standard deviation of all the values within the specified
sumStdDev(Expression) sumStdDev([UnitPrice])
summary region (group, page or report).

Calculates the standard population deviation of all the values within the
sumStdDevP(Expression) sumStdDevP([UnitPrice])
specified summary region (group, page or report).

Calculates the total of all the values within the specified summary region
sumSum(Expression) sumSum([UnitsInStock])
(group, page or report).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1091 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Calculates the amount of variance for all the values within the specified
sumVar(Expression) sumVar([UnitPrice])
summary region (group, page or report).

Calculates the population variance of all the values within the specified
sumVarP(Expression) sumVarP([UnitPrice])
summary region (group, page or report).

Report Items In Expressions

A report's elements are displayed in the Report Designer's Report Explorer. You can access these elements and their properties in
expressions. The following example demonstrates how to set a label's BackColor property to the other label's BackColor property
value.
[ReportItems].[xrLabel2].[BackColor]
 Tip

[ReportItems] is a list that provides access to all report items.

Note

You cannot use the ReportItems collection in a Calculated Field's expression.

Variables
V AR IAB LE D ES CR IPTIO N E X AMPLE

[DataSource.RowCount] != 0
Returns the total amount of data
DataSource.RowCount Result: When using this expression for a control's Visible property,
rows in a data source.
the control is not displayed if there is no data in the data source.

Iif([DataSource.CurrentRowIndex] % 2 = 0, 'red', 'green')

Returns a zero-based index of the
DataSource.CurrentRowIndex Result: When this expression is used for a table row's BackColor
current data row in a data source.
property, odd rows are colored in red and even rows - in green.

Note

These variables are not valid when the report includes a table or contents.

Report Parameters
Use the following syntax to insert parameters into expressions:
Type a question mark before a parameter's name.
?parameter1
(Obsolete approach) Use the "Parameters." prefix before a report parameter's name.
[Parameters.parameter1]

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1092 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Collection Elements Verification

Use brackets "[]" to check if a collection contains an element that satisfies a condition. The following expression returns true if the
Accounts collection contains at least one element that satisfies the [Amount] == 100 condition:
[Accounts][[Amount] == 100]
The following expression returns false if the Accounts collection is empty:
[Accounts][]
Refer to the topic to see an example how to use this syntax.

Parent Relating Operator

Use the parent relating operator ('^' character) to refer to a parent in expressions written in the context of a child. You can apply
this operator successively to navigate multiple parent relationships.
You can use this operator to refer to the currently processed report group. This allows you to calculate aggregates within groups
using expressions like the following:
[][[^.CategoryID] == [CategoryID]].Sum([UnitPrice])
Refer to the topic for details.

Grouping Clauses with Brackets

It is important to use brackets to ensure that your expression returns the intended results.
For instance, the following expression for objects of the Customer type returns all of the Customers where an Account exists with
a Date of 8/25/2006 and where an account exists with an Amount of 100:
[Accounts][[Date] == #8/25/2006#] && [Accounts][[Amount] == 100]
Construct the expression as in the following example to search for all Customers that have an Account with both a Date of
8/25/2006 and an Amount of 100:
[Accounts][[Date] == #8/25/2006# && [Amount] == 100]

Operator Precedence
When an expression contains multiple operators, their precedence controls the order in which expression elements are evaluated.
Literal values
Parameters
Identifiers
OR (left-associative)
AND (left-associative)
'.' relationship qualifier (left-associative)
==, !=
<, >, <=, >=
-, + (left-associative)
*, /, % (left-associative)
NOT
unary -
In
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1093 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Iif
Trim(), Len(), Substring(), IsNull()
'[]' (for set-restriction)
'()'
The default precedence can be changed by grouping elements with parentheses. For instance, the operators are performed in a
default order in the first of the following two code samples. In the second code sample, the addition operation is performed first,
because its associated elements are grouped with parentheses, and the multiplication operation is performed last.
Accounts[Amount == 2 + 48 * 2]
Accounts[Amount == (2 + 48) * 2]

Case Sensitivity
Operators are case insensitive. Although field values’ case sensitivity depends on the data source.
Note

A data source affects certain operators' behavior. For instance, by default, the SQL Server Express 2005 is configured as case
insensitive. In this case, the following expression always evaluates to true:
Lower(Name) == Upper(Name)

Escaping Keywords
You can mark a keyword-like field name with an escape character (@ sign). In the expression below, the CriteriaOperator.Parse
method interprets @Or as the field named "Or", not the logical operator OR.
@Or = 'value'

Escape Characters
Use a backslash () as an escape character for characters in expressions. Examples:
[
\
'

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1094 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Preview, Print and Export Reports

Preview a Report
To switch a report to the print preview mode, click the Preview tab. You will see your report populated with data and broken
down into pages, as specified.

Note

To learn more about the options available in the print preview mode, refer to the Print Preview for WinForms section of this
documentation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1095 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Print a Report
When in the Print Preview mode, you can print out your report using the appropriate menu and toolbar commands.

Export a Report
When in the Print Preview mode, you can export your report to files in different formats. The resulting files can either be saved to
the hard drive or sent by e-mail.

The following documents describe the basics of report exporting and format-specific export options.
Exporting from Print Preview
PDF-Specific Export Options
HTML-Specific Export Options
MHT-Specific Export Options
RTF-Specific Export Options
XLS-Specific Export Options
XLSX-Specific Export Options
CSV-Specific Export Options
TXT-Specific Export Options
Image-Specific Export Options
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1096 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Report Designer Tools

The topics in this section describe the main tools and features available in the Report Designer:
Report Wizard
Toolbox
Toolbar
UI Panels

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1097 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Report Wizard
The Report Wizard allows you to add a report using one of the following templates:
Blank
Creates a new blank report that is not bound to a data source. Choose this option to design your report without using the
wizard.
Table Report
Allows you to create a table report, connect it to a data source and configure basic report layout settings.
Vertical Report
Allows you to create a vertical report, connect it to a data source and configure basic report layout settings.
Template
Enables you to create a new report based on available predefined templates.
Labels
Allows you to select from different customizable layouts to create labels, badges or price tags.

Run the Report Wizard

Use one of the following ways to invoke the Report Wizard.
Create a new report
Use the New Report via Wizard command to create a new report based on a Report Wizard template.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1098 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Edit an existing report

Click the report's Smart Tag and then the Design in Report Wizard... context link in the invoked actions list.
Note

The new report layout overrides the initial report layout.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1099 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Choose a Report Type

On this wizard page, you can choose the report type you want to create.

The following report types are available.

Blank Report
Table Report
Vertical Report
Labels
Template

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1100 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Blank Report
This topic describes how to add a new blank report to an application at design time in Visual Studio by using the Report Wizard.
To create an empty report, run the Report Wizard, select Blank and click Finish.

The following image illustrates the default layout of a newly added empty report.

To learn how to connect a report to data and construct the report layout, see the following topic: Bind to Data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1101 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Table Report
The topics in this section describe how to create a table report and connect it to data at design time within Visual Studio using the
Data Source Wizard.
To create a new report and connect it to data, run the Report Wizard and select Table Report.

The Report Wizard can include the following pages:

Choose Fields to Display in a Report
Add Grouping Levels
Specify Summary Options
Specify Report Page Settings
Specify a Report Color Scheme
Set the Report Title

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1102 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Choose Fields to Display in a Report

This wizard page allows you to select data members for a report and its detail reports as well as choose data fields to display in
these reports.

The list on the left-hand side displays queries and master-detail relationships specified on the previous wizard page. Select
required check boxes to create relevant reports and assign their DataMember property.
In the list on the right-hand side, choose data fields from the selected data members to include into corresponding reports.
After completing the wizard, the report is constructed according to the following:
If you select one query, it assigns to the report's DataMember property. The selected fields with corresponding captions
are automatically added to the report's Detail Band.
If you select two or more queries, this creates the Detail Report Band for each query at the same hierarchical level. The
DataMember properties of these detail reports are assigned to the corresponding queries.
For each selected master-detail relationship, the Detail Report Band with the DataMember property set to this relationship
is created under the corresponding master report.
You can stop the wizard at this step by clicking Finish. The created report looks similar to the image below.

If you want to customize the report further, click Next to go to the Add Grouping Levels page.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1103 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add Grouping Levels

This page allows you to group data in your report. If you do not need to group your data, simply click Next on this page to skip
this step.

Nested grouping and grouping against multiple fields are fully supported. The following image illustrates all basic grouping types.

The list on the left-hand side displays data fields that can be used to group data. To apply grouping, do one of the following.
Select columns and click the right arrow button.
Double-click columns.
To remove a grouping field, double-click it in the list on the right-hand side, or select it and click the left arrow button. You can
also change the order of grouping fields using the up arrow and down arrow buttons.
You can stop the wizard on this step by clicking Finish. In this case, your report will look similar to the image below.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1104 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

If you want to customize your report further, click Next. If data grouping has been applied on this page, you will proceed to the
Specify Summary Options page. If you have not grouped your data, you will skip the summaries step and go to the Specify Report
Page Settings page.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1105 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Summary Options

Note

This wizard step is only available if you have applied data grouping in the previous step (Add Grouping Levels). If you have not
grouped data, this step is skipped.
On this wizard page, you can specify summaries to calculate in the selected reports.

Use the drop-down list at the top of the wizard page to choose a required report.
In the Fields table column, you can select an available numerical or date-time field. To specify which functions should be
calculated for the selected field, enable the corresponding check boxes in the Summary functions drop-down.
The specified summaries are displayed in the report footer and after corresponding groups (if you have grouped report data on
the previous wizard page).
If data fields can contain empty values and you do not want to take these values into account when calculating totals, select the
Ignore null values check box. Otherwise, these values are treated as zeros for numeric fields and the earliest system date for
date-time fields.
You can stop the wizard at this step by clicking Finish. The created report looks similar to the image below.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1106 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

If you want to customize the report further, click Next to proceed to the next wizard page: Set the Report Title.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1107 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Report Page Settings

At this step, set up the report's page.

This wizard page allows you to specify the following report properties:
Report Page Size
Unit
Choose between Inch, Millimeter and Pixel to specify size options on this wizard page. After you finish the wizard, the Report
Designer transforms the specified units to HundredthsOfAnInch, TenthsOfAMillimeter or Pixels to provide a more precise
report element alignment.
Width and Height
These properties are read-only until you set the Size option to Custom.
Page Margins
Use the report page preview to drag the margins to a required position.
Page Orientation
You can change these settings after you finish the wizard in the Report Designer's Property Grid.
If you want to customize the report further, click Next to proceed to the next wizard page: Choose a Report Color Scheme.
Otherwise, click Finish to complete report customization.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1108 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Choose a Report Color Scheme

This page allows you to choose a base color for report styles.

The wizard creates styles based on the chosen color for the first level report controls and applies styles with more transparent
colors to controls on deeper levels.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1109 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Set the Report Title

On this page, specify the title for the report and click Finish to exit the wizard.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1110 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Vertical Report
The topics in this section describe how to create a vertical report - a table report where record fields are displayed vertically and
data records are printed horizontally.
Run the Report Wizard and select Vertical Report to create a new vertical report and connect it to data.

The Report Wizard can include the following pages (similar to the Table Report type):
Choose Fields to Display in a Report
Add Grouping Levels
Specify Summary Options
Specify Report Page Settings
Specify a Report Color Scheme
Set the Report Title
After you finish the wizard, it creates a report with vertical bands: Vertical Header, Vertical Detail and Vertical Total.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1111 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1112 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Labels
This topic describes the steps required to create a report with labels by using the Report Wizard.

Label report creation consists of the following two steps.

Select the Label Type
Customize the Label Options

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1113 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Select the Label Type

This page is intended to select a label type from numerous predefined types.
On this page you can choose the proper setting from the Label Products and the Product Number drop-down lists. The
selected type defines the label's size and layout, as well as the page type, which is default for this label.

Then, click Next to proceed to the Customize the Label Options page.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1114 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customize the Label Options

This page is intended to customize the label's options.
On this page you can adjust the label's layout parameters and choose the Page Size.

Click Finish to complete report creation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1115 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Template
The topics in this section describe how to create a report based on available predefined templates in Visual Studio at design time.
Run the Report Wizard and select the Template option on its first page.

Template report creation includes the following steps.

Choose a Report Template
Map Report Template Fields
Specify Report Template Options

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1116 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This wizard page allows you to choose one of the predefined report layouts.

Once the wizard finishes, the selected template defines the arrangement of the appropriate elements in a report and their
appearance settings. You can stop the wizard on this page by clicking Finish.
Click Next to continue report the wizard page: Map Report Template Fields.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1117 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Map Report Template Fields

On this wizard page, you can specify the relationships between the data source's fields and predefined template fields, or provide
static values for the template fields.
The tree on the left-hand side displays data source fields. The grid on the right-hand side contains two columns with available
template fields and their values divided into categories.
Drag and drop the required data field from the tree onto the corresponding template field to map these fields.

You can also select the necessary data field from the Template Field Value drop-down list.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1118 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Select None in the drop-down list to delete a mapping.

You can also manually enter a static field value in the Template Field Value column.
If you do not provide values to specific template fields, the corresponding elements are added to the resulting report anyway.
You can stop the wizard at this step by clicking Finish or click Next to proceed to the following wizard page: Specify Report
Template Options.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1119 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Report Template Options

The following wizard page allows you to specify currency formatting options and the discount/tax options.

In the Currency section, select the currency symbol and format for displaying price values.
In the Discount and Tax section, you can specify the following settings.
Range - Defines whether the discount/tax value should not be taken into account (None), or should be used for individual
items (Unit) or for the entire order (Total).
Value - Specifies the discount/tax value that can be static or bound to the data source field.
Type - Specifies the type of the discount/tax value (flat, fixed or percentage).
Inclusive (for the tax only) - Indicates whether the tax value is included into product prices.
Click Finish to complete the wizard and get the resulting report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1120 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Control Toolbox
The Control Toolbox lists all available controls and allows you to add them to your report.

Available Controls
The available report controls can be divided into the following categories:
G eneral Content
The following controls are most commonly used to display data in a report.

Bar Code Check Box Gauge Label Character Comb Picture Box Rich Text Table

Extended D ata
The following controls are connected to data individually, without accessing a report's data source.

Chart Pivot Grid

Report Layout
The following controls allow you to draw shapes in a report and customize the report layout.

Cross-Band Line Cross-Band Box Line Page Break Panel Shape Subreport

D ocument Statistics
The dynamic content of the following controls is not obtained from a data source.

Page Info Table of Contents

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1121 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Add a Control to a Report

To add a control from the Toolbox, do one of the following.
Double-click an item in the Toolbox for the appropriate control, which will be created at the Detail band's top left corner.
Drag and drop an item from the Toolbox onto the required location within a report.

Select an item in the Toolbox, and then click the required location within a report.
Select an item in the Toolbox, and then indicate the bounding rectangle by holding the left mouse button.

Select the Pointer item when you need to perform selection, re-positioning or resizing operations. It is automatically selected
after you drop a control onto a report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1122 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Toolbar
The Report Designer Toolbar includes the Home, Layout, Page, and View tabs for general commands as well as contextual tabs
for commands relating to the selected report controls.

Home Tab

Use commands in this tab to

select new DAS reports to be used by the ProReport;
add mapped parameters, calculated fields, and report parameters;
Publish the ProReport to DAS;
delete the selected report elements, place them on the clipboard and paste them onto report bands;
customize font, color, formatting and alignment settings;
create new styles based on the selected control's appearance settings and then apply the created styles to other controls.
Access design and user notes;

Quick Start

Use commands in this tab to

Launch the report wizard;
Automatically layout elements from your DAS report onto the ProReport
Customize the paper size and zero margins
Create a report the size of a header or footer so it can be embedded into other reports.

Data Source

Use commands in this tab to

Switch the ProReport between DAS reports and databox data sources.

Layout Tab

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1123 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

This tab provides commands that

align report elements to each other or the snap grid;
change the report element size relative to other report elements and to fit the snap grid or the parent container;
change the stacked elements' order;
select the snapping mode.

Page Tab

These commands allow you to

set the page margins, orientation, and paper size;
specify the page's background color;
add watermark text to a report or turn a picture into a report's background.

View Tab

This tab enables you to

turn on/off export and printing warnings to highlight intersecting controls and controls placed outside page margins;
display the document's watermark on the design surface;
specify whether to draw the snap grid;
zoom the design surface;
manage the Report Designer panels' visibility.

Contextual Tabs
Contextual tabs are visible whenever you select a specific report element and provide commands applicable to the selected
element's type.
The following image demonstrates the table cell's available tabs:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1124 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1125 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

UI Panels
The Report Designer includes the following panels:
Report Explorer
Field List
Property Grid
Group and Sort Panel

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1126 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Report Explorer
The Report Explorer shows a report's structure in a tree-like form providing easy access to report elements. Additionally, the
Report Explorer contains the Components node, which displays non-visual report components, such as data objects created
when binding a report to a data source.

Once a report element or component has been selected in the Report Explorer, its settings can be changed using the Toolbar or
Property Grid. You can also right-click elements and components to invoke their context menu.

Data-aware controls are marked with a special database icon in the Report Explorer.

The Report Explorer also provides quick access to all styles available for a report. You can manage styles using commands
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1127 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

available in the context menu. To invoke a context menu, right-click the corresponding root node or their sub-node.

To apply a style to a report control, drag it from the Report Explorer onto the required report control.
If the Report Explorer is hidden, you can enable it. To do this, select in the Windows | Report Explorer on the Toolbar's View
page.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1128 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Field List
This panel displays the schema of a report's data sources. You can right-click a data source item to access its settings.
The Field List enables you to perform the following actions.

Bind controls to data

Dropping a field onto a report's surface creates a new report control bound to a corresponding field.

Dropping a field onto an existing control binds this control to a corresponding field.

You can preserve data bindings of an existing control by holding down the CTRL key when dropping a data field on this control.
This creates a new report control on top of the existing control.

Create specific controls

To create a data-bound control of a specific type, do any of the following:
Hold down the SHIFT key and drop a data field onto a report's surface.
Right-click a corresponding data field and drop it onto a report's surface.
This invokes a context menu enabling you to select which control to create.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1129 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Create tables
Dropping an entire data table onto a report creates a table with its columns bound to fields contained in the data table.

To select multiple fields, click them with holding the CTRL or SHIFT key. Dropping these fields onto a report creates a new table
with its cells bound to the corresponding fields.

To create column headers, right-click the required fields with holding the CTRL or SHIFT key and drop them onto a report surface.
This creates a new table with its cells displaying the field names.

Data shaping operations

In addition, the Field List can help you solve the following tasks:
Add calculated fields to data columns for performing various calculations in a report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1130 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Manage the collection of report parameters.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1131 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Property Grid
The Property Grid allows you to access and customize the report's and report elements' settings.

Select a Report Element

Do one of the following to select an element and show its properties in the Property Grid:
Select a required element in the drop-down list at the top of the Property Grid.

Click a required element in the design surface.

Select a required element in the Report Explorer.

Property Grid Tabs

The Property Grid displays properties in tabs.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1132 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Display Favorite Properties

The Favorites tab displays favorite or most frequently used properties.

Click the Edit Favorite Properties context menu item to set up the favorite properties. In the invoked Favorite Properties
Editor, enable check boxes for the controls' properties to include these properties to the favorite list.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1133 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Change Property Values

The Property Grid displays a green marker if a property's default value changes.

Right-click a property's editor to reset the value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1134 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Expressions
If expression bindings are enabled, the Property Grid allows you to specify expressions that can include two or more data fields
and various functions. Click a property marker to see whether the invoked context menu has the PropertyName Expression
item.

Click this item to specify an expression in the invoked Expression Editor.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1135 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Property Grid highlights properties that have an assigned expression.

Click a property's marker and choose Reset to reset the property value.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1136 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note

The Reset command resets the both the expression and the value you specified using the property editor.

Search Properties
The Property Grid's search box allows you to search for a property. When you type within the search box, the Property Grid
automatically creates a search criteria based on the entered text and filters the list of available properties.

If you type two substrings separated by a space character, these substrings are considered as individual conditions combined by
the OR logical operator. To find properties that contain both substrings (i.e., to use the AND logical operator), enclose the entered
string in quotation marks.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1137 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Group and Sort Panel

The Group and Sort Panel allows you to quickly apply grouping and sorting to your report data.

To create a new grouping or sorting criterion, simply click Add a Group or Add a Sort.
Then, to control whether the corresponding Group Header or Footer band should be displayed, use the Show Header and Show
Footer check boxes.
The Sort Order drop-down list allows you to specify a sorting mode (ascending or descending) or disable sorting.
You can change the order in which multiple grouping and sorting criteria are to be performed, using the Move Up and Move
Down buttons.
To remove a grouping or sorting criterion, select it, and click Delete.
Note

If the Group and Sort Panel is hidden, you can enable it To do this, select in the Windows | Group and Sort on the Toolbar's
View page.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1138 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Print Preview
The Print Preview user interface may vary depending on your application platform.
The following topics are available in this section.
Print Preview for WinForms

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1139 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Print Preview for WinForms

This section describes the capabilities provided by the Print Preview form.

Printing and Page Setup

Print a Document via the Print Dialog
Print a Document Using Default Settings
Change Printing Settings via the Page Setup Dialog
Specify Page Margins in Print Preview

Headers and Footers

Insert Page Header and Page Footer into Printed Documents
Insert Page Numbers into Printed Documents
Insert Date and Time into Printed Documents
Insert the User Name into Printed Documents
Insert a Logo into Printed Documents

Scaling
Scale Print Preview by Entering a Zoom Factor
Scale Print Preview by Specifying Width in Pages

Zooming
Zoom Print Preview In or Out
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1140 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Zoom Print Preview by Entering a Zoom Factor

Zoom Print Preview to Show Whole Pages or Fit Content
Show Two or More Pages in Print Preview

Viewing and Navigating

Navigate Between Pages in Print Preview
Use the Hand Tool in Print Preview
Navigate in Print Preview Using Bookmarks
Navigate in Print Preview Using Thumbnails
Search for a Specific Text in Print Preview
Switch Print Preview Display Mode

Interactivity
Content Editing in Print Preview

Watermark and Background

Change Watermark and Background Settings in Print Preview
Remove a Watermark in Print Preview

Exporting
Exporting from Print Preview
PDF-Specific Export Options
HTML-Specific Export Options
MHT-Specific Export Options
RTF-Specific Export Options
DOCX-Specific Export Options
XLS-Specific Export Options
XLSX-Specific Export Options
CSV-Specific Export Options
TXT-Specific Export Options
Image-Specific Export Options

Passing Parameters
Passing Parameters in Print Preview

Miscellaneous
Customize Printing Settings of Charts
Customize Printing Settings of Grids
Customize Printing Settings of Pivot Tables
Customize Printing Settings of Tree Views
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1141 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Warnings and Error Messages

Warnings and Error Messages in Print Previewd)

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1142 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Print a Document via the Print Dialog

To print a document, do one of the following.
Click the Print button on the toolbar, or press CTRL+P.
On the File menu, click Print....
The Print dialog will be invoked.

Specify the necessary settings and click Print.

To print a document without invoking the Print dialog, see the Print a Document Using Default Settings topic.
Note

If you try to print a document whose margins are outside of the printable area, you'll see a warning message. Click Yes to print
the document anyway, if you are sure that your printer supports the specified page margins.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1143 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Print a Document Using Default Settings

To send a document directly to the default printer without customizing print settings, do one of the following.
Click the Quick Print button on the toolbar.
On the File menu, click Print.
To learn how to select a printer, number of copies, and other printing options, refer to the Print a Document via the Print Dialog
topic.
Note

If you try to print a document whose margins are outside of the printable area, you'll see a warning message. Click Yes to print
the document anyway, if you're sure that your printer supports the specified page margins.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1144 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Change Printing Settings via the Page Setup Dialog

To start the page setup dialog box, do one of the following.
Click the Page Setup button on the toolbar.
On the File menu, click Page Setup...
The following dialog will be invoked.

This dialog allows you to do the following:

Change page orientation (choose Portrait or Landscape).
Select paper size.
Change page margins. (This can also be done in the Print Preview dialog)

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1145 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Page Margins in Print Preview

To set document page margins, do one of the following.
Use the Page Setup dialog
In the Page Setup dialog, enter the required top, left, bottom and right page margins' values into the appropriate editors.

Then, click OK to save changes.

Use drag-and-drop in the Print Preview window
To use this approach, point to the dotted line indicating the margin's border. When the pointer changes to , drag the
pointer to move the margin.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1146 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Print Selection
To print only the selected content of the previewed document, do the following.
1. Select the content of the previewed document by holding the left mouse button and dragging the mouse pointer to create a
selection box. Expand the selection box to fit all of the content you wish to print. The selected document elements are
highlighted.

2. Right-click anywhere within the highlighted area of the document and select Print... in the context menu.

3. In the invoked Print dialog, specify the required settings and click Print.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1147 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1148 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Insert Page Header and Page Footer into Printed Documents

To insert a page header and page footer into a document, click the Header and Footer button on the toolbar. This will invoke
the Header and Footer dialog.

Specify header and footer content using the appropriate text boxes, depending on the required alignment.
If needed, you can also adjust vertical alignment and font settings.
Click OK to save changes and close the dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1149 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Insert Page Numbers into Printed Documents

To insert or remove page numbers from a document, first invoke the Header and Footer dialog.
Focus a text box, depending on the required alignment, and do one of the following:
If you need to simply display the current page number, click the Page Number button.
If you need to display the page number out of the total number of pages, click the Page # of Pages # button.
When you click one of these buttons, the dialog adds an alias within square brackets at the current cursor position. You can
surround this alias with any text you like. If you no longer need page numbers in your document, delete this alias.
Click OK to save changes and close the dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1150 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Insert Date and Time into Printed Documents

If you need to display the date and time when a document is printed, first invoke the Header and Footer dialog.
Then, click on the appropriate text box, depending on the required alignment, and do the following:
To add a date stamp, click the Date Printed button.
To add a time stamp, click the Time Printed button.
When you click one of these buttons, the dialog adds an alias within square brackets at the current cursor position. You can
surround this alias with any text you like. If you no longer need to display date and time in your document, delete this alias.
Click OK to save changes and close the dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1151 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Insert the User Name into Printed Documents

To insert user name into a document's header or footer, first invoke the Header and Footer dialog.
Then, focus an appropriate text box, depending on the required alignment, and click the User Name button.
When you click this button, the dialog adds an alias within square brackets at the current cursor position. You can surround this
alias with any text you like. If you no longer need to display user name in your document, delete this alias.
Click OK to save changes and close the dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1152 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Insert a Logo into Printed Documents

To insert a logo into a document's header or footer, first invoke the Header and Footer dialog.
Then, focus an appropriate text box, depending on the required alignment, and click the Image button.
Select the image from the dropdown list.

Click OK to save changes and close the dialog.

Note

If the Image button is disabled, then logo insertion is not supported by your software vendor.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1153 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Scale Print Preview by Entering a Zoom Factor

To scale a document, click the Scale button on the toolbar. The Scaling dialog will be invoked.
Set the required percentage value in the editor.

Click OK to save changes and close the dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1154 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Scale Print Preview by Specifying Width in Pages

To scale a document to fit into X pages, click the Scale button on the toolbar. The Scaling dialog will be invoked.
Set the required number of pages in the editor.

Click OK to save changes and close the dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1155 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Zoom Print Preview In or Out

Zoom In and Out of a Document
To zoom in a document, click the Zoom In button on the toolbar, or press CTRL+PLUS SIGN.
To zoom out of a document, click the Zoom Out button on the toolbar, or press CTRL+MINUS SIGN.
To zoom in or out of a document, you can also hold down CTRL and rotate the mouse wheel.

Use the Magnifier Tool

Use the Magnifier Tool to switch between 100% and "fit whole page" views. Simply click anywhere in the document, to toggle
views.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1156 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Zoom Print Preview by Entering a Zoom Factor

To zoom to a specific zoom factor, do one of the following.
Click the Zooming dropdown list button. The following list will be invoked.

Choose one of the zoom factor presets.

You can manually enter any value into the Zooming box.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1157 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Zoom Print Preview to Show Whole Pages or Fit Content

Zoom Documents to Fit Page Content
To zoom to the page or text width, click the Zooming box. The following list will be invoked.

To zoom to the page width, click Page Width.

To zoom to the text width, click Text Width.
Note

If the preview window will be resized later, the current zoom factor will also be changed, to fit the current page or text width.

Zoom Documents to Display Whole Pages

First, invoke the zooming dropdown (see above).
To display one whole page at a time, click Whole Page.
To fit two pages into the current view, click Two Pages.
Note

If the preview window will be resized later, the current zoom factor will be also changed in order to fit one or two pages.
If you want to preview more pages simultaneously, refer to the Show Two or More Pages in Print Preview topic.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1158 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Show Two or More Pages in Print Preview

To preview two or more pages at one time, click the Multiple Pages button on the toolbar.
Then, in the invoked dialog, hover over the page icons, depending on the required number of pages to preview.

When the required number of pages has been selected, click the popup window to close it and apply changes to the document
view.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1159 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Navigate Between Pages in Print Preview

To navigate between pages, use the scrollbars or navigation buttons on the toolbar. These buttons allow you to
switch to the first, previous, next, or last page of a document.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1160 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Use the Hand Tool in Print Preview

The Hand Tool enables you to scroll content by dragging the document instead of using scrollbars.
To activate the Hand Tool, click the Hand Tool button on the toolbar.

Then, after you click a document's page, the mouse pointer is changed from to . Drag the mouse pointer to scroll the
document.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1161 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Navigate in Print Preview Using Bookmarks

If a document contains bookmarks, you can use the Document Map panel for navigation purposes.
To toggle this panel's visibility, use the Docuemnt Map button on the toolbar. To go to a specific bookmark, click it in the
Document Map. As a result, the Print Preview navigates to a document element associated with the bookmark.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1162 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Navigate in Print Preview Using Thumbnails

You can use thumbnails to quickly navigate between document pages.
To show report thumbnails, click the Thumbnails button on the toolbar.

Click a thumbnail to navigate to the corresponding document page.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1163 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Search for a Specific Text in Print Preview

To search for a specific text throughout a document, click the Search button on the toolbar, or press CTRL+F. This invokes the
Search panel.

To start searching for the terms, click Next or press ENTER. To find the next occurrence of the terms, do the same. To find the
previous occurrence of the terms, click Previous.
The Search panel also provides the settings button, which invokes the dedicated submenu allowing you to specify whether or not
to use a case-sensitive search and whether or not you need to match the whole word during the search.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1164 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Switch Print Preview Display Mode

Enable the Facing Layout View
To enable the facing layout view, on the View menu, point to Page Layout, and then click Facing.

This allows you to preserve an entire page view, whether you resize the preview window, scroll a document or choose a multiple
page view mode.

Enable the Continuous Layout View

To enable the continuous layout view, on the View menu, point to Page Layout, and then click Continuous.

This allows you to continuously scroll a page layout view.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1165 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Content Editing in Print Preview

If content editing is enabled for document elements, it is possible to customize the corresponding field values in Print Preview.
To highlight all editing fields available in the document, click the Editing Fields button on the toolbar. This button is not
available when there are no such fields in the document.
Clicking a field will invoke an appropriate editor. To apply the entered values and navigate between editing fields, use the TAB and
SHIFT+TAB keys. In addition to editing text, you can switch check box states.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1166 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Change Watermark and Background Settings in Print Preview

Invoke the Watermark Dialog
To add a watermark to a document, click the Watermark button on the toolbar, or click Watermark... on the Background
menu. The Watermark dialog will be invoked.

Add a Text Watermark

To add a text watermark, open the Text Watermark tab.

Input the required text, or choose one from the provided options. If required, define other text properties, such as direction, color,
font, size, transparency, etc.

Add an Image Watermark

To add a picture watermark, open the Picture Watermark tab.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1167 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Load the image and customize its properties, such as size mode, horizontal and vertical alignment, tiling, transparency, etc.

Specify the Pages Where you will Display Your Watermark

Specify the required pages to apply a watermark in the Page Range section of the dialog.

Separate page numbers with commas, or specify page ranges using a dash.

Add a Background Color to a Document

To add a background color to a document, click the Background Color button on the toolbar, or click Color... on the
Background menu. The Background Color dialog will be invoked.

Then, choose a color from the Custom, Web or System palettes.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1168 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Remove a Watermark in Print Preview

To remove a watermark from a document, invoke the Watermark dialog. Click Clear All, then click OK to save changes and close
the dialog.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1169 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Exporting from Print Preview

There are two options available for a document being exported to.
Export Document to a File on Disk
Send Exported File via E-Mail

Export Document to a File on Disk

To export a document and save the resulting file on your hard drive, do one of the following.

On the toolbar, click the arrow near the Export Document... button .
On the File menu, choose the Export Document... item.
Choose the required format from the invoked list.

Then, you may be prompted to define format-specific options. See corresponding help topics in this documentation for details,
e.g. PDF-Specific Export Options.
Once you've specified exporting options, the Save As dialog appears, allowing you to enter the file name. Then, the following
message will be invoked.

Click Yes, if you want to preview the exported file.

Send Exported File via E-Mail

To send the resulting PDF file via e-mail, do one of the following.

On the toolbar, click the arrow near the Send via E-Mail... button .
On the File menu, choose the Send via E-Mail... item.
Choose the required format in the invoked list.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1170 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Then, you may be prompted to define format-specific options. See corresponding help topics in this documentation for details,
e.g. PDF-Specific Export Options.
Once you've specified exporting options, the Save As dialog appears, allowing you to enter the file name.
Finally, the created document will be attached to a new empty message, created in your default mail program.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1171 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Copy to the Clipboard

Aside from exporting a document to a third-party formatted file, you can copy a portion of the document content to the clipboard,
and paste it into an editor compatible with one of the supported third-party formats.
To copy document content to the clipboard, do the following.
1. Select the content of the previewed document by holding down the left mouse button and dragging the mouse pointer, to
create a selection box. Expand the selection box to fit all of the content you wish to print. The selected document elements
are highlighted.

2. To copy the selected content, press CTRL + C or right-click anywhere within the highlighted area of the document, and
select Copy in the context menu.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1172 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

When pasted to a third-party editor from the clipboard, the report content will automatically be converted to the target format.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1173 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

PDF-Specific Export Options

When exporting a document, you can define PDF-specific exporting options using the following dialog.

General Options
Page range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Don't embed these fonts
Specifies font names which should not be embedded into the resulting file to reduce the file size. To separate fonts, use
semicolons.
Convert Images to Jpeg
Specifies whether all bitmaps contained in the document should be converted to JPEG format during export to PDF.
Images quality
Specifies the document's image quality level. The higher the quality, the bigger the file, and vice versa.
Compressed
Specifies whether the resulting file should be compressed.
PDF/A-2b
Specifies whether to enable document compatibility with the PDF/A-2b specification.
Password Security Options

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1174 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

These options allow you to adjust the security options of the resulting PDF file (e.g. enable open document, editing, printing and
copying protection, and specify which changes are allowed).
Signature Options
If an X.509 certificate is applied to your report, you can maintain its options using the Signature Options property of the report
PDF Export Options.
Additional Options
You can also fill the Application, Author, Keywords, Subject, and Title fields. These options specify the Document Properties
of the created PDF file.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1175 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

HTML-Specific Export Options

When exporting a document, you can define HTML-specific exporting options using the following dialog.

Export Mode
Specifies how a document is exported to HTML. The following modes are available.
The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file, without preserving the page-by-page breakdown.
The Single file page-by-page mode allows export of a document to a single file, while preserving page-by-page
breakdown. In this mode, the Page range, Page border color and Page border width options are available.
The Different files mode allows export of a document to multiple files, one for each document page. In this mode, the
Page range, Page border color and Page border width options are available.
Page range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Page border color
Specifies the color of page borders from the available palettes.
Page border width
Specifies the width (in pixels) of page borders.
Title
Specifies the title of the created document.
Character set
Specifies the character set for the HTML document.
Remove carriage returns
Specifies whether to remove carriage returns.
Table layout
Specifies whether to use table or non-table layout in the resulting document.
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1176 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Export watermarks
Specifies whether to export watermarks to HTML along with the rest of the document content.
Embed images in HTML
Specifies whether to embed images in HTML content.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1177 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

MHT-Specific Export Options

When exporting a document, you can define MHT-specific exporting options using the following dialog.

Export mode
Specifies how a document is exported to MHT. The following modes are available.
The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file, without dividing it into pages.
The Single file page-by-page mode allows export of a document to a single file, divided into pages. In this mode,
the Page range, Page border color and Page border width options are available.
The Different files mode allows export of a document to multiple files, one for each document page. In this mode, the
Page range, Page border color and Page border width options are available.
Page range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Page border color
Specifies the color of page borders from the available palettes.
Page border width
Specifies the width (in pixels) of page borders.
Title
Specifies the title of the created document.
Character set
Specifies the character set for the HTML document.
Remove carriage returns
Specifies whether to remove carriage returns.
Table layout
Specifies whether to use table or non-table layout in the resulting document.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1178 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Export watermarks
Specifies whether to export watermarks to HTML along with the rest of the document content.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1179 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

RTF-Specific Export Options

When exporting a document, you can define RTF-specific export options using the following dialog.

Export mode
Specifies how a document is exported to RTF. The following modes are available.
The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file, without dividing it into pages.
The Single file page-by-page mode allows export of a document to a single file, divided into pages. In this mode,
the Page range option is available.
Page range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Export watermarks
Specifies whether the exported document should include watermarks (if they exist).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1180 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

DOCX-Specific Export Options

When exporting a document, you can define DOCX-specific export options using the following dialog:

Export mode
Specifies how a document is exported to DOCX. The following modes are available.
The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file without dividing it into pages.
The Single file page-by-page mode allows export of a document to a single file divided into pages. In this mode, the
Page range option is available.
Page range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. Use commas to separate page numbers. Use hyphens
to set page ranges.
Export watermarks
Specifies whether the exported document should include watermarks (if they exist).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1181 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

XLS-Specific Export Options

When exporting a document, you can define XLS-specific export options using the following dialog.

Export mode
Specifies how a document is exported to XLS. The following modes are available.
The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file, without dividing it into pages.
The Single file page-by-page mode allows export of a document to a single file, divided into pages.
The Different files mode allows export of a document to multiple files, one for each document page.
Page range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Sheet name
Specifies the name of the sheet in the created XLS file.
Text export mode
Specifies whether value formatting should be converted to the native XLS format string (if it is possible), or embedded into
cell values as plain text.
Show grid lines
Specifies whether grid lines should be visible in the resulting XLS file.
Export hyperlinks
Specifies whether hyperlinks should be exported to the XLS document.
Raw data mode
Specifies whether to enable the raw data export mode. In this mode, only a document's actual data is exported to XLS,
ignoring non-relevant elements, such as images, graphic content, font and appearance settings.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1182 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

XLSX-Specific Export Options

When exporting a document, you can define XLSX-specific export options using the following dialog.

Export mode
Specifies how a document is exported to XLSX. The following modes are available.
The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file, without dividing it into pages.
The Single file page-by-page mode allows export of a document to a single file, with each shown in a separate
sheet.
The Different files mode allows export of a document to multiple files, one for each document page.
Page range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Sheet name
Specifies the name of the sheet in the created XLSX file.
Text export mode
Specifies whether value formatting should be converted to the native XLSX format string (if it is possible), or embedded into
cell values as plain text.
Show grid lines
Specifies whether grid lines should be visible in the resulting XLSX file.
Export hyperlinks
Specifies whether to include hyperlinks into the resulting file.
Raw data mode
Specifies whether to enable the raw data export mode. In this mode, only a document's actual data is exported to XLSX,
ignoring non-relevant elements, such as images, graphic content, font and appearance settings.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1183 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

CSV-Specific Export Options

When exporting a document, you can define CSV-specific exporting options using the following dialog.

Encoding
Specifies the encoding used in the exported document.
Text export mode
Specifies whether to use the formatting of data fields in the bound data source for cells in the exported document. If this
option is set to Text, all data fields are exported to the CSV file as strings with the corresponding formatting embedded into
those strings. If the option is set to Value, all formatting will be lost in the resulting document.
Text separator
Specifies a symbol used to separate text elements (comma by default).
Quote strings with separators
Specifies whether strings with separators should be placed in quotation marks in the exported document.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1184 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TXT-Specific Export Options

When exporting a document, you can define TXT-specific exporting options using the following dialog.

Encoding
Specifies the encoding used in the exported document.
Text export mode
Specifies whether to use the formatting of data fields in the bound data source for cells in the exported document. If this
option is set to Text, all data fields are exported to the text file as strings with the corresponding formatting embedded into
those strings. If the option is set to Value, all formatting will be lost in the resulting document.
Text separator
Specifies a symbol to separate text elements (TAB by default).
Quote strings with separators
Specifies whether strings with separators should be placed in quotation marks in the exported document.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1185 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Image-Specific Export Options

When exporting a document, you can define image-specific exporting options using the following dialog.

Image format
Specifies an image format to export a document. Available formats are BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, EMF, WMF and TIFF.
Resolution (dpi)
Specifies the required image resolution (in dpi).
Export mode
Specifies how a document is exported to an image. The following modes are available.
The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file, without dividing the output into pages.
The Single file page-by-page mode allows export of a document to a single file, divided into pages. In this mode,
the Page range, Page border color and Page border width options are available.
The Different files mode allows export of a document to multiple files, one for each document page. In this mode, the
Page range, Page border color and Page border width options are available.
Page range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Page border color
Specifies the color of page borders.
Page border width
Specifies the width (in pixels) of page borders.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1186 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Passing Parameters in Print Preview

Some documents or reports allow you to control data display, and what data is to be displayed by specifying parameter values.
To show the Parameters window, click the Parameters button on the main toolbar. A window allowing you to change
parameter values will be invoked.
Enter the required values and click Submit. After changing the current values, you can revert back the previously selected values
by clicking Reset.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1187 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customize Printing Settings of Charts

If allowed by your application vendor, you can customize additional print settings of a document. For example, if you are about to
print out a chart, you may be able to customize the chart's printing options.
To do this, click the Customize button on the toolbar. The Print Options dialog will be invoked.

None
A chart is printed in the same size identical to that shown on the form.
Stretch
A chart is stretched or shrunk to fit the page on which it is printed.
Zoom
A chart is resized proportionally (without clipping), so that it best fits the page on which it is printed.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1188 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customize Printing Settings of Grids

If allowed by your application vendor, you can customize additional print settings of a document. For example, if you are about to
print out a grid, you may be able to customize grid printing options.
To do this, click the Customize button on the toolbar. The Print Options dialog will be invoked.

Options tab
Allows you to uncheck elements that you don't want to print.
Behavior tab
Allows you to pre-process a grid before printing it. For instance, you can enable automatic column width calculation, or
automatic group row expansion.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1189 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customize Printing Settings of Pivot Tables

If allowed by your application vendor, you can customize additional print settings of a document. For example, if you are about to
print out a Pivot Table, you may be able to customize its printing options.
To do this, click the Customize button on the toolbar. The Print Options dialog will be invoked.

Options tab
Allows you to specify which elements are to be printed.
Behavior tab
Allows you to pre-process a Pivot Table before printing it. For instance, you can enable field value merging.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1190 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Customize Printing Settings of Tree Views

If allowed by your application vendor, you can customize additional print settings of a document. For example, if you are about to
print out a tree view, you may be able to customize its printing options.
To do this, click the Customize button on the toolbar. The Print Options dialog will be invoked.

Options tab
Allows you to specify which elements are to be printed.
Behavior tab
Allows you to pre-process a tree view before printing it. For instance, you can enable automatic column width or row height
calculation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1191 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Warnings and Error Messages in Print Preview

Warnings
One or more margins are set outside the printable area of the page.
This message is invoked when you try to print a document whose margins are outside of the printable area of the page.
Click Yes if you are sure that your printer supports the specified page margins. Otherwise, click No.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1192 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

HTML5 Document Viewer

The documents in this section provide information on the capabilities of the Web Document Viewer, which is based on the
HTML5/JS technology and is used to display an interactive document preview on web pages.
This Viewer provides a toolbar that contains commands related to document viewing, navigating, exporting and printing. It also
provides the Document Map for navigating throughout a document using bookmarks, the Parameters panel for editing report
parameters, the Export Options panel for viewing and editing format-specific options, and the Search panel for locating
required data.

Viewing and Navigating

Navigate Between Pages
Navigate Using Bookmarks
Search for a Specific Text
Switch Display Mode
Zooming

Interactivity
Content Editing

Parameters
Passing Parameter Values

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1193 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing
Printing

Exporting
Export a Document
CSV-Specific Export Options
HTML-Specific Export Options
Image-Specific Export Options
MHT-Specific Export Options
PDF-Specific Export Options
RTF-Specific Export Options
Text-Specific Export Options
XLS-Specific Export Options
XLSX-Specific Export Options

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1194 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Navigate Between Pages

To navigate to a specific page of a document, select the required page in the dedicated dropdown list on the Document Viewer's
toolbar.

You can also use the buttons on the viewer toolbar to navigate to the first, previous, next or last page, respectively.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1195 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Navigate Using Bookmarks

If a document contains bookmarks, you can use the Document Map panel for navigation purposes.

To switch to this panel, click the Document Map button on the right side of the Document Viewer. To go to a specific
bookmark, click it in the Document Map. As a result, an appropriate document page will be shown, and a document element
associated with the bookmark will be highlighted.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1196 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Search for a Specific Text

To search for a specific text throughout a document, click the Search button on the right side of the Document Viewer or on
the Viewer's toolbar. This switches to the Search panel.

In this panel, you can input the text to find and specify whether or not to use case-sensitive search and whether it is required to
match the whole word during the search. To start searching or search again, press ENTER. You can also use the buttons to
continue searching backward or forward, respectively.
In addition, the Search panel displays the search result. So, you can quickly locate the required text within a document by
selecting the corresponding item in the Search Result list.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1197 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Switch Display Mode

You can switch between the Document Viewer's display modes by clicking the Toggle Multipage Mode button on the
Viewer's toolbar.
In the default single page mode, document pages are displayed in the Document Viewer one at a time, thus allowing you to
preserve an entire page view. You can navigate between document pages using the navigation buttons and dedicated dropdown
list (see Navigate Between Pages).

In the multipage mode, several document pages can be simultaneously displayed in the Viewer if it has sufficient space, and
pages can be partially visible. In addition to the standard navigation functionality, a vertical scroll bar appears, allowing you to
continuously scroll a page layout view.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1198 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Zooming
To zoom in or out of a document, click the Zoom In or Zoom Out button on the Document Viewer toolbar. These buttons
change the document's current zoom factor by 1 percent.
You can also zoom the document to a specific zoom factor. To do this, click the dedicated dropdown list button and choose one of
the zoom factor presets from the invoked list.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1199 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Content Editing
If content editing is enabled for document elements, it is possible to customize the corresponding field values in the Document
Viewer.

To highlight all editing fields available in the document, click the Editing Fields button on the toolbar. This button is not
available when there are no such fields in the document.
Clicking a field will invoke an appropriate editor. In addition to editing text, you can switch check box states.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1200 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Passing Parameter Values

Some documents or reports allow you to control what data is to be displayed by specifying parameter values.
To switch to the Preview Parameters panel, click the Parameters button on the right side of the Document Viewer. This
panel allows you to specify parameter values before document preview generation is started.
Enter the required values using the corresponding parameter editors and click Submit. After changing the current values, you can
revert back the previously selected values by clicking Reset.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1201 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Printing
The Web Document Viewer supports pixel perfect document rendering, i.e., displays a report document exactly how it will appear
on paper. The printing functionality of this Viewer is based on rendering the report in PDF with special settings and invoking the
PDF plug-in's Print dialog.

To print the entire document, click the Print button on the Viewer's toolbar. You can also print the currently displayed
document page by clicking the Print Page button.
When you click any of these buttons, the Document Viewer tries to use the PDF plug-in of the web browser for printing.
Depending on the plug-in detection result, there are two possible scenarios.
If the PDF plug-in is installed and enabled, its Print dialog is invoked. To print the document, specify the required settings in
this dialog and click Print.
If the PDF plug-in is disabled or is not installed, the Document Viewer exports the report document to a PDF file, and
initiates its download instead of printing. The resulting PDF file contains a script that starts printing the document
immediately after it is opened in a compatible viewer.
The following image shows the Print dialog of the Adobe Reader® plug-in.

To download and install the Adobe Reader® plug-in, use the following link: http://get.adobe.com/reader/. No software other
than the Adobe Reader® should be installed on the machine for printing purposes. After finishing the installation, the plug-in
should automatically be enabled in appropriate web browsers. To learn how to manually setup your browser to use this plug-in,
refer to the Display PDF in browser document. For the changes to take effect, you may need to close and reopen your browser.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1202 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Note that many modern web browsers include their own PDF plug-ins, which automatically replace the Adobe Reader® plug-in.
If you need to revert to the Adobe plug-in, refer to Configure browser to use the Adobe PDF plug-in.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1203 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Export a Document
To export a document to one of the supported third-party formats, click the Export To button on the Document Viewer toolbar
and select a required format from the invoked list. The available formats are PDF, XLS, XLSX, RTF, MHT, HTML, Text, CSV and
Image.

Download of the resulting document will be initiated. Depending on your web browser's configuration, a dedicated dialog can be
invoked prompting you to specify whether to only save the exported file to a disk or save the file and then open it in an
appropriate application. You can also be asked to specify a path for saving the file.
In addition, the Document Viewer allows you to view and edit format-specific options required to export a document in the
dedicated Export Options panel. To switch to this panel, click the Export Options button on the right side of the Document
Viewer.

The options are allocated in groups by the export format to which they are applied. You can expand the required options group by
clicking on its header. Refer to the following documents to learn more about format-specific options.
CSV-Specific Export Options
HTML-Specific Export Options
Image-Specific Export Options
MHT-Specific Export Options
PDF-Specific Export Options
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1204 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

RTF-Specific Export Options

Text-Specific Export Options
XLS-Specific Export Options
XLSX-Specific Export Options

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1205 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

CSV-Specific Export Options

Before exporting a document to CSV format, you can specify CSV-specific options in the dedicated Export Options panel.

Encoding
Specifies the encoding used in the exported document.
Text Export Mode
Specifies whether to use the formatting of data fields in the bound data source for cells in the exported document. If this
option is set to Text, all data fields are exported to the CSV file as strings with the corresponding formatting embedded into
those strings. If the option is set to Value, all formatting will be lost in the resulting document.
Quote Strings with Separators
Specifies whether strings with separators should be placed in quotation marks in the exported document.
Separator
Specifies a symbol used to separate text elements (comma by default).
Skip Empty Rows
Specifies whether to include empty rows into the resulting file.
Skip Empty Columns
Specifies whether to include empty columns into the resulting file.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1206 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

HTML-Specific Export Options

Before exporting a document to HTML format, you can specify HTML-specific options in the dedicated Export Options panel.

Export Mode
Specifies how a document is exported to HTML. The following modes are available.
The Single File mode allows exporting a document to a single file, without preserving the page-by-page breakdown.
The Single File PageByPage mode allows exporting a document to a single file, while preserving the page-by-page
breakdown. In this mode, the Page Border Color, Page Border Width and Page Range options are available.
Page Border Color
Specifies the color of page borders.
Page Border Width
Specifies the width (in pixels) of page borders.
Page Range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Title
Specifies the title of the created document.
Table Layout
Specifies whether to use table or non-table layout in the resulting document.
Use HRef Hyperlinks
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1207 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specifies whether to enable the use of standard HTML link references in document navigation.
Allow URLs with JS Content
Specifies whether the JavaScript code can be placed in URLs in the resulting HTML document.
Remove Secondary Symbols
Specifies whether to remove all secondary symbols (for instance, Space, Carriage Return, etc.) in the resulting document
to reduce its size.
Export Watermarks
Specifies whether to export watermarks to HTML along with the rest of the document content.
Character Set
Specifies the character set for the HTML document.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1208 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Image-Specific Export Options

Before exporting a document to an image, you can specify Image-specific options in the dedicated Export Options panel.

Export Mode
Specifies how a document is exported to an image. The following modes are available.
The Single File mode allows exporting a document to a single file, without preserving the page-by-page breakdown.
The Single File PageByPage mode allows exporting a document to a single file, while preserving the page-by-page
breakdown. In this mode, the Page Border Color, Page Border Width and Page Range options are available.
Page Border Color
Specifies the color of page borders.
Page Border Width
Specifies the width (in pixels) of page borders.
Page Range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Resolution
Specifies the required image resolution (in dpi).
Format
Specifies an image format to export a document. Available formats are BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, EMF, WMF and TIFF.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1209 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

MHT-Specific Export Options

Before exporting a document to MHT format, you can specify MHT-specific options in the dedicated Export Options panel.

Export Mode
Specifies how a document is exported to MHT. The following modes are available.
The Single File mode allows exporting a document to a single file, without preserving the page-by-page breakdown.
The Single File PageByPage mode allows exporting a document to a single file, while preserving the page-by-page
breakdown. In this mode, the Page Border Color, Page Border Width and Page Range options are available.
Page Border Color
Specifies the color of page borders.
Page Border Width
Specifies the width (in pixels) of page borders.
Page Range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Title
Specifies a title of the created MHT file.
Character Set
Specifies the encoding name used in the exported document.
Table Layout
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1210 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specifies whether to use table or non-table layout in the resulting document.

Use HRef Hyperlinks
Specifies whether to enable the use of standard HTML link references in document navigation.
Allow URLs with JS Content
Specifies whether the JavaScript code can be placed in URLs in the resulting HTML document.
Remove Secondary Symbols
Specifies whether to remove all secondary symbols (for instance, Space, Carriage Return, etc.) in the resulting document
to reduce its size.
Export Watermarks
Specifies whether to export watermarks to HTML along with the rest of the document content.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1211 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

PDF-Specific Export Options

Before exporting a document to PDF, you can specify PDF-specific options in the dedicated Export Options panel.

General Options
Convert Images to Jpeg
Specifies whether all bitmaps contained in the document should be converted to JPEG format during export to PDF.
Show Print Dialog on Open
Specifies whether the Print dialog should be displayed when the resulting PDF file is opened in an appropriate application.
Compressed
Specifies whether the resulting file should be compressed.
Never Embedded Fonts
Specifies font names which should not be embedded into the resulting file. To separate fonts, use semicolons.
Image Quality
Specifies the document's image quality level. The higher the quality, the bigger the file, and vice versa.
PDF A Compatibility
Specifies document compatibility with the PDF/A specification.
Page Range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.

Document Options
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1212 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Document Options complex property contains options which specify the Document Properties of the created PDF file.
Click the complex property's header to access its nested options.

PDF Password Security Options

This complex property allows you to adjust the security options of the resulting PDF file.

OpenPassword
Specifies the password for opening the exported PDF document.
PermissionsPassword
Specifies the PDF permissions password for the document.
PDF Permissions Options
Provides access to the options which specify the permissions for printing, changing, copying and accessing the exported
document.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1213 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

RTF-Specific Export Options

Before exporting a document to RTF, you can specify RTF-specific options in the dedicated Export Options panel.

Export Mode
Specifies how a document is exported to RTF. The following modes are available.
The Single File mode allows exporting a document to a single file, without preserving the page-by-page breakdown.
The Single File PageByPage mode allows exporting a document to a single file, while preserving the page-by-page
breakdown. In this mode, the Page Range and Export Watermark options are available.
Page Range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Export Watermarks
Specifies whether watermarks (if they exist) should be included into the resulting file.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1214 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Text-Specific Export Options

Before exporting a document to TXT format, you can specify TXT-specific options in the dedicated Export Options panel.

Encoding
Specifies the encoding used in the exported document.
Quote Strings with Separators
Specifies whether strings with separators should be placed in quotation marks in the exported document.
Separator
Specifies a symbol to separate text elements (TAB by default).
Text Export Mode
Specifies whether to use the formatting of data fields in the bound data source for cells in the exported document. If this
option is set to Text, all data fields are exported to the text file as strings with the corresponding formatting embedded into
those strings. If the option is set to Value, all formatting will be lost in the resulting document.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1215 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

XLS-Specific Export Options

Before exporting a document to XLS format, you can specify XLS-specific options in the dedicated Export Options panel.

Export Mode
Specifies how a document is exported to XLS.
Export Hyperlinks
Specifies whether hyperlinks should be exported to the XLS document.
Page Range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Raw Data Mode
Specifies whether to enable the raw data export mode. In this mode, only a document's actual data is exported to XLS,
ignoring non-relevant elements, such as images, graphic content, font and appearance settings.
Sheet Name
Specifies the name of the sheet in the created XLS file.
Show Grid Lines
Specifies whether grid lines should be visible in the resulting XLS file.
Suppress 256 Columns Warning
Specifies whether to suppress the warning that appears if the resulting XLS file has more than 256 columns.
Suppress 65536 Rows Warning

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1216 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specifies whether to suppress the warning that appears if the resulting XLS file has more than 65,536 rows.
Text Export Mode
Specifies whether value formatting should be converted to the native XLS format string (if it is possible), or embedded into
cell values as plain text.
Workbook Color Palette Compliance
Specifies the color palette compatibility mode with different workbook versions. The workbook palette can store no more
than 56 colors. If you select the ReducePaletteExactColors value, original color values are kept, but only the first 56 colors
are included in the palette. Choose AdjustColorsToDefaultPalette to degrade the color values to match the 56 standard
colors of the default workbook palette.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1217 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

XLSX-Specific Export Options

Before exporting a document to XLSX format, you can specify XLSX-specific options in the dedicated Export Options panel.

Export Mode
Specifies how a document is exported to XLSX. The following modes are available.
The Single File mode allows exporting a document to a single file, without dividing it into pages.
The Single File PageByPage mode allows exporting a document to a single file, while preserving the page-by-page
breakdown. In this mode, the Page Range option is available.
Export Hyperlinks
Specifies whether to include hyperlinks into the resulting file.
Page Range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. To separate page numbers, use commas. To set page
ranges, use hyphens.
Raw Data Mode
Specifies whether to enable the raw data export mode. In this mode, only a document's actual data is exported to XLSX,
ignoring non-relevant elements, such as images, graphic content, font and appearance settings.
Sheet Name
Specifies the name of the sheet in the created XLSX file.
Show Grid Lines
Specifies whether grid lines should be visible in the resulting XLSX file.
Text Export Mode
Specifies whether value formatting should be converted to the native XLSX format string (if it is possible), or embedded into
cell values as plain text.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1218 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

DOCX-Specific Export Options

Before exporting a document to DOCX format, you can specify DOCX-specific options in the dedicated Export Options panel.

Export mode
Specifies how a document is exported to DOCX. The following modes are available.
The Single file mode allows export of a document to a single file without dividing it into pages.
The Single file page-by-page mode allows export of a document to a single file divided into pages. In this mode, the
Page range option is available.
Page range
Specifies a range of pages which will be included in the resulting file. Use commas to separate page numbers. Use hyphens
to set page ranges.
Export watermarks
Specifies whether the exported document should include watermarks (if they exist).

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1219 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

What is a Bursting?
Data Access Studio provides a powerful way to combine data in your reports called Bursting. Bursting designates one report, the
burst driver, to control the data selection of one to many target reports. You can think of the burst driver as the "list of items" on
which to operate and the burst target as "what to do for each item".
Examples:

Burst Driver Report Burst Target Report Action

List of customers Invoice for customer Distribute: Print and email invoice

List of employees Benefits report for employee Distribute: Print and store in company directory

Distribute: Email consolidated list of items that need to be re-order to

List of items Does item need to be re-ordered purchasing contact Bring back: the number of quantity of items
needed to order

List of accounts Posted and unposted balances Bring back: Total posted and unposted amounts

Drill down: interactively show the transaction details for the select
List of transactions Transaction detail
transaction(s)

The pattern with bursting is:

1. Define a list of things over which you need to report (this is the burst driver).
2. Define one or more target reports that do something useful with each item in the list. In the example above, only one target
report is specified per burst driver. The target reports are separately designed DAS reports or ProReports which can be run
independent of or in conjunction with the burst driver.
3. Add the Burst calculation to the driver report to call each target report.
4. Configure the Burst calculation to perform one or more combinations of the following actions:
Bring back: Return column summary values from the target back to the burst driver report
Distribute: Export the results of the target report and either copy to a directory or email it
Drill down: Interactively show the details of the list item in the target report
In the topics that follow, we'll discuss the multiple variations that configure the Burst calculation to do exactly what you require.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1220 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Distribution Burst
A distribution burst involves creating a primary or main report (driver) that when run will distribute sub-reports to a target
audience or output directory. The sub-report(s) is designed and attached as a burst calculation to the burst driver report. Upon
running the main report, the sub-report may be created for an intended “target audience”, e.g. Employee Master driver report to
send a benefit sub-report to Employees or a Business Unit (BU) Master driver report to send out Inventory or Sales sub-reports by
BU to the BU manager. When Automator runs the scheduled report, users receive that report and any associated email. A
distribution report may also be sent to an output file directory in lieu of an email distribution. A burst driver report may be burst
manually for customers who did not buy Automator.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1221 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Burst Driver Setup

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1222 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

What is a Distribution Burst Report?

As mentioned above, a distribution burst involves creating a primary report (driver) that, when run manually or through
Automator, will distribute a sub-report to a target audience or output directory.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1223 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Designing Distribution Driver Report and Sub-Reports

The first step is creating the sub-report(s) to be called by the driver report.
In our first example, an A/P target report was designed earlier as our sub-report. This example shows vouchers per vendor. Notice
that there are different vouchers per Business Unit. In our example, a user would like to have this sub-report generated for each
BU and emailed to the BU owner.
The second step is to select the source table to act as the driver for report generation and distribution. This driver could be a JDE
table or external table as the trigger field(s) for distribution, e.g. by each customer or vendor, or by employee, or by branch plant/
BU, etc.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1224 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Selecting Fields From Other Sources

Sometimes an external database source is the driving table of the distribution or sometimes some of the file’s fields are required
from this external source via a table lookup to complete the driver report.
In our example, a combination of an existing JDE table and an external table were required to build our report. To create the burst
driver report in our example that will eventually pull the appropriate F0411 A/P Voucher Detail, we’ll use the F0006 Business
Unit Master, which contains the BU’s and may also contain the Responsible Person or owners of the BU’s in a category code. In
our example ERP environment, the emails are stored outside of JDE.
We’ll use an external Excel spreadsheet that contains business units, the owners of the business units, and their emails. The
information in the Excel file will provide the email addresses used in the mail merge component in the distribution.
We’ll assume an Excel document was created earlier with corresponding email addresses with business unit owners. Our Excel
example has the business unit number, employee number, and email addresses we’ll need for an upcoming table lookup step.
We’ll assume that an external data source connection to DAS has been created. (External Connections is taught in another course.
Please refer to that training content if you are not yet familiar with External Connections.)
So, to start our driver report, we open the F0006 Business Unit Master and select the columns required to generate the
distribution report. In our screenshot, our example selected the Business Unit column (MCU) and then created an Associated
Description for the Business Unit.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1225 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Utilizing Advanced Calculations to Complete Driver Report

To complete a report may require performing some additional calculations. To automate our emails using “mail merge” concepts,
we will grab our email addresses from our external database source through a table lookup.
One advanced calculation type that may be required to complete a table lookup between two tables is Type Converter. To
perform a table lookup, regardless of the database source, fields linking a table lookup need to be the same structure or format,
e.g. string without leading zeroes, etc.
In some cases, the primary table field(s) needs to be converted to another data output type, trimmed, and or/split to create a field
allowing for an apples-to-apples match.
If a Type Converter calculation is necessary on a database field, Go to Design | Calculations. Add a new Type Converter
calculation. Choose the field to be converted and select the desired output type.
In our example, the Excel BU value and the JDE BU value did not match, so changing the output type to an integer on the JDE BU
will allow us to perform a table lookup to the BU field in the Excel table.
Next, we can perform our table lookup and join the source and target tables off Excel BU and our DAS Type Converter BU on the
F0006. This will allow us to return the Employee Name and email address from Excel to our driver report.
Another advanced calculation that may be required to build the driver report is a Split calculation. This will allow us to split off the
first name of the employee from the last name, e.g. Annette instead of Annette Walters. Our example will use the first name of
the Person Responsible in the salutation of our automated email message.
Go to Design | Calculations and add a new Split calculation. If there is a delimiter, e.g. a blank, comma, or dash, you may use
that delimiter as a calculation reference point for where to consistently split a value. Then select the number of splits to perform
and name each, e.g. First Name and Last name in our example.
Hide unnecessary columns, and finally, with some column renaming and reorganizing, the output for our Burst Driver Report
looks like the second screenshot below.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1226 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Adding Distribution Burst Calculations to Burst Driver Report

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1227 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

What is a Burst Calculation for a Distribution Burst?

The final step in designing our driver report is to create the Burst Calculation, which tells the driver report which report(s) to call
when the report meets the bursting filter criteria, e.g. for each Business Unit owner in our example, etc.
Select Design | Calculations and choose a Burst calculation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1228 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Input Parameter Values Related to Distribution Burst

For the input Report, choose your sub-report to be called each time the driver report is run. Since we are doing an email burst,
we will choose a public (published report), assuming the published version is fully vetted and a private report may not be ready
for mass distribution. (Note: For distribution reports with an email output, a burst Simulated Output will run without sending
emails/file directories ouputs to avoid distributing a test email/file output to a large audience by accident.)
Burst on Run will allow the sub-report to be automatically generated each time the driver report runs.
Show target during run allows the designer to see each target sub-report as it opens in the side window when manually
generating the burst report, e.g. if you had ten business units and a sub-report was generated per BU, you would see ten sub-
report windows open in the background upon test report generation. When testing a burst calculation, pick a small subset of data
to get a few iterations of the sub-report generation so you don’t have to wait a long time while each sub report opens.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1229 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Which Rows to B urst

For Which rows to burst, Auto detect is the default. This ensures the best and fastest sub-report calculation at generation,
caching what it needs to avoid extra query fetches. In the distribution burst, we’ll use Auto Detect.
Which rows to burst choices are:
1. Normally it is recommended that users leave this option set to Auto detect. DAS will select the best choice based on the data
at the time of query to optimize results. One of 2 through 5.
For Advanced Users Only:
2. Distinct lookup values performs a run query once per unique value for each field combination specified in the “lookup
values” portion of the burst calculation. This allows for “auto tuning” to minimize query run time that may be significantly
impacted by WAN connections. (See Table Below)
3. Distinct lookup values and de-duplicate will do the same as option 2 but will return distinct values only once, performing
de-duplicate automatically. (See Table Below)
4. All drivers rows will run a query once per row for the “lookup values” from the main report’s burst calculation as related to
every item in the target report. This can significantly slow the report runtime down as it re-querying duplicate data from the main
report per row. (See Table Below)
5. Once per Group is the opposite of the last choice, meaning once unique data is gathered for the main reports row it is cached.
Options 2 and 3 would be recommended before Option 5. This option only shows in a Grouped driver/master report. (See Table
Below)
Example 1
Example 2

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1230 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Lookup Values for Distribution Burst

The next section of the burst calculation asks for Lookup values. These values tell the required relationships and values that build
the bridge between the driver and target sub-report. If no lookup values are used, it will bring all data in the sub-report based on
that sub-report’s design, filtering, parameters, etc. For example, if the sub-report was the F0911 G/L audit trail file and no lookup
criteria were passed from the driver, it would call all F0911 records. That could mean a mass amount of data and a drag on the
server.
In our example, we want a sub-report generated per BU. Therefore, our target and the distribution driver report link on the BU
field.
Note: If a user designs a sub-report and wants values to pass from the driver report into the report parameter fields displayed in
the sub-report, then select the parameter field in lieu of the data or calculation field(s) listed in the visual assist, e.g. BU is a report
parameter in our sub report, and if a single BU is being displayed, we may want to see that value in the report parameter field for
quick reference when viewing the sub-report. It should be noted that if multiple report parameter values for a field are being
passed to the sub-report, no value is displayed for that sub-report report parameter field. That information is just passed within
the grid filter portion of a column.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1231 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Specify Output Type Post Processing

Our last step in the burst calculation is to specify the output. This is the trigger section of the burst calculation to determine that
type of burst being performed. There are different Output Types. These types are what differentiate the 3 types of Burst reports
we mentioned at the beginning of this course: Distribution, Master, or Drilldown.
 
Select the visual assist under Output Description to bring up the Burst Output Settings window.
Select a radio tab, e.g. Presentation PDF in our example. On the Output Type tab, if a Data or Presentation radio button (left
side of window) is chosen instead of a Result value (lower right side of window), the wizard changes views, displaying two
additional tabs: File and Destination.
Note: Presentation radio buttons only appear, like the screenshot above, if a presentation layer exists in your sub-report. You may
select either a DAS format or and Excel Presentation format that best suits the requirement for the distributed report. Designers
may have multiple types of outputs by adding a new burst distribution output for each output type on the same burst calculations
Output description portion shown with an arrow above.
Distribute separately will be selected by default. This means each bursted item will create a separate export file. For example, if
you have a target report for each employee and select Excel (XLS), this instructs the burst distribution to create one Excel
workbook for each employee.
You may elect, however, to Consolidate the burst outputs as well (See Consolidate outputs). In the example above, with
consolidation, you can instruct the burst to create one Excel workbook with each employee given their own sheet in that work
book.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1232 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

If your version of DAS shows the Consolidate option on the Burst Output Settings (DAS version 7.0.50 or later), then you can
elect to combine the Excel outputs into one output file -- i.e. consolidate multiple excel files into one. This is handy when what you
are after is a single Excel workbook of all the results vs a many Excel workbooks.

For comparison, without consolidation (i.e. selecting the Distribute separately option), each of the worksheets above would
have be saved as a separate file.
To specify output consolidation, on the Burst Output Settings form:

Click one of the Excel Presentation formats and select Consolidate. This will enable the Edit Consolidation button.
Next, click Edit Consolidation:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1233 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To configure the consolidation, you will need to specify the following:

Output Type Tab:
The output format for the consolidation: Select one of the available output type options.
The consolidation method:
All rows - means all rows from the burst driver will end up on a separate sheet in one consolidated file.
Each row - only makes sense if you have multiple burst targets in your burst driver report (i.e. each row is creating more
than one target output). If this is the case, then Each row means each row from the burst driver will be a separate output
file; however, all the burst target reports for that row will be consolidated into that file.
The sheet naming rules: Use the visual assist to select tokens that will parameterize how the sheet names will be title. In the
example above, each sheet will be named with the account name for the burst driver row. If you specify a naming rule that results
in a non-unique name for each sheet, DAS will make each sheet name unique with an incremental index (i.e. Sheet (1), Sheet (2),
etc.)
Table of Contents option: If you check Generate Table of Contents, DAS will create a basic hyperlink cover page for your
consolidated output to make navigating to the sub-sheets easier. In the Table of Contents Description Column: select a burst
driver column that provides the description you want shown in the Table of Contents. In the example above, we pick the account
name because for our consolidation, the account name is unique and describes the page to which we would want to navigate.
Normally this column and the sheet name are a unique description for each burst item that is meaningful to your end-user.
File Tab: Burst Output Settings: File Tab
2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1234 of 1276
9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Destination Tab: Burst Output Settings: Destination Tab

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1235 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Burst Output Settings: File Tab

Next, select the File tab. This points to the targeted sub-report and shows the default file name and its report title variables
<REPORT>_<TIMESTAMP> that will insert your report name and today’s date/time when the report is generated. If necessary,
edit the variables from the visual assist and/or add any static text to the file output name.
Next, users may choose to have a report generate Only distribute if not empty, assuming a user wants to run a report only if
there is data available at runtime. Or a user may choose to always distribute, even if the sub-report will bring back no data
based on the report’s current burst conditions.
The default setting is to Only distribute if not empty, e.g. a user wants a sub-report generated by Automator on inventory once
the quantity available gets below a certain value. We’ll keep the default value for our example.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1236 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Burst Output Settings: Destination Tab

The last step in the Burst calculation wizard is to set up the destination, either an Email or Save to Destination.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1237 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Email
Using the visual assist for To, pull in the dynamic variable email address created in the earlier steps like we pulled from our
external table. You could also manually type specific email addresses but this would require manual maintenance to the list.
Type a static Subject and/or add a dynamic subject using the visual assist dynamic variables, e.g. Report Name.
Add the body of the email with static text and/or dynamic variables from the Insert Token assist button, grabbing desired items,
like the report name and the first name we created in the earlier Split calculations.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1238 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Save to D estination
Users may also select to have a distribution report go to an output directory in lieu of email distribution. This directory allows
reports to be used by those outside of the DAS. Not all users may have a DAS Subscriber or Designer license but need access to
report output. (Note: If choosing this option, determine whether the earlier step for the File tab of the Burst Output should include
the time stamp as part of the <REPORT>_<TIMESTAMP> name. If you want to overwrite a previous version in the output
directory, exclude the timestamp so the original file is overwritten. Think about your auditor requirements.)
After you Save the burst calculation, notice that a new Burst column appears in the report. A Burst drop down menu also
appears.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1239 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Edit a B urst Calculation

Designers may edit a burst calculation column by one of three methods: selecting the Burst menu to select Edit, return to Design
| Calculations to select the specific burst calculation, or by double clicking on the burst calculation column to quickly edit.
 
Note: Users may add additional sub-reports to the same distribution driver by creating another burst calculation for each
required. This assumes those sub-reports may be generated at the same time and under the same criteria as the last example we
created when Automator is run.
In looking at your grid columns, notice that the distribution driver report displays the burst calculation column. It shows a status
of Not processed until the report is run.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1240 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Test the B urst Calculation

Manually test your report by right clicking and bursting a selected row(s) or by choosing Burst Selected Rows from the
Bursting dropdown menu. If Show Target reports is still checked in the burst dropdown menu or within the burst calculation
during testing, a new window should open showing the relevant target or sub-report. Also valid values matching your report
parameters on the sub-report pass through criteria will appear, e.g. report by BU 1, as we established earlier. Obviously,
Automator ignores the Show target on run when it process a report, but you must have Burst on Run selected.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1241 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

B urst D ropdown menu

In addition to bursting selected rows or editing a burst calculation from the Bursting dropdown menu, users may Reset Burst
Status and run an additional test.
If you are signed into the DAS Server with access to your email output server, a test of email distribution output for a couple of
selected rows may be performed by turining off Simulate Output. Be careful to test this by emailing a few sample users who are
pre-notified of the test. Also, note that unchecking this option during testing on the private driver report is not saved. The next
time a private report is open, this selection will appear as checked. DAS assumes a user is testing the sub-report simulation and
that a user will uncheck Simulate Ouput for future tests when needed.
Note: When a report is run from Automator, a published Public report automatically unchecks the Simulate Output selection,
assuming the user knows the burst has been tested and wants emails generated. If you did not purchase automator, reports must
be manually burst by a system administrator with access to the DAS server and email server.
Workplace Options allows Designers to turn off the opening of sub-reports in adjacent windows during a burst. If Silence
Target Reports is unchecked, a sub-report will open for the appropriate burst instance tiled vertically or horizontally. Processing
speed will slow down. There are times when users want to see the sub-report(s) open for use in a side-by-side comparison of
data, for example, during distribution burst testing of a couple highlighted rows of data.
Highlighting current row during burst can be a helpful aid for users to see where in the burst process a report or test report is,
highlighting the actual data row in the DAS report being processed. This is useful if Silence Targets Reports takes away the
visual aid of watching sub-reports open in the side window.
Close target reports when closing driver saves users from having to manually close sub-report windows.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1242 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Master (Bring Back) Burst

A master report involves creating a desired master report with assembled content from other sub-reports compiled into a single
main report, essentially a user defined bring back or “report lookup” from other reports. The sub-reports are attached through
burst calculations. The master report may be manually run or set on Automator and will grab sub-report columns of data at the
time of generation.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1243 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Burst Driver Setup

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1244 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

What is a Master Burst Report?

As mentioned earlier, a master report involves assembling or “bringing back” summarized content from other sub-reports into
one master report.
Essentially, it is a type of lookup similar in nature to a table lookup except it is a “report lookup.” The burst calculation returns new
columns into the main report, similar to a table lookup. These columns allow users to see summarized relevant data from selected
rows “bursted” from sub-report results. A master report and it sub-reports may be run manually or set in Automator.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1245 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Designing a Master Burst Report and Sub-Reports

The first step assumes you have created a sub-report(s) used in the burst calculation, e.g. A/P Payment Detail Sub-Report.
Next, a master report must be created that will call columns from the sub-report above. In our example we’ll choose the A/P
Voucher Detail as our master report choosing columns similar to the report on the next page.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1246 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Adding Master/ Bring Back Burst Calculations to a Master

Report

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1247 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

What is a Burst Calculation for a Master Burst?

The next step to building a Master Burst is to add a burst calculation via Design | Calculations. The steps to set it up are nearly
identical to the distribution burst we created earlier. Leave Burst on run selected. During testing, leave Show target during run
checked. Uncheck after testing.
First, we choose our public or private report. Second, we match the values to the sub-report connecting the Lookup Values to
match the criteria for passing information from the master to the target sub-report: e.g. Vendor, Document Number,
Document Type, etc.
The divergent step from the process we did for the distribution burst occurs next: Specify Output Type and the Output
description field shown above. As mentioned before, these types are what differentiate the 3 kinds of Burst reports.
Select the visual assist to bring up a similar window to the screen shot to the right.
After selecting the visual assist for Output Types, select the radio button for Return Value. This indicates we are building a
Master (Bring Back) Burst report and choosing sub-report values to return into our main or master report. Select the visual assist
next to the blank Result Value. From the list of valid fields, select the first sub-report value to return to the master report as a
new column. In our example we will choose Payment Amount. Repeat this process for each result field required. (Note: Unlike
with a table lookup, a user may not select multiple values using CRTL or SHFT. Currently, each result must be manually selected
and added to the Specify Output Type and the Output description.)
For our example, the second and third fields retuned are: Pay Item and Check Item Date.
 
After the burst calculation is completed and saved, rearrange your master report columns, for example the screenshot below.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1248 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Burst Dropdown menu

Earlier, we explained Burst Selected Rows, how to edit your burst calculation(s), resetting a burst to re-test, and simulate burst that
applies only to Distribution Bursts.
Go to the Burst dropdown menu and select Workspace options. Silence target reports does not apply to a Master burst
because a new window is not opened. (Note: A user could still see the related sub-report used in the Master Burst by highlighting
rows and selecting the option of any available drilldowns.)
Highlight current row during burst may be used to watch the progress of the bursting of each row in the main report but this
feature will slow down the processing of the report. So it should only be used during testing.
Close target reports doesn’t apply to the Master Burst calculation unless you are testing and Showing target on run. It saves
the user from having close each sub-report manually.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1249 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Test the B urst Calculation

Next, to test the burst calculation: highlight the row(s) on your master report, to burst. Right click on the highlighted selection and
select Burst selected rows.
The master report for our example is updated with the burst row results, payment amounts and check item number in our
example. The sub-report shows the summary totals from that column’s burst. (Note: if the data field is not numeric, a count
summary will show, e.g. Result column is for Do Ty’s it will count the number of documents for that level of grouping. If it is a
numeric field, it will be a sum of the numeric values, e.g. Gross Amount of five vouchers totaling $2360.) In our example we have
Show target during run checked so we could compare the data in the sub-report to the column(s) added to the Master Burst.
 
On the sub-report window, select From Drilldown’s dropdown menu. To see what is being passed or not passed through from
the master report to the sub-report, choose View filter. To disable these passed through filters, disable drilldown filter. To
Unbind your sub-report from the master so you can change your filter criteria and choose Get Sample Data or Run, choose
unbind. Do not click Save on the unbound sub-report if you made changes that you do not wish to be saved. Once it is
unbound, it is a standalone report to be overwritten with your changes.
Another concept to revisit is back inside the burst calculation. Reopen your burst calculation and look at the Which rows to
burst.
As discussed earlier in the manual, normally you should leave this set to auto detect. DAS will best select the choice based on the
data at the time of query to optimize results. Refer to page 8 to review the advanced user options. There are cases where
advanced users may want to override the system selection.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1250 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Drilldown Burst
A drilldown report allows users to get to a sub-report for audit or analyses purposes on related data in the main report. In
addition to or in lieu of using the DAS default drilldown sub-reports, a custom drilldown report(s) is created and attached through
a burst calculation(s) to a regularly run report. When a user is looking at a report and determines they require supporting data,
the user highlights records or rows for the drilldown and right clicks to select the drilldown report(s). The sub-report(s) may be
shown in a new window/ tab format for analyzing data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1251 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

What is a Drilldown Burst Report?

As mentioned earlier, a drilldown burst report involves creating a sub-report and then attaching it through a burst calculation to
a regularly run report for analysis use. A drilldown report is similar during its creation and its purpose as a Master Report, except
no resulting burst columns are returned into the main report.
A drilldown may be accessed through the right click menu as a drilldown option for highlighted rows. Users call the default DAS
drilldowns or custom drilldowns only when needed to analyze associated audit data, viewed in a new window for side-by-side
comparison.
In our example, we will assume we have an A/P Voucher Detail report as the main report and want to view, when needed, an A/P
Payment Detail Report based on selected rows of the main report without doing a join or table lookup.
Assume a custom A/P Payment sub-report exists joining the F0413 and F0414 payment header and detail tables, like the screen
shot below.
Next, let’s assume you’ve already designed an A/P Voucher Detail Report based off the F0411 for your main report.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1252 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Adding Drilldown Burst Calculations to the Main Report

The first step to building the drilldown relationship between the two reports is to add a burst calculation to the master report, the
F0411 A/P Voucher Detail in our example. The steps in creating this type of burst follow most of the same steps of our last two
burst calculation types.
Start by going to Design | Calculations. Choose a Burst calculation.
Choose your public or private target or sub-report, the A/P Payment Report for our example.
Uncheck Burst on Run. For our example: when the Master report is run, no separate windows for the sub-reports are necessary
unless a user decides to drilldown in the future.
Uncheck Show target during run. This step isn’t necessary if Burst on Run is off because no report is processing.
A new field added in later releases of DAS 6.0 allows designers to specify the Activation Condition for a burst drilldown. This
allows designers to limit the display and use of a drilldown for a row(s) based on whether it meets the conditions defined in the
criteria. For example, maybe you created a drill down only to be displayed in the report if a certain AP document type is present in
a highlighted row, e.g. PV. You would set the activation criteria as Do TY equal to PV.
Our next step is for the Lookup Values. Choose what values are being passed between the master report and sub-report field(s),
e.g. report parameter field for Vendor Number.
We are also passing filtering information from the main report to the sub-report to limit data being returned in the drill down
sub-report relevant to the rows highlighted. In our example, there is G/L Date, Invoice Date, Due Date, and Pay Status.
Change the setting for each row from Column to Literal. Then use the funnel visual assist to select the corresponding report
parameter variable.
(Note: If passing filter information from the main report to the sub-report, e.g. a user variable date range variable in the main
report, Column as Filter may be the required selection from the visual assist in lieu of Column or Literal.)
 
Save and Close your calculation window. Notice that a new burst calculation column appears. Users may hide this column since
it isn’t returning any required information or data like it did for our Master Burst Report in the earlier topics.
Input your desired report parameter in the main report.
Get Sample data or Run the report.
To access the Drilldown just created, highlight a row(s) or open the report’s grouping level on the tree to the detail level and
highlight rows, e.g. hover your mouse over a row’s Document Number and right click. Notice the new drilldown(s) and any
default DAS drilldowns in the list. (Note: If you highlight and right click any cells that show the blue underline hyperlink, users will
see DAS default drilldowns appear beneath any user created drilldowns listed.)
Select the drill down choice(s) to drilldown into that report based on your highlighted rows.
A new window(s) opens for each drilldown report selected, showing the sub-report(s) and the content matching your drilldown
criteria from the main report.
Add other burst calculations for additional drilldowns. You may also have drilldowns work from both directions by attaching burst
calculations for drilldowns to the “sub-report” for when it is used as the main report and the other report becomes the drilldown
sub-report.
For example, our A/P Detail report allows us to drilldown to the sub-report for payments. I could have my A/P payments report
have drilldowns to the A/P Detail. Then a user could go either direction to analyze data.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1253 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Sub-Report Attributes

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1254 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

From Drilldown Menu

The sub-reports show the relationship between the main report and sub-reports generated from the burst calculations and
displayed in adjacent windows. A dropdown menu appears: From Drilldown.
The From Drilldown menu shows the main report leading to the sub-report, helpful in case you have several report windows
open.
Users may View Filter to see how the information passed through from the burst calculation’s Lookup Values.
If the drilldown report is meant to be viewed in a broader context, a user may temporarily uncheck the option to turn off the
Enable Drilldown Filter.
Users may Unbind the drilldown and sub-report, if necessary, allowing users to run the report independently, change the report,
and save changes to a sub-report. Do not click Save on the unbound sub-report if you made changes that you do not
wish to be saved. Once it is unbound, it is a standalone report to be overwritten with your changes.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1255 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Report Parameter Pass-through

For users who have set up the burst calculation Lookup Values for the Target Report pointing to a Report Parameter field(s) on
the targeted sub-report report (in lieu of using the Data Field(s)), they will see values passed through from the main report
drilldown item to the sub-report report parameter(s). This occurs only for single values being passed through.
For example: the <Vendor Number> report parameter variable field was selected and the user performs a drilldown on a single
highlighted item in the main report.
The user wants to see the Vendor Number 1001 in the vendor report parameter field of the sub-report. However, If the user
focuses in the main report on more than one row where multiple vendors are being referenced back in the sub-report, the report
parameter field is left blank on the sub-report because there would be multiple vendor details listed.
To make this occur, the designer would choose the Parameter Field in lieu of the Data field for Vendor Number.
Example, a single vendor is returned:
Example, Multiple vendors returned:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1256 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

U S ER LEV EL JD E K NO W LED G E CAN D ES IG N R EPO R TS TECHNICAL K NO W LED G E

Subscriber Not needed No Minimal

Quick Report Designer Minimal Yes Minimal

Ad Hoc Designer Yes Yes Some

Advanced Designer Yes Yes High

This section is for report designers who need to automate report execution. Scheduling allows you to specify which reports you
want to run and when. You may specify any Date pattern and time sub-pattern. For instance, you can run a report on Monday,
Wednesday, and Friday at 9:00 AM and 4:00PM each day.
IMPORTANT: You must have a scheduler license to use the Scheduler features.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1257 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

In Data Access Studio, a Task is defined as a set of reports scheduled to run at a certain time. To schedule a report or set of
reports, you must define or create a new Task:
1. On the Main Menu, click Schedule -> Edit Schedule
2. On the form that appears, click New Task

TO D O THIS

Name your Task Type a new name in the Task name edit box.

Check the Enabled check box to enable the Task. Un-check the box to disable it. You many want to disable a Task so
Enable/Disable
that its definition exists (for future use, copying, etc.) but the Task will not actually run. When a Task is disabled, all the
your Task
edit options for the Task are disabled as well.

Select what
report(s) you See Specify What You Want to Run.
want to run

Specify when
you want to run See Specify When You Want to Run it.
your report(s)

Tag your task See Queue Tags

Distribute your
See Task Report Distribution
reports

Set recovery
See Recovery Options
options

To save your
changes Click OK.

To cancel your
changes Click Close.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1258 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

To specify what you want to run:

1. Choose the reports
2. Select the output types
3. Configure the destination
4. Select advanced options

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1259 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Select the Reports

The first step in defining a task is to specify what reports you want to run. You may select one or more reports. The reports may
be published or private.

TO D O THIS

Add one
or more Click the Add Report button. DAS will present you with a list of published and private reports. You may select more
reports than one report at a time. Once you add a report, DAS will show you options for specifying output types and destination.

Remove a Highlight the report or reports you want to remove. Click the Delete Report button. If you remove all the reports, then
report DAS will hide the output types and destination options.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1260 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Choose the Report Output Types

Once you have added one or more reports to your Task, you can specify which output formats to export your report.
You may select one or more output types.

If any report in your task has an Excel Presentation, then the Presentation options will be enabled.
If you want to export the Data portion of your query (i.e. non-Excel Presentation), select one or more check boxes in the Data
section. The mobie output option allows you to update an existing DataBox Snapshot. This option will only be enabled if the
selected report has an existing DataBox Snaphot.
For each type you select, DAS will export to that type and send all outputs to the destination.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1261 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Login I nformation ( Advanced )

You will typically leave the login information as the default. However, if you need to override or specify either the Environment
(Library) or Role (E1 only), you may do so:

Enter the Environment or Role that you need to run your reports.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1262 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

The Task's Date recurrence allows you to specify any date recurrence that MS Outlook can do.
Click on the Schedule tab to see the Date recurrence and Time recurrence editors:

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1263 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

D ate Pattern
Click the Date Recurrence tab and set up as follows:

To Schedule by Do this

Select the Day radio button.

Day

Select how many days or Every weekday.

Select the Week radio button.

Week

Select either how many weeks or select which days in the week you want to run.

Select the Month radio button.

Month

Select how many months or which day of the month using the options available.

Select the Year radio button.

Year

Select how many years or which day of the year using the options available.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1264 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Range of Recurrence
Once you have specified the date recurrence pattern you want, select when you want the recurrence to start and end.

TO D O THIS

Specify when to start Enter the start date and time by the Start: label.

Run report recurrence with no end date Select the No end date radio button.

End after a certain number of runs Select the End after radio button and enter the number of times to run the report.

End by a certain date and time Select the End by radio button and enter the end date and time.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1265 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Time Pattern
In addition to the date recurrence, you can also specify a time recurrence within the date recurrence. For instance, you may want
to have a report run on weekdays on the hour from 8 AM to 5 PM. To specify time recurrence:
1. Select the Time recurrence tab
2. Check the Enable button on that tab

TO D O THIS

Specify hours to run

Select the Hours tab. Check the check boxes for the hours you want to run your report.
your report

Specify the minutes to Within each hour, you may specify which minutes you would like to run your report. Select the Minutes tab and
run your report check the minutes (in 5 minute intervals) that you would like.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1266 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Advanced Schedules
Allow for the specification of an iCalendar RFC 2445 schedule.
D ate and Time Formats
Dates, or dates with associated times, can be used in the DTSTART, UNTIL, EXDATE and RDATE elements when specifying a
recurrence pattern. iCalendar defines the DATE value type to identify values that contains a calendar date and also defines the
DATE-TIME type to identify values that specify a precise calendar date and time of day. DATE-TIME values can be specified in three
forms, with:
Local time.
UTC time.
Local time and time zone.
D AT E

According to the iCalendar standard, DATE values must follow the yyyyMMdd format. The following example represents July 14,
1997: 19970714
D AT E - T I M E w i t h T i m e

The date with local time form is simply a date-time value that does not contain the UTC designator, and doesn't reference a time
zone. For example, the following represents Janurary 18, 1998, at 11 PM: DTSTART:19980118T230000. Note that time zone
offsets (UTC's 'Z' indicator and TZID property) are ignored. Automator will always schedule the entire schedule in the context of
the time zone attached to the task.
BY WE E KNO P rovides I S O 8601 Compliance
Use BYWEEKNO only when conformance with ISO 8601 is required. Week numbers as defined by ISO 8601 are very different
from week numbers in the normal sense. According to ISO 8601, week number one of the calendar year is the first week of a
calendar year that contains at least four days. This rule makes the algorithm specific to applications requiring conformance to ISO
8601 and make it almost inapplicable to other uses. ISO 8601 is supported by some European banking and financial applications.
It is also used in television for booking commercials. The BYWEEKNO rule specifies a comma-delimited list of numbers identifying
weeks of the year. Valid values are 1 to 53 and 1 to 53. This corresponds to weeks according to week numbering as defined in ISO
8601. BYWEEKNO is only valid for YEARLY rules.
Click the Advanced Scheduling tab and set up as follows:

To Schedule by Do this

DTSTART:20160711T163900
Recur every weekday at 2 AM and Recur every week
RRULE:FREQ=WEEKLY;BYDAY=MO,TU,WE,TH,FR;BYHOUR=2
on the Sunday at 11 AM
RRULE:FREQ=WEEKLY;BYDAY=SU;BYHOUR=11

DTSTART:20180101T160000
Every other day except for 7/4 and 12/25 RRULE:FREQ=DAILY;INTERVAL=2
EXDATE:20180704T160000,20181225T160000

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1267 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

DTSTART:20040902T090000
Weekly on Tuesday and Thursday for 5 weeks
RRULE:FREQ=WEEKLY;UNTIL=20041007T000000Z;WKST=SU;BYDAY=TU,TH

DTSTART:20040903T090000
Monthly on the 1st Friday for ten occurrences
RRULE:FREQ=MONTHLY;COUNT=10;BYDAY=1FR

DTSTART:20040930T090000
Monthly on the first and last day of the month
RRULE:FREQ=MONTHLY;COUNT=10;BYMONTHDAY=1,-1
unless it is weekend for 10 occurrences
EXRULE:FREQ=MONTHLY;BYDAY=SU,SA

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1268 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Standard D istribution
Once you have added one or more reports to your task and specified the output types you want, you need to tell DAS where to
send the report results.This is configured within Distribution tab of the Task.

Note

Your DAS Administrator must setup a valid email provider first. For information on how to setup an email Provider, please consult
the Data Access Studio Administration guide.

TO D O THIS

Send an
Enter a valid email address (i.e. [email protected]) and email Provider. Separate multiple email addresses using
email on task
a semi-colon (';').
completion

Set the
Specify correctly formatted email addresses
recipient list

Set the email

Edit the subject to your email message.
Subject

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1269 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

TO D O THIS

Set a custom
email The email editor is a rich editor that allows text formatting for custom messages.
message

Attach the
report
output to Default checked. Check the Attach Output checkbox to send the report output as an attachment to the email message.
the email
message

Copy report Click the visual assist and select a valid output directory. TIP: If you want to update network resources, it is best to provide
outputs to a the Universal Naming Convention (UNC) path to the network resources (as opposed to shard drive letters). When your
directory report runs, it will run on the DAS Web server. The path you enter here must be accessible from the DAS Web server.

Encrypt the If compression is enabled, then the Encrypt check box will be enabled. If you check this box, DAS will encrypt the ZIP file
compressed used to compresss the output with your JDE password. To open the attached zip file, enter the JDE password of the task
attachment owner.

Append
Default checked. When checked, the Automator will append a timestamp to your output file name to make it unique. If
timestamp to
unchecked, the Automator will overwrite the existing file with the same name.
filename

Distribute Default Always distribute. Set the Always distribute checkbox if you want the task to distribute the task output regardless of
the task whether the result is empty. You can set the Only distribute if not empty checkbox if you do not want any distribution
output when there are no report results.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1270 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

mobie® D istribution
When mobie® output is selected (from the Output types on the Reports to run tab), you will be taken to the Distribution tab to
select the DataBox and Snapshot.

TO D O THIS

Publish task Go to the Distribution tab and select mobie for the destination. You will then need to choose a DataBox and Snapshot name.
output to The Remove unused columns checkbox will optimize your Snapshot and remove any unused columns to save space in your
mobie. database.

Note:A valid DataBox Snapshot must have already been created to allow publishing to mobie.This is done by publishing a dashboard that uses the
selected report. For more information on our mobie product, please refer to mobie Administration in the Administrator's guide.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1271 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Queue Tags
Queue Tags allows the Task to run in a specific queue.

TO D O THIS

Assign a task to a specific queue or multiple queues Go to the Queue Tags tab and open the Tag drop-down list.

Note:Queue Tags are configured by your Automator Administrator.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1272 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Recovery Options
When a task has an execution failure or Automator cannot run a scheduled task due to server down time or an outage, the
Recovery options will allow you to determine how Automator should handle these tasks on system startup.

TO D O THIS

Define what Automator should do when Automator misses

running a scheduled task, such as a power outage or server Go to the Recovery tab and select an option for missed scheduled starts.
down time.

Go to the Recovery tab and check the task fail checkbox. Then choose the
Define what Automator should do when a task has an
recurrence interval (in minutes) and the number of attempts that Automator
execution failure.
should perform.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1273 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Work with Scheduled Tasks

Once you have create a task, you can work with it. From the main menu, click Schedule | Edit Schedule:

To Do this

Edit a Task Highlight the Task and click Edit.

Highlight the Task(s) and click Delete. Note: you may also disable a Task by editing
Delete a Task
it and unchecking the Enabled box.

Copy a Task Highlight the Task and click Copy.

Filter Tasks View You may use the filter boxes in the upper grid to limit which tasks you see.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1274 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

See the Preview window. This window shows all upcoming run times for enabled
See upcoming times for the task to run tasks. If a task is disabled, it will not show in the Preview. You may filter for tasks
and times you want to see using the filter boxes in the Preview grid.

Once you have created a task, you can specify the task recurrence using the
Advance Edit iCalendar standard. The advanced editor shows you some syntax for time patterns.
You need to specify the iCalendar time pattern as text.

You can now queue your reports to run instantly without modifying the schedule by
Queue your report to run now clicking on Queue Now. The task will immediately be placed into the queue of
running tasks behind any tasks already running or waiting to run.

You can Enable/Disable a scheduled report from the main window without having to
Enable/Disable a Task
edit the Task. Change becomes effective when you click the Save button.

You can modify multiple tasks at the same time. Note that you will need special
permissions from your administrator to change certain attributes (such as task
owner):

Modify multiple tasks

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1275 of 1276

9/20/2019 Data Access Studio 8.0

Task Activity
The task activity tab shows both currently running tasks as well as previous runs of a task or all tasks.

TO D O THIS

Terminate a
Click the Terminate button.
task

Click the 'View Details' button. If the administrator enabled detailed tracing, the log viewer that comes up will include those
View logs
log files as well.

2019 - ReportsNow Inc. 1276 of 1276